Home

Eurotherm 2704 User Manual

Contents

1. gt v ANALOGUEOPERS v gt MULTI OPERS gt v gt LOGIC OPERS gt v gt PATCH WIRING gt v en e C O LG Y Select Y Select Select Y Select AT we Wuliopi wing using or MultiOp3 i B LY vj e o i Parameters for Parameters for PRIN oe r P for Logic Operators Patch Wiring g p Dn pies pets See Chapter 19 See Chapter See Chapter 18 See Chapter 18 19 3 uu e Y gt COMMS gt v gt MASTER COMMS gt y gt STANDARD IO gt v gt MODULE IO gt v gt sy H Module Select Select Select J Module using using Module 1A Ta A 4 Module 18 or or Module 1C Y v v Above repeated l for each module I fitted Parameters for Communications Cj See Chapter 20 1 Parameters for Module IO See Chapter 23 oy EM Y gt TXDCRSCALING gt v gt IO EXPANDER gt Y DIAGNOSTICS gt v gt Return to ACCESS 4 4 i Start of section 3 8 o ic E Select Y using Parameters for Parameters for A DIO Expander Diagnostics or See Chapter 25 See Chapter 26 lv Parameters for Transducer Scaling See Chapter 24 48 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 4 CHAPTER4 FUNCTION BLOCKS 4 1 WHAT IS A FUNCTION BLOCK A function block is a software device which performs a control strategy Examples are PID Controller Setpoint Programmer Cascade Controller Timer etc A
2. Voltage 0 to 10V or 0 to 2V Current 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA VH VH 2 Lies amp VI 0 10 x VI Current x Volt c source sabe x s S x Tt resistor V supplied m x V mV up to 80mV x VH amp mVolt LM source x V X v Note This connection is shown for 26 and 2700 series controllers It is not the same as 2400 and 2200 series controllers Figure 2 7 Wiring Connections For PV Input 20 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 2 5 4 Analogue Input Connections The analogue input is supplied as standard and is intended to accept 0 to 10 Vdc from a voltage source A milli amp current source can be used by connecting a 100 resistor across terminals BA and BB This input can be used as a remote setpoint input remote setpoint trim or as a high level PV input to a control loop This input is not isolated from the d igital IO Non isolated Voltage Source 0 to 10V E93 L Non isolated BAIE Otc B8 GO ne pu If screened cable is used BC x earth at the supply end Non isolated Current Source 0 20mA 4 20mA sh Non BA x isolated 1000 current
3. For 2 wire this is a local link Voltage 0 to 10V or 0 to 2V 0 10 Volt source Ue Current 0 to 20mA 4 to 20mA Be Current source 2490 z resistor supplied eee w gt U O A 31 Engineering Handbook 1 O Module Typical usage 4 Wire PRT Input Modules 3 amp 6 only Triple Logic Input Triple Contact Input 24V Transmitter Supply 20mA Transducer Power Supply 32 Two special versions of the PV Input module provide high accuracy high stability emperature measurement Code PH is PRT 1000 Code PL is PRT 25 50 Events e g Program Run Reset Hold Events e g Program Run Reset Hold To power an external transmitter Provide 5V or 10Vdc to power Strain Gauge Transducer Shunt Contact H W Code PH RE TL Logic inputs lt 5V ON gt 10 8V OFF Limits 3V 30V External Switches or Relays Contact inputs 1000 ON gt 28KQ OFF MS G3 or G5 4 wire RTD PRT 1000 or PRT25 5O Input 1 Input 2 Input 3
4. DIO4 Val DIO5 Val DIO6 Val DI8 Vl DIO7 Val BCD Function Block Input Src Input2 Src Input 3 Src Input4 Src Input5 Src Input Src Input7 Src Input8 Src BCD Value gt Prog Num Src Decimal Value Digit 1 units Digit 2 units Programmer Figure 14 6 Wiring of Digital Inputs to the BCD Function Block Implementation In STANDARD IO DIO3 Page In STANDARD IO DIOA Page In STANDARD IO DI05 Page In STANDARD IO DI06 Page In STANDARD IO DIO7 Page UT OPERS BCD Input Page UT OPERS BCD Input Page UT OPERS BCD Input Page UT OPERS BCD Input Page UT OPERS BCD Input Page UT OPERS BCD Input Page UT OPERS BCD Input Page UT OPERS BCD Input Page Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 In PROGRAM EDIT Options Page section 8 11 1 In STANDARD IO DIO1 Page section 22 6 1 In STANDARD IO DIO2 Page UT OPERS BCD Input Page section 14 6 2 18 In PROGRAM EDIT Wiring Page section 8 12 2 set BCD Prg Num Yes set Channel Type Digital Input set Channel Type Digital Input set Channel Type Digital Input set Channel Type Digital Input set Channel Type Digital Input g g g set Channel Type Digital Input g g g set Channel Type Digital Input set Enable On Set Input1 Src 05402 DIO1 Va Set Inpu
5. Figure 27 6 3 Wire RTD Connections to Modules 3 amp 6 27 5 3 Dual PV Input Module The procedure is the same as the PV Input module above but the parameter En Dual Mode in the Channel C parameter list must be set to No Cal State is accessed from Channel A when enable dual mode is set to No 27 5 4 DC Input Module The procedure is the same as the PV Input module above except that only a single mV range is available 338 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 27 5 5 TDS Input Module Conductance Calibration Since the module is factory calibrated it is very unlikely that it will be necessary to recalibrate the conductance reading in the field However should this become necessary the procedure in this section should be followed The TDS module is calibrated at two conductance points e OmS i e the probe connections open circuit e 45 455mS i e at 220 resistance At the 220 calibration point use a resistor that calibrate the module to its specification od directly to the terminals as shown below or use 0 2 1 5m long At the open circuit Calibration point take care that outside to the calibration reading Keep wires very short or replace directly to the controller terminals IQ c TOL TDS Module Terminals is within 0 2 of 220 to Connect the resistor four short wires less than noise does not
6. 187 Example Of H rnidity Contreller Cornectlons corro cere b re e e e op ue 187 Temperature Control Of An Environmental Chamber sse tette tentent 188 Humidity Control Of An Environmental Chamber tette tnter tne tenete ntn entes 188 TO VIEW AND ADJUST HUMIDITY PARAMETERS esseesseeeeeere nennen nennen nnnm nre terere nennnrene 189 Humidity Options Parameters eenia eret mee da eme amet dct ee enit ptite tme 189 VIT Ee e EEEE E 189 HOMIDIY WIRING EXAMPLE pietre etr A E ei eee pP PHP a aaa 190 The Euriieity E nctior BIOCK s street ee t e o e i EROR E E EE 190 Cenfig ration of a Humidity Control Loop feta iei ea e ia ede a e i e hd 190 Vacuum Controller eram reme a e REDE 192 Vacuum Ghamiber Example pete hn rere ite sasnacasistessesnhsasvassatssvenssvsasia ATASA ET OAE TENA 192 VACUUM CONTROLLER FUNCTIONALITY essen nnne NERA UNE ane enne nne 193 SOUP ONES ates srs et EIL 193 HOW VACUUM GAG EEE ESE EE 193 tene TUNE re 193 Gage inearisatiOn ertet n ite en eee e En a a e ERE Lees a E tags fedet Ee eed 193 Roughing Purp TImeoUtszz5 uice E ET EUER OXON une DERI RISE UR UEBER ERES 194 Leak Detection uiri RR IER NU ARE ERECTA cao GU AY UE ARCU RI EE DAE ERE 194 Gauge SWItelioVert ordern prt e i RERO ORO REQUIRE UHR UTI NE E EPUM 194 WIRING CONNECTION Sien 2 rH rtiai PRHEHA 195 SV TG SON S rot re tes e nettes A E
7. SP 0 100 Dual probe Input Module C Isolation required ChA Hz type EIN ChC mV mA Pt100 Additional type ie PV input if ie required WA NI IN Panel j ground Precision PV Input mA set up PID Loop set up Elec Lo OV Proportional band PB 145 Elect Hi 13 333V Integral time Ti 0 6sec Filter time 0 4sec Derivative time Td Off All the internal variables of the loop and their limits are set to 0 100 range Figure 23 6 Precision 0 10V Voltage Retransmission 14bit Channel C input and the retransmitted 4 20mA output must be connected together at the terminal of the Dual probe input The receiving instrument 4 20mA input and the other end of the channel C input should be isolated from each other It is the installers responsibility to ensure the appropriate isolation when using the Dual probe module Notes on the previous page apply 302 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 23 3 16 High Resolution Output Module Parameters Table Number This page allows you to set the parameters for a High Resolution Output MODULE IO Module 23 3 16 module 4C Page This module can only be fitted in slots 1 4 and 5 This module has two outputs Parameters are displayed under channel A and channel C Channel A can be 4 20mA output or transmitter PSU channel C is the PSU Cremna dentin Channel Type Output type mA not Ch C Conf Volts Ch
8. SSR or thyristor unit le Output A Output Bet C9 Output C C9 Common 4 X 29 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 1 O Module Typical usage Connections and examples of use Code Triac Heating T2 and Dual cooling valve and TT Rai First triac Triac raise valve alse lower 0 7A 30 to Motorised _ Voltage 264Vac valve supply combined rating Second triac Note Dual relay modules may be used in place of dual triac Note The combined current rating for the two triacs must not exceed 0 7A DC Control Heating D4 cooling Actuator 10Vdc 20mA 0 20mA max e g toa or 0 10Vdc 4 20mA process actuator Dual DC Control Output output 12 bit resolution each channel Output 1 can be 4 Can only be 20mA or fitted in slots 24Vdc power 1 44or 5 supply High Retransmissio HR Resolution DC n in feedback Output mode Output 1 one 15 bit 4 Fitted in slots 20mA plus 1 4 or 5 only one 24V power supply Output 2 30 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 Output 2 DC Re Logging of
9. 3 4 BACKSCROLL In some cases it may be more convenient to scroll back up the list for example to select a new segment number when setting up a program S ori A short cut is provided by holding down and pressing Each press of will step back to the previous parameter Each press of LY J parameter will step forward to the next This function is provided as a short cut and is not necessary to navigate through the parameters 42 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 3 5 PARAMETER VALUES Parameter values can be displayed in different ways depending upon the parameter type The different types of parameter and how their values are changed are shown below 1 Numerical Values eg Full Scale High Alarm Setpoint FS Hi Setpoint MAU Press to increase the value Press Y to decrease the value 2 Enumerated Values eg PV Input Alarm Acknowledge o No 4 Press to show next state L1 PV Alm Ack Press Y to show previous state 3 Digital Values e g programmer event outputs Prog Reset DO Press C to step along the values A cursor under the selected value flashes LI Press Y lor 4 to turn the value on or off 4 Parameter Addresses eg PV Src a Press or Y to change the Parameter address A cursor under the parameter PV Src 05108 PVIn Val address flashes The parameter name for that address if it exists is shown to the right of th
10. sssseesseeeeeee nennen nre 257 A Mod le Parameters itm tetti En MIR TILUR ETATE ERO VO EYE DRAKE CERRAR ERR RUE Oe 257 J Med le Parameters ncctne teeth RR ER DC ROUEN XU EUER EH SERVE EEEE 258 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS DIAGNOSTICS essent enne nnnenren 259 Ethernet Technical Note sie esee ne er PeRRPIOROEPOR OON POPEPEPIHER RE DIR Gres tte t AET 260 MAG adcress display rrr mre mee I RO UEIRIE ONEAN Oa D egy Rer vene 260 DACP SENGS En KENEAN RE PE E EEEE AS SORENE EEEREN TES VE CERVI EL VICES 260 IMSERUMME ME SOTU o EEEE EE EEEE EEE T 260 Network ohbectlon es reee ra re aeeoea aetna I aeaaea EEr A nEn AE AAE EAA EAE AEEA EnaA E Eaa EEan EE EAEE G 260 Dynamic IPAddressing ertt err tree RTE Re EE tere gini TEETE Pee h eb ee SEEE RESES 260 Fixed IP Addressing iie iie mir m e etuer ec et te G aiii 260 Additional MOLES issn m HR 260 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 7 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 20 4 8 20 5 21 21 1 21 24 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 21 8 1 21 8 2 22 22 1 22 2 22 2 1 22 2 2 22 2 3 22 2 4 22 3 22 3 1 22 3 2 22 3 3 22 4 22 4 1 22 5 22 5 1 22 6 22 6 1 22 7 22 7 1 23 23 1 23 2 23 2 1 23 3 23 3 1 23 3 2 23 3 3 23 3 4 23 3 5 23 3 6 23 3 7 23 3 8 23 3 9 23 3 1 23 3 1 23 3 1 23 3 1 23 3 1 23 3 1 23 3 1 23 4 23 4 1 23 4 2 23 5 23 5 1 23 5 2 23 5 3 23 5 4 23 5 5 23 5 6 23 6 23 6 1 23 6
11. ae ae os QOo o oo n 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 21 CHAPTER 21 2704 MASTER COMMUNICATIONS 21 1 INTRODUCTION Software version 5 and above of the 2704 controller supports Master Communications The objective of the master communications is to allow the 2704 to communicate with any instrument using ModBus interface as a master device that is without the need for a supervisory PC This allows the 2704 to link through digital communications with other products to create a small system solution There are two methods of communication 1 Broadcast Communications 2 Direct Read Write 21 1 1 Broadcast Communications The 2704 master can be connected to up to 32 slaves The master sends a unit address of 0 followed by the address of the parameter which is to be sent A typical example might be a multi zone oven where the setpoint of each zone is required to follow with digital accuracy the setpoint of a master 2704 Master Slave 21 1 2 Direct read write The 2704 master can be connected to up to eight sixteen from software version 6 onwards slaves Each slave has its own unit address The master can send data to each slave by sending a unit address followed by the parameter address It can also request data from a slave This data may be displayed on the 2704 or used as part of a 2704 control strategy 2704 Master Slave Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0
12. eg 100 Eng Value L pra oe Electrical Output In y B this example the Electrical Lo Electrical Hi cu ofthe eg Relay eg Relay P y Permanently off permanently on Figure 23 9 Time Proportioning Relay Triac or Logic Output 308 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 23 5 4 To Scale A Control Output Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From the MODULE IO sub header display Press or Y to choose the slot in which the Output module is fitted 2 Press to show the list of parameters 3 Press or Y lto scroll to Electrical Lo 4 Press Lo to select the Electrical Lo 5 Press E to select the Electrical Hi 6 Press or Y to change the value 7 Press to select the Eng Val Lo 8 Press Aj value or Y to change the 9 Press C to select the Eng Val Hi 10 Press A or to change the value Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 Meru Level 3 MODULE I0 D OIAG MODULE IO Module 18 Set this to a low value normally 0 11 Press lto select the Eng Val Hi 12 Press or Y to change the value Set this to a high value normally 100 Set up this value so that the relay triac or logic switches fully off corresponding to the Electrical Low setting If the module is Analogue 0 0 output Set up this value so that the relay triac or logic switch
13. Remaining parameters in the Analogue Operators list are accessed and adjusted in the same way The list of parameters available is shown in the following table 18 2 1 Analogue Operator Parameters U Table Number This page allows you to configure Analogue Operators 1 to 32 ANALOGUE OPERS 18 2 1 Analogue 1 Page Operation The operation to be performed See 16 1 1 Off Input 1 Src Input 1 Scalar Input 2 Src OP Units OP Resolution Low Limit High Limit Default Enable Input 1 scalar Range depends on Input 1 Src Enable fall back Clip Bad Fallback Bad Clip Good Fallback Good Input 2 Scalar Input 2 scalar Range depends on Input 2 Src The above table is repeated for Analogue Operators 2 to 24 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 249 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 18 3 MULTIPLE OPERATORS The multiple input operator block performs analogue operations on up to six inputs It can be used to find the average maximum value minimum value or summation ofthe inputs The block will output either the operation result which may be clipped or a user defined Default value depending upon the number and status of the wired inputs and whether they are within a user specified range The Casc Numlps Src is a wire that indicates to the block the number of inputs cascaded from a previous block this is required for a valid average calculation when in cascade If this input is wired it is assumed that the block is in casc
14. If all segments in the program are already configured the message Program Full is shown 8 29 PROGRAMMER ERROR MESSAGES If an invalid entry is made when setting up programs through the front panel a pop up error message will appear For example a pop up will occur if an attempt is made to copy and paste a program which has more segments than the controller has left The messages are similar to those which are shown if the same action is implemented over digital communications see section 20 3 8 30 RUNNING AN ASYNCHRONOUS PROGRAMMER As with the synchronous programmer the group of programs can be run using 1 The PROG button 2 A digital input configured to activate all configured PSPs 3 Digital inputs configured to run each PSP separately 4 Via a command from digital communications If the PROG button is used as described in the following section a pop up window is shown which allows you to choose the format of the program The other methods listed above are designed for remote or fixed operation in which case the pop up window is not displayed The program may also be controlled using the relevant parameters in the lists These are 5 Group Status in the PROGRAM GROUPS Active Group list This allows all configured PSPs to be started together 6 Program Status in the PSP1 2 or 3 PROFILE Run General list This allows each PSP to be run separately 112 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12
15. Tune OL to a value which will limit the minimum output demand during tuning This may be 0 0 for a heat only loop Set Tune OH to a value which will limit the maximum output demand during tuning Step 4 Start tune on the slave loop as follows In AUTOTUNE Set Autotune Loop to LP7A Step 5 You may monitor the progress of the tune by viewing the following parameters In AUTOTUNE Autotune State This indicates which step is being performed Tune OP The output demand of the autotune For a slave loop this will be the same as the working output power Tune SP The setpoint about which the loop is being tuned Stage Time The length of time this particular step has been running The tune step will abort after two hours Step 6 On completion of the slave loop tuning Keep the loop in Cascade Disabled and allow the slave loop to control the process You must allow the slave loop to control at its Local SP Wait for the master loop to settle to a steady state value Note it is unlikely that the master loop steady state is the same as the slaves When the master PV is at a steady value proceed with tuning the master loop Note if the master loop has not settled satisfactorily you may not be able to tune the master loop at all since it is necessary to restrict the disturbance of the slave when tuning the master Step 7 Tune the master loop In AUTOTUNE Set Tune OL and Tune OH The values chosen s
16. Enable Input Src Output Units Output Resol Input Value Output Value Output Status Input Lo Output Lo Input Hi Output Hi Input 2 Output 2 Parameter Description Default To enable custom linearisation Off On Custom linearisation input source Modbus address Custom linearisation output units See Appendix D 2 Custom linearisation output resolution The conditions are bad or out of range Bad Adjus ust to correspond to the low input Range value Adjus Adjust to correspond to the high input Range value Adjust to the first break point Adjust to correspond to input 2 The above two parameters are repeated for all intermediate break points ie 3 to 14 Adjust to the last break point Adjust to correspond to input 15 The above table is repeated for e INPUT OPERS Cust Lin 2 Page e INPUT OPERS Cust Lin 3 Page Input 15 Output 15 208 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 L3 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 14 4 THERMOCOUPLE PYROMETER SWITCHING This facility is commonly used in wide range temperature applications where it is necessary to control accurately over the range A thermocouple may be used to control at lower temperatures and a pyrometer then controls at very high temperatures Alternatively two thermocouples of different types may be used Figure 14 3 shows a process heating over time with boundaries which define the switching points between the two devices
17. Engineering Handbook 13 14 2 To Scale Vacuum Readout in Other Units The vacuum units in the software version covered by this supplement are mbar only To scale to alternative units use Analogue Operators described Chapter 18 In a two gauge system it is necessary to scale both gauges independently In a single gauge system the low vacuum gauge is taken as the reference The following example shows a two gauge system as wired in the previous section The units conversion will be from mbar to mmHg where 1mmHg 1 333mbar 04948 Analogue 06758 Operator High Mine ps 1 Gauge divide Chamber User pane Vacuum Value 1 set Gauge ee to 1 333 Switch 04468 Analogue 06178 Operator LOW silts Ao eat J Mod 3A 2 Gauge divide Single gauge User 09220 Numbers in italics are the MODBUS addresses being wired from Value 1 set to 1 333 Separate User Values may be replaced by setting the input scalar to the appropriate value 0 75 in this example Figure 13 14 Scaling units in a two gauge system 13 14 2 1 Implementation 1 In USER VALUES User Val 1 Page section 16 3 2 Or use any unused User Val 2 In ANALOGUE OPERS An 1 Page section 18 2 1 Or use any unused analogue operator 3 In ANALOGUE OPERS An 2 Page section 18 2 1 Or use any unused analogue operator In VACUUM High Vacuum Page
18. Figure 25 1 IO Expander Data Transfer Wiring connections are shown in section 2 5 5 and further details of the IO Expander are given in the IO Expander Handbook Part No HA026893 When this unit is connected to the controller it is necessary to set up parameters to determine its operation These parameters can be set up in Operation Level 3 and are repeated here for information The IO Expander is enabled in INSTRUMENT Options Page see section 7 2 1 326 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 25 2 TO CONFIGURE IO EXPANDER Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes A ES Meru contr 1 From any display press as many mE times as necessary to access the page header menu 2 Press 4 or Y toselect lO EXPANDER 5 Press 7 to show the parameter list In this view the IO Expander type has been configured as 10 In and 10 Out and parameter OP 1 Src has been connected to the 6 Press A or Y to scroll to the Totaliser 1 Alarm Output required parameter The IO Expander output 1 will operate when Totaliser 1 alarm output is exceeded 7 Press to select the parameter 8 Press or Y to change the value or state Remaining parameters in the Analogue Operators list are accessed and adjusted in the same way The list of parameters available is shown in the following table y 25 2 1 IO Expander parameters Table Number This page
19. Hot Tuning Autotune page is at Level 3 by default but can be promoted to L1 or L2 See section 7 2 5 The choices are LP1 LPIA LP7 Cascade These are repeated for Loops 2 and 3 Note Text shown in ta ics is user definable in configuration mode and may be different from that shown The controller induces an oscillation in the PV by first turning the output power on and then off The power is limited by Tune OL and Tune OH These two parameters are defaulted to 0 and should be set to values which do not overload the process during tuning These values are limited by the overall OP Low Limit and OP High Limit set in the Output Page The first cycle is not complete until the measured value has reached the required setpoint After two cycles of oscillation the tuning is completed and the tuner switches itself off When the controller is autotuning the status of autotune is shown periodically on the relevant loop summary The parameter Tune SP is the setpoint value which the controller uses to tune In a cascade loop this may be derived form the master or slave loops The parameter Stage Time shows the time spent in any individual stage of the tuning process If the time in any stage exceeds two hours the auto tune is aborted The controller then calculates the tuning parameters listed in Table 12 1 and resumes normal control action If you want Proportional only P
20. Internal CJT sensing spec Calibration error 25 C including temp difference between top and bottom screws lt 0 5 C Total CJT error lt 0 5 C 0 012 C per 1 C of ambient change i e CJC Rejection for measured temperatures above 0 C is gt 80 1 Noise resolution 0 01 C CJT Error oC Maximum error Typical 0 25 error Ambient Temperature Figure 31 5 Overall CJT Error at Different Ambient Temperatures Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 373 Engineering Handbook 32 APPENDIX D PARAMETER UNITS AND ADDRESSES 32 1 COMMONLY USED PARAMETERS 2704 Controller Although any parameter can be chosen for Soft Wiring Parameter Promotion or Customised Display purposes the controller contains those which are most commonly used together with their Modbus Addresses These parameters are shown below CUniOP m ET CLin3 OP SwOv1 OP Switchover output value Mod1A Val e 1A output value Oo O Oo O O O du du j du alue du du alue du alue du alue du du alue du alue du du DIOZ Va DIO4 Va Prg PSP1 Programmer working SP1 V V V ModaCvs V V Prg PSP3 Programmer working SP3 Refer To Section Chapter 11 LP1 SETUP Diagnostic Page Output Page Output Page Chapter 11 LP2 SETUP Diagnostic Page Output Page Output Page Chapter 11 LP3 SETUP Diagnostic Page Output Page Output Page Chapter 14 INPUT OPERS Cust Li
21. Low 3KO SBrk Impedance Low 10KQ Volts input 3V to 10V and HZ Volts input 1 5 to 2V SBrk Impedance High 500KQ SBrk Impedance Low 100KQ 22 44 FIXED RELAY OUTPUT Allows access to parameters which set up the fixed Relay output connected to terminals AA AB and AC This relay may be used as an alarm relay or a time proportioning control output 22 4 1 TO SCALE THE FIXED RELAY OUTPUT If the relay is used as a time proportioning control output this means that the relay will by default be fully off for 0 power demand fully on for 100 power demand and equal on off times at 50 power demand As with input scaling you can change these limits to suit the process It is important to note however that these limits are set to safe values for the process For example for a heating process it may be required to maintain a minimum level of temperature This can be achieved by applying an offset at 0 power demand which will maintain the relay on for a period of time Care must be taken to ensure that this minimum on period does not cause the process to overheat These offsets can be made to parameters in the AA Relay pages The above example is shown in Figure 22 2 PID Demand signal Eng Value His suse p7 Pa eg 100 Eng Value Lo eg 0 Electrical Output In this example the on off ratio of the Electrical Lo Electrical Hi tral eg Relay on for eg Relay A AnA short period permanently on Figure 22 2
22. Num of Prog DOs PROGRAM EDIT Reset Options Not shown if Num of Prog Dos None Prog DO 1 to f programmer event outputs have The name of the event is Off L1 16 been configured then as an alternative shown with its state o the previous presentation the event On or can be given a name Off PROGRAM EDIT Options Named Dos Yes Reset UsrVa 7 Reset prog user 1 values Name is user configurable Reset UsrVa 7 Reset prog user 1 values Name is user L1 configurable L1 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 105 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 8 25 4 PSP1 2 OR 3 PROFILE Run Segment Pages Table Number These parameters show the running conditions in each segment PSP1 2 or 3 PROFILE 8 25 4 of the running program Run Segment Page Parameter Description Default Access Level PSP1 Type PSP1 type Name is user configurable PSP1 Working setpoint for profiled setpoint Display range Alterable in 1 Note 1 Name is user configurable PSP1 Target Running segment target for profiled Display range Alterable in setpoint 1 Note 1 Name is user configurable PSP7 Dwell Time Remaining dwell time for PSP1 h m s Alterable in PSP1HBk Appl PSP1 holdback applied Yes Note 1 Range limited by user defined upper and lower limits If HHHHH or LLLLL appear this indicates out of range high or low respectively 106 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering
23. Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 Engineering Handbook 167 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 12 CHAPTER 12 TUNING This chapter describes how to tune your controller to match the characteristics of the process under control There are five topics e WHAT IS TUNING e AUTOMATIC TUNING e MANUAL TUNING e GAIN SCHEDULING e TUNING OF CASCADE LOOPS This chapter should be read in conjunction with Chapter 11 Loop Set Up 12 1 WHAT IS TUNING In tuning you match the characteristics of the controller to those of the process being controlled in order to obtain good control Good control means e Stable straight line control of the PV at setpoint without fluctuation e No overshoot or undershoot of the PV setpoint e Quick response to deviations from the setpoint caused by external disturbances thereby rapidly restoring the PV to the setpoint value Tuning involves calculating and setting the value of the parameters listed in Table 12 1 These parameters appear in the Loop Setup PID list see Chapter 11 Meaning or Function Proportional The bandwidth in display units or over which the output power is proportioned between minimum band and maximum Integral time Determines the time taken by the controller to remove steady state error signals Determines how strongly the controller will react to the rate of change of the measured value High Cutback The number of display units above setpoint at which
24. Power supply for upply o valve drive Cooling Solenoid Dilution Air Sooting Alarm Enrichment Gas Gas Analyser BB 8 GO 8 80 GO CO 0 C2 3 19 6 9 9 9 9 6 9 9 9 9 C CO CO CO COO CD CO CX GG GGG GO GG GO X8 GG CO GO G2 Temperature control Note The ve of thermocouple the volt source must be connected to the ve of the thermocouple Zirconia Zi i b Volt irconia probe thermocouple Source Figure 13 1 An Example of 2704 Wiring for Carbon Potential Control The above diagram is a generalised connection diagram for further information refer to INSTALLATION Chapter 2 and to the instructions supplied by the probe manufacturer In the above example the following modules are fitted This will change from installation to installation Module 1 Dual triac or relay to drive motorised valve Module 3 Dual PV Input Module Standard Digital I O Used as logic input for manual probe clean and outputs for solenoid valve drives Standard PV Input For the temperature control thermocouple input Standard Analogue Input For gas analyser Standard Relay Output For sooting alarm Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 181 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 13 2 TO VIEW AND ADJUST ZIRCONIA PARAMETERS Do This This Is The Disp
25. Run Hold or program Reset can be selected from his list e Current segment e Program event outputs e Time amp Days remaining to end of program Fast Run Warning Fast Run allows the program to be tested by quickly running through the program segments If the controller is l connected to the process ensure that the process is not affected if fast run is selected The default value No means that the program will run at the set rate The full list of parameters is shown in the following table 8 19 1 Run Parameter Tables U Table Number These parameters provide information on PROGRAM RUN General Page 8 19 1a the running program L Prog DOs Digital outputs summary L3 These are shown in this format if Up to 16 Named Dos No m Off The number of DO values is set by On Num of Prog DOs PROGRAM EDIT Options Not shown if Num of Prog DOs None Prog DO 1 to 16 If programmer event outputs have The name of the event is Off L3 been configured then as an alternative shown with its state o the previous presentation the event On or can be given a name Off PROGRAM EDIT Options Named Dos Yes Delayed Start Delay before the start of the program 0 00 00 Time remaining to end of program Not Running or h mm ss hn o o jj Days Remaining Number of days left for the 0 to 255 i Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 91 Engineeri
26. These parameters only appear if the control loop is configured for cascade italics is user control definable in i d Ratio Page These parameters only appear if the control loop is configured for ratio configuration 9 P VAPE P 3 control mode and may be Override Page These parameters only appear if the control loop is configured for override different from control that shown PID Page These parameters allow you to set up the three term or PID values for the selected loop See also Chapter 13 Controller Applications PID Aux These parameters allow you to set up the three term or PID values for the Page selected auxiliary loop See also Chapter 12 Tuning Motor Page Allows you to set up the values for a valve positioning output when the selected loop is configured for motorised valve control See also Chapter 13 Controller Applications Output Page Allows you to set up the values for the output when the selected loop is configured for analogue or digital control outputs Diagnostic These parameters are for diagnostic purposes on the selected loop Page Diag Aux These parameters are for diagnostic purposes on the selected auxiliary Page loop 134 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 11 1 1 LOOP SET UP Options page Table Number This page determines the control action LP1 SETUP 11 1 1 9 See notes for further parameter descriptions Options Page Parameter Description V
27. This timer has been targeted at guaranteeing that the output remains On for a duration after the input signal has been removed It may also be known as an Off Delay timer and may be used for example to ensure that a compressor is not cycled excessively e The output will be set to On when the Input changes from Off to On e When the Input changes from On to Off the elapsed time will start incrementing towards the set Time e The Output will remain On until the elapsed time has reached the set Time The Output will then switch Off e Ifthe Input signal returns to On while the Output is On the elapsed time will reset to 0 ready to begin incrementing when the Input switches Off e The Triggered variable will be set while the elapsed time is gt 0 It will indicate that the timer is counting Figure 15 4 illustrates the behaviour of the timer under different input conditions Input eee ee a S Output 00 c i Time Time Elapsed Time Triggered Tul L F l Figure 15 4 Minimum On Timer Under Different Input Conditions Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 219 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 15 3 TO VIEW AND ADJUST TIMER PARAMETERS Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press m 3s This page is only available if Timer Blocks is Enabled in the many times as necessary to access INSTRUMENT Options page the page header menu 2 Press ES or Y to select TIMER BL
28. _ Common Transmitter External calibration resistor may be fitted in transducer To Fixed or Module PV Input 2704 Controller Connections and examples of use Note To minimise noise pick up it is recommended that screened cables are used for strain gauge power supply connections Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook I O Module Typical usage H W Connections and examples of use Code Potentio Motorised VU 0 5v E meter Input valve position rr x A feedback X 8 100Q to W 15KQ Remote SP iper x X p Ov a Dual PV Input To accept two Modules 3 amp inputs from a Current 0 2V 6 only high level and source input AN A a low level 4 x source DESI 1000 B The two c3 inputs are not C isolated from each other Current 0 20mA source input The common connections to terminal D must be returned separately to D as shown in the dual current example above Figure 2 18 Wiring Connections for IO Modules Part
29. in LPx SETUP Output Page section 11 6 Transfer from manual to auto takes place bumplessly 8 Rate Limit Units Rate limit can be applied to the SP such that the change in PV takes place at a controlled rate It is used where a full programmer is not justified and is typically used to protect the process from sudden changes in the PV 9 Manual Track When the controller is switched into Manual mode the working setpoint tracks the value of the PV so that on return to Auto mode is bumpless 10 Remote Track When the controller is switched into Remote SP mode the local setpoint tracks the value of the remote SP so that the return to Local SP is bumpless 11 Program Track When the controller is running a program the local setpoint tracks the value of the program setpoint If the controller is switched to Local SP the transfer takes place bumplessly 12 Start SRL Mode Defines Setpoint Rate Limit action on power up None No Change Setpoint Rate Limit starts up in the same mode as power off Hold Setpoint Rate Limit is in hold mode on power up Clear Hold Setpoint Rate Limit is active on power up 13 Start Rem Mode Defines Local Remote action on power up No Change The controller powers up in the same mode as power off Local The controller starts up in Local setpoint mode Remote The controller starts up in Remote setpoint mode 14 Manual Mode on Power up This parameter provides the choice between Continue and SBrk Output
30. section 13 12 1 5 In VACUUM Low Vacuum Page section 13 12 2 6 In VACUUM Display section 13 12 8 Text shown in talics may be customised Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 set Resolution X XXXX set User 1 Value 1 333 It may also be necessary to set the High Limit to gt 1 333 Copy the Modbus address of this parameter by pressing the MAN button set Input 2 Src 09220 UVal1 Val The LOOP button will paste this value from the previous copy procedure set Input 1 Src 04948 Mod6A Val set Operation Divide This will divide the high level gauge signal by 1 333 to convert to mmHg set Operation Divide set Input 1 Src 04468 Mod3A Val set Input 2 Src 09220 Uval1 Val This will divide the low level gauge signal by 1 333 to convert to mmHg set Gauge Src 06158 AnOp1 OP This connects the high vacuum gauge PV from the analogue operator 1 output set Gauge Src 06178 AnOp2 OP This connects the low vacuum gauge PV from the analogue operator 2 output set Units mmHg This configures the units shown on the banner to mmHg 205 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 14 CHAPTER 14 INPUT OPERATORS 14 1 WHAT ARE INPUT OPERATORS The 2704 controller can have three control loops Each loop can be independently configured to the process to be controlled This has been described in Chapters 12 and 13 for PID Cascade Ratio Override
31. shown in Figure 13 11 If more than one setpoint output is On the message box cycles the messages 13 8 2 Low Vacuum Gauge The block will accept an input from a low vacuum gauge typically used to measure vacuum in the range 10 to 10 mBar A probe status logic input is also provided When the probe status is bad or the probe measurement is bad the fault output from the block will be set and Sensor Break displayed 13 8 3 High Vacuum Gauge The block will accept an input from a low vacuum gauge typically used to measure vacuum in the range 10 to 10 mBar A probe enable input is provided in the form of two setpoints and a logic output and is operationally the same as the setpoint feature described in section 13 8 1 When the probe status is bad or the probe measurement is bad the fault output from the block will be set and Sensor Break displayed 13 8 4 Gauge Linearisation This uses the linearisation ability of the analogue inputs described in Chapter 14 Three linearisation curves are available which can be downloaded for each type of probe using iTools configuration software The curve downloaded must correspond to the atmospheric gas being used If further customised curves are required contact your supplier with details of the gauge characteristics Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 193 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 13 8 5 Roughing Pump Timeout When starting the chamber the roughing pump is run to get the ch
32. 7 3 1 7 32 7 3 3 7 3 4 7 3 5 7 3 6 8 9 8 10 8 11 8 11 1 8 12 8 12 1 8 12 2 8 13 8 14 8 14 1 8 14 2 8 15 8 15 1 8 16 8 17 8 18 8 18 1 8 182 8 18 3 8 19 8 19 1 8 20 8 20 1 8 20 2 8 21 8 22 8 23 8 24 8 24 1 8 24 2 CHAPTER 7 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION ccsccssccssscssccssscssesscescessessscesssesecsseseoeees 58 WHAT IS INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION ue ceeeeseesecsseeesesseceseceseseesseceeesseesaeessesseesaeeeesaeesaeesesseeaeed 58 To Seleetith Instr ment Configuration Pages reme eet e nte a t a e Eee 58 TO CONFIGURE CONTROLLER OPTIONS ea nnen erinnere Ee eE ene 59 NSTRUMENT GOptions Page tistentevo Apo REO a Cain D I i tco ved ers coetus oL ctun 59 INSTRUM EIN Tal into Page EAA a conca ren oaeaan niin cc O TDI DI PAID DM IDA II LISSE r d 60 NSTRUMENT UNITS Pag Eneee eaii rt REP MERE OPE REOR CUIRE EDEN SENE IRE e EUIS iem itin een recens 61 NSTRUMENT Display Page cscs sssssscecsassscdssesssdesessissasvsvevesoassscscvssicstasssestusacs d ie pa eee ere eres 61 NSTRUMENT Page Promote Page oun rtr iiri ie dir rei e n e beer pa E HER HERR 63 NSTRUMENT User Text Page eee trc een n vede ie et e d tede e et 64 NSTRUMEN I SummriaryPag6 ite det ee tne e ER RE OP t reet O OE ecd Cua Reda 65 NSTRUMENT Standby Page rct tre e RAD SERT EEG ERE Y CENERE LENEE STOS EE SANIE NEVA SILENE 67 SERSBEXT EXAMPE ES 7 crotch eee ee ee ee PUPPI ee ee eee eee ENS 68 ToReN me loopilto Zone Ty Hras aa cete e t der
33. Alarm Setpoint Controller range 1 Alarm hysteresis Controller range L3 Alarm delay 0 00 00 0 No es Alarm output Off Off R O at L1 On Used if the user alarm is deviation Display min to display max R O at L3 if Normally internally wired to the PV wired to PV source Used if the user alarm is deviation Display min to display max R O at L3 if Normally internally wired to the SP wired to SP source L3 Inhibit Src Alarm inhibit source Modbus address Inhibit Alarm inhibit No Yes The above table is repeated for User alarm 2 User alarm 5 User alarm 3 User alarm 6 User alarm 4 User alarm 7 User alarm 8 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 131 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 10 8 ALARM WIRING EXAMPLES 10 8 1 Control Loop With High and Low Alarms In this example two alarms are added to the loop wiring example shown in Section 5 1 1 Alarm 1 is configured as a high alarm and operates the fixed relay AA This relay is inhibited until a digital input DIO1 becomes true Alarm 2 is configured as a low alarm and operates a relay module in slot 3 Connections made in example shown in Section 5 1 1 ricus SECI r rds Sem Pera mee I l PVI t L 1 I LL a Module 1A Pin veg 4 PV Src CH1OP 1 i i I Ctrl Hold Src SES Sis i l f l Integr Hld Src CH2 OP Man Mode Src 1 Pot IP Src I I Rem FFwd Src I l l Soe een Rem MORSET Settings eecmee
34. BB x source If screened cable is used BC x earth at the supply end Isolated Voltage Source 0 to 10V E 3 T A Isolated BA X 0 to AREA 10Vdc BB x J J source BC x Screen Isolated Current Source 0 20mA 4 20mA a BA x Isolated 3 1000 current BB x source BC q Figure 2 8 Wiring Connections For Analogue Input Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 x p uj Screen 21 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 2 5 5 I O Expander or Additional Digital Input An I O expander Model No 200010 can be used with the 2704 to allow the number of I O points to be increased by a further 20 digital inputs and 20 digital outputs Data transfer is performed serially via a two wire interface from instrument to expander If the expander unit is not required it is possible to use terminals E1 amp E2 as a secondary digital input These terminals are not part of the digital I O terminals D1 to D8 and if used in this way connect a 2K2 4 W limiting resistor in series with the input see Figure 2 9 I O expander connections I O expander connections Data transfer Additional digital input if the expander is not used E1 E2 amp Limits E2 69 1V 35V Figure 2 9 Wiring Connections for the I O Expander For details of the IO Expander refer to the Operating Instructions HA026893 The connections for this unit are reprod
35. Ch C IP Sat Ch A Not Calib Ch C Not Calib Ch Short CCT Part No HA026933 Module good Module initialising Channel A sensor input break Channel C sensor input break Channel A out of range Channel C out of range Channel A input saturation Channel C input saturation Channel A not calibrated Channel C not calibrated Channel terminals shorted Issue 7 0 Nov 12 377 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller Declaration of Conformity 378 invensys Fol Declaration of Conformity Manufacturer Eurotherm Limited Faraday Close Worthing West Sussex BN13 3PL United Kingdom Product type Contoller Programmer Models 2604 Controller 2604f Controller 2704 Controller 2704f Controller 200010 Digital O expander Safety specification EN61010 1 2001 EMC emissions specification EN61326 1 2006 Class B Ethernet Devicenet options Class A EMC immunity specification EN61326 1 2006 Industrial Locations Eurotherm Limited hereby declares that the above products conform to the safety and EMC specifications listed Eurotherm Limited further declares that the above products comply with the EMC Directive 2004 108 EC and also with the Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC Signed JA Vows Dated 76u Bus 2o Signed for and on behalf of Eurotherm Limited Kevin Shaw R amp D Director LE Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 Eurotherm International sales and service ASEAN ndonesia Malaysia Philippines Sin
36. Each segment consists of a single duration parameter and a set of target values for the profiled variables 1 The duration specifies the time that the segment takes to change the profiled variables from their current values to the new targets 2 A dwell type segment is set up by leaving the target setpoint at the previous value 3 AStep type segment is set up by setting the segment time to zero 8 3 2 Ramp Rate Programmer Each segment can be specified by the operator as Ramp Rate Dwell or Step 1 Each profiled setpoint must complete its segment before the programmer will move to the next segment If one ramp reaches its target setpoint ahead of the other variables it will dwell at that value until the other variables have completed The program will then move to the next segment 2 The duration parameter for a segment is read only In this case the dwell period can be changed when the program is in Hold 3 The duration is determined by the longest profile setting 8 4 SEGMENT TYPES A segment type can be defined as Profile Go Back To or End 8 4 1 Profile A profile segment may be set as The setpoint ramps linearly from its current value to a new value either at a set rate called ramp rate programming or in a Set time called time to target programming You must specify the ramp rate or the ramp time and the target setpoint when creating or modifying a program The setpoint remains constant for a specified period at
37. H slot only Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 369 Engineering Handbook 31 18 ALARMS No of Alarms Alarm types Modes Parameters 2704 Controller Input alarms 2 loop alarms 2 User alarms 8 Full scale deviation rate of change sensor break plus application specific Latching or non latching blocking time delay Refer to Chapter 10 31 19 USER MESSAGES No of messages Format Maximum 100 triggered by operator or alarm or used for custom parameter names Up to 16 characters 31 20 CONTROL FUNCTIONS No of loops Modes Options Cooling algorithms PID sets Manual mode Setpoint rate limit One two or three On off PID motorised valve with or without feedback Cascade ratio override or feed forward Linear water oil or fan 3 per loop Cascade loop includes master and slave parameters Bumpless transfer or forced manual output manual tracking available Display units per second minute or hour 31 21 SETPOINT PROGRAMMER Programmer modes Programmer types No of programs Event outputs Synchronous or asynchronous Time to Target or Ramp Rate A maximum of 60 programs assignable over 600 segments for a time to target programmer and 480 segments for a ramp rate programmer A program can consist of up to 3 variables Programs can be given user defined 16 character names Up to 16 can be assigned individually to segments or called as part of an event group 31 22 ADVANCED FUNCTIONS Applica
38. Humidity Control etc It is also possible to apply custom linearisation to the inputs of each loop This is a 16 point straight line linearisation and the parameters can be made available at Levels 1 2 and 3 so that scaling can be carried out during commissioning There are three Custom linearisation pages Also included in this section are parameters which allow you to switch inputs between different thermocouple types or between a thermocouple and pyrometer when the process is a high temperature furnace The page headers are INPUT OPERS P Cust Lin 1 Page These parameters set up the custom linearisation for input 1 Cust Lin 2 Page These parameters set up the custom linearisation for input 2 Cust Lin 3 Page These parameters set up the custom linearisation for input 3 Switch 1 Page These parameters provide switch over between thermocouple types or pyrometer Monitor 1 Page Logs maximum and minimum counts time above threshold BCD Input Monitors the Digital Inputs when configured for BCD switch The Input Operators page is only available if Input Operators has been enabled in configuration level Note In addition to linearising the controller inputs channels it is equally valid to customise other sources such as Output Channels This allows you for example to compensate for non linear control valve characteristics 206 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 14 2 CUSTOM LINEARIS
39. Mod 6 A _ Temp Src Zirc PV Mod 4A Mod 6A Va mV Src Zirc Stat Wire Src Mod 4C Rann Gas Site Zirc Clean Wira Sre Clean Src Zirc S Alm DIO1 AA Relay DIO1 Val Wire Src Figure 13 3 Zirconia Wiring for Carbon Potential 13 3 2 1 Implementation 1 In INSTRUMENT Options Page section 7 2 1 2 In MODULE IO Module 3A Page section 23 3 9 3 In MODULE IO Module 6A Page section 23 3 9 4 In STANDARD lIO Dig 101 Page section 22 7 1 5 In ZIRCONIA PROBE Options Page section 113 2 1 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 set Num of Loops 2 set Zirconia Enabled set Channel Type Thermocouple set Linearisation K Type set Units C F K set Resolution XXXXX set SBrk Impedance Low set SBrk Fallback Up Scale set CJC Type Internal This configures Module 3 to measure temperature set Channel Type HZVolts set Linearisation Linear set Units mV set Resolution XXXXX set SBrk Impedance Off set SBrk Fallback Up Scale set Electrical Lo 0 00 set Electrical Hi 2 00 set Eng Val Lo 0 00 set Eng Val Hi 2000 This configures Module 6 to measure probe mV set Channel Type Digital Input This configures DIO1 to be a digital input set Probe Type Type of probe in use set Un
40. On confirm the current input value is stored as Input High and the value entered by the user is stored in the Scale High parameter 10 Press e to confirm or lto cancel as instructed It is possible to perform either low or high points in isolation or to calibrate both points consecutively as described above Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 321 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 24 5 AUTO TARE CALIBRATION The auto tare function is used for example when it is required to weigh the contents of a container but not the container itself The procedure is to place the empty container on the weigh bridge and zero the controller Since it is likely that following containers may have different tare weights the auto tare feature is always available in the controller at access level 1 24 5 1 To Use the Auto Tare Feature Firstly access the transducer scaling parameters as follows Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press D Jas many times as necessary to access the page d header menu TRMDRRD I0 MODULE 10 2 Press A or Y to select TXDCR ird SCALING Meru L eve a 3 Press to show Sub headers EES The choices are Txdcr 1 TRHDRRD IO Txder 2 4 Press A or Y to select Txder 1 MODULE 10 Txder 3 or 2 or 3 This can be user defined text 5 Press C to show the parameter list This parameter remains On once it has been set It requires
41. Only shown if segment type is Go Back Segment Name Allows a user defined name to be Default Text to 100 Usr Default Text chosen 100 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 No wait Event A Event B Event C INN The name of the event is shown with its state On or Off 1 to no of segments See also Section 8 4 2 1 to 999 89 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 8 16 TO RUN ASYNCHRONOUS PROGRAM PROG e Press A program can only be Run Reset or Held in Operator Level 1 2 or 3 Program Status 1 The program status pop up window is displayed A 2 Press or Y to select the program to be run Delay 3 Press to edit Delayed Start if it is required to run the program after a set period A 4 Press or Y to set a time period for the delayed start 5 Press the PROG button again to select Run The symbol in the top left of the display changes to E 8 17 TO HOLD A PROGRAM A program can only be held from Run mode Press the PROG button once The pop up window is again displayed showing Run Press the PROG button again The message in the pop up window changes to Hold 8 18 TO RESET A PROGRAM Press the PROG button once The pop up window is again displayed showing Run or Hold Press the PROG button again and hold it pressed for 2 seconds The message changes to Reset The symbol in the top left of the display changes
42. Rem Lo OP Src The above two para Rem SP Ena S Remote SP Sr SP Select Sr SP1 Src SP2 Src Rt Lim Dis Src Rt Lim Hld Src Prog SP Src PID Set Src Power FF Src Track Enab S Track Src Ext FBack Src Part No HA026933 These parameters allow you to soft wire between function blocks Parameter Description Process variable source Target OP power source OP rate limit enable src Lead PV source Ratio setpoint source Ratio trim source Ratio enable source Freeze control flag source ntegral hold flag source Auto manual select source Pot position source Remote feedforward src Remote high power limit src Remote low power limit src Remote SP enable source Remote setpoint source Internal SP select source Setpoint 1 source Setpoint 2 source SP rate limit disable src SP rate limit hold source LP1 PSP wire source PID Set Source Power feedforward source OP track enable source Track output source External feedback source Issue 7 0 Nov 12 LP1 SETUP Wiring Page Modbus address 05108 Conf PVIn Val Modbus address meters do not appear if Control Type section 11 1 1 On Off Modbus address Modbus address Modbus address Modbus address Modbus address Modbus address Modbus address Modbus address Modbus address Modbus address Modbus address Modbus address 159 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 11 11 4 Ratio Parameters Table Number This list only app
43. Resolution Full The slave address is in the range 0 Timeout msecs 100 to 254 and does not necessarily 3 Press LO again to edit Address i g Retries 1 have to be the same as the slave Status Online number Block Write 1 4 Press 4 or LY Jto change the 0 is reserved for broadcast value comms See section 21 7 for a description Repeat 3 and 4 to set up following of the parameters and settings parameters Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 269 Engineering Handbook 21 7 21 7a Parameter Name Param Index Parameter Slave Address Slave Param Scaling Function See Note below Repeat Rate Status Note PARAMETER TABLES Table Number These parameters configure a transaction between a local parameter in the 2704 and a parameter in a slave Parameter Description Select up to 100 parameters to read or write to Increased from 38 from version 6 onwards The address of the parameter in the 2704 which is to be sent to a slave OR the address in the 2704 in which a parameter sent from a slave is stored 2704 Controller Parameters Value Default 1 to 100 modbus address shown as address followed by name of commonly used parameter The address of the slave where the parameter 0 to 254 is to be sent or received 0 is broadcast mode in which the parameter is sent to all slaves The parameter address in the slave 0 to 65535 Scaling of the parameter in the slave
44. Servo can be set in configuration so that when a program is run the setpoint can start from the initial controller setpoint or from the current process value Whichever it is the starting point is called the servo point This can be set in the program Servo to PV is the default and will produce a smooth and bumpless start to the process Servo to SP may be used in a Ramp Rate programmer to guarantee the time period of the first segment In this case it is necessary to soft wire the Working Setpoint parameter to the PSP Reset Value parameter Note ina Time to Target programmer the segment duration will always be determined by the setting of the Segment Duration parameter 8 2 5 Hot Start When run is initiated Hot Start allows the program to automatically advance to the correct point in the profile which corresponds to the operating value of the process It can occur in any segment type for any PSP but is most useful to ramp segments Hot start is enabled in configuration level and specifies which programmed variable to use when deciding the correct segment 74 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 8 3 PROGRAMMER TYPES The programmer can be configured as Time to Target or Ramp Rate A time to target programmer requires fewer settings and is simple to use since all segments are the same A time to target programmer can in general contain more segments than a ramp rate 8 3 1 Time To Target Programmer
45. Set up the displayed value instrument minimum span which corresponds to the Electrical Lo input eg 2 Set up the displayed value instrument maximum span which corresponds to the Electrical Hi input eg 200 00 307 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 23 5 3 Output modules If the output module is DC or if it is a relay triac or logic used as time proportioning control it can be scaled such that a lower and upper level of PID demand signal can limit the operation of the output value This is shown in Figure 23 9 applied to a relay output or any time proportioning output By default the relay will be fully off for 0 power demand fully on for 100 power demand and equal on off times at 50 power demand You can change these limits to suit the process It is important to note however that these limits are set to safe values for the process For example for a heating process it may be required to maintain a minimum level of temperature This can be achieved by applying an offset at 0 power demand which will maintain the relay on for a period of time Care must be taken to ensure that this minimum on period does not cause the process to overheat These offsets can be made to parameters in the relevant Module IO pages If the output is DC the electrical low and electrical high parameters are analogue values and can be set as in the example given for DC Output Retransmission section 23 5 5 PID Demand signal Eng Value Hi
46. Table Number These parameters allow you to set up the conditions for transfer from Gauge Switch 13 12 4 one gauge to another See also section 13 8 7 Active Gauge Selected input High Vac L3 R O Low Vac Both iota pecan iad E Switch Vac Lo High switch over See Figure 13 9 H Switch Vac Hi See Figure 13 9 See Figure 13 9 13 9 ChamberVac Vac Chamber Vac Current chamber vacuum Current chamber vacuum vacuum Vacuum Display range ooo L3 R O Bad 13 12 5 Setpoint Parameter Tables Table Number These parameters allow you to set up and configure the six setpoints Setpoint 13 12 5 See also section 13 8 1 Setpoint 1 Sel Select the source of the vacuum value for None None L3 SP1 Low Vac High Vac Backing Vac Chamber Vac Setpoint 1 Off Value to turn off output Setpoint1On Setpoint1On On Valuetoturnonoutput to turn on Valuetoturnonoutput Setpoint 1 Out Current value of setpoint 1 output L3 R O Setpoint 1 Str Name for setpoint 1 Usr 01 to 50 DE The above parameters are repeated for setpoints 2 to 6 Vacuum Display range 13 12 6 Pump Control Parameter Tables Table Number These parameters allow you to set up and configure the pump Pump Control 13 12 6 parameters such as timeout See also section 13 8 5 Vacuum Select Select the source of the vacuum None None L3 Low Vac High Vac Backing Vac Chamber Vac Pump Running Src Select the source to turn the pump on Modbus a
47. The Programmer Page etc A complete list of these is shown in the full navigation diagram Section 3 3 Where a function has many parameters associated with it the Page Header may be further sub divided into Sub Headers The parameters are then found under this category Page Header Sub Header Parameters Figure 3 3 Page Types It is possible to configure different start up pages as the Home page but the principle of navigation is the same for all pages Note A page only appears on the controller if the function has been ordered and is enabled in Configuration mode For example if a programmer is not configured the RUN page and the EDIT PROGRAM pages will not be displayed in operation levels Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 39 Engineering Handbook 3 3 NAVIGATION OVERVIEW 3 3 1 To Select a Page Header Do This 1 From any display press eJ as many times as necessary to access the page header menu 2 Press to scroll down the list of page headers 3 Press to scroll back up the list of page headers 40 This Is The Display You Should See Menu Level 3 ALL LOOPS AM TREND PROGRAM RUN Henu Level 3 M TREND H RUH Menu Level 3 ACCESS The sequence is repeated following further presses of Y button 2704 Controller Additional Notes The vertical bar on the right of the display indicates the position of the page header
48. This will allow the operator to select say the Heating Pattern to be active within a program segment OP 16 Src Or IO Expander Pattern15 OP 1 OP 1 Src i OP 2 OP2S Pattern 0 l ate Program User l Val 1 OP 16 f Figure 16 2 Pattern Selected by Programmer User Values Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 225 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 16 1 1 1 To Configure The Pattern Generator 10 TT 16 1 1 2 To Wire Pattern Generator Outputs to the IO Expander Inputs 226 Do This From any display press as many times as necessary to access the page header menu Press 4 lor Y to select PATTERN GENERATOR Press J to show Sub headers Press lor y Group 1 or 2 to select Dig Press e list to show the parameter Press Le Src again to select Pattern Press lor to select the Modbus address of the parameter you wish to wire to Press J to show Pattern Enu Press lor Y to select the User Text which contains the appropriate message Press to select the first pattern Pattern 0 Press Jor Y to change to change the first digit in the pattern to On I or Off D Do This Enable the IO Expander in INSTRUMENT Options page Scroll to the IO EXPANDER page Select expander type e g 10 in 10 out and confirm as instructed Scroll to OP1 Src Press A lor Y to selectt
49. e The state Off or value of the parameter is shown Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 239 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 17 3 1 To Display the User Page View Using the above example the User Page will be found in both configuration and operator levels in the main menu under its name Usr1 If the parameter Page Location Loop Summary the user page is only available in operator level by pressing the Loop button Further parameters can be added by selecting Custom Param 2 to 14 and its modbus address so that it appears as shown in the page view at the beginning of this chapter Page Name 01 Usr1 Custom Param 1 i Custom Ad L2 Ch1 OP Graph Style Absolute Vien GraphLo amp Hi 0 100 Section 1 Name Zone 1 user text Custom Name Heat user text Li Open Vent ad Promote Param 1 Promote Add Prg DO1 Promote Name Open Vent user text Promoted Parameter Value Figure 17 9 Dual Loop User Page Example 17 4 AUTO MANUAL OPERATION FROM A USER PAGE From software version 6 onwards an additional parameter called Auto Man Key has been made available on all styles of User Page This means that auto manual operation can be associated with the user page being displayed For example if on User Page 1 Auto Man Key LP1 then in operation levels loop 1 can be put into auto or manual mode from User Page 1 Similarly User Page 2 could have Auto Man K
50. gauge is switched on Gauge Enabled High vacuum gauge setpoint output Enabled Disabled L3 R O Disabled Gauge Name A user defined name for the high vacuum Usr 01 to 50 Default Config gauge Text 13 12 2 Low Vacuum Parameter Tables Table Number These parameters allow you to set up and configure the low vacuum Low Vacuum or takes a 13 12 2 gauge parameters See also section 13 8 2 user name Gauge Src The source from which the low vacuum Modbus address Config gauge is wired Gauge Val The value read by the low vacuum gauge Vacuum Display range L3 R O The source from which the gauge status Modbus address is wired Status Val The status condition Good L3 R O Bad Gauge Name A user defined name for the low vacuum Usr 01 to 50 Default L3 gauge Text 13 12 3 Backing Vacuum Parameter Tables Table Number These parameters allow you to set up and configure the backing Back Vacuum or takes a 13 123 vacuum gauge parameters user name Gauge Src The source from which the backing Modbus address Config vacuum gauge is wired Gauge Val The value read by the backing vacuum Vacuum Display range 2 L3 R O gauge The source from which the gauge status Modbus address is wired Status Val The status condition Good L3 R O Bad Gauge Name A user defined name for the backing Usr 01 to 50 Default L3 vacuum gauge Text 198 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 13 12 4 Gauge Switching Parameter Tables
51. initis it t m rtt ttem emt etit te e 377 ISSUE STATUS OF THIS MANUAL Issue 6 applise to firmware version 6 51 The manual has been re formatted in style and size now A4 to maintain consistency with other controller manuals Updates also include Installation and Operation at the beginning of the document and corrections to cascade controller block diagram sections 11 10 4 and 11 10 5 Issue 7 updates Directive numbers in section 30 1 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Related Handbooks Engineering Handbook The following related handbooks may be downloaded from the Eurotherm web site www eurotherm co uk 2704 User Guide shipped with the controller Part No HA029465 Series 2000 Communication Handbook Part No HA026230 Series 2000 Profibus DP Communications Handbook Part No HA026290 Series 2000 DeviceNets Handbook Part No HA027506 Handbook Supplements 2704CP Furnace Atmosphere Controller Supplement Part No HA027734 2704VC Vacuum Furnace Controller Supplement Part No HA027655 2704MP Melt Pressure Controller Supplement Part No HA027519 OEM Security Supplement Part No HA027482 Boiler Controller Part No HA028177 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 Describes Installation and general operation Describes El BiSynch and Modbus digital communications Describes Profibus digital communications Describes DeviceNet digital communications Describes 2704 controller configured for carbon
52. set Input 1 Scalar 2 set Low Limit 1 set High Limit 1 Note when Programmer Status Run the result of the calculation is 0 Set Wire Src 07176 LgOp1 OP This connects Logic Operator 1 output to operate the AA relay 133 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 11 CHAPTER 11 LOOP SET UP In the controller LOOP SET UP appears after AUTOTUNE in the operator display In this manual however an explanation of how to set up each loop is given before the tuning procedure Also the order in which each sub header appears in this chapter is not necessarily the same as the order in which they appear in the controller because single loop control is explained before dual loops 11 1 WHAT IS LOOP SET UP The 2704 controller can have up to three control loops Each loop operates independently and can be configured for On Off PID or Valve Positioning control Additionally each loop can have an auxiliary loop associated with it and this allows other control strategies to be implemented such as cascade ratio and override control The LOOP SETUP pages allow you to configure the type of control most suited to your process The pages are divided into a number of sub headers briefly described below LP1 2 or 3 SP Page Allows you to configure the setpoint parameters for a particular loop SETUP gt Note SP Aux Page Allows you to configure the setpoint parameters for an auxiliary loop Textshown in Cascade Page
53. 05402 DIO1 al 7 Press or Y to select the Modbus Address of the parameter to be wired to If the Modbus Address is not known it is possible to select the required parameter from a list of commonly used parameters This list is shown in Appendix D 8 Press again If the Modbus Address is not known the parameter can be vues selected its mnemonic See 9 Then press or to scroll Appendix D for a list of these through a list of commonly used parameters commonly used parameters See Copy and Paste Section 5 1 2 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 67 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 7 3 USER TEXT EXAMPLES 7 3 1 To Re Name Loop 1 to Zone 1 First enable User Text since its factory default is disabled A library of User Text can then be created from which the new loop name can be selected 7 3 1 1 Implementation 1 In INSTRUMENT User Text Page set User Text Enabled set Text Number 1 or any unused text no set Text Zone 1 This defines Text Number 1 to be Zone 1 2 In LOOP 1 SETUP Display Page set Loop Name 01 Zone 1 This replaces the default name LP1 with Zone 1 7 3 2 To Re Name User Alarm 1 and Provide a Message User alarms can be re named and also provide a diagnostic message to the user 7 3 2 1 Implementation 1 In INSTRUMENT User Text Page set User Text Enabled set Text Number 2 or any unused text no set Usr2 High Temp This de
54. 1 Status The conditions are correct or out of range nput 2 Value The current working value Display Range Can be adjusted between the limits set by Input Lo and Input Hi in configuration level nput 2 Status The conditions are correct or out of range Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 209 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 14 5 TO SET UP INPUT OPERATORS MONITOR The Monitor block 1 Logs the Maximum and Minimum excursions of the PV These values are reset when a An external logic input configured as reset is enabled b The reset parameter see Table 14 5 1 is changed to Yes 2 Counts the time above a threshold 3 Provides a time alarm 14 5 1 Input Operator Monitor Parameters Table Number This page allows you to set up Monitor parameters INPUT OPERS Monitor 1 14 5 1 Page Enabled Reset Reset No to run Yes to reset Maximum The maximum value recorded by the controller between resets see 1 above Minimum The minimum value recorded by the controller between resets see 1 above PV threshold for timer log Days above threshold 0 to 32767 Time above threshold 0 00 00 0 Day Alarm This sets the alarm threshold for the 0 to 32767 number of days that the alarm is active Time Alarm This sets the alarm threshold for the time 0 00 00 0 that the alarm is active Alarm Output Displays an alarm when the number of Off days and time has been exceeded On 14 6 BCD INPUT An available
55. 2 Press or Y to select COMMS Digital communications modules may be fitted in either one or both 3 Press C to show Sub headers ANALOGUE 1 4 Press or Y to select H mies EE Module C 5 Press to show the parameter The first parameter is Protocol list B ate 6 Press or Y lto scroll to the required parameter 7 Press to select the parameter 8 Press or Y to change the value or state Remaining parameters in the Analogue Operators list are accessed and adjusted in the same way The list of parameters available is shown in the following table 20 2 1 H Module Parameters Table Number This page allows you to configure Digital Communications fitted in COMMS 20 2 1 slot H H Module Page Protocol Comms protocol Modbus L3 El Bisynch or Profibus Ethernet Devicenet Baud Rate Baud rate Modbus 9600 Conf not shown if Profibus Bisynch 9600 19200 4800 Devicenet 125K 250K 500K Parity Parity None Conf Modbus only Address Controller address Devicenet 0 63 1 L1 Bisynch 1 99 Modbus 1 254 Profibus 0 127 Ethernet 1 253 Resolution Comms resolution Full Full L3 Modbus only Integer Delay This introduces a short delay No Oms No Conf between messages to allow some Yes 10ms intelligent RS485 converters to switch between Rx and Tx modes not applicable if Ethernet Rx Timeout H Comms timeout value None to Conf not shown if Devicenet 1 00 00 C
56. 2 49 0 1 Precision PV Input set up PID Loop set up Elec Lo 4mA Proportional band PB 125 Elect Hi 20mA Integral time Ti 0 4sec Filter time 0 2sec Derivative time Td Off All the internal variables of the loop and their limits are set to 0 100 range Figure 23 3 Precision 4 20mA Current Loop Retransmission 15bit using a single precision PV input module Notes 1 To guarantee that the 4 20mA range is fully covered the channel output is calibrated at 3 8mA cal low and 20 5mA cal High 2 To utilise the full potential for high accuracy resolution extra care should be taken to ensure low levels of EM interference as follows keep connecting cables away from power cables ground Dig Common of the controller to local panel ground use shielded cables with the shield connected to local panel ground Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 299 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller Precise 4 20mA Current Loop Retransmission 14bit Using Dual probe module and a feedback loop with input from cannel A Burden resistor 2 49Q to Retransmission Variable 900Q 0 1 HiRes Output 4 20mA V PID Loop Panel ground SP 0 100 Dual probe Input Module Isolation required ChA Hz type PV 10909 0 100 SR QE S o O A T I ee se mV mA Pt100 nu type i Additional E PV input if m required sads n it p a i iu L Panel ground Channel A Input set up PID Loop set up Elec Lo 0 4V
57. 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 8 31 EXAMPLE TO RUN A PROGRAM USING THE PROG BUTTON Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes The Run Group Status pop up will be shown The following conditions may be selected Group Group 1 to Group 20 or USER to run SELECT Press A or x7 to choose Run Group Status 1 From any display Press PROG Group 1 to 20 selects pre set profiles as set up in PROGRAM GROUPS Active Group page If the user changes the profiles in this pop up display the changes Press become permanent to scroll USER SELECT will choose the down last selected Program Group the list but if the profiles are changed they are only applicable to the current run 2 Press again to Run the program PROG e OOP Run Profile ot Used or SP1 01 PSP1 P1to 20 PSP1 20 ot Used means that the profile will not be run in this program 01 PSP1 P1 will select PSP1 Program 1 to PSP1 Program 20 3 PROG e Press Hold the program again to 4 Press mos 8 and hold for 3 seconds to Reset the program Profile ot Used or SP2 01 PSP2 P1 to 20 PSP2 20 This is an example of an Overview Profile ot Used or display SP3 01 PSP3 P1 to 20 PSP3 20 Delayed This can be set between Start 0 00 00 and 500 00 0 hrs This value counts down when Run is selected Note the symbols shown on each of these displays as described in the following section In the event
58. 3 3 can be promoted to Level 1 Level 2 or Level 3 as follows Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes Views are typical and may vary depending upon options in any particular controller 1 From any display press Cas many times as necessary to access the page header menu 2 Press or Y INSTRUMENT to select The choices are G 3 Press to show sub headers Options Info 4 Press or Y to select Page Units Prom Display Page Prom VACUUM User Text Summary Standby The choi 5 Press C to show parameters TN ge aces 6 Press or Y to scroll to the In this view the Summary and Program Mimic pages will only displayed at Operator Levels 1 and higher name of a page which you wish to promote to levels 1 2 or 3 Le Le Le Le 7 Press C to edit All others at Lev 3 only Note Not all parameters in a page will be seen For example parameters marked as available in a higher level eg 3 will not be shown in the page if itis promoted to a lower level 8 Press or Y to choose the level at which you wish the page to be displayed Repeat the above for every page which you wish to promote to a different level Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 63 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 7 2 6 INSTRUMENT User Text Page This page allows you to configure up to 100 User Text strings of up to 16 characters Any string can be used to provide a name for particular paramete
59. 4 ogue 5 ogue 6 ogue 7 ogue 8 ogue 9 ogue ogue ogue ogue ogue ogue ogue Chapter 19 Logic 1 Pag Logic 2 Pag Logic 3 Pag Logic 4 Pag Logic 5 Pag Logic 6 Pag Logic 7 Pag Logic 8 Pag Logic 9 Pag Logic 10 Pa Logic 11 Pa Logic 12 Pa Logic 13 Pa Logic 14 Pa Logic 15 Pa Logic 16 Pa Chapter 15 Alarm 1 Page Alarm 2 Page Chapter 15 Totaliser 1 Page Totaliser 2 Page Totaliser 3 Page Totaliser 4 Page Chapter 15 Timer 1 Page Timer 2 Page 08975 Timer 3 Page 08987 10 Page 11 Page 12 Page 13 Page 14 Page 15 Page 16 Page ANALOGUE OPERS 06158 Page LOGIC OPERS 07176 e e e e e e e ge ge ge ae E ge TIMER BLOCKS 08711 08716 08743 08757 08775 08791 08963 RUN General Page TIMER BLOCKS TIMER BLOCKS 375 Engineering Handbook Parameter Description Tme OP Uvalz Val Refer To Section Timer 4 Page Chapter 16 3 USER VALUES User Val 1 Page User Val 2 Page 2704 Controller Modbus Address 08999 UVal3 Val Pat1 OP1 Pat1 OP2 Pat1 OP3 Pat1 OP4 Pat1 OP5 Pat1 OP6 Pat1 OP7 Pat1 OP8 Pat1 OP9 Pat1 OP1 Pat1 OP1 Pat1 OP1 Pat1 OP Pat1 OP Pat1 OP1 Pat1 OP1 Pat2 OP1 Pat2 OP2 Pat2 OP3 Pat2 OP4 Pat2 OP5 Pat2 0OP6 Pat2 OP7 Pat2 OP8 Pat2 0P9 Pat2 OP1 Pat2 OP1 Pat2 OP Pat2 OP1 Pat2 OP1 Pat2 OP1 Pat2 OP1 Sum LP2 amp 3 Sum PrName Sum D1 16 N 3 eas Ja RI ow e N
60. 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 22 CHAPTER 22 STANDARD IO 22 1 WHAT IS STANDARD IO Standard IO refers to the fixed Input Output connections as listed in Table 22 1 below Parameters such as input output limits filter times and scaling of the IO can be adjusted in the Standard IO pages This chapter also describes User Scaling of the standard IO The controller is calibrated for life against known reference standards during manufacture but user scaling allows you to offset the permanent factory calibration to either 1 Scale the controller to your reference standards 2 Match the calibration of the controller to an individual transducer or sensor 3 To compensate for known offsets in process measurements These offsets can be made to parameters in the Standard IO pages PV InputPage Allows access to parameters which set up the fixed Process Variable Input connected to terminals VH VI V and V This is generally the PV input for a single loop controller An InputPage Allows access to parameters which set up the fixed Analogue Input connected to terminals BA BB and BC This is the high level input from a remote source AA RelayPage Allows access to parameters which set up the fixed Relay output connected to gt terminals AA AB and AC This relay may be used as an alarm relay a time STANDARD IO proportioning control output or valve raise or lower Dig 107 Page ows access to parameters which s
61. 999 0 Process Factor Process Factor is used in some zirconia 0 0 to 999 0 L3 probes to provide compensation for the 182 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook Table Number This table allows you to view or adjust zirconia probe parameters ZIRCONIA PROBE 13 2 1 Options Page varying abilities of different alloys to absorb carbon Applies to MMI probes only Clean Mode Clean probe input Of On J of Clean Freq Zirconia probe cleaning interval Off to 4 00 00 0 a 99 54 00 0 Clean Duration Sets the cleaning time 0 00 06 0 to 0 10 00 0 L3 1 39 54 0 ax Recvy Time Maximum recovery time after purging 0 00 06 0 to 0 10 00 0 L3 1 39 54 0 Minimum recovery time after purging 0 00 06 0 to 0 10 00 0 1 39 54 0 in Cal Temp Minimum calculation temp 999 0 Temp Offset Sets the temperature offset for the probe 2000 0 The following 4 parameters are not relevant to Probe Type Oxygen Next Clean Time to next cleaning 0 00 00 1 R O L1 counts down to 0 00 00 0 Clean State The burn off state of the zirconia probe Inactive R O L1 Cleaning Recovering a eee ee 19 5 Protest Pobesmnenrbeak Nos o vot The following parameter is not relevant to Probe Type Oxygen Temp iP aeons probe temp input Temere fron PV Invalid PV Invalid This is a boolean which is true when the temperature is below that set by Min Cal Temp t may have been wir
62. Automatic The alarm is displayed until it is acknowledged Automatic Once the alarm has been acknowledged it will clear when it is no longer true Alarm ON PV Alarm OFF Alarm setpoint V1 4 i NN e MN Sn Hysteresis 1 i Time l H gt Alarm Acknowledged 10 4 2 Latched Alarm Full Scale High Manual Acknowledging here will not reset the alarm The alarm must because it is still in an Manual first clear before alarm condition it can be reset Alarm ON T Alarm E OFF Al i i Y arm setpoint gt M Uc f Hysteresis Time l a Alarm Acknowledged 124 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 10 4 3 Grouped Alarms Alarms can be associated with different aspects of the process They are grouped in accordance with the functions they perform as follows Loop Alarms Alarms associated with each control loop Examples are High Low Deviation and Rate of Change Two alarms are available for each loop On a new controller these are the only alarms which are configured those listed below must be enabled in configuration level PV Input Alarms Alarms which operate on the PV input Examples are High and Low Two alarms are available with this input Analogue Input Alarms which operate on the analogue input Examples are High and Low Two alarms Alarms are available with this input Module Alarms Alarms which operate on each plug in module These can be input or outp
63. Co Sum TiRem Oo Const 1 Zirc Clea User 3 value User 4 value ttern 1 output 1 Es Es w N N ttern w output 2 ttern 1 output 3 ttern 1 output 4 Es U oio a N N ttern w output 5 v w ttern 1 output 6 ttern 1 output 7 ttern 1 output 8 v u 0 oio a N N ttern w output 9 c w N ttern 1 output 10 4 v w ttern 1 output 11 4 Es w ttern 1 output 12 4 v w ttern 1 output 13 4 v w ttern 1 output 14 4 Es w ttern 1 output 15 4 Es w ttern 1 output 16 v w ttern 2 output 1 v w ttern 2 output 2 Es w ttern 2 output 3 ttern 2 output 4 v 0 oio ttern 2 output 5 Es w ttern 2 output 6 ttern 2 output 7 U 0 oio ttern 2 output 8 Es w ttern 2 output 9 c w ttern 2 output 10 Es w ttern 2 output 11 Es w ttern 2 output 12 cu w ttern 2 output 13 ttern 2 output 14 0 oio ttern 2 output 15 v w ttern 2 output 16 S S Summary of digital outputs 1 to ummary of loop 2 and loop3 ummary of programmer name Summary of program time remaining Constant value 1 May be used in place of a User Value Zirconia Value Probe Status Clean State User Val 3 Page User Val 4 Page Chapter 16 1 PATTERN GENERATOR Dig Group 1 Chapter 16 1 PATTERN GENERATOR Dig Group 2 10246 Chapter 8 PROGRAM RUN General Page Cha
64. Cutback High 1 Manual Reset 1 Cool Gain 1 3 a a a N This table does not appear if the Loop Type is Single or Ratio These tables are repeated for Loop Zand Loop J3 if these have been configured Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 147 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 11 6 OUTPUT PARAMETERS Typically the output s of the PID function block are wired to e The standard relay or logic outputs configured for on off or time proportioning pulses e Relay triac or logic output module configured for on off or time proportioning pulses e Analogue output module configured for Volts or mA 11 6 1 Table of Output Parameters Table Number This list allows you to set up the parameters which control the output LP1 SETUP 11 6 1 to the plant Output Page Loop Mode Allows the controller to be Auto Manual switched into manual OP Low Limit Sets a low limit on an analogue 100 to 100 output signal OP High Limit Sets a high limit on an analogue 100 to 100 100 output signal OP Rate Limit Sets the rate at which the output Off to 99 99 sec value changes L3 L3 L3 L3 L3 L3 R O OP Rate Lim En Output rate limit enable On Forced OP Sets the output value when the 100 to 100 controller is in manual alternative to bumpless transfer SBrk OP Sets the level of the output in 100 to 100 sensor break CH1 OP Reads the current value of 100 to 100 channel 1 output Ch1 Hysteresis Only shown if the out
65. DO1 SP 1 L Thyristor unit Es ec 2 Roughing pump e 1 2 o2 ic analogue kc Th Bel CHORR may 3 pile be made viaa plc ui e ex 65 modules E Oe relay Gc ac i AA relay Diff pump Setpoint 6 to turn ff ae iced T gauge on off v 2 o a Ie pe Ole P E Low vacuum gauge manaon uk oe gt gauge ra unit Figure 13 10 Example Wiring Connections Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 195 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 13 10 SWITCH ON Install and wire up the controller in accordance with the types of modules fitted and the configuration of the controller and switch on A short self test sequence takes place during which the controller identification is displayed together with the version number of the software fitted For the vacuum controller the version number must be greater than 3 0 Status bar Units mBAR Vacuum bar graph Increasing Vacuum SP1 to SP6 shows the status of the six setpoints ERR Chamber fault Second display if configured GON High Vacuum Gauge on tpoint b Im setpoint Message DUK PUMP TOUT Pump Timeout alarm man ETT proc LEAK DET Leak detection alarm The Loop Select button selects each loop display in turn or between each loop and the trend chart if the options are configured plus a summary of all loops Figure 13 11 Operator View This display is configurable by the user
66. Description Default L L Override Type Override type Minimum Conf See Note 1 Maximum Select OVR Target SP Override target setpoint Display range Disable OVR Disable override control No See Note 2 Yes Active Loop Displays the loop which is controlling at any time OVR SP Trim Override loop setpoint trim Note 1 Minimum selects the lowest output power from the two loops to be the control output Maximum selects the highest output power from the two loops to be the control output Select allows either the main output or the override output to be used as the control output depending on the state of a digital input or via digital communications Note 2 The main control loop is active when Override control is disabled Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 165 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 11 12 11 Override Wiring Example This example shows how to configure Loop 1 to be a simple override furnace temperature controller The main PV is connected to the PV Input rear terminals V amp V and the override PV is connected to a PV Input module fitted in slot 3 rear terminals 3C amp 3D The control output is an analogue control module fitted in Slot 1 PV Src LP1 Override Aux PV Src Aux LSP Src Ctrl Hold Src AuxCtrlHld Src Integr Hld Src Aux Hold Src Man Mode Src Active Lp Src OVR Disab Src OVR Trim Src Pot IP Src Rem FFwd Src Rem Hi OP Src Rem Lo OP Src Rem SP Ena Src Remote SP Src SP
67. Fixed Relay Scaling 278 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook To set up and scale the Fixed Relay Output proceed as follows This can be done in Level 3 Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press B as many times as necessary to access the page ANALOGUE OPE The AA Relay is connected to header menu terminals AA AB and AC TRMDREDIO M MODULE In 2 Press or Ylto select mE STANDARD IO A 3 Press LC to show Sub headers 4 Press or Y to scroll to the AA Relay Page STANDARD ID MM y rag MODULE 10 DIRI Ri 5 Press to show the AA Relay STANDARD IO AA Rela sec This parameter applies to time parameter list proportioning outputs only Auto 0 05sec 6 Press again to select Min Pulse Time 7 Press or Y to choose Auto or a minimum on off time for the relay E If the relay is wired to the PID C i output demand signal as shown 8 Press to select Electrical Lo in Figure 20 2 set this to a low value normally 0 9 Press or Y to adjust the value a STANDARD TO AA Relan EF If the relay is wired to the PID output demand signal as shown in Figure 20 2 set this to a high value normally 100 10 Press 7 to select Electrical Hi A 11 Press or LY J to adjust the value Set up this value so that the relay switches fully off corresponding to the Elec
68. GROUP Options Page 5 nrc a eee rer EP RE D e EE OH n e ca Re LESER FEE H SUY 99 PROGRAM GROUPS Wining Page coenen tr ertet bes eet bete cokecsevedecsduenskceusexsedecesstts RN e 100 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 3 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 10 11 8 24 3 8 25 8 25 1 8 25 2 8 25 3 8 25 4 8 25 5 8 25 6 8 26 8 27 8 28 8 29 8 30 8 31 8 31 1 9 1 9 2 9 2 1 9 2 2 9 3 9 4 9 4 1 10 1 10 1 1 10 2 10 2 1 10 2 2 10 2 3 10 2 4 10 2 5 10 2 6 10 2 7 10 3 10 3 1 10 3 2 10 3 3 10 4 10 4 1 10 4 2 10 4 3 10 5 10 5 1 10 6 10 7 10 7 1 10 7 2 10 7 3 10 7 4 10 7 5 10 7 6 10 8 10 8 1 10 8 2 HEN ees pe a lec ce BRRRRRBRLRGDDQMiL2L Bx oO Ust i2 Ww N gt LA 3 r PROGRAM GROUPS Group Edit Page cic eene ne mie et eet e OT 100 PROEIEE SETPOINI PAGES Anat aaan E E oer E PEPERHE E 101 PSP1 2 or 3 PROFILE Options 101 PSP1 2 or 3 PROFILE Wiring 103 PSP1 2 OR 3 PROFILE Run General Pages 103 PSP1 2 OR 3 PROFILE Run Segment Pages 106 PSP1 2 OR 3 PROFILE Program Edit Parameters 107 PSP1 2 or 3 PROFILE Segment Parameters 108 Example To set up and run program groups ME 110 Example To Cop a Program ii geste sq DB Reed 111 Example To Inserta Segment into a Program eee ette tete teretes rotes 112 Programmer error messages runNING an asynchronous pro
69. Handbook 8 25 5 PSP1 2 OR 3 PROFILE Program Edit Parameters This page is similar to the PROGRAM EDIT Program Page in the synchronous programmer Table Number 8 25 5 Parameter Description Value Program Number Hbk Mode PSP1 HBk Type PSP1 FineHBk Fine holdback value for PSP7 Display Range PSP1 CourseHBk Rate Units Hot Start Program Cycles The number of times a program repeats Cont to 999 End Action Part No HA026933 These parameters set up the overall program Selects the program number to be edited If Profile Lock z Unlocked only those programs which were created prior to setting the Profile Lock parameter can be selected Allows a program to be copied and pasted The example in section 8 27 describes how his feature is used Holdback mode one no holdback Per prog applied over the whole program Per seg active in every segment Holdback type for PSP7 per program These are deviations between SP and PV Fine and course holdback allows two levels of holdback to be applied to different segments Course holdback value for PSP7 Rate units Only if program Type Ramp Rate PROGRAM GROUPS Options Page Allows hot start to be applied Only appears if Hot Start Yes PROFILE SP1 Options Page Defines the action in the end segment Dwell the program will dwell indefinitely at the conditions set in the end segment Reset the program will reset to the start c
70. Handbook 9 2 2 Digital Program 1 to 4 Page Table Number These parameters are associated with Digital Programs 1 to 4 DIGITAL PROG 9 2 2 Dig Prog x Page Run Hold Src Run Hold equivalent to Prog Modbus address None Conf Status wire source Reset Disable When Reset Disable Offthe Off Off L3 program is in reset On Prog Status Program status L3 Ru OP Enable Enables the output O Off L3 O Reset on Pfail Power fail recovery O see section 9 3 O Program Cycles Number of cycles for the Continuous to 999 Continuous L3 sequence Seg Time Rem 0 00 00 0 to 99 59 59 9 Output Shows the current state ofthe Off output On Output Inv Shows the current inverted Of state of the output O Prg End Program complete Of Off prog running On On prog complete 9 3 POWER FAIL RECOVERY In the event of a power fail to the controller the parameter Reset on Pfail defines how the controller behaves on restoration of the power f n f n n n f f f If this parameter On then Prog Status Hold and Reset Disable Off at power up If Prog Status and Reset Disable have been soft wired they override this state Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 117 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 9 4 CASCADE TRIM MODE EARLIER CONTROLLERS This section applies only to controllers built before April 2001 with software versions 3 or less Controllers built after this date have software version 4 0
71. Home Timeout IRSTRUMENT Display Page is set to None 246 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 18 CHAPTER 18 ANALOGUE AND MULTIPLE OPERATORS 18 1 WHAT ARE ANALOGUE OPERATORS Analogue Operators allow the controller to perform mathematical operations on two input values These values can be sourced from any available parameter including Analogue Values User Values and Digital Values Each input value can be scaled using a multiplying factor or scalar as shown in Figure 18 1 The parameters to use the type of calculation to be performed and the acceptable limits of the calculation are determined in Configuration level In access level 3 you can change values of each of the scalars In Access levels 2 amp 3 provided the Analogue Operators page has been promoted the input values and the result of the calculation can be read The Analogue and Multiple Operators pages are only available if the Toolkit Functions options have been ordered and Analogue and Logic Operators have been enabled in configuration level as described in section 7 2 Up to 32 separate operations can be performed and a separate page header is provided for each one Analogue input 1 69 Output Value Analogue operator result of calculation Input 1 Scalar See section 18 1 1 Analogue input 2 9 Input 2 Scalar Figure 18 1 Analogue Operators Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 247 Eng
72. I lt Jc h c Master Main PV L Sm m p m id a eee d Ms ee S See Loop Lor KY Sm C a C J Control Output Main Wkg OP j c j VASE IIIT Figure 12 2 Cascade Control of a Furnace Load When tuning a cascade loop it is necessary that both master and slave loops are tuned It is recommended that each loop is tuned independently using the procedure below Because the slave loop is used by the master loop it must be tuned first Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 175 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 12 6 1 To Tune a Full Scale Cascade Loop Step 1 Configure the loop as cascade full scale as follows In LP7 SETUP Options Page section 11 1 1 Set Loop Type Cascade In LP7 SETUP Cascade Page section 11 10 7 Set Cascade Mode Full Scale Set Disable CSD Yes In LP7 SETUP SP page section 11 3 2 Set Setpoint 1 the normal operating setpoint value for the main loop In LP7 SETUP SP Aux page section 11 3 3 Set Local SP the normal operating setpoint value for the slave loop when cascade is disabled Step 2 Start the controller in Level 3 as follows In ACCESS Select Level 3 Step 3 Set tune output high and low limits as follows Note For the slave tune you may wish to restrict the ability of the tuner to disturb the process Tune OH should therefore be set to a value that will only enable the tune to achieve the local setpoint which is chosen In AUTOTUNE Set
73. IEEE region of the Target Setpoint Modbus address 2 is simply 2x2 8000h 8004h 32772 decimal This calculation applies to any parameter in a series 2000 slave that has a Modbus address Access to the IEEE area is made via block reads Functions 3 amp 4 and writes Function 16 Attempts to use the Write a Word Function 6 operation will be rejected with an error response Furthermore block reads and writes using the IEEE region should only be performed at even addresses although no damage to the instrument will result in attempting access at odd addresses In general the number of words field in the Modbus frame should be set to 2 times what it would have been for normal Modbus The rules governing how the data in the two consecutive Modbus addresses are organised depending on the data type of the parameter See also Series 2000 Communications Handbook Part No HA026230 21 8 2 Configuration mode The Master does not communicate in configuration mode During configuration if there is no parameter in the master with the specified modbus address the Status is set to No Parameter and on exit from configuration mode all parameters defining that transaction are set to their cold start values Parameter Name Cold Start Value Parameter None Slave Address 1 Slave Parameter 0 Repeat Rate 0 00 00 0 Function None Scaling XXXXX Status Good 272 Part No HA026933 Issue
74. J N U Relay Wo Co J Analogue input a Ww 0 10V omrcoos Jamrcoos amrcoos VYOOEOOOSOOoe e 5 8 8 8 8 80 GO 8 G8 8 COGO 26282 8 8 O8 82 8 G amp 60 60 8 8 60 amp O COO eO Ov emrcoos Analogue input screen VA VH VI V V BA BB Hinged coverin E1 E2 prone AA AB AC position D1 to D8 and DC ZEIA L N Earth Terminals 2A 2B 2C 2D must not be wired to Figure 2 4 Rear Terminal Connections Part No HA026933 Issue7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 2 5 STANDARD CONNECTIONS 2 5 1 Power Supply Wiring Controllers supplied with the VH Supply Voltage option are suitable for connection to a power supply of between 100 and 240Vac 15 10 48 to 62 Hz Controllers supplied with the VL Supply Voltage option are suitable for connection to a power supply of between 24Vac dc 1596 1096 48 to 62Hz or 20 to 29Vdc It is the users responsibility to provide an external fuse or circuit breaker Suitable fuses are For 100 to 240 volt supply Fuse type T EN60127 time lag type rated at 1A 250V 24 volt supply Fuse type T EN60127 time lag type rated at 4A 250V High Voltage Supply Code VH Low Voltage Supply Code V
75. Level 1 and Level 2 L3 means that the value is always available in the instrument operating mode Conf means Configuration Level R O is Read Only Access Levels are described in Chapter 6 Table Number Table Number Description ofthe page PageHeader of the page Page Header een Name Parameter pM ae A Program Number The number of the selected program Segment Number The currently running segment number Note A parameter only appears if it is relevant to the configuration of the controller For example a programmer configured as Time to Target will not display the Rate parameter 3 7 PARAMETER AVAILABILITY AND ALTERABILITY A parameter which appears on a page is described as available Parameters are not available if they are not appropriate for a particular configuration or instrument status For example relative cool gain does not appear in a heat only controller and integral time does not appear in an On Off controller A parameter described as alterable is preceded by the symbol which indicates that its value can be changed A parameter which is not alterable may be viewed subject to availability but may be changed by an instrument algorithm A parameter is alterable only if the following conditions are satisfied e The parameter is READ WRITE e The parameter does not conflict with the status of the instrument For example the proportional band will not be alterable if auto
76. No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 33 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 2 7 TO CONNECT ZIRCONIA DUAL SIGNAL PROBE A dual signal probe such as a Zirconia probe will normally be connected to a Dual PV Input module Code DP The module presents two channels A and C where A is the voltage input and C is the mV thermocouple RTD or mA input Example 1 shown below uses the Dual PV Input module with both channels configured In this configuration the module runs at 4 5Hz The two channels are un isolated from one another but isolated from the rest of the instrument Example 2 uses two modules The modules can either be two PV Input modules code PV or a Dual PV Input module code DP with Channel C configured as None plus a PV Input module This combination runs at 9Hz and may be used if the loop is unusually fast I O Module Typical usage Connections and examples of use Code Zirconia Example 1 Using the Dual PV Input Module probe Channel C is shown configured for thermocouple The temperature sensor of a zirconia probe is connected to this input terminals C amp D The Volt Source is connected to the A channel terminals A amp D_ Zirconia Volt source Note The ve of the volt source must be connected to the ve of the thermocouple Two PV Example 2 Using Two Modules Input The temperature sensor of the zirconia probe can be connec
77. OK L3 function block See section 28 4 3 for more No Temp information Calibrating Confirm Change FAIL Function block output units uS cmQ925 C uS cm L3 i e TDS PV units PPM 25 C PPM Conversion factor for calculating PPM from 0 000 to 1 000 0 7 L3 Conversion uS cm 25 C Shown when Units PPM Resolution This defines the resolution of specific L3 conductance output For a units setting of PPM the resolution should be set to xxxxx FallBack Fallback setting which the controller will Off take if the calculation is invalid ie Invalid Low OP set to 0 LV aarue High OP set to 500 000 Bubble Bubble Filter time constant limiting the rate HH MM SS s Filter t at which the signal is allowed to fall while not limiting the rate at which it is allowed to rise TDS output either in terms of temperature uS cmQ25 C compensated specific conductance or PPM PPM Invalid PV Flag indicating the validity of the function True 7 Invalid output L3 block output False Valid output mS Src Source address of TDS input typically Modbus address wired from TDS Module Eng Val i e Conductance Temp Src Source address of temperature PV input Modbus address Should be wired to a valid temperature input or alternatively wired to a user value Setup When enabled allows parameters to be Disabled Conf and L3 if set Params available in level 3 including this Enabled to enable parameter It also changes the optio
78. RESTORE FACTORY CALIBRATION VALUES Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 Press until the parameter Cal State The factory calibration values are 2 Press LA or Cl to choose Restore restored for the input selected i e Factory if the Analogue Input is selected the PV Input and Module input values are not affected 342 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 28 CHAPTER 28 BOILER CONTROL The 2704 contains function blocks and hardware that are primarily designed for use in controlling water impurities in shell type industrial Boilers Other aspects of Boiler Control such as level and pressure control can be set up using standard PID blocks and this is covered in other chapters 28 1 INTRODUCTION Water admitted in a boiler system is heated and taken out as steam Dissolved solids are in the water that are added to the system and these solids are left behind when the water is converted to steam At high parts per million PPM levels foaming on the surface of the water occurs which may then cause loss of efficiency of the boiler or blockage in the outlet pipes It is therefore essential although costly in terms of energy and money to drain away some of the boiler water and top it up with less contaminated fresh water This draining process is known as Continuous Blowdown or as Continuous TDS Control TDS Total Dissolved Solids is normally controlled at a
79. RLUES available if Enabled as described in section 7 2 The example shown here sets Switch 1 as follows Switch 1 is named Input 1 Volts and its values can be set between 0 00 and 10 00 volts Select Hi Lim 5 allows the first 6 values to be selected If an out of range Select value is delivered by the Select Src when wired Current OP is always set to value 0 i e value 0 could be configured as the safe state value 227 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 16 3 USER VALUES User Values are normally used as constants in analogue or digital operations In an analogue operation the User Value may be used as a constant in a calculation In a digital operation it may be used to select an event For example it could be used to select a pattern from the pattern generator in the same way as the Programmer User Value was used in example 14 1 1 In this example the Program User Val 1 would be replaced by the User 1 to 12 Value Each User Value can be given a user defined name using the User Enumeration feature This feature is generally intended for use when the User Value is used in a digital operation The 2704 controller contains up to 12 user values which are in a single list under the page header USER VALUES 16 3 1 To Access User Values Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press as The USER VALUES page is only avail
80. S NM VAN L A Lo Time Time Elapsed Time o hamo l 0 Triggered 2j L1 bL Input Interval Time Input Output sd Lo Eo n 4 gt Time Elapsed Time L Triggered uq Figure 15 1 On Pulse Timer Under Different Input Conditions Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 15 2 2 Off Delay Timer Mode This timer provides a delay between the trigger event and the Timer output If a short pulse triggers the Timer then a pulse of one sample time 110ms will be generated after the delay time e The Output is set to Off when the Input changes from Off to On e The Output remains Off until the Time has elapsed e Ifthe Input returns to Off before the time has elapsed the Timer will continue until the Elapsed Time equals the Time It will then generate a pulse of one Sample Time duration e Once the Time has elapsed the Output will be set to On e The Output will remain On until the Input is cleared to Off e The Triggered variable will be set to On by the Input changing from Off to On It will remain On until both the Time has elapsed and the Output has reset to Off Figure 15 2 illustrates the behaviour of the timer under different input conditions e LI 110mS Time Output b Time Elapsed Time Triggered Figure 15 2 Off Delay Timer Under Different Input Conditions Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 217 Engin
81. SP PV Ramp Working SP Ramp rate Servo SP changed Range Min Ramp Status Figure 11 2 Setpoint Function Block Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 139 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 11 3 2 Setpoint Parameters Table Number This list allows you to configure SP parameters LP1 SETUP 11 3 2 Other parameters are available in operation levels SP Page PV high limit disp limit 1372 Conf SP Select Internal setpoint select Setpoint 1 L1 Setpoint 2 ET 6 3 qus NEED Disable Rt Lim Setpoint Rate limit disable No L3 Yes Rt Lim Hold SP rate limit hold No No L3 Yes Rate Limit Val Rate of change of setpoint Off to range a L3 Local SP Trim Applies a trim value to the Range units L1 remote setpoint Enable Rem SP Remote setpoint enable L1 HBk Type SP rate limit holdback type Off Low High Band HBk Value SP rate limit holdback value Display range HBk Status SP rate limit holdback status Off Holdback If temp units C 140 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 11 3 3 LP7 SETUP SP Aux Page Table Number This list allows you to configure auxiliary loop setpoint limits It only LP1 SETUP 11 3 3 appears if cascade or override control is configured see sections SP Aux Page 11 10 and 11 12 Other parameters are available in operation levels Min to max display limit SP Low Limit Auxiliary setpoint 1 low limit SP High Lim
82. Scalar Input 1 Scalar Mod 3A Dual PV Input 05099 An Operator 2 An Operator 1 Mod 3A Multiply Add SBrkVal OP VAI SBrk Val Input1 OP VAI Input 1 lH Input 2 i Input 2 User Val 1 09220 UVal1 Val User 1 Value Input 2 Scalar Input 2 Scalar 1 In MODULE IO Module set SBrk Impedance High 3A or 6A 2 In ANALOGUE set Operation Multiply OPERS An 2 Page set Input 1 Src 05099 Sensor break value set Input 1 scalar 1 0 set Input 2 Src 09220 User value 1 output set Input 1 scalar 1 0 3 In ANALOGUE set Operation Add OPERS An 1 Page set Input 1 Src 06178 Analogue Operator 2 Output value set Input 1 scalar 0 01 set Input 2 Src 06158 Analogue Operator 1 Output value set Input 1 scalar 0 99 These settings of input scalar will ensure that the Output Value reaches the same value as Input 1 Value 23 6 3 2 Calibration 1 Connect a known value of resistor between 50 and 100KQ in place of the probe 2 Adjust User 1 Value so that Analogue Operator 2 Output Value reads the value of the resistor 3 The output from Analogue Operator 2 should ramp to the same value This value can be promoted to a User Screen or used to provide an alarm Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 315 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 24 CHAPTER 24 TRANSDUCER SCALING 24 1 WHAT IS TRANSDUCER SCALING Transducer scaling is a software function block which provides a method of offsetting the calibration of the controller in
83. Select Src Main SP gt SP1 Src SP2 Src Prog SP Src PID Set Src AuxPID Set Src Power FF Src Ena OP Trk Src OP Track Src EnaAuxOPTrkSrc Aux OP Trk Src PV Input Module 1A PVIn Val Module 3A Mod3A Val Override SP Figure 11 15 Wiring for Simple Override Control Loop 11 12 11 1 Implementation 1 In LP1 SETUP Options Page section 11 1 1 set Loop Type Override This action also connects the main SP and override SP to SP1 and SP2 respectively 2 In LP1 SETUP Override Page section set Override Type Minimum FEST Set other parameters as required 3 In LP1 SETUP Wiring Page section 11 2 1 set PV Src 05108 PVIn Val Appendix D This connects the PV input to the main PV of the override loop 4 In LP1 SETUP Wiring Page section 11 2 1 set Aux PV Src 04468 Mod3A Val Appendix D This connects the override PV input of the override loop from Analogue Input 5 In MODULE IO Module 1 A Page section set Wire Src 00013 L1 Ch1 OP 23 3 1 Appendix D This connects channel 1 heat control to the Analogue output module See Appendix D for list of Modbus addresses See Copy and Paste description in Chapter 5 166 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 11 13 LOOP2 SET UP All pages listed in the previous sections are repeated for Loop 2 11 14 LOOP3 SET UP All pages listed in the previous sections are repeated for Loop 3
84. The following may differ on your controller Chamber vacuum Either switchover output or low vacuum outputs Chamber text Selected from a user text string Second display Only shown if a second function is configured e g a temperature control loop Resolution Decimal point may be selected as appropriate Pump Timeout Only shown if configured Vacuum Select None section 13 12 6 Leak Detect Only shown if configured Vacuum Select None section 13 12 6 196 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 13 11 OPERATION On a new instrument the vacuum controller can only be operated in access level 3 To enter access level 3 see Chapter 6 However it is possible to promote commonly used parameters to level 1 If this has been done the principle of operation in level 1 is the same as described below To promote parameters see section 7 2 5 13 11 1 To Access the Vacuum Controller Parameters The vacuum controller parameters are grouped under page headings in exactly the same way as other parameters Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press jas many times as necessary to access the page header menu 2 Press lor Y VACUUM to select 3 Press C lto display the list of sub headers The parameters are grouped by subject under the following sub headings 4 Press lor Y to scroll through the list of sub headings and to select t
85. The last segment in a program is normally defined as an End segment The program either ends repeats or resets in this segment You specify which is the case when you create or modify the program When the program ends the programmer is put into either a continuous dwell state with all outputs staying unchanged or the reset state 76 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 8 4 4 Wait An event can be configured at the end of each segment which when active will cause the program to wait before progressing to the next segment Three wait conditions are provided which may be wired in configuration level to an external source using digital inputs or to internal sources e g a loop alarm Each segment may then select No Wait Wait on Event A Wait on Event B or Wait on Event C In a synchronous programmer the program will not proceed until all profile segments are complete Programmer WaitA Event A or digital Event OP input WaitB WaitC Event B or digital Event OP input Segment 1 extended i Segment 3 extended by by the wait period _ the wait period Segment 1 i Segment 2 Segment 3 Wait Wait on Event B bsS Wait Wait on Event A Wait OFF Figure 8 5 Wait Events Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 77 Engineering Handbook 8 5 POWER FAIL RECOVERY In the event o
86. This connects the PV input to the main PV of the ratio loop 4 In LP1 SETUP Wiring Page section set Lead PV Src 05268 Anln Val Appendix D Ene This connects the lead PV input of the ratio loop from Analogue Input 5 In MODULE IO Module 1 A Page section set Wire Src 00013 L1 Ch1 OP n Appendix D This connects channel f heat control to the Dual Triac output module See Appendix D for list of Modbus addresses See Copy and Paste description in Chapter 5 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 161 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 11 12 OVERIDE CONTROL 11 12 1 Overview Override Control allows a secondary control loop to override the main control output in order to prevent an undesirable operating condition The override function can be configured to operate in either minimum maximum or select mode A typical example can be implemented in a heat treatment furnace with one thermocouple attached to the workpiece and another situated close to the heating elements Control of the furnace during the heating up period is regulated by the override heating element temperature controller which provides a safeguard against overheating Control of the furnace will switch over to the workpiece temperature controller at some point when the temperature is near to its target setpoint The exact point of switchover is determined automatically by the controller and will be dependent on the selected PID terms 11 12 2 Simple Ov
87. When the vertical bar reaches the centre of the screen the text moves up This feature allows you to see previous and following page header names When the last name in the Page Header list appears at the bottom of the display the vertical bar and the highlighted text will continue move downwards Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 3 3 2 To Navigate to a Parameter from a Page Header Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes Henu Level 3 1 From any page press as many times as necessary to select the list of Page Headers ati ini The symbol indicates that the page ALARMS header is followed by a list of sub headers 2 Press or Y to scroll up or down the list of page headers Press to return to Page Header G 3 Press to select the list of Page Sub Headers for the highlighted Page Header If a page does not contain a Sub Header the display goes directly to 5 below 4 Press or Y to scroll up j meur or down the list of page sub i headers Press to return to Sub Header F 5 Press to select the list of Almi Tope Full Scale High Parameters in the highlighted Find ink E sub header 1 Filmi Output OFF Almi Inhibit Ho 6 Press or Y lto scroll up or down the list of parameters Press Dj to return A flashing bar underlines the selected ALARMS IEETI 7 Press to select the parameter para
88. You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press D jas This page is only available if many times as necessary to access l Humidity is Enabled in the the page header menu E INSTRUMENT Options page 2 Press or Y to select HOPED 10 HUMIDITY MODULE 10 Options Configure and adjust zirconia OMIA PROBE parameters EL Wiring Soft wires 3 zirconia parameters 3 Press to display sub headers 4 Press 4 lor Y to scroll to the required sub header 5 Press to select the parameter list for the required sub header The full list of parameters available under these list headers is shown in the following tables 13 5 1 Humidity Options Parameters Table Number These parameters allow you to view or adjust the parameters for HUMIDITY 13 5 1 humidity control Dew Point Wet Dry temperature measurement of dew point 299 9 to 999 9 L1 R O Rel Humidity Relative Humidity 0 0 to 100 0 L1 R O Resolution Display resolution 9 Atm Pressure Atmospheric Pressure 0 0 to 2000 0 1013 mbar PMetric Const Psychrometric Constant 0 0 to 10 0 3 Wet Bulb Offs Wet bulb temperature correction 100 0 to 100 0 L 3 Humidity SBrk Sensor break action for humidity control B L1 R O Yes Dry Bulb Temp Dry Bulb Temperature Rengeunits L1 R O Wet Bulb Temp Wet Bulb Temperature Range unis L1 R O 13 5 2 Wiring Page Table Number These parameters configure humidity block HUMIDITY 13 5 2 wiri
89. a EEEN NN OEN NR 14 OPERATION rir iieri ie aie es ai E EE EAE EEEN RE 36 FUNCTION BLOCKS oriei a aor AA ATE TAr TEN 49 SOET WIRING aere eea E e EEEE EO E TOE 50 ACCESS LEVELS auaa a A AOO 56 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION cesses eee tenen ntn ttn sen sensn tnn snns 58 PROGRAMMER CONFIGURATION s ssssssssssssssssssessessssssssssssessesseseeneesees 71 DIGITAL PROGRAMMER ssccssssssssssssssssssssssssscsscsssssssssssssssssscssesssessoeees 115 ALARM OPERATION sicciccccccciievecceicetccetssetoctescetesstssetentestesseresetsseVostesceissetsse esey 119 LOOP SETUP iiron aa O OTE 134 udo aea ATEREA OEE TES 168 CONTROLLER APPLICATIONS scssssssssssssssessssssssssssessssssesssssesseeseenenseess 179 INPUT OPERATORS 5 222 cote cece euer Eae eaS EEANN DOKEN EEA ESKERA EARNE REER 206 TIMER CLOCK TOTALISER OPERATION eerte eene 215 ADVANCED FUNCTIONS eer ettet eat eben rere eoo noa toe reocE 225 USER PAGES 5 eerte ave ect nit iere esie ieu e edere 234 ANALOGUE AND MULTIPLE OPERATORS esent 247 LOGIC OPERATORS oiiire tiani en raae epo eere erae nte eo eese ANRE ORR 253 DIGITAL COMMUNICATION SG eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennenntntnn aoe tn senten 256 2704 MASTER COMMUNICATIONS eese eene eet nenntnntnnnne 263 STANDARD I nee rE E E E cusensasasaensansusevsenscess 273 MODULE IO m 284 TRANSDUCER SCALING eese eene o so
90. a Host Name Address within the iTools scan 1 Ensure iTools is NOT running before taking the following steps Within Windows click Start the Settings then Control Panel In control panel select iTools Within the iTools configuration settings select the TCP IP tab Click the Add button to add a new connection Enter a name for this TCP IP connection QE sv Sue pe 0A IND Click the Add button to add the host name or IP address details from your network administrator in the Host Name Address section eo Click OK to confirm the new Host Name IP Address you have entered 9 Click OK to confirm the new TCP IP port you have entered 10 Click OK again and you should now see the TCT IP port you have configured within the TCP IP tab of the iTools control panel settings 11 iTools is now ready to communicate with an instrument at the Host Name lp Address you have configured Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 261 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 20 5 ADDENDUM 2704 CONTROLLER SPECIALS NUMBER EU0678 APPLIES TO 2704 CONTROLLER FITTED WITH ETHERNET COMMUNICATIONS A parameter has been added to 2704 controllers fitted with Ethernet Communications The parameter is Unit Ident and appears in the Ethernet Parameters List in the table below Unit Ident The Modbus TCP Specification includes the normal Modbus address as part of the packaged Modbus message where it is called the Unit Identifier If
91. according to 2 C zZ TFC T uuu 1 100 T uia 25 0 Diagrammatically this is represented as TCF25 Tiquia 5 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 2 C 1 0 25 C 100 C 200 C e TCF Calibration As the temperature coefficient may vary according to chemical constituent of the fluid and the temperature itself the most reliable way of determining TCF is by calibrating TCF at a range of temperatures tabulating it and deriving the actual TCF2s Tuiquia by interpolating the tabulated values The 2704 controller can perform this calibration automatically 344 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 28 3 3 Probe Factor K The Probe Factor or K indicates a relationship between the conductance measured with the probe and the specific conductance of the fluid Fluid conductance probes are based on a model probe that has two electrodes exactly 1cm in area and spaced exactly 1cm apart In practice these dimensions vary from probe to probe so the probe factor converts the conductance read by the probe to the value that would be read if the model probe were used The K factor is measured in units of 1 cm therefore Specific Conductance in uS cm K in 1 cm Measured Conductance in uS For most boiler probes K is in range 0 1 to 1 and the value is affected by installation 28 3 4 Probe Design and TDS Module Operation TDS probes are usually characterised according to the number o
92. allows you to configure the IO Expander IO EXPANDER 25 2 1 Expander Type Expander type None None Conf 10 in 10 out 20 in 20 out OP 1 Src Output 1 source Modbus address Conf Source of the signal to operate relay 1 in the IO Expander The above parameter is repeated for all 20 outputs available in the IO Expander al nc NNNM Bad In Stat 1 10 Status of the first 10 digital inputs Off L1 R O OOOOOOOOOOto SEER E On In Stat 11 20 Status of the second 10 digital inputs OOOOOOOOOO to Sees OP Stat 21 30 Status of the first 10 digital outputs Press C to select outputs in turn The flashing underlined output can be changed using buttons uunmnunuuunuto THENENEEEEEN OP Inv 1 10 To change the sense of the first 10 outputs O direct L3 E Inverted Out Stat 31 40 Status of the second 10 digital outputs Press C to select outputs in turn The flashing underlined output can be changed using buttons OO00000000 to TENHEEEEENEEN OP Inv 31 40 To change the sense of the second 10 outputs O direct E Inverted Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 327 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 26 CHAPTER 26 DIAGNOSTICS 26 1 WHAT IS DIAGNOSTICS Diagnostics are displayed in Access Level 3 and Configuration level and provide information on the internal state of the controller The parameters are intended for use in advanced fault finding situations Up to eight error messages can be listed and each er
93. are in common use on a particular installation The first parameter in the list Show Summary must be enabled so that the summary list is shown in operating levels To configure Summary pages Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes To Show the Summary Page in Operating Levels 1 From the INSTRUMENT page c Menu Config XSBTE Views are typical and may vary depending upon options in any particular controller header press to display the list of sub headers 2 P A The level at which the Summary Es ad Ie Page is shown is selected by the summary VACUUM Page Promote section 5 2 5 y mes If Yes is selected the Summary 3 Press to show the list of INSTRUMENT Summaru SET Page which consists of up to 10 parameters parameters will be shown in the Main Menu following INSTRUMENT 4 Press C to select Show or OEM SECURITY if ordered see Summary Navigation Diagram section 1 12 If No is selected the Summary 5 Press or Y to Yes page will not be shown e n 1 1 Press to select Page Name Up to 100 user defined text Names are available 2 Press or Y to selectthe k The previous section explains how required name from the User Text User Text is set up library E id E e Part No HA026933 Issue7 0 Nov 12 65 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes To Select the F
94. can be Synchronous or Asynchronous 9 Press or to change the value or state of the parameter 10 Continue to select and change instrument options as described The following table gives the full above list of parameters available under INSTRUMENT list header 7 2 1 INSTRUMENT Options Page U Table Number These parameters allow you to enable or disable instrument INSTRUMENT 7 2 1 options This table is only available in Configuration Level Options Page Num of Loops To configure the number of loops Chapter 11 Enabled Asynchronous ed Digital Prog To enable or disable the digital Chapter 9 Disab programmer Enabled Vacuum To enable or disable the vacuum Chapter 13 Disabled control block Enabled Zirconia To enable or disable the zirconia Chapter 13 Disabled block Enabled Humidity To enable or disable the humidity Chapter 13 Disabled block Enabled Input Opers To enable or disable the Input Chapter 14 Disabled Operators Enabled Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 59 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller Table Number These parameters allow you to enable or disable instrument INSTRUMENT 7 2 1 options This table is only available in Configuration Level Options Page Timer Blocks To enable or disable the Timer Blocks Chapter 15 Disabled Enabled Pattern Gen To enable or disable the pattern Chapter 16 Disabled generator Enabled Analogue Switch To enable or disable the analogue Chapter 16 Disabled s
95. chapter 12 4 1 Setting the cutback values The above procedure sets up the parameters for optimum steady state control If unacceptable levels of overshoot or undershoot occur during start up or for large step changes in PV then manually set the cutback parameters Proceed as follows 1 Set the low and high cutback values to three proportional bandwidths that is to say Lcb Hcb 3 x P 2 Note the level of overshoot or undershoot that occurs for large PV changes see the diagrams below In example a increase Low Cutback by the overshoot value In example b reduce Low Cutback by the undershoot value Example a Example b PV E Sas Overshoot Overshoot FINE Setpoint Where the PV approaches setpoint from above you can set High Cutback in a similar manner 172 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 12 4 2 Integral action and manual reset In a full three term controller that is a PID controller the integral term automatically removes steady state errors from the setpoint If the controller is set up to work in two term mode that is PD mode the integral term will be set to OFF Under these conditions the measured value may not settle precisely at setpoint The parameter Manual Reset in the Loop Setup PID page is used to compensate for no integral term by providing a small output bleed and must be set manually in order
96. condition since the instrument requires several samples This delay increases if the set value and actual value are close together 4 A hysteresis value of say 1 unit per second will prevent the alarm from chattering if the rate of change varies by this amount 122 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 10 3 BLOCKING ALARMS A Blocking Alarm only occurs after it has been through a start up phase It is typically used to prevent alarms from being indicated until the process has settled to its normal working conditions 10 3 1 Full Scale Low With Blocking The alarm only occurs after the start up phase when low alarm has first entered a safe state The next time a low alarm occurs will cause the alarm to become active 7 Alarm ON PV p a Alarm OFF Alarm setpoint gt v Process Variable 10 3 2 Full Scale High Alarm With Blocking The alarm only occurs after the start up phase when high alarm has first entered a safe state The next time a high alarm occurs will cause the alarm to become active i e If the controller is powered up with PV gt Hi Alarm SP no alarm Alarm ON is indicated The PV PV eee 9 must reduce below Alarm OFF the High Alarm SP and increase again to Hi Alarm SP The Alarm Setpoint ep Nr a f alarm condition will Hysteresis Ne then be indicated T 3 If the controller is Ts powered up with PV Process Varia
97. contribute them with links connected Using the same general procedure as described in the previous sections proceed as follows e Enter Configuration level and select the particular module slot where the TDS module is fitted It is a single channel so the slot number will be followed by the letter A e Connect 220 40 296 resistor as shown above e Select the Cal State parameter initially set to Idle e Press or Y button to select High 220hm Confirm this by selecting Go The controller will automatically calibrate as described in previous sections e Assuming the reading falls within the expected range the Cal State parameter will show Pass Use or Y button to Accept e Next open circuit the probe connections and set the Cal State parameter to Low O C and repeat the above procedure e Finally set the Cal State parameter to Save to User to save the new calibration values Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 339 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 27 5 6 4 Wire RTD Module Calibration To achieve the specified accuracy 4 Wire RTD Modules must be calibrated using 4 wire resistance reference sources with a recommended 10ppm accuracy If absolute accuracy is required and the appropriate 4 wire resistance source is not available the user is advised to return the controller to Eurotherm for calibration Each module is calibrated at two points
98. controller is intended for industrial temperature and process control applications when it will meet the requirements of the European Directives on Safety and EMC Use in other applications or failure to observe the installation instructions of this handbook may impair the safety or EMC protection provided by the controller It is the responsibility of the installer to ensure the safety and EMC of any particular installation 30 1 SAFETY This controller complies with the European Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC by the application of the safety standard EN 61010 30 1 1 Electromagnetic compatibility This controller conforms with the essential protection requirements of the EMC Directive 2004 108 EC by the application of a Technical Construction File This instrument satisfies the general requirements for heavy light industrial and residential commercial environments as described by EN 61326 For more information on product compliance refer to the Technical Construction File 30 2 GENERAL The information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice While every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of the information your supplier shall not be held liable for errors contained herein Unpacking and storage The packaging should contain an instrument mounted in its sleeve two mounting brackets for panel installation and an Installation amp Operating guide Certain ranges are supplied with an input adapter If on rec
99. each program can run independently INSTRUMENT Options SET 9 Press to edit Prog Mode 10 Press A or Y to Asynchronous 98 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 8 24 EXAMPLE TO CONFIGURE ASYNCHRONOUS PROGRAMMER TYPE The programmer is supplied as a Time to Target programmer This section describes how to configure a Ramp Rate type Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes Programmer Groups is a new list added for the asynchronous programmer and configures Programmer Type Number of programs Hot Start Power fail recovery type Profile Lock for all PSPs Henu Config 1 From any display press lto access the page header menu 2 Press or Y to select PROGRAM GROUPS 3 Press C to display sub headers PROGRAM GROUP TY Options 1 4 Press or Y to select Options if necessary C i 5 Press to display parameters If programs have already been set up using the previous Program Type all segment data will be c a TO A 6 Press again to edit Program deleted and will need to be re Type entered in Operation level The Program Type requires a few 7 Press or Y to select Ramp seconds to re configure during Rate which time INITIALISING is displayed The Program Type is then Confirm Program Tupe confirmed 8 Confirm or reject as instructed If
100. ee t er t cate et Ted 68 To Re Name User Alarm 1 and Provide a Message sssssssssssseseeeeeenetetetetteneentetetnteneteente nenne tenentes 68 To Re Name Module 1 to be called Heat Output ssssssssssssssseeeeeeneeeteteetetetentet netter tentent ente nen 68 To Rename a Digital Input and show in the Summary Page nete 69 To Assign CUSTOM HIS een petia te edet De RR PER E E EUER ERE ED ERO EHE EE 70 To Customise the Power Up Display aderenti tetris tinte ie etai ire teste eani irte ibi nh eh res ee s dota stare 70 CHAPTER 8 PROGRAMMER CONFIGURATIONN eene eene entente nennen sinat tns sinas tns senses 71 WHATIS SETPOINT PROGRAMMING Ars i ctore tot cee at ates ht annee ertet teet tette dee cete tete in 72 Synchironous ProgfFarmimer cett RR EYE SEAE EAEE OSEAS EEEE EEEN S 72 Asynchronous Progr aE iesire seese a rt Y RR EPIRI EIE YN XXX TR TEX ERE REDE DAR CEN HB TESTE RES 73 SETPOINT PROGRAMMER DEFINITIONS sese rennen eren eren nre teret enne nnne ens 74 Hc RREN 74 mejore E E E E A E 74 RES Ct E EA A EEE EE E E 74 SEV Oaer a E A E EAO E TAE TA E O T E R N 74 gli EE 74 PROGRAMMER TYPES n n e REL PUER DL ri d ra RE IRE RE Dep ex a Rena ace keep ene ere ETa 75 Time To Target Programmer nente teat te Satan e eee dette ti 75 Ramp Rate Progtratmrriet terere tee peer eee eei eina dor bebe i n ge b IEEE LO I ed EI CU ET GEN 75
101. end segment Dwell Reset Prog Reset DO Digital event outputs in Reset a These are shown in this format if up to 16 Named Dos No m Of On Seg Edit 1 to 16 If programmer event outputs have The name of the event is been configured then as an alternative shown with its state to the previous presentation the event On or can be given a name Off PROGRAM EDIT Options Named Dos Yes Reset UsrVal1 Reset value for User Value 1 Reset UsrVal2 Reset value for User Value 2 Only shown if configured 92 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook Table Number These parameters are associated with Profiled Setpoint number 1 PROGRAM RUN 8 19 1b PSP1 Page Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default PSP1 Type Running segment type for profiled Not Used L1 R O setpoint 1 Step Dwell Ramp shown in PSP1 Working setpoint for profiled setpoint 1 Display range Note 1 Ramp Rate programmer only L1 Alterable in Hold EE L1 Alterable PSP1 Target Running segment target for profiled Display range Note 1 setpoint 1 PSP1 Dwell Tm Time remaining in running segment for Display range profiled setpoint 1 PSP7 Rate Running segment rate for profiled ay range Note 1 setpoint 1 PSP1 HBk Appl Holdback applied for profiled setpoint 1 Note 1 Range limited by user defined upper and lower limits in H
102. fitted in slot 1 Calibrate the Potentiometer Minimum Position Ident 1A Pot Input Eng Val Lo 0 Eng Val Hi 100 Filter Time Module 1A Val Module Status Cal State LOOP Valve Position Ident 1A Eng Val Lo Eng Val Hi Filter Time Module 1A Val Module Status Cal State Eng Val Lo and Eng Val Hi will normally be set to 0 and 100 respectively to represent a fully closed to fully open position of the valve These parameters do not limit the travel of the valve but provide an indication of the pot position This is a typical Overview page To calibrate follow the instructions on the display When the controller is calibrating the message Doing Fine Cal appears When the controller has finished the message Passed appears Press or Y to Accept After approx 3 seconds the display will revert to Idle completing the procedure You can also Abort at this stage 311 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller Calibrate the Potentiometer Maximum Position Repeat the above steps to adjust the valve fully open and select the parameter Pot Hi Pos The Potentiometer Input Module can be used simply so that the resistance value represents an engineering value For example 35 to 780 mm or 0 1000Q The parameters Eng Val Lo and Eng Val Lo are then set to these values The procedure to calibrate for these readings is the same as above but
103. function block may be represented as a box which takes in data at one side as Inputs manipulates the data internally using parameter Settings and outputs data at the other side to interface with analogue or digital IO and other function blocks Figure 4 1 shows a representation of a PID function block as used in the 2704 controller Loop Number PV Src Rem SP Src Man Mode Src Settings Inputs Setpoint 1 Outputs Setpoint 2 Rate Limit Prop Band Ti Figure 4 1 A Simple PID Function Block 4 1 1 Inputs Inputs are provided to the function block from field sensors or from other function blocks within the controller Each field input is served by an analogue or digital input block which processes the signal depending upon the type of input and makes it available to the function block in a useable form Each input wire see Chapter 5 is labelled as Src since it defines the source of the signal by holding its Modbus address 4 1 2 Outputs In a similar way the function block makes available signals to other blocks plant actuators and other devices Each output interfaces with analogue or digital output drivers which provide signals to the plant such as relay 4 20mA 0 10V outputs etc 4 1 3 Settings The purpose of a particular function block is defined by its internal parameters Some of these parameters are available to the user so that they can be adjusted to suit the characterist
104. headers A 4 Press or Y to scroll to Display 5 Press 2 lto enter the INSTRUMENT Display parameter list 6 Press or Y to scroll to Home Page 7 Press l to underline the parameter 8 Press 4 or Y to select Vacuum Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 201 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 13 13 2 To Customise the Vacuum Summary Page The vacuum summary page can be customised using the parameters listed in section 13 12 8 Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 Select the VACUUM Display page RUH d AM EDIT ALARMS AUT 2 Press to enter the parameter list If Yes is selected the operator view 3 Press to select Show Sec Val nate will show the second display as shown in Figure 13 11 4 Press LA or Y to choose Yes or No 5 Press Lehto display Sec Val Src The value which will be displayed on the vacuum summary display is l Y sourced from the PV Input 6 Press or to choose the In the examples given in this supplement this is chamber temperature source of the second value a v A i 7 RE or to scroll to Units which can be selected are Units mmHg psi bar mbar 8 Press or Y Ito select the units which will be displayed in the Status bar Other parameters which can be customised in the summary display include A Name for the Second Display chosen from
105. heating output time proportions electric heaters usually via a solid state relay The cooling output operates a refrigerant valve which introduces cooling into the chamber The controller automatically calculates when heating or cooling is required 13 4 4 Humidity Control Of An Environmental Chamber Humidity in a chamber is controlled by adding or removing water vapour Like the temperature control loop two control outputs are required i e Humidify and Dehumidify To humidify the chamber water vapour may be added by a boiler an evaporating pan or by direct injection of atomised water If a boiler is being used adding steam increases the humidity level The humidify output from the controller regulates the amount of steam from the boiler that is allowed into the chamber An evaporating pan is a pan of water warmed by a heater The humidify output from the controller humidity regulates the temperature of the water An atomisation system uses compressed air to spray water vapour directly into the chamber The humidify output of the controller turns on or off a solenoid valve Dehumidification may be accomplished by using the same compressor used for cooling the chamber The dehumidify output from the controller may control a separate control valve connected to a set of heat exchanger coils 188 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 13 5 TO VIEW AND ADJUST HUMIDITY PARAMETERS Do This This Is The Display
106. input scaling where an electrical input of 4 20mA requires the display to read 2 5 to 200 0 units Display Reading value eg 200 0 Engineering value eg 2 5 Electrical Input Electrical Lo Electrical Hi eg 4 mA eg 20 mA Figure 23 8 Input Scaling Modules 306 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 23 5 2 To Scale The PV Input 10 11 12 13 14 Part No HA026933 Do This From any display press jas many times as necessary to access the page header menu Press A 10 Press j to show Sub headers Press 4 lor Y to choose the slot in which the PV Input module is fitted Press to show the list of parameters Press lor Y ito scroll to Electrical Lo Press J to edit Electrical Lo Press value or Y to change the Press j to select the Electrical Hi A Press or Y l to change the value Press to select the Eng Val Lo A Press or Y to change the value Press l to select the Eng Val Hi A Press or Y J to change the value or Y to select Module Issue 7 0 Nov 12 This Is The Display You Should See enu Level 3I MODULE IO Module 3 RI mM MODULE 10 Module 3 A Filter Time Electri lj Engineering Handbook Additional Notes Set this value to the lowest level of the input eg 4mA Set this value to the highest level of the input eg 20mA
107. is switched on Programmer Monitor Block PSP1 Hback On Input Src Logic 1 OR AA Relay Invert LgOp1 OP Reset Src input 1 gt nput Src Alarm Output Wire Src X Reset Src Invert input 2 Figure 14 8 Example Wiring Holdback Duration Timer 14 7 3 1 Implementation 1 In LOGIC OPERATORS Logic 1 Page set Operation OR section 19 2 1 set Input 1 Src 05869 Prg DO1 set Input 2 Src 05869 Prg DO1 set Invert Invert Both This inverts the sense of Program DO1 2 In INPUT OPERS Monitor 1 Page Set Enable Enabled section 14 5 1 Set Input Src 05804 This connects PSP1 Holdback Status Set Reset Src 07176 LgOp1 OP This connects Logic 1 Output to the Monitor Reset Set Trigger 1 0 Set Day Alarm 0 Set Time Alarm 0 30 00 0 3 In STANDARD IO AA Relay Page Set Channel Type On Off section 22 5 1 Set Wire Src 03500 This assigns AA Relay to Monitor OP 214 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 15 CHAPTER 15 TIMER CLOCK TOTALISER OPERATION 15 1 WHAT ARE TIMER BLOCKS Timer Blocks allow the controller to use time date information as part of the control process They can be triggered by an event and used to initiate an action For example a programmer can be set to RUN at a particular day and time or an action delayed as a result of a digital input signal The Timer Blocks
108. is turned off From Cal State Idle 13 Press or Y to choose Save Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 3 Sec Cal State gt Save ie Cal State Idle The 10 and 90 calibration values are stored and used by the controller To return to factory calibration press LA l to Restore Factory When Idle appears choose Save 337 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 27 5 2 PV Input Module PV Input modules can be fitted in positions 3 and 6 These modules can provide inputs for thermocouple 3 wire RTD mV Volts or mA The wiring connections for these inputs are shown below The calibration procedure is identical to that described in Section 27 3 but the Cal State parameter will be found under the page header MODULE IO Module 3 A Page or Module 6 A Page Copper cable for mV calibration Jj CA A L 2704 GA C Controller c Module 3 or 6 r4 T C compensating cable for CJC calibration mV Source For volts calibration use terminals A and D T IL r4 For best results OmV should be calibrated by disconnecting one of the copper wires from the mV source and short circuiting it to the other wire This is particularly important to obtain best accuracy for RTD calibration Figure 27 5 Volt mV and Thermocouple Connections to Modules 3 amp 6 Decade Box Matched impedance copper leads EAS P 2704 C Controller m Module 3 or 6 Cle
109. itis locked 7 PRG ADV EDIT POOL INIT MR Paste Program Segment or Program Pool is being initialised e g after a change is made to program mode i e ramp rate to time to target or vice versa PRG ADV EDIT PROGFULL MR Program already has the maximum number of allowed segments PRG ADV EDIT RANGE ERROR MR Segment number is not valid for the program i e beyond the end of the program Note 2 If Profibus is selected from the previous page it will be necessary either to power cycle the controller or to switch to operation level before this parameter is displayed Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 259 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 20 4 ETHERNET TECHNICAL NOTE 20 4 1 MAC address display Each Ethernet module contains a unique MAC address normally presented as a 12 digit hexadecimal number in the format aa bb cc dd ee ff In the 2704 instrument MAC addresses are shown as 3 separate values in the COMMS page each representing 2 pairs of MAC address digits The first MAC1 shows the first two pairs of digits example AA BB MAC2 shows to the third and fourth pair of MAC digits and MAC3 shows the fifth and sixth pairs of MAC digits Under iTools these will appear as an integer value e g 3A E7 will display as 15079 The MAC address can be found by powering up the instrument and navigating to the COMMS page 20 4 2 DHCP Settings You need to consult with your network administrator to determine if the IP Addresses for th
110. master 20 4 5 Dynamic IP Addressing Within the Comms page of the instrument set the DHCP enable parameter to Dynamic Once connected to the network and powered the instrument will acquire its IP address SubNet Mask and Default gateway from the DHCP Server and display this information within a few seconds 20 4 6 Fixed IP Addressing Within the Comms page of the instrument ensure the DHCP enable parameter is set to Fixed then set the IP address and SubNet Mask as required and defined by your network administrator 20 4 7 Additional notes 1 The Comms page also includes configuration settings for Default Gateway these parameters will be set automatically when Dynamic IP Addressing is used When fixed IP addressing is used these settings are only required if the instrument needs to communicate wider than the local area network i e over the internet 2 The Comms page also includes configuration settings for Preferred Master Setting this IP address to the IP Address of a particular PC will guarantee that one of the 4 available Ethernet sockets will always be reserved for that PC reducing the number of available sockets for anonymous connections to 3 260 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 20 4 8 iTools Setup iTools configuration package version V5 64 or later may be used to configure Ethernet communications The following instructions configure Ethernet To include
111. measured at subsequent system calibrations For this reason set up parameter was introduced see section 28 4 4 3 28 4 2 Probe Deterioration Scaling The performance of TDS probes particularly the 2 electrode may deteriorate during use due for example to scaling Probe deterioration scaling is determined and compensated for by performing a periodic live calibration specifically designed for this task called Probe Cal This calibration mechanism together with the current readings generates an Apparent K or Current probe factor that includes any deterioration of the probe This value can then be compared to the initial probe factor to determine the amount of deterioration that has taken place Limits can be set on Apparent K using Max Apparent K parameter and warnings given when exceeded indicating that the probe may require a service The warning is given by the flag called Clean Probe Rq This means of detecting probe scaling is only useful for 2 electrode type probes Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 347 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 28 4 3 TDS Function Block Parameters The TDS Function block has input and output parameters as well as key internal variables as shown in the table shown below Table This list allows you to set up the parameters for boiler BOILER TDS Number control 28 4 3 Parameter Parameter Description Default Access Level Name TDS Status Indicates the overall status of the TDS
112. mj to cancel This button becomes a paste button as instructed in configuration mode The parameter with Modbus address 05108 has now been pasted to PV Src If the modbus address is known or the parameter name is one that is listed in Appendix D it can be entered directly at stage 13 above as follows 1 Repeat stages 8 to 13 2 Atstage 13 press to edit PV Src A flashing cursor appears under the modbus address 3 Ifthe modbus address is known enter it here by pressing the A or LY button 4 If the modbus address is not known press C The display transfers to the name of the parameter A 5 Press or Y to scroll through a list of parameter names See Appendix D for the list of these parameters Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 53 Engineering Handbook 5 1 2 2 To connect the Loop to the Output Module The example is Loop 1 Channel 1 output to Module 1A input 7 Do This From any display press Cas many times as necessary to access the page header menu v Press or to select LP7 SETUP Press 7 to display the list of sub headers Press or Y lto select Output en g Press to display the parameter list Press or Y to select CH1 OP to copy this Press parameter This button becomes a copy button in configuration mode 10 11 12 13 54 Press as many times as necessary to access the page header menu Pres
113. not be at 25 C particularly boiler fluid the conductance reading will have to be temperature compensated to hold relationship to TDS In the 2704 controller this is usually automatically done by sensing liquid temperature and applying an appropriate correction factor to each reading of conductance In cases where the temperature sensing is not available the user must estimate this temperature derived from boiler pressure for example and enter it manually 28 3 2 Temperature Correction Factor TCF25 Thiquia If the actual temperature of the fluid under examination is different to that of the reference temperature of 25 C the readings need to be temperature compensated to derive a valid TDS estimate Almost always hotter fluid will conduct better than the same fluid at a cooler temperature Therefore it is usual to measure the temperature of the fluid and divide the conductance reading by a number that represents the fractional change of the conductance This number is called Temperature Correction Factor and conveniently noted as TCFzs Tuqua where Tuqua is the temperature of the liquid and the subscript 25 signifies the reference temperature for which the reading is to be adjusted Linear Temperature Compensation Temp Coef Most common way of deriving TCF is by applying linear temperature compensation which is determined by a single parameter called Temperature Coefficient Temp Coef typically 296 C and calculated
114. of units when the controller is in standby mode In this state all interfaces to the plant are switched to a rest condition For example all control outputs 0 When this symbol is on the controller is no longer controlling the process This symbol will be on when e The controller is in configuration mode e Standby mode has been selected through the user interface or via an external digital input e During the first few seconds after start up Table 3 1 Status Messages 38 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 3 2 PARAMETERS AND HOW TO ACCESS THEM Parameters are settings within the controller which determine how the controller will operate They are _ a accessed using the land 2 buttons and can be changed to suit the process using the and buttons Selected parameters may be protected under different security access levels Examples of parameters are Values such as setpoints alarm trip levels high and low limits etc or States such as auto manual on off etc These are often referred to as enumerated values 3 2 1 Pages The parameters are organised into different pages A page shows information such as page headers parameter names and parameter values Parameters are grouped in accordance with the function they perform Each group is given a Page Header which is a generic description of the parameter group Examples are The Alarm Page
115. of course it is not necessary to revert to the Overview display since the potentiometer can be adjusted manually When the pot position parameter is highlighted the units are displayed in the upper right of the display banner The units and resolution will have been set in configuration level An Out of Range signal will be displayed if the pot measurements lay outside the calibrated range 312 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 23 6 MODULE IO WIRING EXAMPLES 23 6 1 To Configure Module 1 Channel A to Run a Program Mod 1A Programmer Mod1A Val 9 Run Src Figure 23 11 External Run Hold Switch This example assumes a Triple Logic module fitted in module slot 1 No configuration of the Module 1A function block is required but the output of the block must be wired to the Run Source in the Programmer block 23 6 1 1 Implementation 1 In PROGRAM EDIT Wiring Page set Run Src 04148 Mod1A Val section 8 12 2 This connects the output of module 1A to the Run Source wire in the Programmer block 23 6 2 To Operate a Relay from a Digital Input This example assumes that a Relay Module is fitted in module slot 2 and it is required to operate when Digital Input 1 is true DIO1 Mod 2A DIO1 Val gt Wire Src Figure 23 12 To Operate a Relay from a Digital Input 23 6 2 1 Implementation 1 In STANDARD lIO Dig IO
116. of the value or not failure could be due to the source being outside of the limits of the destination or a type incompatibility etc The 2700 controller includes 32 of these wires The parameters for the point to point wiring are available for viewing editing only when the unit is in configuration level access mode in all other access levels the parameters are only viewable and not editable An example of where patch wiring is useful is to be able to wire to a parameter which cannot otherwise be wired a User Value to an output for example for wire 1 Wire 1 Src09225 Uval2 val Wire 1 Dest 00004 L1 Wkg Op Wire 1 Status Ok 19 3 1 Patch Wiring Parameters Table Number This page allows you to wire from any parameter to another PATCH WIRING Wire 1 19 3 1 Page Wire 1 Status Wire 1 Status No Wire No Wire Conf Failed OK The above parameters are repeated for Wire 2 to Wire 32 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 255 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 20 CHAPTER 20 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS 20 1 WHAT IS DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS Digital Communications or comms for short allows the controller to communicate with a PC or a networked computer system A choice of comms protocol is available and can be selected in configuration level For standard serial comms the protocols are MODBUS or JBUS or ElBisynch and modules can be fitted in both the H or J slots For Profibus Devicenet and Ethernet modules can be fitted in
117. only e To any segment use the PROGRAM EDIT page These changes are always permanent and will apply to subsequent runs 3 Other programs can be created or edited when another program is running 4 A program can be edited in Configuration Level or Operating Level 8 14 EXAMPLE TO ACCESS THE PROGRAM EDIT PAGES Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes ES 1 From any display press to access the page header menu 2 Press or lto select PROGRAM EDIT 3 Press C to show sub headers This page allows the overall programmer parameters to be defined 4 Press or if necessary to select Program The value of a parameter prefixed by can be changed using Aor vj 5 Press to show parameters 6 Press again to edit the highlighted parameter The full list of parameters is shown in the following table Y Table Number These parameters affect the overall program PROGRAM EDIT 8 14 1 Program Page Parameter Name Parameter Description Default Access Level Program Number Selects the program number to be edited 1 to 20 or 1 L1 If Profile Lock z Unlocked only those 1 to 60 programs which were created prior to setting the Profile Lock parameter can be selected 8 14 1 PROGRAM EDIT Program Page Parameters Edit Function Allows a program to be copied None None L1 The example in section 8 28 describes how Copy Program this fea
118. or SSR Drive in any combination External power supply 10 to 35 Vdc Outputs are Each output is current limited to 40mA Ni open collector Cf vc Relay id C9 D1 D2 Rela y S os Unit IOR eo L C9 Figure 2 11 Wiring Connections for Digital I O Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 23 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 2 6 OPTIONAL PLUG IN MODULE CONNECTIONS 2 6 1 Digital Communications Connections Digital Communications modules can be fitted in two positions in the 2704 controller The connections being available on HA to HF and JA to JF depending on the position in which the module is fitted The two positions could be used for example to communicate with a configuration package such as iTools on one position and to a PC running a supervisory package on the second position The connections shown in the following diagrams show EIA232 2 wire EIA 485 4 wire EIA 422 and master slave communications to a second controller The diagrams show connections for bench top test wiring For a full description of the installation of a communications link including line resistors see Communications Handbook Part No HA026230 and EMC Installation Guide part no HA025464 EIA 232 C HA C9 HB Rx Tx Com C9 PE es HD Common GO HE Rx CO HF Tx Figure 2 12 EIA232 Communications Connecti
119. or metal making accidental contact with live wires 2 3 2 Rear Terminal Layout The rear terminal layout is shown in Figure 2 4 which identifies terminal designations and their functions Refer to the individual diagrams to wire the controller to your requirements The two outer terminal strips have fixed hardware for all versions of the instrument as follows e AProcess Variable input which can be configured for e Thermocouple RTD Pyrometer Voltage e g 0 10Vdc or Milliamp e g 4 20mA plus vacuum log10 e Seven Digital I O configurable as input or output e Inputs are logic 1 to 35Vdc or contact closure and can be configured for Manual Remote Run Hold Reset etc e Outputs are open collector requiring an external power supply and can be configured as event status time proportioning or valve position outputs e One digital input e Anl O expander which allows additional digital I O via an external unit or an extra digital input e Achangeover relay which can be configured as an alarm or event output It cannot be configured as a time proportioning output e Ananalogue input for volts e g 0 10Vdc or Milliamp e g 4 20mA signals to a second PID loop setpoint etc This input can be characterised to match a particular curve from a transmitter It cannot accept thermocouple inputs directly e Power supply to the unit The supply may be 85 264Vac 50 or 60 Hz The three central terminal strips are for optional plug
120. output EIA 232 Comms 16 analogue and 32 digital operations General Notes 1 Loop 1 PV defaults to main input on microboard Loop 2 and 3 PV inputs must be fitted in I O slots 3 or 6 or be assigned to the analogue input 2 Thisalarm configuration refers to loop alarms only One selection per loop is allowed Additional alarms are available for the user to configure Thermocouple and RTD inputs assume sensor min and max values with no decimal point Linear inputs are ranged 0 100 no decimal point Temperature inputs will be C unless ordered by USA where F will be supplied Remote setpoints assume loop min amp max ranges VP1 VP2 VP3 or VP4 not available with override function For cascade and override inputs only o ONAA PR Ww HR module should be used in feedback mode 360 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 29 2 QUICK START CODE An instrument delivered to the quick start code is partly configured For simple applications the quick start code may be sufficient to allow the instrument to be used without further configuration 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 3 Loop function 7 Analogue Input 8 12 Slot function First Digit XXX None Loop number XXXX None pm PV Loop 2 XXX Unconfigured Sn Standard PID PS PV Loop 3 i Loop No 1 einer Cascade Sim SP Loop 1 2 Loop No2 RA Ratio S2N SP Loop 2 Qm Loop N
121. page allows you to monitor the number of times that a particular COMMS 20 3 comms module has received a message Diagnostic Page H Rx Messages Valid H comms messages L3 R O received J Rx Messages Valid J comms messages L3 R O received Network Status Network status Running L3 R O Only shown if the Profibus or Initialising Devicenet option is configured in Ready the H Module Offline Bad GSD Profibus only Note 1 If an invalid entry is made when setting up programs through the front panel a pop up error message appears If the program is set up over digital communications the error messages are displayed as a Program Error as follows Value Mnemonic Reference Meaning 0 PRG ADV EDIT NOERROR MR No Error 1 PRG ADV EDIT SEGOVER MR Not enough segments to perform the PASTE This error appears if an attempt is made to copy and paste a program which has more segments than the controller has left 2 PRG ADV EDIT PWRFAIL MR The PASTE operation was interrupted by a power fail prior to completion 3 PRG ADV EDIT NOCOPYPROG MR Paste Program The COPY program has not been selected 4 PRG ADV EDIT NOPASTEPROG MR Paste Program Paste Program is the same as COPY program 5 PRG ADV EDIT PROG RUNNING MR Paste Program Program to be edited is currently running 6 PRG ADV EDIT PROFILE LOCKED MR Paste Program Edits are not allowed to the program
122. page is only available if Timer Blocks has been enabled in configuration level The Timer Blocks fitted in the 2704 controller are Four timer blocks Timer blocks can have four modes of operation which are explained in Section 15 2 The timer type is set in Configuration level The timer is activated by an event The event is also defined in Configuration mode or it may be triggered by a parameter in the list Timing continues for a set time period The output can be wired in configuration mode to operate a further event This is a real time clock which can be used to operate other time based functions Two alarm clock Alarms can be switched on or off at a particular day or time and provide a digital output blocks The alarm output can be wired in configuration mode to operate an event Four totaliser Totaliser blocks can also be wired in Configuration level to any parameter They are blocks used to provide a running total of a parameter and give an output when a pre set total is reached An example might be to totalise the flow through a pipe The output can also be wired in Configuration level to operate an event such as a relay Timer Blocks are grouped under page headers as follows TIMER BLOCKS P Timer 1 Page Parameters to set the time period and read elapsed time for timer 1 Timer 2 Page Parameters to set the time period and read elapsed time for timer 2 Timer 3 Page Parameters to set the time period and read elapsed time f
123. panel width 5 91in 96mm 3 78in Figure 2 1 Outline Dimensions 14 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 2 1 3 Mounting the Controller Engineering Handbook 1 Prepare the panel cut out to the size shown in Figure 2 2 Ensure that there is sufficient spacing between instruments as shown by the minimum dimensions given in Figure 2 2 Ensure also that the controller is not mounted close to any device which is likely to produce a significant amount of heat which may affect the performance of the controller 2 Insert the controller through the panel cut out 3 Spring the upper and lower panel retaining clips into place Secure the controller in position by holding it level and pushing both retaining clips forward 4 Peel off the protective cover from the display Note If the retaining clips subsequently need removing in order to extract the controller from the control panel they can be unhooked from the side with either your fingers or a screwdriver Panel cut out Recommended minimum 92x92mm 08 spacing of controllers 3 2x3 62in ds Figure 2 2 Panel Cut out and Minimum Spacing Requirements 2 1 4 Unplugging and Plugging in the Controller 10mm gt 0 4in 38mm 1 5in Not to scale If required the controller can be unplugged from its sleeve by easing the latching ears outwards and pulling the controller forward out of the sleeve Whe
124. range 6 Press eJ until the parameter Cal State m is displayed n Cal State Idle Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 331 Engineering Handbook Do This This Is The Display You Should See Calibrate at OmV 2704 Controller Additional Notes 7 Set mV source to OmV or better by linking the two copper wires as described in the previous section 8 Press to choose Low OmV A 9 Press to choose Go 10 Press to choose Accept 11 Set mV source to 50mV 12 Press to choose High 50mV 13 Repeat steps 9 amp 10 3sec Cal State Low Omv a Cal State Confirm Cal State Go As Cal State Doing Fine Cal e Cal State 3sec Cal State Accept Cal State Idle Calibrate at 50mV 3sec Cal State High 50m b Cal State gt Confirm Passed Calibration commences 3 seconds after Go is selected and 4 seconds later progresses to Passed If the message Failed appears this usually indicates that the input is not connected At any point in this process press LA to select Abort 3 seconds after selecting Accept the OmV calibration becomes valid A Alternatively press to Abort At this point the new calibration values are used by the controller They will however be lost when the power to the controller is turned off Complete the following step to store the values to the User Calibration area 14 Press or Y
125. slave setpoint when the master loop tune starts therefore it is important that the slave has settled at its local SP After you have set the tune limits start the master LP1 autotune and only after that enable cascade mode When complete the controller can be operated in cascade mode Step 3 Normal Operation Adjust the master SP to the required process value and observe control response 178 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook T3 CHAPTER 13 CONTROLLER APPLICATIONS The 2704 controller contains control blocks specifically designed to suit a number of different applications Examples are Carbon Potential Oxygen or Dew Point control using Zirconia probes Humidity control using wet and dry platinum resistance thermometers Vacuum Control About this chapter This chapter gives general descriptions which are not intended to be of a particular installation of the use of the 2704 controller in the above applications Brief description and terminology applications using zirconia probes An example wiring diagram for carbon potential control Viewing and adjusting the parameters for a carbon potential controller An example of soft wiring for a carbon potential control loop Brief description of humidity control An example wiring diagram for humidity control Viewing and adjusting the parameters for a humidity controller An example of soft wiring for a humidity control loop Brief description of vacu
126. strategy Ramp Back Continue See also Section 8 5 Reset Continue Hold Test Time Reset Time Power recovery reset time 0 00 00 to Only if Recovery Type Test Time 23 59 59 Servo Time Power recovery servo time 0 00 00 to Only if Recovery Type Test Time 23 59 59 Num of Prg DOs Defines the number of digital event None to 16 outputs used Named Dos Allows names to be allocated to digital No No event outputs Yes DO1 Name To allocate a name for digital event User Text 1 to 100 Default Text output 1 from User Text This parameter only appears if Named Dos Yes The above parameter is repeated for every digital event output configured PSP1 Units Units to be displayed for PSP1 See Appendix D 2 PSP1 Resol PSP1 decimal point resolution PSP7 Low Lim PSP1 low limit Display range PSP1 High Lim PSP1 high limit Display range PSP7 Reset Val Safe state target setpoint Prog SP lo lim Prog SP hi lim PSP7 Rate Res PSP1 Rate Resolution PSP1 Name To choose a name for PSP1 from user Default Text to 100 User100 Default Text text The above parameters are repeated for PSP2 and PSP3 if Num of PSPs 2 or 3 Profile Lock Prevents a program from being Unlocked selected Profile Locked See also section 8 9 Fully Locked imic Page The program mimic page may be Off turned off or configured to appear in Main Page the Main Menu or in the Summary Page Summary Page Note 1 Parameters only available if the relevan
127. such a message is sent to an Ethernet to Serial gateway the Unit Ident is essential to identify the slave instrument on the serial port When a stand alone Ethernet instrument is addressed however the Unit Ident is not required since the IP address fully identifies the instrument To allow for both situations the Unit Ident Enable parameter is used to enable or disable checking of the Unit Ident received from TCP The enumerations produce the following actions e Instr The received Unit Ident must match the Modbus address in the instrument or there will be no response e Loose The received Unit Ident value is ignored thus causing a reply regardless of the received Unit Ident e Strict The received Unit Ident value must be OxFF or there will be no reply The complete parameter list is shown below Table Number These parameters are displayed if Protocol Ethernet COMMS 20 5 1 H Module Page Unit Ident Unit Identifier enable disable Strict See previous section for further Loose explanation Instr H Activity Comms activity in H module IP address 4 222 Subnet mask 1 255 Subnet mask 2 255 Subnet mask 3 255 Subnet mask 4 Default gateway WY cm Default gateway Mo Default gateway Po Default gateway Po Pref mstr IP add css Pref mstr IP add Ro Pref mstr IP add b Pref mstr IP add Po MAC address 1 00 00 MAC address 2 ff 00 00 MAC address 3 y Tooo 262 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12
128. the H slot only For standard serial comms modules can be fitted use which EIA232 EIA485 or EIA422 Transmission Standards A full description of these standards is given in the 2000 series Communications Handbook part number HA026230 These modules can be fitted into either or both of two positions referred to as the H slot and the J slot which correspond to the rear terminal connections see also Installation section of the User Guide Both slot positions may be used at the same time An example is to allow a multi drop connection between a number of controllers and a computer running say a SCADA package on one comms position and a separate PC used for configuration purposes on the second comms position In this example an EIA485 module may be fitted for the multi drop SCADA requirement and EIA232 in the second position for the single PC configuration requirement Notes 1 When the controller is placed into Configuration Level it is taken off line and placed into a standby state In this state it no longer monitors or controls the plant 2 EIA232 etc is also commonly known as RS232 etc 256 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 20 2 TO CONFIGURE COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS The operation of the H and J Modules is the same Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes Menu Level 3 1 From any display press gt Jas many times as necessary to access the page header menu
129. the Zoop Setup PID page 3 Or you can transfer automatically in gain scheduling mode SP 4 5 Boundary 3 4 Boundary 2 3 Boundary 1 2 Boundary Controlled A A A Variable PID PID PID PID Set1 Set2 Set 3 Set 4 Figure 11 6 Gain Scheduling in a Non Linear System 144 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 11 5 1 To Configure Gain Scheduling Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press B as Alternatives are LP Z and LP 5 many times as necessary to access OSRAM EDIT These only appear in the list if the page header menu SUELE configured ED mu LP1 SETUP 2 Press or Y to select LP1 SETUP 3 Press to display sub headers LPL SETUP la 4 Press A or Y to select PID ese Te 1 The choices are shown in section 5 Press C to show the parameter 115 list A n 5 Manual 6 Press again to select Schedule Type FID Set 1 uu Remaining parameters can be set in the same way 7 Press or Lv to select the gain scheduling type to use Gain scheduling is uni directional acting on the magnitude of the scheduling variables The PID Cutback Low and High Manual Reset Cool Gain Analogue Value Output High and Low values must now be set up for each gain scheduling set Tuning the PID parameters when using gain scheduling is described further in Chapter 12 11 5 2 PID Parameters Table Number These p
130. the logic outputs are configured as time proportioning outputs they can be scaled as described in section 22 4 1 22 6 1 Standard Digita IO Parameters Table Number This page allows you to configure the Digital l O Parameters STANDARD IO 22 6 1 Dig 101 to 7Page Channel Type Input Output type Digital Input Conf On Off Time Proportion Valve Lower Valve Raise Wire Src Source ofthe signal to operate a digital output Modbus address Conf This parameter does not appear for digital input Invert Normal inverted I O Normal Conf Inverted The following five parameters only appear if Channel Type Time Proportioning Min Pulse Time Minimum logic on or off time Auto 0 05s or 0 1 to 999 9s Electrical Lo Electrical low input level Input range BE Electrical Hi Electrical high input level Input range Eng Value Lo Low display reading Display Eng Value Hi High display reading Dig IO1Nal f Channel Type Digital Input this reads the 0 Off state of the input 1 On f configured as an output this reads the or desired output value 100 to 100 Electrical Value f Channel Type Digital Input this value does not appear f configured as an output this reads the actual 0 or 1 electrical value Channel Name A name which replaces Dig Oxfrom User Text Dig IO Enum See Enumeration for the electrical value on off Not Enumerated also section 16 6 output or Digital Input only Elec Value Enum Enumeration for the electrica
131. the parameter 19 Press A or Y ito change the value 268 This Is The Display You Should See USER SWITCHES USER PAGES COMMS STANDARD IO MODULE IO DIAGNOSTICS USER SWITCHES USER PAGES COMMS Parameters MASTER COM ISBN STANDARD IO Slave 2 MODULEIO Slave3 DIAGNOSTICS Slave 4 EE 5 Param Index Parameter Slave Address Slave Param Scaling Function Repeat Rate Param Index Parameter Slave Address Slave Param Scaling Function Repeat Rate 0 00 00 0 Param Index Parameter Slave Address Slave Param Scaling Function Repeat Rate 0 00 00 0 Param Index Parameter Slave Address Slave Param Scaling Function Repeat Rate 0 00 00 0 Param Index Parameter RESI Slave Param Scaling Function Repeat Rate 0 00 00 0 Additional Notes These parameters configure a transaction between a local parameter in the 2704 anda parameter in a slave The flashing underline indicates the value can be changed Commonly used parameters see App D Engineering Handbook are followed by a short description To edit the parameter using this description press followed by Jor LY Parameter In this example the slave address is 1 For broadcast comms set this value to 0 Range 0 to 65535 This full range is only necessary for IEEE It is necessary to give the full IEEE address to get true floating point For example in Eurotherm controllers PV 8002 He
132. to The symbol in the top left of the display changes to El 8 18 1 From Digital Inputs If digital inputs have been configured and wired for an external RUN HOLD or RESET activate the relevant digital input This will normally be activated from an external switch 8 18 2 From Digital Communications If a PC running SCADA package or iTools is connected to the controller via the digital communications module the programmer status may be changed from this package 8 18 3 From the PROGRAM RUN Page This page contains a parameter called Program Status Its value can be changed to Run Hold or Reset See the following section 90 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 8 19 EXAMPLE TO VIEW THE STATE OF A RUNNING PROGRAM If you wish to know the state of the digital outputs or times remaining for example then you can access the PROGRAM RUN pages Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press P to access the page header menu PRI 1 EDIT 2 Press or Y to select PROGRAM RUN 1 MIHIC PROGRAM RUM Lai C Menu Level 1 3 Press to show sub headers ET PROGRAM MIMIC PROGRAM RUM 4 Press LA or LY if necessary to PROGRAM EDIT select General The parameters in this view include 5 Press C to select the list of parameters for running the Program Status
133. to 3 you can view the values of each input and read the result of the calculation The Logic Operators and Patch Wiring pages are only available if the Toolkit Functions options have been ordered and Analogue and Logic Operators have been enabled as described in section 7 2 Up to 32 separate calculations can be performed and a separate page header is provided for each one 19 1 1 Logic Operations The following calculations can be performed FOR The ouput resis ON when either Input 1 orlnput2ieON Exclusive OR The output result is true when one and only one input is ON If both inputs are ON the output is OFF Latch The output is ON when input 1 turns ON The output remains ON when input 1 turns OFF The output is reset to OFF by turning input 2 ON Logic input 1 Invert option Logic operator Output Value gt See above table result of calculation Logic input 2 Invert option Figure 19 1 Logic Operators Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 253 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 19 2 TO CONFIGURE LOGIC OPERATORS Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press as many times as necessary to access ER the page header menu T ER AN OPERS 15 2 Press or Y to select LOGIC AOE IO OPERS MODULE IO Meru ibevel 3 3 Press Le to show Sub headers Menu iLevel 3 4 Press lor Y Logic 1 to 32 to select STANOARD 10 MODUL
134. to be switched Off manually 6 Press S again to edit Enable Cal It may be wired to an external digital input source such as a key switch 7 Press 4 or Y to On if necessary The auto tare calibration is then as follows Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes Set the equipment at the normal tare point eg place the empty container on the weigh bridge 1 Press C to Tare Value TROER SCALING Txdor 1 This will normally be zero Ta When once set it will only be t Prti Cal necessary to access this parameter again if a new tare A v 2 Press or to enter the required value is required value e This parameter can be initiated from a digital input and wired for example to an external switch An example of this wiring is given at the end of this chapter 3 Press as many times as necessary to scroll to Start Tare 4 Press A Jor to On 322 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook The effect of auto tare is to introduce a DC bias to the measurement as shown in Figure 24 4 below New Scale High f QM m offset Scale High New Scaling arewalue lcesqumesteteteqipsdn Du tugetupetus e pateteduv ema LSU Tare offset Original Scaling New Scale Low Tare offset Scale Low t Input Low Input at auto tare Input High point Figure 24 4 Effect of Auto Tare Note A Tare calibration will change th
135. to choose Save to User 332 x 3sec Cal State Save to User Cal State Part No HA026933 3 seconds after selecting Save to User the OmV and 50 mV calibration values are stored and used by the controller To return to factory calibration press LA to Restore Factory then choose Save to User Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 27 3 2 Thermocouple Calibration Thermocouples are calibrated firstly by following the previous procedure for the 40mV and 80mV ranges both ranges should be calibrated to cover all types of thermocouple then calibrating CJC This can be carried out using an external CJC reference source such as an ice bath or using a thermocouple mV source Replace the copper cable shown in Figure 27 1 with the appropriate thermocouple compensating cable Set the mV source to internal compensation for the thermocouple in use and set the output for OmV Then Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 Access the PV Input sub header from STANDARD IO menu as described in the previous section STANDARD I0 MODULE IO To choose PV Input 2 Press lto show the parameter list STANDARD TU FU Input SETS To choose input type 3 Press again to select Channel type 4 Press Alor Y to choose Thermocouple To choose thermocouple 5 Press lto select Linearisation STANDARD IG PV Input SET us linea
136. to determine how long the power has been off Two time periods can be set which allows three strategies 1 Ifthe power is off for less than the first period the programmer will continue from its last operating point 2 Ifthe power is off for a time between the two time boundaries the controller will servo to the PV and ramp back to the operating point using the previous ramp rate 3 Ifthe power is off for longer than the second time boundary the programmer will reset The programmer takes about 25 seconds to start running after power is applied to the 2704 Part No HA026933 Issue7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 8 6 HOLDBACK GUARANTEED SOAK Holdback freezes the program if the process value does not track the setpoint by an amount which can be set by the user It may operate in any PSP type In a Ramp it indicates that the process value is lagging the setpoint by more than a settable amount and that the program is waiting for the process to catch up In a Dwell it will freeze the dwell time if the difference between SP and PV exceeds settable limits In both cases it guarantees the correct soak period for the product Holdback may be configured in three modes e OFF holdback does not operate e Applied to the complete program Holdback operates the same way in every segment e Toeach individual segment A different holdback type can be applied to each segment Holdback Type defines how holdback operates It may apply
137. to the reading This could produce an offset of between 0 1C and 1C but is dependent on thermocouple type and actual temperature As this is a small fixed offset for a given reading the Offset parameter of the input block could be used to cancel it if necessary Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 163 Engineering Handbook 11 12 9 Controller Configured For Override 2704 Controller A controller is configured for override operation if Loop Type Override in LOOP SETUP Options page section 11 1 1 Table Number These parameters allow you to soft wir 11 12 9 e between function blocks LP1 SETUP Wiring Page PV Src Process variable source Modbus address 05108 Conf PVIn Val Integr Hld Sr Integral hold flag source odbus address The above two parameters do not appear if Control Type se ction 11 1 1 2 On Off Track Enab S OP track enable source Modbus address Power FF Src Power feedforward source odbus address Ext FBack Src External feedback source Modbus address AuxExtFBck Src Auxiliary external feedback source Modbus address 164 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 11 12 100verride Parameters Table Number This list only appears if override is configured see section 11 1 1 LP1 SETUP 11 12 10 and allows you to set up parameters specific to override controllers Override Page Parameter Name Parameter
138. transmission PV SP output power etc To other controllers 10Vdc 20mA 0 20mA max 0 to 10Vdc or or 0 10Vdc 0 to 20mA 2704 Controller I O Module Typical usage TDS Module TDS Control in boilers The diagrams show general wiring connections Connection terminals vary from supplier to supplier Particular attention must be made to grounding and screen connections as recommended by the supplier PV Input Second or Modules 3 third PV input amp 6 only mV V mA TC RTD Pt100 Zirconia probe Second or Analogue third PV input Input Modules 1 mV mA 3 4 amp 6 only TC RTD Pt100 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 H W Code Engineering Handbook Connections and examples of use 2 Electrode TDS Probe Boiler Earth 3 Electrode TDS Probe Boiler Earth 4 Electrode TDS Probe Probe GJ A AM up to 100mV mVolt E source Probe tip Driver tip Sensor tip Earth feedback F Earth Current electrode 1 1 Voltage electrode 1 L1 Voltage electrode 2 Current electrode 2
139. v 5 Press or to On 6 Press as many times as necessary to select the page header menu 7 Press or Y to MODULE IO 8 Press Lo to select the module sub header list 9 To confirm press A the module in which the Pot Input Module is fitted 10 Press 4 to show the Pot Input parameters 11 Press L or Y to scroll to Cal State 12 Press to edit 13 Now press to return to an Overview page and select the Valve Position parameter 14 Press Y to close the valve 15 Press to return to the VP parameters 16 Press A or Y to select Pot Low Pos 17 To confirm press a r Go 18 You can also select Abort at this point Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 or Y to scroll to Enable Pot or Y to select lor Y to select This Is The Display You Should See Enable Potentiometer Calibration LPi SETUP E TUP Min Pulse Time VP Pot Lo Lim VP Pot Hi Lim VP SBrk OP VP SBrk Action Valve Position Enable Pot Cal Select the slot in which the Pot Input Module is fitted LOGIC OPERS COMMS STANDARD IO Idents Module 1A Module 2A Module 2B TXDCR SCALING IO EXPANDER DIAGNOSTICS Additional Notes LP1 is a user definable name and may be different in your controller The view shown here is an example and depends upon the functions enabled in the controller This example also assumes the Pot Input Module is
140. when e The PV is below the SP by a pre set value Lo e The PV is above the SP by a pre set value Hi e The PV is below or above the SP by a pre set value Band In addition two levels of holdback are available per profile setpoint per program These are defined as Fine and Course Example Holdback operating in each segment is often used in a temperature control application as detailed below During a ramp up period the holdback type may be set to deviation low If the Process Value lags the programmed rate of rise holdback will stop the program until the PV catches up This prevents the set program from entering the next segment until the PV has attained the correct temperature Dwell starts when PV reaches Dwell held if PV falls Dwell extended by correct value beyond limits t1 t2 SP PV _ y PV lags SP SP as set in the Holdback stops the ramp until SP catches up Set by a deviation low alarm Nt N CE program N N N SP as modified by holdback follows the rate at X which the process is capable Time Figure 8 6 Effect of Holdback to Produce Guaranteed soak During a dwell period the holdback type may be set to deviation band This guarantees that the dwell or soak period operates only when the process value is within both high and low deviation limits During a ramp down period the holdback type may be set to deviation high If the process cannot cool at the rate set by the ramp down rate the prog
141. wire PROGRAM EDIT 8 12 2 programmer functions Wiring Page This table is only available in Configuration Level Press C to select Modbus Address Parameter Mnemonic PSP1 Reset Src PSP1 reset source 00001 LP1 PV PSP2 Reset Src PSP2 reset source 01025 LP2 PV PSP3 Reset Src PSP3 reset source 02049 LP3 PV Note 1 The PSP Reset Source defines the programmer starting conditions To servo to setpoint wire the relevant reset source into the SP To servo to PV wire the relevant reset source into the PV The value which is wired into the Reset Source is the value which appears at the programmer output Note2 By default these parameters are not soft wired Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 85 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 8 13 TO CREATE OR EDIT A PROGRAM To create or edit a program it is first necessary to define the parameters associated with the overall program These parameters will be found under the page header PROGRAM EDIT Program see section 8 14 1 Then set up the parameters which define each individual segment These parameters will be found in the page PROGRAM EDIT Segments see section 8 15 1 Notes 1 A running program cannot be edited it must be put into Reset or Hold mode 2 Changes can be made to any segment of a currently running program as follows e Tothe currently running segment use the PROGRAM RUN page These changes are always temporary and apply to the current run
142. wired parameters is given in Appendix D The function blocks used in this manual are drawn as follows 1 Input parameters defined by Src on the left of the function block diagram 2 Typically wired output parameters on the right hand side 3 Other parameters which are not normally wired to are shown as settings A parameter which is not wired to can be adjusted through the front panel of the controller provided it is not Read Only R O and the correct access level is selected All parameters shown in the function block diagrams are also shown in the parameter tables in the relevant chapters in the order in which they appear on the instrument display Figure 5 1 shows an example of how a PID function block Loop 1 might be wired to other function blocks to produce a simple single loop controller The Loop1 PV Src input is soft wired to the output value from the Standard IO PV Input block on terminals V to VH The channel 1 heat output from the PID block is soft wired to the input source Wire Src of Module 1A fitted as an output module Also in this example a digital input to the Man Mode Src allows the loop to be placed into manual depending upon the state of the digital input The digital input is DIO1 connected to terminal D1 on the controller For further information on the configuration of the Standard IO and the Module IO see Chapters 22 and 23 respectively Further examples of function block wiring are g
143. 0 00 or 1 00 time prop R O L3 output in operation mode Module 1A Val The current output value in operation 100 0 R O L3 mode ve values are not used Module 1A can be user defined text Channel Name User defined name for the channel Default Cont Select from User Text Page Section Text 7 2 6 This module has three outputs Each output is found under Module 7 A B and C Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 289 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 23 3 5 Triple Logic and Triple Contact Input Table Number This page allows you to set the parameters for a Triple Logic Input MODULE IO Module 7 A 23 3 5 module Page Ident Module identification Logic Input f R O Channel Type Channel Module Type Digital Input Digital Input Conf Invert Invert input operation Normal Conf Invert Eng Val Enum Enumeration for the Module 1A Val Not Enumerated Not Conf See also Custom Enumerations section 01 Usr01 Enumerated 16 6 50 Usr50 Module 1A Val The current input value 0 Off R O Module 1A can be user defined text 120n Channel Name User defined name for the channel Default Text Conf Select from User Text Page Section 7 2 6 This module has three inputs Each input is found under Module A B and C 23 3 6 Transmitter Power Supply Table Number This page allows you to set the parameters MODULE IO Module 7 A Page 23 3 6 for a Transmitter Power Supply module Parameter Name Parameter Description Defau
144. 0 4 INSTALLATION SAFETY REQUIREMENTS 30 4 1 Safety Symbols Various symbols are used on the instrument they have the following meaning Caution refer to the Functional earth AN accompanying documents ground terminal This symbol indicates general information C This symbol indicates a helpful hint The functional earth connection is not required for safety purposes but to ground RFI filters 30 4 2 Personnel Installation must only be carried out by suitably qualified personnel 30 4 3 Enclosure of live parts To prevent hands or metal tools touching parts that may be electrically live the controller must be installed in an enclosure 30 4 4 Isolation The fixed digital I O and analogue input are not isolated The PV Input and all plug in modules are fully isolated The Analogue Input is a self biased differential input suitable for either grounded or floating transducers of low output impedance generating signal in the range of 10V or 20mA with a burden resistor of 100 Ohms across and terminals This input is neither isolated from the instrument ground which can be earthed via fixed I O ports nor isolated from the instrument earth terminal therefore under no circumstances should mains potentials be applied to any of its inputs In order for the Input to operate safely the common voltage at the inputs measured with respect to instrument ground should not exceed 120Vdc or acm For activel
145. 0 pixel electroluminescent is used to show all process information The user interface is menu driven via the display and seven front panel keys MAN SP PROG Figure 1 1 shows an example of this display when the instrument has been configured as a three loop controller Figure 1 1 General View of 2704 Controller Display Features include e Advanced ramp dwell programmer with storage of up to 50 programs e Application specific controllers such as Carbon Potential Humididty and Melt Pressure e A wide variety of inputs which can be configured including thermocouples Pt100 resistance thermometers and high level process inputs e Each loop can be defined to be PID On Off or motorised valve position and can control using a variety of strategies including single cascade override and ratio control e PID control outputs can be relay logic triac or dc with motorised valve position outputs being relay triac or logic e Auto tuning and PID gain scheduling are available to simplify commissioning and optimise the process Configuration of the controller is explained in this Manual Configuration is achieved either via the front panel operator interface or by using iTools a configuration package which runs under the Windows 95 or NT operating systems KEY Display screen Latching ears Q Panel sealing gasket Panel retaining clips G Label amp Sleeve Terminal covers Ratchets Figure
146. 0 to 100 Enable Pot Cal Pot input calibration enable On Note 1 These three parameters are only displayed if the potentiometer is soft wired i e Pot IP Src is wired to a parameter Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 149 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 11 8 DIAGNOSTICS Diagnostic parameters are available at all levels are read only and provide information on the current operating conditions of the controller 11 8 1 Diagnostic Page Table Number This list allows you to interrogate operating conditions of the loop LP 1 SETUP 11 8 1 Diagnostic Page Error Value of main loop error Display range L1 PV SP Aux Error Value of the auxiliary loop error PV 9999 to 9999 R O SP Proportional component of the 999 to 9999 R O output Aux P OP Proportional component of the 999 to 9999 R O auxiliary loop output Integral component of the output 999 to 9999 R O loop output auxiliary loop output Aux Ext FBack Auxiliary External Feedback EET R O 150 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 11 9 DISPLAY The Summary Page displayed in Operation levels see the Navigation Diagram section 3 3 consists of up to 10 parameters which are in common use on a particular process These parameters are promoted to this display using the following table 11 9 1 Display Page Table Number This list configures the Loop Summary display LP 1 SETUP 11 9 1 Display Page
147. 04 Diff Valve open User Text05 Chamber Temp User Text 06 Start Program User Text 07 Start User Text 08 Pre Heat User Text 09 Stabilise User Text 10 Heat Ramp User Text 11 Annealing User Text 12 Cool Ramp User Text 13 Baking User Text 14 Open Vent User Text 15 Stop Fan User Text 16 Complete When using Custom Enumerations it is important to remember that there is a maximum of 50 user strings available The above technique for example uses 10 strings from the User Text library Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 233 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 17 CHAPTER 17 USER PAGES 17 1 WHAT ARE USER PAGES User pages allow you to place a pre determined number of parameters onto a set of semi custom screens Each of the available screens has a pre determined structure allowing specific parameter types to be placed directly into empty slots There are eight screen styles of this type and up to eight user pages may be defined using any combination of these styles Each screen may be accessed under the LOOP button or from the Page Menu With the exception of the Parameter List Style page a scroll list of up to 10 parameters may also be configured These parameters always appear at the bottom of the screen and they are the only parameters which can be made alterable depending upon the access level setting of each parameter 17 2
148. 0C Type Thermocouple 45 C 50 C None SBrk Impedance Sensor break enable for Off Off Conf certain high output Low impedance sensors High SBrk fallback Sensor break fallback Off Conf Down scale Up Scale The following four parameters do not appear for Channel Type Thermocouple or RTD Filter Time PV input filter time Off to L3 0 10 00 0 Emissivity Emissivity Only appears Off to 1 00 L3 if the PV input is configured as a pyrometer 275 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller Table Number This page allows you to configure the PV Input Parameters STANDARD IO PV nput 22 2 4 Page Electrical Val The current electrical Input range R O L1 value of the PV input PV InputVal The current value of the Display range R O L1 PV input in engineering units Transducer scaling offset Display range R O L3 SBrk Trip Imp Sensor break value 0 to 100 R O L1 See section 22 3 3 PV Input Name User defined name for PV User text Default Conf input Select from User Text Text Page Section 5 2 6 Rear Term Temp Temperature at the rear Auto Conf terminals See note 2 Notes CJC Temp CJC Temperature Only Display Range R O L1 appears if the PV input is configured for thermocouple 1 Input Linearisation J Type K Type L Type R Type B Type N Type T Type S Type Platinel Il C Type PT 100 Linear Square Root Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 2 RearTerm
149. 1 2 General View of 2704 Controller Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 13 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 2 CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION The 2704 controller must be mounted and wired in accordance with the instructions given in this chapter and in the Installation sheet Part No HA029465 which is supplied with the controller The controller is intended to be mounted through a cut out in the front panel of an electrical control cabinet Select a location where the minimum vibrations are present and the ambient temperature is within 0 and 50 C 32 and 122 F The controller is retained in position using the panel mounting clips supplied All wires are connected to terminals at the rear of the instrument Each block of six terminals is protected by a hinged cover which clicks into closed position Before proceeding please read Appendix B Safety and EMC Information 2 1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION 2 1 1 Positioning The controller can be mounted vertically or on a sloping panel of maximum thickness 15mm 0 6in Adequate access space must be available at the rear of the instrument panel for wiring and servicing purposes The outline dimensions are shown in below Take care not to cover ventilation holes in the top bottom and sides of the instrument 2 1 2 Outline dimensions Model 2704 Panel thickness up to 15mm 0 6in A Front Panel Height 96mm 3 78in Y Overall depth behind panel 150mm Front
150. 1 Page set Channel Type Digital Input section 22 6 1 This configures DIO1 to be digital input 2 In MODULE IO Module 2 A Page set Channel Type On Off section 22 5 1 set Wire Src 05402 DIO1 Val This configures Module 2A to On Off relay and connects DIO1 to operate this relay Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 313 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 23 6 3 Zirconia Probe Impedance Measurement The impedance of Zirconia probes can increase with age The 2704 controller can be used to monitor this impedance using the Sensor Break Value parameter An alarm on this parameter can be provided if required The controller continuously monitors the impedance of a transducer or sensor connected to any analogue input see also section 22 3 3 This impedance expressed as a percentage of the impedance which causes the sensor break flag to trip is a parameter called SBrk Trip Imp and is available in the parameter lists associated with both Standard and Module inputs of an analogue nature The table below shows the typical impedance which causes sensor break to trip for HZ Volts input and High and Low SBrk Impedance parameter settings HZ Volts 1 5 to 2V applies to Standard PV Input PV Input module and Dual PV Input module SBrk Impedance High 500KQ SBrk Impedance Low 100KQ The graph below shows the approximate relationship between the actual sensor impedance in ohms and the measu
151. 10 8Vdc to 30Vdc at 2 5mA inactive 3 to 5Vdc at lt 0 4mA Functions Refer to Chapter 23 31 8 DIGITAL OUTPUT MODULES Module types Single relay dual relay single triac dual triac isolated as a group individally isolated triple logic module isolated from instrument as a group Allocation Can be fitted into slot 1 3 4 5 or 6 max 3 triac modules per instrument Relay rating 2A 264Vac resistive Logic drive 12Vdc at mA Triac rating 0 75A 264Vac resistive Functions Refer to Chapter 23 31 9 ANALOGUE OUTPUT MODULES Module types 1 channel DC control 1 channel DC retransmission 5 max Allocation Can be fitted into slot 1 3 4 5 or 6 Isolation Fully isolated from the rest of the instrument Range 0 20mA 0 10Vdc Resolution 1 part in 10 000 2 000 noise free 0 5 accurate for retransmission 1 part in 10 000 2 5 accurate for control Functions Refer to Chapter 23 31 10 TRANSMITTER PSU Allocation Can be fitted into slots 1 3 4 5 or 6 isolated Transmitter 24Vdc at 20mA 31 11 TRANSDUCER PSU Bridge voltage Software selectable 5 or 10Vdc isolated Bridge resistance 3000 to 15KQ Internal shunt resistor 30 1KQ at 0 25 used for calibration of 3500 bridge Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 367 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 31 12 DUAL DC OUTPUT Two Current Outputs 4 20mA 20V output span see section 23 3 13 Isolation Fully isolated from the instrument and each other Accuracy 1 11 bit no
152. 17 1 Single Loop User Page 234 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 17 2 2 Dual Loop User Page Page name can be chosen from user text 11 XXXXX Section 1 Name Bar graph parameters 13 XXXXX 14 XXXXX AC ABC 7 asc Jal aec v asc Jv asc Scroll List Ee Up to 10 parameters can be promoted to the scroll list Section 2 Name ABC Parameter name from user text or default text truncated 12 XXXXX aL Asc Jal asc sLasc e anc Figure 17 2 Dual Loop User Page 17 2 3 Triple Loop User Page Style 1 eee name can be chosen from user text Section 1 Name Section 2 Name Section 3 Name Bar graph parameters i i i ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC 7 ABC xxxxx 8 ABC xxxxx 9 ABC xxxxx 10 ABC xxxxx 11 ABC xxxxx 12 ABC xxxxx 13 ABC xxxxx 14 ABC xxxxx 15 ABC xxxxx ABC Parameter name from user text or default text truncated Scroll List Up to 10 parameters can R oR eee promoted to the scroll list Figure 17 3 Triple Loop User Page 1 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 Engineering Handbook The position of each parameter is fixed and dictated by its number indicated next to the parameter Section Names are chosen from user text Section Names are chosen from user text The position of each parameter is fixed and dictated by its number indicated next to the parameter 235 Engineering Handbook 17 2 4 Triple Loop User Page Style 2 Page name can be ch
153. 2 23 6 3 1 2 1 o o0 0 RS i09 i022 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 Mool Stp oles t Addendum 2704 Controller Specials number EU0678 CHAPTER 21 2704 MASTER COMMUNICATIONS INTRODUCTION siete tiad abetted CEREREM ERE IPSERN ERO ORI D Ee ieee Broadcast Communications Directread Wiltezs ae tee ARE Oo te ORE asec ASML DER UTR D ed DE e oe ac RR WIRING CONNEGTIOINS tede tea ettet et bearbeitet etie retis reb suckle Example Wiring Diagrams for Different Slaves sss cross board version Basic Navigation esses eene nnenerenne enne To Configure Parareters c m ex oet stetit etes To Configure Slaves ee crereere teet teet erat e e Rte Re eH eee Parameter Fableszsustaun nene hau nO nOn RIORUM additional NO ESen iaa aE DR ARR EER AIR ENERE S SE IEEE in 2000 Series CONT GUAT OOS RC CHAPTER 22 STANDARD IQ rece torneo eoe o ego ete epa repe oo epe Peta ee ooa ese ea reser WEIATASSTANDARD IQS ecco ea Lac esr 273 VID UE ete To Scale the PV Input it Offset iis eR o ERR ENT ERGO NRI R ANS E PIA Ux te bein UM ToView and Change Input Filter Tile e re t HR nese PEU EUR PER RP Re t cem rece eer eme bateria 275 Standard IO PV Input Parameters ANALOGUE INPUT X To Scalehe Analegue Input e eet ce ede RI REIN te PIER Standard IO Analogue Input Parameters sse eterne tenntetenetetentntetetnte tenente retenti 277 Sensor B
154. 2 Analogue Input This is the fixed input on terminals BA BB BC and is intended for volt or current sources 3 Analogue I O Modules These are inputs which can be connected to terminals A B C D of the module I O Any input type listed above can be connected to these modules See also the Installation chapter in the User Guide for details on terminal connections 27 2 PRECAUTIONS Before starting any calibration procedure the following precautions should be taken 1 When calibrating mV inputs make sure that the calibrating source outputs less than 250mV before connecting it to the mV terminals If accidentally a large potential is applied even for less than 1 second then at least one hour should elapse before commencing the calibration 2 RTD calibration is incomplete without mV calibration A strict procedure presented in section 27 3 5 must be followed to avoid calibration errors being up to an order of magnitude greater than that specified for this input This particularly concerns the linearity specification A pre wired jig built using a spare instrument sleeve may help to speed up the calibration procedure especially if a number of instruments are to be calibrated This can be built using a spare instrument sleeve available by quoting Part No SUB26 SLE It is very important that power is turned on only after the controller has been inserted in the sleeve of the pre wired circuit Power should also be turned off before re
155. 23 Full Scale High Alarm With Blocking wie 123 Deviation Band With Blocking 5129 EATCHINGALARM S 5 22 2 2 ater tte Demeratere emen ete I 124 Latched Alarm Full Scale High Automatic 124 Latched Alarm Full Scale High Manual Grouped Alarms sese HOW ALARMS ARE INDICATED Alarm Delay Time sss TO CONFIGURE AN ALARM Es oe ALARM TABLES nad e m an Suan An EUMD RR PERI oe E PE SENESTE STANE TEKOT SEOSE RENNE ETET TES ALARMS S mriary Page eie t Dr bn aod eb uada dum edet ee t names ALARMS P7 2 or 3 Page Parameters ALARMS PV Input Page Parameters ALARMS An Input Page Parameters ALARMS Module 1 3 4 5 amp 6 Page Parameters ttti 130 ALARMS User 1 to 8 Page Parameters sse nennen tetn trente na NiE aae entente trennen ALARM WIRING EXAMPLES Control Loop With High and Low Alarms re Loop Alarm Inhibited if Programmer not in Run isisisi esaii espeia aeia SEEEN ent 133 CHAPTER IT COOP SETUP eter rece eae eee e eee ea eee een ee ooa eee eet eee ea eee eet eee eer eee teen peut 134 WHATS EOOP SEIU cm LOOP SET UP Options page SINGLE LOOP CONTROL eee E LOOP SET UP tWiring page SINGLE LOOP tret ro me etta e te tie Ig e RT 138 SETPOINT DEERINIRION e M Setpoint Function Block Setpoint Parameters eu LPTSETUP SP AUX PaQQe tr RTT EXER
156. 3 28 3 4 28 3 5 28 3 6 28 3 7 28 4 28 4 1 28 4 2 28 4 3 28 4 4 28 5 28 5 1 28 5 2 28 5 3 28 5 4 28 5 5 28 5 6 28 5 7 28 6 29 29 1 29 2 29 3 CHAPTER 24 TRANSDUCER SCALING ccsccsscssscstecsssccsscsssccscssscsssssssccsscsesesssessesseeees 316 WHAT IS TRANSDUCER SCALING 2 0 rete ee tette tree tree ret reet EFE r rr der aree eg 316 SHUNT GALIBRAMO Nex case tot UT UPOPEPEPUC UBI EDe Pt Et edet tee a Mecsas Mri 316 To Calibrate a Strain Gauge Bridge Transducer sse tenentes 317 LOAD CELL CAEIBRATIORN etit erue ai ect re wate ais eaten Renee ek RR PEDRO EERE 319 To Calibrate a Load Gell ttt et REPRE DT UR ROC MOT EET ERR XE ERREUR 319 COMPARISONKAEIB RATIO NI c reni rrt ER PEE ER RM EE e tattel hee tae 320 To Calibrate a Controller Against a Second Reference ssssssssssssseeee rettet nente 321 AUTOSTARECAEBIBRATIG Ns uto os 1e ott t Eo E te ER Rx Rte tomatoe tose ener uet dg esterne 322 To Usethe Auto Tare Feature esii HERE MIR RRU RUN GATA UAR ERECTAE ERES 322 TRANSDUCER SCALING PARAMETERS RR RE E ERR CE PRI 324 Transducer Scaling Parameter Table ree eee eee ner menn aen mom een mm e re ees 324 Parameter Notesi cit Cete RU ED ERR REN RU ERO EIER REI buevedesduevavdvaevaverbserscesonebetanparavisssetts 325 CHAPTER 25 IQ EXPANDPEER 5 2 oc ocd cai IHE 225 AAEN tette feo eate eR eter eda cos 326 WAA TISIO EX PANDER A 2 22128 regere nee ARE Re eae as 326 TOCONFI
157. 3 C then the first calibration reading will take place at 60 C and the next one at 70 C and so on The instrument will continue taking readings until the user select stop parameter of the TCF Cal This should be done after the boiler water has reached the maximum operating temperature Providing that the TCF Cal is then accepted the TCF Table is created This table could be used for deriving temperature compensation if Use Table parameter is set to Yes Note that at least 2 cal points must be acquired for the calibration mechanism to complete successfully 352 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 28 4 4 5 TDS Calibration using Cal State Parameter The Cal state parameter is used to control a calibration state machine that deals with all three calibration mechanisms The options that are available to the user in any access level other than Conf are dependent on the setting of the Setup parameter The sequence of options available are shown in the diagram below Setup Disabled Idle Probe cal 5 Confirm Go Enter data Cancel Idle Cancel Idle Setup Enabled Idle Set K to Auto SEK Accept SEK Cancel Idle TDScal Confirm Go o Enter a Cancel Idle Cancel Idle Set TCOEF to AUTO 46K Accept XX Cancel Idle TCOEF cal Confirm Go Running Cancel Idle Stop IAK gt User changes state Software changes state Cancel Idle Pa
158. 4 INPUT OPERATORS erre co tenete ene eee ce nete eene ta eias ii neto kenn 206 WHAT AAREINPUT OPERATORS aenea teta dm en RR Y RE RCRUM Eee t Y LE as 206 CUSTOM EINEARISATIGON etie odo ox ood ed nd n aoe iene 207 Compensation for Sensor Non Line rities iine e eee ete n b ER EH HER eer Seen 207 TO VIEW AND ADJUST INPUT OPERATOR PARAMETERS sees 208 Input Operator Custom Linearisation Parameters ssssssseseeeseeeeeeetntetntntetetete tatit tetti ttti tnininintnin 208 THERMOCOUPLE PYROMETER SWITCHIINQ 5 3 cette tenter en tente dann ER RP E Ro SR d 209 Input Operators Switch Over Parameters scans eiieti sins esee io tint tbi th te landen de tini tb edi eate dana en o 209 TO SET UP INPUT OPERATORS MONI TOR reir t ai RR RR ERR SM KARANTENE rr EEEa 210 Input Operator Monitor Parameters eet eei rie ebd PR tend COPA ERE ER HER 210 BCDB INPU T x si tm m emo e and aan nA SEO Om Ove aided DOR ere Ret ee SPERA S ce REN Fa Aah eve EXER eR 210 Main Feature Sieu K eet amets iate A t its ta v t CH ODIO Rte mte cae ttt de 210 BCD Parameters c a pprcten ee pa e ide e b TR EUR AEEA E eL CEN SE TE ERE DH Hv 211 INPUT OPERATORS WIRING EXAMPLES e m RO RARE RENE ERR e E REESE SEE ERE e ER ese ERES ERR ER EHE TA 212 Switch Over Loop With Custom Linearised Input sse tnter neni 212 Configuring the BCD Input to Selecta Program tret LE HIR RH ne
159. 5 Custom 6 mBar Pa Torr sec min hrs HH MM SS S HHH MM SS C F K sec min hr The above table of parameters is repeated for MultiOp2 and 3 18 5 2 Use of Default The table below shows how the default type affects the output result Clip Bad Fallback Bad Clip Good Fallback Good In range Out of In range Out of In range Out of In range Out of range range range range No inputs Output Default value Output Default value wired Status Bad Status Good One or Output Output Output Output Output Output Output Output more inputs Operation Clip Operation Default Operation Clip Operation Default OK Status Status Status Status Status Status Status Status Good Bad Good Bad Good Good Good Bad Al wiee Output Default value Output Default value inputs bad Status Bad Status Good Note The default value must be within the blocks limits or it will be clipped to those limits 252 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 19 CHAPTER 19 LOGIC OPERATORS Logic Operators allow the controller to perform logical calculations on two input values These values can be sourced from any available parameter including Analogue Values User Values and Digital Values The parameters to use the type of calculation to be performed input value inversion and fallback value are determined in Configuration level In levels 1
160. 5 PROFILE SETPOINT PAGES These pages are similar to the PROGRAM EDIT page available in the synchronous programmer They allow you to configure and set up each PSP There are six pages 1 The Options page available in configuration level only Allows configuration of overall parameters associated with the PSP such as limits PSP names units etc 2 The Wiring page available in configuration level only Allows internal soft wiring to parameters specific to the application The Run General page available in Operator Level 1 Provides running information of the PSP 4 TheRun Segment page available in Operator Level 1 Provides running information of each segment of the PSP 5 The Program Edit page available in Operator Level 1 Allows editing of the overall PSP 6 The Segment Edit page available in Operator Level 1 Allows editing of each segment in the PSP 9 8 25 1 PSP1 2 or 3 PROFILE Options This page is only available in configuration level Table Number These parameters allow you to configure parameters PSP1 2 or 3 PROFILE 8 25 1 associated with the PSP Options Page Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default Press C to select Prog Usr Val1 Allows programmer User Value 1 to be enabled UVal1 Low Lim User value 1 low limit 0 to 127 Limited by Uval1 Hi Only shown Lim if Prog Usr Val Yes UVal7 Hi Lim User value 1 high limit 0 to 127 Usr Val Name Name from user text for programmer user va
161. 5Vdc linear E Thermocouple Ni Ni18 Mo Pt20 Rh Pt40 Rh R Setpoint EBs Aux PV input For input range select third digit from table 1 Single DC outputs 1 5Vdc linear For input range select third H PID Heat ustom Replace C digit from table 1 Nee PID Cool Custom curve Aux amp lead PV inputs EE PV Retransmission D Thermocouple AR Ratio lead input Es SP Retransmission For output range select third digit from table 1 Dual 4 20mA 24Vdc Tx OP W W26 Re Eng High Res DC Output HHX Heat OP Lps 1 amp 2 W W26 Re Hos TA 4 20mA PV retran HC Heat Cool W5 Re W26 Re Eng TV 0 10V PV retran HT Ch 1 Heat Ch 2 Tx W5 Re W26 Re Hos SA 4 20mA SP retran TTX Both chs Txmtr Pt10 Rh Pt40 Rh SV 0 10V SP retran Changeover Relay Exergen K80 IR Pyro HX Heat CX Cool QUICK START CODE EXAMPLE SVP1 SPID SPID K Z A S1A 1VH 2PV 2HV 3HC 3PV This code configures the hardware specified in section 29 1 to be Loop1 Valve position control Type K input Ch1 VP output in slot 1 4 20mA remote setpoint input Loop 2 PID control RTD input in slot 3 0 10Vdc Ch1 output in slot 4 Loop 3 PID control 4 20mA input in slot 6 Logic Ch1 Ch2 output in slot 5 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 361 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 30 APPENDIX B SAFETY AND EMC INFORMATION This controller is manufactured in the UK by Eurotherm Controls Ltd Please read this section carefully before installing the controller This
162. 67579999 E info eurotherm in invensys com IRELAND Dublin Eurotherm Ireland Limited T 353 1 4691800 F 353 1 4691300 E info eurotherm ie invensys com ITALY Como Eurotherm S r l T 39 031 975111 F 39 031 977512 E info eurotherm it invensys com JAPAN Tokyo Invensys Process Systems Japan Inc T 81 3 6450 1092 F 81 3 5408 9220 E info eurotherm jp invensys com KOREA Seou Invensys Operations Management Korea T 82 2 2090 0900 F 82 2 2090 0800 E info eurotherm kr invensys com NETHERLANDS A phen a d Rijn Eurotherm B V T 31 172 411752 F 31 172 417260 E nfo eurotherm nl amp invensys com MIDDLE EAST AND NORTH AFRICA UAE Dubai Invensys Middle East FZE T 971 4 8074700 F 971 4 8074777 E marketing mena invensys com POLAND Katowice Invensys Eurotherm Sp z 0 0 T 48 32 7839500 F 48 32 7843608 7843609 E info eurotherm p invensys com Warsaw Invensys Systems Sp z 0 0 T 48 22 8556010 F 48 22 6556011 E biuro invensys systems p SPAIN Madrid Eurotherm Espa a SA T 34 91 6616001 F 34 91 6619093 E info eurotherm es invensys com SWEDEN Malmo Eurotherm AB T 46 40 384500 F 46 40 384545 E info eurotherm se invensys com SWITZERLAND Wollerau Eurotherm Produkte Schweiz AG T 41 44 7871040 F 41 44 7871044 E info eurotherm ch invensys com TAIWAN Kaohsiung Invensys Taiwan T 886 7 811 2269 F 886 7 811 9249 E
163. 76 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 12 6 2 To Tune a Trim mode Cascade Loop This example uses SP feedforward where the value of the MasterWSP is 50 the slave range is 0 200 and the Trim limits are 25 The slave setpoint calculation is shown in the diagram below which has been reproduced from the previous chapter CSD FFwd Src not included in version 4 0 e Master WSP e FeedFwT TEUER Master PV e A Trim Limit Scale to Slave PV units s rwite 0l SPHi v SP Limit Mone inf AuxHR AuxLR M DS ias a 100 SPLo in1 FF SP Trim Limit Re scale to 10096 User wire inZ X 100 i Mover EB lt AuxHR AuxLR lt 4 x in2 FF_SP Figure 12 3 Cascade Controller in Trim Mode The formula in the box Scale to Slave PV units simply normalises the masterOP to the slave range for example here a masterOP of 0 will produce a trim value of 0 units and an output of 100 a trim value of 200 units A 50 master OP will produce 100 So if masterOP is 10 this will provide a trim value of 20 that will be added to the fed forward SP providing a working slave setpoint of 70 It should also be noted if masterOP is 20 this should provide a trim value of 40 but because the trim limit is set a 25 instead of the slave setpoint going to 90 it will be limited to 75 The feedback path via the parameter MasterFB en
164. 933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 22 2 3 To View and Change Input Filter Time An input filter provides damping of the input signal This may be necessary to prevent the effects of excessive noise on the PV input The filter may be turned off or set in steps of 0 1sec up to 10mins If the input is configured to accept process levels eg 4 20mA as in the above example the parameter which follows Eng Value Hi is Filter Time For thermocouple and RTD inputs the first parameter to be displayed is the Input Filter Time since the input scaling parameters do not appear for specific linearised inputs Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From the previous display press 7 to select Filter Time 2 Press A or Y to adjust the Filter Time between Off and 10mins The following table gives the full list of parameters available under the PV Input list header This list of parameters set up the fixed Process Variable Input connected to terminals VH VI V and V This is the PV input for a single loop controller U 22 2 4 Standard IO PV Input Parameters Table Number This page allows you to configure the PV Input Parameters STANDARD IO PV nput 22 2 4 Page Channel Type RTD ThermocouplePyrometer 40mV i LN 80mV mA Volts HZVolts Log 10 Resolution Display resolution XXXXX to Conf X XXXX or SCI CJC type Internal Internal Conf Only shown if Channel
165. 99 L1 Alterable in 0 E re Total Segments Number of segments in the running 0 to 100 L1 Alterable program in Hold only shown if Segment The currently running segment number 1 to 100 L1 Alterable in Number Hold Segment Type Running program segment type Profile L1 R O Profile normal segment Profile End Segment End of prog End Segment Go Back repeat part of prog Go Back Text Seg Time Rem Time remaining in the current segment L1 R O Alterable if Time To Target prog and in Hold Wait Status Wait Status No Wait No Wait L1 R O Event A Event B Event C Wait Condition Wait condition for the running segment No Wait No Wait L1 Alterable Event A in Hold Event B Event C Prog User Val 1 Active Programmer User Val 1 Name is L1 user configurable Prog User Val2 Active Programmer User Val 2 Name is L1 user configurable GoBack Rem Number of repeat cycles remaining 1 to 999 EE L1 Alterable in Hold The state required in the end segment L1 R O Reset Prog Reset DO These are the digital events in Reset Only shown if and are shown in this format if Named 104 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook Table Number These parameters provide running information of the PSP PSP1 2 or 3 PROFILE 8 25 3 This page is available in operator and configuration level Run General Name Dos No configured The number of DO values is set by Alterable in
166. A EA EA ATA ATA AA ASTES 196 OPERATION Sz semet ee Ae soe MIHI III MAE E M DE DAS Me at Lats 197 To Access the Vacuum Controller Parameters snesienasicunaiinniii io a n E tette terere nnne nenne 197 PARAMETER TABLES dre eate nabe O ET ai ena pre erbe 198 High Vacuum Parameter Tables rtt e Ca HR AR YO EU DM tis NA a 198 Low Vacuum Parameter Tables onere nt irte tenere teer etie e ete einer eater 198 Backing Vacuum Parameter Tables de e eet ettet in am eee denen 198 Gauge Switching Parameter Tables idt tinet ret nei rhe tini ensi coi eene icut 199 Setpoint Parameter Tables PT anaa 199 Pump Control Parameter l abl6s iecit eet ie t a ene anteire eet eene 199 Leak Detect Parameter l bles eie petite e ED UP QU PU p P a eee b eee botes Pope ent 200 Vacu rn display Parameter Fables cis ri tane Ero Ree On E GR d ree 200 CONFIGURATION LEVEL wn rh cot c rr oe rere oe PEOR HET ORUM ER TR ere eat 201 To Configure the Vacuum Summary as the HOME Page teet 201 To Customise the Vacuum Summary Page tear RR EIE Y EET UR ER XR TL NT DAS EXER AMARE 202 Vacu m FEurnction Blocle etre etre ert ar PI pe de reed reet 202 VACUUM CONTROLLER WIRING EXAMPLES ccc eecssssesseeeserseeseesseeseeeseeeesaeessesseesaeseaeeeesaeenaeaes 203 Simple Temperature and Vacuum Control sss terrere entente tene 203 Lo Seale Vacuum Readoutin Other Units rtm et e oat e ie reines 205 CHAPTER 1
167. ATION The linearisation uses a 16 point straight line fit Figure 14 1 shows an example of a curve to be linearised and is used to illustrate the terminology used for the parameters found in the INPUT OPERS Cust Lin 7 Page Terminated search f Output 2 to 15 l Ignored data 1 points Output Lo 6 i Sealey Input Lo Input 2 to15 gt Input Hi Figure 14 1 Linearisation Example Notes 1 The linearisation block works on rising inputs rising outputs or rising inputs falling outputs It is not suitable for outputs which rise and fall on the same curve 2 Input Lo Output Lo and Input Hi Output Hi are entered first to define the low and high points of the curve It is not necessary to define all 15 intermediate points if the accuracy is not required Points not defined will be ignored and a straight line fit will apply between the last point defined and the Input Hi Output Hi point 14 2 1 Compensation for Sensor Non Linearities The custom linearisation feature can also be used to compensate for errors in the sensor or measurement system The intermediate points are therefore available in Level 1 so that known discontinuities in the curve can be calibrated out Figure 14 2 shows an example of the type of discontinuity which can occur in the linearisation of a temperature sensor eg 1000 C Cal Point 6 cres Output 2 to 15 e s Cal Point 4 Cal Point 3 Se MN WU pou O
168. Cutback While the PID parameters are optimised for steady state control at or near the setpoint high and low cutback parameters are used to reduce overshoot and undershoot for large step changes in the process They respectively set the number of degrees above and below setpoint at which the controller will start to increase or cutback the output power i Zeit i oe P Undershoot E t To reduce the undershoot decrease the low cutback value To reduce the overshoot increase the low cutback value Figure 11 4 High and Low Cutback 142 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 11 4 5 PID Block Diagram Control Action Remote Direct feedforward SP High Limit SP ae Feedforward M I T iM Reverse PI Integral Hold SP Low Limit FF dv gt Integral or PW 4 Derivative Action Man est FF d M a SS o EF _ OP Hi Error Range Max OP Lo PV GERI s ivati Derivative ET PV Range Min Integral de PID OP saturation Remote OP pe A feedback Track Enable Track Value Ch 1 OP Auto OPH Rem OP Hi lw 00 moo gt x P d p gt gt a a Relative Manual Manual OPL Rem Op Lo 500 gt Cool Gain M Parameters are w
169. D or Pl control you should set the Integral time parameter or derivative time parameter to OFF before commencing the tuning cycle These parameters are found in the Loop Setup PID pages see Chapter 11 The tuner will leave them off and will not calculate a value for them Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 169 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller Typical automatic tuning cycle PV Setpoint 2 Tuning normally takes place at a PV which has a value of Setpoint X 0 7 Time Calculation of the cutback values Low cutback and High cutback are values that restrict the amount of overshoot or undershoot that occurs during large step changes in PV for example under start up conditions If either low cutback or high cutback is set to Auto the values are fixed at three times the proportional band and are not changed during automatic tuning 12 3 1 Carbon Potential Control If the loop is configured for carbon potential control it is necessary to set the proportional band from Engineering Units to Percentage before initiating self tune This is because the controller requires an error of at least one unit to be able to tune In the case of carbon potential this signal is very often 1 To set Proportional Band in Percentage In LPx SET UP Options Page Scroll to Prop Bnd Units A Press or W button to select Percentage For further inform
170. Disconnect the shunt resistor 2 Calculate the low point calibration value by continuously averaging two lots of 50 measurements of the input until stable readings are obtained 3 Connect the shunt resistor 4 Calculate the high point calibration value by averaging two lots of 50 measurements of the input Controller under Calibration Strain gauge C TXDCR SCALING Txder1 Ei Ca On B A Clear or Transducer power supply ut 0 1000 Figure 24 1 Strain Gauge Calibration 316 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 24 2 1 To Calibrate a Strain Gauge Bridge Transducer The controller must have been configured for Cal Type Shunt and the transducer connected as shown in Figure 2 18 using the Transducer Power Supply Then Do This This Is The Display You Should See Engineering Handbook Additional Notes It is first necessary to enable calibration as follows 1 From any display press as many times as necessary to access the page header menu 2 Press 4 lor Y to select TXDCR SCALING 3 Press Le to show Sub headers 4 Press A y 2or3 5 Press C to show the parameter list 6 Press C again to select Enable Cal A v 7 Press or to On or to select Txdcr 1 or Menu Level 31 MODULE 10 TOCA SCALING Me DIAGN HDRRD 10 MODULE IO DIAGN Tort Al TADCA SCALING Txder i Enable Cal The choices are Txd er 1
171. E See Chapter 8 See Chapter 8 See Chapter 8 RUNS NU igital Program iN J See Chapter 9 Synchronous Programmer ee Programmer PROFILE SP1 to SP3 if configured C vY gt VACUUM gt v gt ALARMS 0v gt AUTOTUNE gt vy gt LP 1 SETUP cv Ss c High Vacuum lt Summary lt elect Select aa see iPr fto 3 pi A PV Input A See Chapter 12 or or SP Aux vi Module 1 to 6 v Select Pump Control User 1 to 8 using Display lt c PD or n X PID Aux LY et pone far M Alarms Parameters for See Chapter 10 Vacuum Control Display Aux seg Supplement No HA027186 e Y Parameters for LP 1 Setup See Chapter 11 J C Y gt LP2SETUP vo LP 3SETUP gt v gt GoTo Notes V V BOILER Page headers shown shaded are not fo E available in levels 1 2 or 3 See also a M Next INSTRUMENT Page Promote Chapter 5 page Parameters for Loop 2 and Loop 3 Set up See Chapter 11 46 Text shown in italics is user configurable in configuration mode and may be different from that shown Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller From LP3 SETUP Previous page Engineering Handbook gt v gt BOILER gt v c ZIRCONIA PROBE gt vy gt HUMIDITY gt yv gt INPUT OPERS gt yv dS Y Y Y Lo Le lo c M v v Y Cust Lin 1
172. E 10 The first parameter is Operation 5 Press l to show the parameter list The choices are 6 Press or Y to scroll to the required parameter Off AND OR XOR Latch Equal Not Equal Greater Less Than Great or Equal Less or Equal 7 Press to select the parameter 8 Press Jor Y to change the value or state Remaining parameters in the Analogue Operators list are accessed and adjusted in the same way The list of parameters available is shown in the following table 19 2 1 Logic Operator Parameters Table Number This page allows you to configure Logic Operators 1 to 31 LOGIC OPERS Logic 1 Page 19 2 1 Invert Invert inputs None Invert Input 1 Invert Input 2 Invert Both Default OP Fall back value Does not appear if Operation Off Input 1 Value Input 1 Value Off On Input 2 Value Input 2 Value Off On Output Value Output Value Enumerated if OP Enum User defined text Status Status Good Bad OP Enum User string for the first enumeration of the Output Value The above table is repeated for Logic Operators 2 to 31 254 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 19 3 PATCH WIRING Patch wiring consists of blocks that allow the user to wire from any parameter to another Each block consists of a Source Destination and Status element Each wire status indicates the success failure of the connection successful writing
173. E E E E E NE A EE E E E ES The temperature input required but is invalid Invalid O P TRUE The user is required to check the Confirm Change parameter and make a decision about what action to take from the options given rating no errors The calibrations state machine is not idle The TDS Conductance input is invalid For a full description of these states and their priorities please see section 28 4 4 4 354 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 28 5 BOTTOM BLOWDOWN FUNCTION BLOCK Traditionally to lower the TDS a boilerman would open a valve in the bottom of the boiler to let water out and lower the TDS Installing a TDS controller removes the need to do this to lower the TDS value but there is still a need to blowdown the sediment that forms at the bottom of the boiler To minimise the energy loss blowdown is restricted to between 3 and 30 second burst probably twice a day at a time selected by the boilerman The blowdown water normally passes to a blowdown vessel usually sized to cope with dissipating the energy from a single boiler Because of this a Health and Safety Guideline PM60 in the UK dictates that adjacent boilers should be inhibited from blowing down at the same time 28 5 4 Bottom Blowdown of Multiple Boilers When the blowdown time is reached a sequence of network integrity checking and pre wait will take place before the bottom blowdown v
174. ESE E EEEN YT Re aN ERE NEn ERr eue ds 223 LETT M 223 APPLICATION EXAMPLE ire t re DELE MERE aa Rd ah cO EL Due Her Rd Penh 224 COMPESSOr TIME ii 224 CHAPTER 16 ADVANCED FUNCTION S eeeeeeeee eene eene enn tnnt tns tnnt tn seins sinat tns en setas tun 225 PATTERN GENERATOR ttt teste e RU debe tac ex tendre ettet 225 Example Programmer Event Outputs te ttr ttr bn t en RR XN ERR EXCEL AEA 225 ANALOGUE SWITCHES ves tust teE AU EPPERSINUERUAENINBEIUEe enin 227 T Setup n Analogue Switch eter i e p RR IR E PUO PED DIG DRAN UIS 227 WISER WAR Sis vr er eem tote e CM pueda err ed ERN 228 To Access User Values vecti n CHR RU VON CURE XH CURVA EC EXERCERE EN 228 User Values Patameter Table citscescccvsnerscienrensvevsnesseroraeveserinestcndunencessnnesacdysonsevssereduesonesaftonensedentescvesspesneronvendvestpesied 228 USER MESSAGES niit t E esee tene eae edidere 229 HO CONG Ure A User Messages sostener t BUR e RD PRU NRBIS 229 U SERPS WITCHES ics esset deett rog ertet teret ete rre ebore terre AAAA ATT 230 dosconigurelser switches c mc m o M Im MU M RU TA 230 CUSTOMIENUMERATIONS ceca 3 tte t tr tren Heri i rr Seren ient eee 231 T6 Configure Custom Enumeration Sie Tara aa t PO RERO UE IRE URGENT OP RR URS 231 CHAPTER 17 USER PAGES 12 1 11er LeIr ette arnee s rsen esp eae oae p ee en tee ge sensere een ie EEEREN 234 WHAT ARE USER PAGES RO RO RO EXTR ERE EVE ERE E
175. Eiern reta 213 Holdback Duration Timer arent eR EAEN TICINO ETATIS BIS 214 CHAPTER 15 TIMER CLOCK TOTALISER OPERATION eeeeeee eerte eere nennen nennen 215 WEIAT ARE TIMER BEO CKS s 5 reno eremo mnnepeDORERIEO HEP een suas sedan ede 215 TIMER DYXRES 5ittnthenctatasotegoeneottento edo teuctesate eel testes O Pulse Timer Mode cote ene ee ie ea ede eben p e ren e eie een Off Delay Timer Mode One Shot Timer Mode Compressor or Minimum On Timer Mode ertetettetetntetenttntee entente entente teni 219 TO VIEW AND ADJUST TIMER PARAMETERS t e RO RO E E Pe D E CREE e 220 TimeriPararneters ciae teen mins tei i aep tel e n IH EU EC UR ECRIRE LE eR C HER 220 THEGE QO GK pipe pti Ot ERROR ane ae eter 221 Clock Parameters ise nose ertet hera ri rp ier RE pra its 221 TIME BASED ALARMS 4 oreet o e e M o D OB tm Od An A Ata 222 Timer Alarm Parameters urbe t i c e P eH e i e ie e peteret enero 222 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 15 6 15 6 1 15 7 15 7 1 16 17 2 2 17 2 3 17 2 4 17 2 5 17 2 6 17 2 7 17 3 17 3 1 17 4 17 5 17 5 17 5 2 17 5 3 17 5 4 17 5 5 17 5 6 17 5 7 18 18 1 18 1 1 18 2 18 2 1 18 3 18 3 1 18 4 18 5 18 5 1 18 5 2 19 19 1 1 19 2 19 2 1 19 3 19 3 1 20 20 1 20 2 20 2 1 20 2 2 20 3 20 4 20 4 1 20 4 2 20 4 3 20 4 4 20 4 5 20 4 6 20 4 7 TOTAEISERS otim aa ede tette a p ot d toa ds ser CENE E
176. Figure 27 3 on Switch 2 _ 2704 x G9 BA i Controller GAT g Switch 1 T Switch 3 BB Go i 8V Source BC o G9 Screen Switch 4 Figure 27 3 Analogue Input Calibration Connections Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press las many times as necessary until the STANDARD ANALOGUE OPER IO page header is displayed ES Ci STANDARD IO MOE A 2 Press J to select sub headers and An Input 3 Press to select the parameter list The Channel Type may be mA or Volts The calibration procedure is the same 4 Press c necessary again to edit Channel Type if 5 Press C until the parameter Cal Cal State Idle State is displayed To calibrate Offset Connect and terminals together by closing switch 1 Open switches 2 3 and 4 to allow the short circuited inputs to float A v 6 Press or to choose Offset z The procedure is now the same as Cal State Offset paragraphs 9 10 and 14 for mV calibration To calibrate Common Mode Rejection Ratio Close switches 2 and 4 while switch 1 remains closed and switch 3 remains open so that 8V is applied to both and input terminals with respect to the Screen terminal 7 Press A or Y to choose CMRR The procedure is now the same as Enhance paragraphs 9 10 and 14 for mV calibration To calibrate Gain Open switches 1 and 4 and close switches 2 and 3 so that 8V is co
177. GURE IO EXPANDERA 2 22 err rrr Qa fin Pan ins an nied Gann Gene een eed 327 IG Expander paramelters zen ret ha E ni t pet Re re NI EE EI IER E 327 CHAPTER 26 DIAGNOSTICS orania enses tnsttn seins tinae ta setas tease inst east ense e 328 WHAT IS DIAGNOSTIGS i2 iii tiet e D D dep i d S De Pe SEN ETENN Rupee deca 328 Diagnostics Parameters oso onte RAT t E oC EO RENT e FP ERR I ERE EGER HE ERES 328 CHAPTER 27 CALIBRATION cccscccssccscscssccscstssdecchesssscarsedescnceescsenteetsscuesedssentdodsstnedonsscnttedcscases 330 USER AGAPIBRA IGNI Ea aieea e qe IER a arr ise 330 ANE AEON e EREEREER EERE EAA EA AE ERE EEE EEEE 330 AMICI 331 To Galibrate mwW Rafiges ue e e o ten een i ene itis aee ee a deett eee ren lo niei 331 Thermocouple Calibration tes oer er ot a c e e eg aa e o en 333 Voltage Calibration ette ES EORR i eme poen P o e dee 333 HightZ Voltage Calibration ertet t e IU P NH E EE REAREA E EAA 333 ER ITALICUS 334 AINABOGUE INPUTS 55 er itec eite tee tert bert DIC RI 335 MO DUCE I O 3a iac eR e DI ERE E E Eher t Ea At ASI er Ate ih 336 DC OutputModule 5 tote e e e e e PR tendre ameet etii 336 alant 338 Dual PV Input Module treni rtr emere ae e s E REL Eas 338 pieds 338 TDSInput Module Conductance Calibration rmt meet tv t ev rd 339 4 Wire RTD Medule CaliBratiori ete tratte e o e e RR UR EU Re E UA RE REED Ehe Eee es 340 TO RESTORE FACTORY CALIBRATION VAL
178. HT ROT RET Dee 368 Z NIEeRTISIDDUE s ntn otn trt eo oeste tti tetintuttat a theta tf 369 Digital COMMUNICATORS eeu eee emere Deme iter re t ee tite 369 Ala 28 0 nisin otta staat sheet ation erage ODER RETE nn DRIED EORR 370 USEr IMESSAGES si setestossietelesateastataesnussinssadsnsssedesdssnsdasasteadsriesasdssuisnione beers e Aveta E DER NaN 370 Control functions saxaS edes are tae itt eel eee na id aden d og aa ARES 370 Setpointprogtarmimel oi REDIERE EROR IRR NOB Sanaa anna Ta 370 Advanced functions ese eR e IR RR OS Te a a A EORR EE ERES 370 General sp cification onone gg eM Ek 370 graphical tepresertatiorroferrorsz iiu imet tt ip RO ra cp DO a EEUU ER 371 mV Int coetu ite iei e eerte e E ee RENS 371 Mid range high impedance Input ertt ttt rerit ote tr He Ee Peri ai dien eh redit on 371 Aigh Level la Ut asses css cou sessseseabedaceussuesccelaeds a tenesdantaben sess tusucsstagevsdss uasssuesgesessastanaseetesadgotassedesseusdcasuaeas ANE i ETELE 372 SEWIresRED Pt100 Inp titype rr trm teer aep eret sr n cag rt op E TH n E tants 372 Thermocouple Inputtype s eee te RED RE UE BU CIR Rr ee ER ERE WAHR EVER ERR AA ERR epe ote 373 APPENDIX D PARAMETER UNITS AND ADDRESSES eerie eese eeee entes etna tnnt 374 GOMMONEDYUSED IPARAMEBTERS V tnter a tee Ote Te ETE Prius Io eur IURE e e d 374 PARAMETER UNITS eerte ee eceubenslsokscakssubaathacedecsds Sekacths suka NEA ERST A ER Pipe IRR ARTES 377 MODULE STA US MESSAGES s
179. I l l I I L I I I Up to 16 Digital Events for PSP 1 Up to 16 Digital Events for PSP 2 16 Up to 16 Digital Events for PSP 3 Figure 8 2 An Example of an Asynchronous Setpoint Program The configuration and operation of the synchronous programmer is described in the first part of this chapter the configuration and operation of the asynchronous programmer is described in the last part of this chapter where it differs from the synchronous programmer Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 73 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 8 2 SETPOINT PROGRAMMER DEFINITIONS This section defines the more common parameters to be found when running a 2704 programmer controller 8 2 1 Run In run the programmer varies the setpoint in accordance with the profile set in the active program 8 2 2 Hold In hold the programmer is frozen at its current point In this state you can make temporary changes to program parameters such as a target setpoint ramp rates and dwells if programmer configured for ramp rate or segment duration if programmer configured as Time to Target Such changes will only remain effective until the end of the currently running segment when they will be overwritten by the stored program values 8 2 3 Reset In reset the programmer is inactive and the controller behaves as a standard controller with the setpoint determined by the raise lower buttons 8 2 4 Servo
180. Input if necessary 5 Press to display the parameter list 6 Press or Y Input Val to select PV 7 Press parameter This button becomes a copy button in configuration mode 8 Press as many times as necessary to access the page header menu A 9 Press Or Uv lto select LP1 SETUP 10 Press to display the list of sub headers 11 Press E lor M to select Wiring 52 to copy this This Is The Display You Should See Select the wire source Menu Confia STANDARD I0 MODULE Copy the Parameter PV Input Val Address 05108 Copied Value 0 Copied Select the wire destination Menu Config Additional Notes This selects the PV Input Val parameter which is to be wired from This display confirms that the parameter with Modbus address 05108 ie PV Input Val has been copied This display appears for as long as the A M button is depressed Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes Select the wire source PV Src of LP1 is the parameter to be wired to 12 Press L2 to display the parameter list 13 Press A or Y to select PV Src if necessary The Loop Select button becomes a paste button in this mode LE1 SETUP hiring copied parameter ie 05108 to the PV Src of LPI Press to confirm Press
181. K A real time clock is provided for use with various timer functions in the controller 15 4 1 Clock Parameters Table Number This page allows you to configure the clock TIMER BLOCKS Clock 15 4 1 Page Mode Real time clock mode Run L3 Stop Set Time Real time clock time HH MM SS L1 R O when Mode Set Day Real time clock day Never L1 Monday R O when Tuesday Mode Set Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Mon Fri Mon Sat Sat Sun Every Day Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 221 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 15 5 TIME BASED ALARMS There are two alarms available which allow an output to be turned on or off at a set time and day 15 5 1 Timer Alarm Parameters Table Number This page allows you to set up Timer Alarm Parameters TIMER BLOCKS Alarm 1 or 15 5 1 2 Page EnableSrc Src Enable input wire source Enable input wire source wire source Modbus address address Noe Conf LI CM RTC Alarm 1 Enable Enables the timer alarm ad Sets the day to turn the alarm on Never Never Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Mon Fri Mon Sat Sat Sun Every Day On Time Sets the time of day to turn the 0 00 00 to 0 00 00 L3 alarm on 23 59 59 Sets the day to turn the alarm off Never Never L3 Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Mon Fri Mon Sat Sat Sun Every Day pue i Time Sets the time of or uum to turn the 0 00 00 to 0 00 00 ala
182. L 5 N oo 6 bine 100 to 240Vac 24 A 1 6 9 00 24Vac de M 15 10 24 X Oo 15 10 N x O Neutral 59 E Eun z Figure 2 5 Supply Voltage Connections 2 5 2 Relay Output A single changeover relay is provided as standard It can be configured as a control output or an alarm or event output Fixed relay connections re ane 3 Paid Y pen Relay Rating PF AB X Common 264Vac 2A Max A EM 1V 1mA Min L AC x Normally Closed Figure 2 6 Wiring Connections For Fixed Relay Output Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 19 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 2 5 3 Sensor Input Connections The fixed PV input can accept a range of sensors including Thermocouple RTD Pt100 Pyrometer Voltage e g 0 10Vdc or Milliamp e g 4 20mA signals These sensors are used to provide inputs to Control Loop 1 Thermocouple or Pyrometer RTD Pt100 Use the correct type of 3 wire platinum compensating cable x VH resistance x to extend wiring p thermometer SSS x VI x VI t S X v For 2 wire this is ra G9 v m alocallink gt amp v MESS V
183. L1 PV This connection is required so that PSP1 can use Loop 1 PV to servo start 6 In PROGRAM EDIT Wiring Page Set PSP2 Reset Src 01025 L2 PV This connection is required so that PSP2 can use Loop 2 PV to servo start 7 In LP1 SETUP Options Page Set Prog Setpoint PSP1 Connects PSP1 to become the program SP for Loop 1 8 In LP2 SETUP Options Page Set Prog Setpoint PSP2 Connects PSP2 to become the program SP for Loop 2 See Appendix D for list of Modbus addresses See Copy and Paste description in Chapter 5 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 95 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 8 21 ASYNCHRONOUS PROGRAMMER A summary of the functions available in the asynchronous programmer is given below Creation of programs is the same as for the synchronous programmer thus allowing for a different number of segments for each PSP The number of available programs for each PSP is fixed at 20 Twenty Program Groups are available Program Groups are described in section 8 22 Up to three programs may be configured into each program group Programs in each Program group are executed asynchronously They all start at the same time although it is possible to run say PSP1 and PSP2 with PSP3 not used then run PSP3 later Each program can have up to 16 event outputs and two user values per segment The first press of the PROG button allows the user to select the program group to run The
184. Loop Name Loop name chosen from User Text Default Text Default Conf see Section 7 2 6 or 01 to 50 User Text Text Graph Low Sets the lower limit on the trend Display Range L3 plot Graph High Sets the upper limit on the trend Display Range 3 plot Param Promote Selects the parameter which is to 1to 10 be promoted to the Summary Page L Param Name A name can be selected from User Default Text Text see section 7 2 6 and or 01 to 50 User Text replaces the number of the Param Promote parameter Param Access Sets the read write access level of Lev 1 Read Only the Param Promote parameter Lev 1 Alterable Lev 2 Read Only Lev 2 Alterable Parameters which have been promoted using Param Promote are listed at the end of this table as a preview of those which will appear in the Summary page in operation levels Param Address The modbus address of the Modbus address parameter selected by Param Promote See Appendix D 32 1 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 151 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 11 10 CASCADE CONTROL 11 10 1 Overview Cascade control is classified as an advanced control technique used for example to enable processes with long time constants to be controlled with the fastest possible response to process disturbances including setpoint changes whilst still minimising the potential for overshoot It is a combination of two PID controllers where the output signal from one the master forms the s
185. No of decimal points XXXXX to X XXXX Time transmitted as seconds sss Time transmitted as minutes mmm Time transmitted as hours hhh Time transmitted as tenths of seconds SS S Time transmitted as tenths of minutes mm m Time transmitted as tenths of hours hh h IEEE Float 32 bit see section 21 8 1 Euro REAL Time transmitted as 32 bit msec Euro TIME Disables the transaction None Set to Read 3 for parameters with modbus Read 3 function code 3 Set to Read 4 for parameters with modbus Read 4 function code 4 Set to Write to write at a repeat rate Write Set to Change Write to write only if the Change Write parameter value has changed Time between transmissions 0 is continuous 0 to 99 59 59 9 Set to good on leaving config Slave returned illegal address Slave returned illegal value Slave returned Modbus exception Error in message returned by slave Value read was out of limits or the parameter is unalterable Parameter is OEM secured and will not be transmitted No response from slave The master has no parameter associated with the specified modbus address Config only Parameter value unchanged since last transmit Relevant to change write only The slave does not support block write Good Addr Error Data Error Error Failed Store Error Secured Timed Out No Parameter Unchanged No Block Write Function codes are a single byte instruction to the slave describing the action to perf
186. Nov 12 263 Engineering Handbook 21 2 WIRING CONNECTIONS Before proceeding further please read Appendix B Safety and EMC information in the above handbooks The Digital Communications module for the master is fitted in Communications Module slot J and uses terminals JA to JF 2704 Controller The Digital Communications module for the slave is fitted in either slot J or slot H EIA422 EIA485 4 wire or EIA232 Rx connections in the master are wired to Tx connections of the slave Tx connections in the master are wired to Rx connections of the slave This is shown diagrammatically below l 2704 Master EIA422 EIA485 4 wire l Slave 1 EIA422 EIA485 4 wire EIA485 2 wire Connect A in the master to A of the slave Connect B in the master to B of the slave This is shown diagrammatically below 264 2704 A Master EIA485 Com 2704 Master EIA232 A Slave EIA485 Tx Rx Figure 21 1 Master Slave Connections Tx Slave 1 EIA232 Rx Com Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 21 2 1 Example Wiring Diagrams for Different Slaves The following diagrams show connections for a range of different controllers using EIA422 These are representative of typical slaves which may be used but could also include third party products using Modbus protocol EIA422 or EIA485 4 wire Comms c
187. OCKS 3 Press to show Sub headers Timer 1 To configure Timer 2 timer types m Timer 3 and 4 Press A or Y to scroll to the Timer 4 parameters required sub header GERI Clock To set time and day MODULE 10 Alarm 1 To wire and Alarm 2 set alarm outputs Totaliser1 To wire and Totaliser2 set totaliser Totaliser3 1 2 3 amp 4 Totaliser4 parameters TIMER BLOCKS Timer 1 BY s 5 Press C to selectthe parameter list for the required sub header The full list of parameters available under these list headers is shown in the following tables U 15 3 1 Timer Parameters Table Number This page allows you to configure timer type and set up Timer TIMER BLOCKS Timer 1 to 15 3 1 Parameters 4 Page Type Timer type Conf on Pulse Timer Off Delay Timer One Shot Timer Min On Timer Time Tmertim Time 0 00 00 0 00 00 0 pte ECU M input Turn On to start timing En Triggered Timer triggered timing R O L1 en Output Timer output Occurs when the Off Off L1 timer has timed out On Elapsed Time Timer elapsed time 0 00 00 0 R O L1 The above table is repeated for Timers 2 to 4 Lo To change hours minutes and seconds individually press and A together This will highlight each area individually Then use A or Y to change the highlighted value The maximum settable time is 99 59 59 9 220 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 15 4 THECLOC
188. OPERATORS uu ccecsecsssessetssesnecsseeecessecesesscesseceseseesseeaesseessesesesseesaeeeeesseesaeeags 247 Analogue Operations isc eset a RE ERR ERRORES GE AVE ENERGIE DM 248 TO CONFIGURE ANALOGUE OPERATORS eese trennen eter tenet ete be ie Er a egets ea eee Da aeneo 249 Analogue Operator Parameters creme eer ereie meret ei on IR b e Re Rer de 249 MultipletGperatetsczsa inesset eterne eme tiet taie ree ten ich 250 GascadingiMultiple Input Blocks nent Hep entem e ne o RR O Oen ime tege 250 Tenable multi operato rS S osio eesin tiere neisi DOO eomm qr een 251 to locate multi operator parameters siiani seiniin ioi ea aii 251 MULTORPERATOR Mu ltiQPA to 3 Page to peer t tere ae tede OAE 251 UseoLDStaulbee eec ceo cde cc IUE EE A 252 CHAPTER 19 LOGIC OPERATORS iere rene rhet eren eR eere Deere p Eee reor een rennen 253 Logic Operations oireen E 253 TO CONFIGURE LOGIC OPERATORS rtr depre OSA anon KES rE 254 Logic Operatof Patrarieters sn a nitro RECHTE IR CRI EORR EP P a p RR LEVEL AEn 254 PATCH WIRIN Gi nics E TESS S 255 Patch Wiring Paraimeters eonun ep en eL toe qn M I RR ILLE covatsvueccessvavecessaa RN ERE ANC E ETUR aa 255 CHAPTER 20 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS eeeeeeee eene einen eene en tnnt tnn sins tns senatus 256 WHAT IS DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS esee ennemi nren ere nes erret nnenn ens 256 TO CONFIGURE COMMUNICATIONS PARAMETERS
189. Proportional band PB 145 Elect Hi 2V Integral time Ti 0 6sec Filter time 0 4sec Derivative time Td Off All the internal variables of the loop and their limits are set to 0 100 range Figure 23 4 Precision 4 20mA Current Loop Retransmission 14bit i Channel C input and the retransmitted 4 20mA output must be connected together at the terminal of the Dual probe input The receiving instrument 4 20mA input and the other end of the channel C input should be isolated from each other It is the installers responsibility to ensure the appropriate isolation when using the Dual probe module Notes 1 To guarantee that the 4 20mA range is fully covered the channel output is calibrated at 3 8mA cal low and 20 5mA cal High 2 To utilise the full potential for high accuracy resolution extra care should be taken to ensure low levels of EM interference as follows keep connecting cables away from power cables ground Dig Common of the controller to local panel ground use shielded cables with the shield connected to local panel ground 300 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook Precise 0 10V Voltage Retransmission 15bit Using a single precision PV input PSU output and a feedback loop HiRes Output Heeei 1 ChA x P LI I 4 20mA b ET Retransmission Variable G i TRR iu g D Ch C PSU 0 100 Txder Burden resistor Scaling Pa
190. R ui rS A SPLo int FF_SP Re scale to 100 inZ AuxLR X 100 i Master Bae m AuxHR AuxLR b x X ind FF SP Figure 11 10 Cascade Controller in Full Scale Mode Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 154 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 11 10 6 LOOP SETUP Wiring page for Cascade Loop A controller is configured for cascade operation if Loop Type Cascade in LOOP SETUP Options page section 11 1 1 Table Number These parameters allow you to soft wire between function blocks LP1 SETUP 11 10 6 Wiring Page PV Src Process variable source Modbus address 05108 PVIn Val Casc FFwd Src Modbus address The above parameter does not appear if FF Type section 11 1 1 None E p EC NEN p Rem Lo OP Sr Remote lo power limit src Modbus address The above two parameters do not appear if Control Type section 11 1 1 On Off Rem SP Ena S Modbus address it 4 Remote SP Sr Modbus address B SP Select Sr Modbus address al Rt Lim Dis Src Modbus address Rt Lim Hld Src Modbus address Poa E a NEN O O AuxExtFBck Src Auxiliary external feedback Modbus address source q q d q Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 155 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 11 10 7 Cascade Parameters Table Number This list only appears if cascade is configured see section 11 1 1 and LP1 SETUP 11 107 allows you to set up parameters specific to cascade controllers Cascade Page C
191. Reset Src PSP2 Reset Src PSP3 Reset Src Figure 8 8 Example Programmer Wiring One Profile Three Loops 8 20 1 1 Implementation 1 In INSTRUMENT Options Page set Num of Loops 3 set Programmer Enabled 2 In PROGRAM EDIT Options Page set Num of PSPs 1 Note other parameters such as number of digital event outputs SP range and power failure recovery are also set in this page 3 In PROGRAM EDIT Wiring Page Set PV1 Src 00001 L1 PV This connection is required so that the programmer can use Loop 1 PV to calculate holdback 4 In PROGRAM EDIT Wiring Page Set PSP1 Reset Src 00001 L1 PV This connection is required so that the programmer can use Loop 1 PV to servo start 5 In LP1 SETUP Options Page Set Prog Setpoint PSP1 Connects PSP1 to become the program SP for Loop 1 6 In LP2 SETUP Options Page Set Prog Setpoint PSP1 Connects PSP1 to become the program SP for Loop 2 7 In LP3 SETUP Options Page Set Prog Setpoint PSP1 Connects PSP1 to become the program SP for Loop 3 See Appendix D for list of Modbus addresses See Copy and Paste description in Chapter 5 94 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 8 20 2 Two Profiles Two Loops This example explains how to configure a 2704 programmer to generate two setpoints which are then used to profile the setpoint for two independent control loops In this example PSP1 and PSP2 are sof
192. SEGMENT TYPES ie RO ODER ERENERENVES AYER ieee NEUEN EVER TREE nese eee 75 ARI N E ER AA E ter ERU ep lee ERE o RR RR ER I HERE USER UO ERRORS 75 Go Back To SEGMEN S incar a RR EE GENE AH UN ALIENI EUER EUR DILE RUN TOC EL EGRE TURN N e 76 melee m 76 Dre S 77 POWER FAV RECOVERY 32 5 tacet ctetu eaaet ette tete ias 78 HOLDBACK GUARANTEED SOAK ante e retra treat e t EEE EAN ERREUR amet EER 79 PROGRAM USERNALDUES e n n terere LERERHEEPMERDBMISDRHRAID AN Erico tet trat 80 Program User Value En reratiorns eene ente pe over a exe LIO UO RT OY b NI Dies 80 External Programi m BUTS oerte tU e PR ORDNUNG EEE E E E G E 80 PROEIPE LOCK C rd 80 Example TO CONFIGURE A SYNCHRONOUS PROGRAMMER sese 81 Example TO CONFIGURE SYNCHRONOUS PROGRAMMER TYPE ssessesseeseeseeseeseeseeseeseeaeeseeaeenes 82 PROGRAM EDIT Options Page testis nete held b c d e at ir e Tals 82 PROGRAMMER WIRING 5 3 m ae REGE DR KEN E R ERE ERE R REUS E REY ES ERE Ce EUR ear ERE Ye ERR T Er aeS 84 Programmer Function Block eret eii e Peer eei ote E dcr hti eec eate rennen 84 PROGRAM EDLITWiring3 Page antri ceteri erii been e e ERR Lee VE TE I LO REL L ce E FU TERM 85 TO CREATE OR EDITA PROGRAMS ncn nnm Ho m a m o a a DR D OD OR E ERE D Paene 86 Example To Access the Program Edit pages nennen 86 PROGRAM EDIT Program Page Parameters rire i ederet it em e e ERE 86 Fine
193. SSE USE Y RESP ENSE EXER HERE ERR REN NOE RENS ERE YRES Ne NN Ves 234 USERIPAGE STYEBES tri eee bene ratctetonmterererme retenta 234 Single Loop User Page ee e e te e UR HER REP edd E rii rir E E P nsn 234 Duall oop User Page erecta iet e m n ee SERERE ETUR RAIN AIAT aS 235 Triple Loop Yser Page Styl EN itr mmm te m temere eri er E E is 235 Triple Loop User Page Style 2 reenso saisir senat Enteni EEEE KESAEN EE EEEE EEE AE ve Eo ee CUR Ue 236 Status Grid User Page dete e e aH e HG RR EI n da rte ep a ea 236 Bal Gira Me R 237 Parameter list Style cette nep ER SU OR RR DR HORA RD RR ADR EORR DEOR E 237 To Configure S RUE dere 238 To Display theUser Page VIGW s t eerte metit imei mire ore ime dup te tiae iip ir ise ad 240 Auto manual operation from a user page ssssssssseeeeeeeeneneneeeneneenetrtnenee nennt nene innen 240 USERPAGE PARAMETER TABLES Kleeren ena eee epi ile eee vee 241 Ilao EAE oTa o peu M 241 BITIS oa eM O RS EETA E 242 Tr pledoop 1 3ndi2 oie EEEE TAEA T EE E E E 243 Status Grid Sarina i E E E ENa EEEE TN dr o A R TAAT UR Ree 244 Baf Graphie arie a i EEEa EA EEEE AEA E EASRA ESA PIENEN TASA N S 245 CIEN T 246 sul PX 246 CHAPTER 18 ANALOGUE AND MULTIPLE OPERATORS scsscsscsscssscssecssseseeseeees 247 WHAT ARE ANALOGUE
194. Select Cust Lin 2 using Y Y 4 Cust Lin 3 A o o c Switch 1 or EN 4 Monitor 1 LY BCD Input Parameters for Parameters for Parameters for 4 Boiler control Zirconia Probe Humidity c See Chapter 28 See Chapter See Chapter Y 13 1 13 4 Parameters for Input Operators See Chapter 14 C LY gt TIMER BLOCKS gt Y gt PATTERN GEN Y gt ANALOGSWITCH gt Y gt user VALUES EY PA Y Y Y n o Lo Y Select Y Y Select Timer 1 to 4 Select Dig Group 1 1 using using using Dig Group 2 LA Select r3 Alarm 1 amp 2 2 or using User Val 12 or Totaliser 1 to 4 or Y Lv A v Cy J a or c v Y Parameters for Parameters for Parameters for Pattern Gen Switch 8 User Values Timer Blocks See Chapter See Chapter See Chapter 15 16 1 16 3 Parameters for Analog Switch See Chapter 16 2 C V gt USER MESSAGES gt v gt USER SWITCHES gt v gt USER PAGES gt v gt USER PAGE 1to8 gt v gt Y Up to eight user defined pages Select Select appear here if using using Hn AO A UserPage2 A Gee Chapter 17 or User Page 3 or v v Y Parameters for User Messages See Chapter 16 4 e Y Parameters for User Switches See Chapter 16 5 Y Parameters for User Pages See Chapter 17 C gt GoTo ANALOGUE OPERS Next page Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 47 Engineering Handbook From USER PAGE X Previous page 2704 Controller
195. TNR ERUIT HET TECH EE TONES EIS 141 PIDICONTROLb i nnctntnacndnscustenatutietietuteett Atte EAM NIAE 142 Proportional Term 142 Integral Term 142 Derivative Term we 142 High and Low Cutback wilde PID Block Diagram su 143 Remote External OP Feedbatck 4 ae etre ben bie d REG ES E ee I RE Cei ofa Erg 143 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 11 4 7 FANIEIIIS DIAC 143 11 5 GAIN SCHEDULING eee EE zi e 11 5 1 Te Configure GainSchedullng s inepte tee diee AEE ete eee pc e ERE 11 5 2 PID P rarmiet rs noe eem E RODEO RE DO ORDRE ER E Ee a 11 5 3 PID Aux Parametefs x eoi dct ree vett era ote eaa m a OD e aed a e a d 11 6 OUTPUT PARAMETERS shesgbersheaeberebe 11 6 1 Table of Output Parameters 11 7 MOTORISED VALVE CONTROL 11 7 1 Motor Parameters 11 8 DIAGNOSTICS 11 8 1 Diagnostic Page m wiki ves 44 97 IDISRLAY S si E T dieta tete dee naeh ate elevatis 11 9 1 Display Page susti da epa d OL PUE TEE A e e n eiie de deed 11 10 CASCADE CONTROL 11 10 1 E DA I E IG ES E O A e ET EAEE EN EEA A R E EA ML E EE E eeu 11 10 3 Trim Mode weenie 11 10 4 Auto Manual Operation in Cascade tert aiaa aai 11 10 5 Cascade Controller Bl
196. TUNNG i sce test E C PERPE EHO CUP GR RR OU GE C QU De arde ted 12 3 TOJAUTOTUNE CONTOLLOOP LE Ls nine nAeDRERPSESPIR EOSORUPRESRBAESPSINCBANIENSAeems 169 12 3 1 Carbon Potential CONO h E 170 12 3 2 Autot ne Parameters ie ecien voa od n a XENON OTRO REID EDU ED VAI DINAR UNDAE 171 12 3 3 To View the State of AUtOtun 6 4 ec oe CONTIONE GU XR EE O NIE GE NAA PNE GOV REO OR de STR 171 12 4 MANUAL TUNING 172 12 4 1 Settingithe cutback values rem i NR VOR X ETERNI REIR er cen 172 12 4 2 Integral action and man alreset eer memi rettet t Re CHR Re Re depen retire tienen 173 12 4 3 WalVE POSIT OMACOMU lia sts Aee e Cem RI M E NL E eT 173 12 5 TUNING WHEN GAIN SCHEDULING IS USED 174 12 5 1 Tuning Procedure etian aE EEEE 174 12 6 CASCADE TUNING EET m 175 12 6 1 To Tune atFulbScal Cascade Eo0p ence ee eet ttim Rn 176 12 6 2 To Tune a Trim mode Cascade LOoOp nero cmetesenmime i e te DIRE EUG EXE ER VOR EXERCERE Ee eee 177 13 CHAPTER 13 CONTROLLER APPLICATIONS eeeeeeee eene en nenne tnnt tn sttns tins tns etna tenens 179 13 1 ZIRCONIA CARBON POTENTIAL CONTROL essen enne ennemi enne eren E innen 180 13 1 1 Temperature Control 4n erm treten p D en e die Ure cota ete NEU ties e EP coats 180 13 1 2 Carbon Potential Control ioc n ERGO P E IDEO DEO GOOD ANI I E E Un e e o as 180 13 1 3 Soocting Alari ossia cte eere DROP TE E E TONTA A A A 180 13 1 4 A
197. Terminals Screen attached atthis point Figure 23 7 Terminal Connections for Calibration e Make sure that Cable Offset Compensation parameter is set to 0 000 so that the conductance reading Module A Val is only due to cable capacitance itself It may be helpful to make a note of this value e Adjust Cable Offset parameter to equal that read by the Module A Val Stopping adjustment for more than 2 seconds will activate the compensation e Check that the compensated conductance reading is very close to zero Note that PV noise i e variation in reading may cause the reading to flip between positive and negative values On average these should add up to zero Ifthis is not the case readjust in small steps Cable Offset until the above is reached The noise increase around zero is particularly pronounced if large cable capacitance 20 40nF is compensated e Reconnect the probe Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 305 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 23 5 MODULE SCALING The IO modules are scaled as already described in Chapter 23 for the fixed inputs and outputs The procedures are repeated below 23 5 1 The PV Input Scaling of the PV input applies to linear process inputs eg linearised transducers where it is necessary to match the displayed reading to the electrical input levels from the transducer PV input scaling is not provided for direct thermocouple or RTD inputs Figure 23 8 shows an example of
198. The higher boundary 2 to 3 is normally set towards the top end of the thermocouple range and the lower boundary 1 to 2 set towards the lower end of the pyrometer or second thermocouple range The controller calculates a smooth transition between the two devices Input 2 High temperature lt thermocouple or pyrometer 2704 Temperature Input 1 controller Low temperature thermocouple lt 4 Temperature T Controller operates entirely on the higher temperature device Boundary 2 3 Controller operates on a Boundary 1 2 combination of both devices Controller operates entirely on the lower temperature device Y Time gt Figure 14 3 Thermocouple to Pyrometer Switching 14 4 1 Input Operators Switch Over Parameters Table Number This page allows you to set up and inspect Switch Over parameters INPUT OPERS 14 4 1 Switch 1 Page Parameter Description Value Default Enable To enable switch over Off Off Conf On Active Input Selected input Input 1 Input 2 Both Inputs nput 1 source Modbus nput 2 source address Switch Lo and Hi can be adjusted up to the limit set by Input Hi and Switch Lo and Switch Hi Output Value The current working value Display Range Output Status The conditions are OK Good or out of range Bad nput 1 Value The current working value Display Range Can be adjusted between the limits set by Input Lo and Input Hi in configuration level nput
199. This may be carried out at Access Level 3 Do This 1 From any display press as many times as necessary to access the page header menu 2 Press or Y to select STANDARD IO e 3 Press to show Sub headers 4 Press or Y to select PV Input if necessary 5 Press C to show Electrical Lo 6 Press again to select Electrical Lo 7 Press or Y to adjust the value 8 Press C to select Electrical Hi 9 Press A or Y to adjust the value 10 Press to select Eng Value Lo 11 Press or LY J to adjust the value 12 Press to select Eng Value Hi 13 Press A or Y to adjust the value 274 This Is The Display You Should See Meru Level 31 STANDARD IO 4 MODULE I0 DIAGN STANDARD I0 MODULE I0 STANDARD IQ PV Input STANDARD IO PY Inguri mmHs STANDARD IO PY Input mmHs Additional Notes The PV Input is connected to terminals VH V V Set this value to the lowest level of the input eg 4mA The units displayed here may be mV V mA or Ohms depending on what type of input is configured Set this value to the highest level ofthe input eg 20mA Set up the displayed value instrument minimum span which corresponds to the Electrical Lo input eg 2 50 Set up the displayed value instrument maximum span which corresponds to the Electrical Hi input eg 200 00 Part No HA026
200. Txdcr 2 Txdcr 3 This text can be user defined This parameter remains On once it has been set It requires to be switched Off manually It may be wired to an external digital input source such as a key switch Set the strain gauge bridge to its zeroed condition 8 Press las many times as necessary to scroll to Scale Low A lor v 9 Press to enter the low end calibration value 10 Press lto scroll to Scale High 11 Press l or Y to enter the high end calibration value 12 Press to scroll to Start Pnt 1 Cal 13 Press 4 lor Y to enter On TaDCR SCALING Txder 1 This will normally be zero In this example a value of 8000 is chosen which may represent 80 of the 0 10 000psi range of a pressure transducer This parameter can be configured to be initiated from a digital input and wired for example to an external switch An example of this wiring is given at the end of this chapter 344 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller e Tip To backscroll hold down and press A The controller automatically performs the procedure described in Section 24 2 During this time the Cal Active parameter will change to On When this parameter value changes back to Off the calibration is complete The Shunt State parameter will also change during the procedure to show when it is being connected On connected Off 2 disconnected Note It is possible to start the calibratio
201. UES 4 2 rnnt PenoEPRRPPeROPERSEHIBEBDE 342 CHAPTER 28 BOILER CONTROL e eeeeeeeeeeee eee en ee en st tns tinae th sth asina tens t ense ease tassa se ensens 343 IBtLOGUCtIOT octet thet este 8 cmatesue ioco poene ette temi md 343 Wat S nDST thee eere eene bite e pte eremi ree Rep eiie tee esee TA 343 HOW ISAS mmeas red ene eO CR ROC CORRER n OP RERRRRRRBERBPOCERER 344 Specific Cond Fre Dis 344 Temperature Correction Factor TCF25 Thiquid ccccsssssesssesessssssseesessseseenseessesensesesesesseeeesassceseesesseseaaeesasseeeeeeessenaetes 344 Probe Factor I tiom itle ai e er ash PE OCIO P CRI e tram Ee e D ERN 345 Probe Design and TDS Module OperatioN seoir sire eiiserie inaa a E AAKE AEAEE entente netten 345 Probe Deterioratlon n onma a A A E A ORO UR OU EE 345 PINSON RER S 346 10 EEES 346 TDS Function Block mte tested nad nid HAE aid AREE E A RANA NEN VEN EET a NaN VEN ATAPA eR RR FEL aali 347 Installation versus Operation Modles nerit tin thesi tt ttes iicet cibi tet iner EEE EEEa Eaa 347 Probe Deterioration Scaling ua tetti et n ie p PIRA YER YE UR ND AS CHER TIL EI Fee reete 347 TDS Furiction Block Parameters ies eoe irent tne IU e i ER ERE ARE CIERRE FACER CR ER EDEN rre tine c Ud 348 Further Parameter Descriptlons i utt tae rU ORE ON De NOR CQ Oe ovp dee eiie 350 bottom blowdowrn nctiomBIOGle ut oec ci aoe eire eee e e
202. UOKRWNH O N BR 32 32 1 322 32 3 APPENDIX B SAFETY AND EMC INFORMATION creen eene eee enn nens enn tnnt tnn sins stnnes 362 SACL cease rcs C n M M MEM RE M E ee ee ee ea 362 Electromagnetic compatibility itt tri e RR RIO EELT TEE aus near ERI TR DINI EERR UR 362 GENERAL 3 E E AR E AAN EE IEE etie bete None attin edet mnc oe eon ed tid 362 SEIVICCVAMO FED alld sted P 362 Electrostatic discharge precautions irt ct RH OR HR HR VERAX LC YER EE EXVAY EE TREES IAN 362 ETE E E E RIT E TE E E E AEE EET 362 Installation Safety Requirements eene tette retrtr eret nne rennes 363 Satety Symbols c Pe a t a RE OE REPERI ERR BRNO XE YR OX ve tone 363 Personnels oret UEM MM e D E ITE 363 Enclosdre ohlive Balises cunc e maa NEE AN E EAT 363 ejje es 363 WIEITYG 72 coeno recie E nc eee i Poe ero i E e SIE sev HH e YE DR ERE SCR ETE TEES TERES HE HOLD UER SERE CERTUS RTEREOR 363 der T igizel ii ols ER SAANS 364 Earth leakage CUrrent eee cantet eet a UR ERREUR CEDE ERRRREER SECURE DTIRMREV IR XE C E E 364 Overcurrent PrE Mayrin verter tror teet ste ctt vov ctii Contes verb vri vette i e eise dier tid 364 V lt ge ratin giye m M 364 Conductive PONT OM b E 364 Over temperature Protecta snura sie t LH ERE HR IE DERI i RR T ea eH be dtes 364 Groundirig of the tempe
203. USER PAGE STYLES As stated above there are eight page styles These are Single Loop Dual Loop Triple Loop style 1 Triple Loop style 2 Status Grid Bar Graph Blank this could be used for example in a photographic development area Parameter List Qo mugs S RN s Each of these screens defines a fixed format on which you can place parameters suited to your particular application The position of each custom parameter is dictated by a number as shown on each of the screen views which follow To define the parameter choose the number using Custom Param in the USER PAGES list followed by Custom Ad Custom is used to refer to parameters which are placed on the User Page Similarly Promote is used to refer to parameters which are promoted to the list at the bottom of each screen If the selected parameter is a bar graph parameter two additional parameters Custom GraphHi and Custom GraphLo will be available 17 2 1 Single Loop User Page Page name can be chosen from user text The position of Page Name each ON OFF parameter is boolean fixed and parameters 8 XXXXX dictated by its ABC number Parameter indicated next name from 9 XXXXX to the user text or parameter default text Parameter name XXXXX truncated Parameter name xxxxx Parameter names can be chosen from user text Parameter name XXXXX Scroll List Up to 10 parameters can be promoted to the scroll list Figure
204. User Text Resolution of the values displayed A Name for the Chamber chosen from User Text 13 13 3 Vacuum Function Block A description of function blocks is given in Chapter 4 The function block for the vacuum controller is shown in Figure 13 12 below and allows the user to soft wire to other devices within the controller to produce an individual control strategy Vacuum block Hi Guage Src Status Src Enable Vac Src Lo Gauge Src Status Src B Gauge Src Status Src Sec D Val Src Pump On Src Leak T Src Figure 13 12 Vacuum Function Block 202 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 13 14 VACUUM CONTROLLER WIRING EXAMPLES The vacuum function block may be internally wired in software to control specific applications Soft Wiring is described in Chapter 5 13 14 1 Simple Temperature and Vacuum Control The following example is included to show the principle of wiring between function blocks It is not necessarily intended to be a complete solution to an application The vacuum function block has inputs from three vacuum gauges A number of outputs are available as listed in the parameter tables The example shows wiring from three of the setpoint outputs and a digital output used to turn the pump off This example corresponds to the physical wiring diagram Figure 13 10 The principle of wiring to other outputs is the same A PID control block is used for temperature control receiving its setpo
205. V noise resolution 300uV OFF 150uV O 4sec 100uV 1 6sec Calibration accuracy 25 C lt 0 5mV 0 1 of reading Drift with ambient temperature lt 0 01mV 0 006 of reading per C Linearity error lt 0 02 ofspan i e 2mV Input Impedance 0 66 MQ 2 10 12 Figure 31 3 Error Graph 0 10V Input 31 24 4 3 Wire RTD Pt 100 Input type Resistance measurement specification in Ohms Range 0 to 400Q with up to 22Qin each connecting lead Noise resolution 8mO 0 4sec 4m 1 6sec Calibration accuracy limits 25 C lt 35mQ 110Q 0 03 of reading 110Q Drift with ambient temperature 0 002 of reading per C Error eae C Linearity error of max i 44 5 eO 0 7 errors E at 0 to 50 C Pt 100 measurement specification in C ot Range d 200 C to 850 C ol L 4 The actual oo and typical errors at 0 to 50 C Noise resolution 0 02 C 0 4sec 0 01 C 1 6sec Specified limit of max error at ambient 25 Calibration accuracy limit 25 C lt 0 1 C 0 03 of reading in C Drift with ambient temperature lt 0 0055 C 0 002 of reading in C per C of ambient change Linearity Linearisation error oC lt 55 mC i e 50 mC 5 mC rel Figure 31 4 Error Graph RTD Input 372 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 31 24 5 Thermocouple Input type
206. Val Lo 100 Alternatively one channel can be used with fixed 4mA while Eng Val Hi 100 the other is varied between 4 and 20mA Elec Lo 4mA The polarity of the desired signal depends on which channel is Elect Hi 20mA fixed Figure 23 2 Connections to Obtain a Bipolar 16mA Current Output Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 297 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 23 3 14 Dual DC Output Module IO Parameters Table Number This page allows you to set the parameters for a Dual DC Output module MODULE IO Module 23 3 14 This module can only be fitted in slots 1 4 and 5 4C Page This module has two outputs Parameters are displayed under channel A and channel C Channel A and channel C can be 4 20mA or PSU outputs Channelidentification DCOw o Jo TO Channel Type Output type Conf mA analogue output mA Volts transmitter PSU Volts Channel Name User defined name for Default Conf the channel Select from text User Text page section 7 2 6 The following parameters are shown for Channel Type mA only Wire Src Source to which the Modbus address Conf channel is wired Electrical Lo Electrical low input level O P range 4 00 L3 min See output Electrical Hi Electrical high inputlevel O P range 20 00 max scaling Electrical Val The current electrical value of the output in 4 to 20mA operation mode Module 1 4 or The current output value 100 0 5 AVal can be in operation mode ve values a
207. Weight T4DCR SCALING Txdcr1 On OFF OFF OFF 0 0 1000 Figure 24 2 Load Cell Calibration 24 3 1 To Calibrate a Load Cell The controller must have been configured for Cal Type Load Cell and the transducer connected as shown in Chapter 2 INSTALLATION Then Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes Enable calibration as described in steps 1 7 of section 24 2 1 Then set the load cell to its zeroed condition This parameter can be configured so that it is activated from a digital input and wired for example to an external switch 1 Press C las many times as necessary TTE to scroll to Start Pnt1 Cal An example of this wiring is given A Y Neo On 2 Press lor to On at the end of this chapter During the time taken for the controller to calculate the low point calibration value the Cal Active parameter will be On When the Calibration low procedure is complete place the reference load on the load cell It can be configured to be initiated from a digital input and wired for example to an external switch 3 Press Lo to scroll to Start Pnt2 Cal An example of this wiring is A v 4 Press d to On given at the end of this chapter Note Scale High is the high calibration point and Scale Low is the low calibration point These should be set to the range over which calibration is required Threshold Value applies as in the previous se
208. Y HR ects e THER YHP MSS rese An teenage 355 Bottom Blowdown of MultipleBoil rss rrt ni t PR EB etre maaan eee 355 Operating Principles of High Integrity Interlock Bus sse tette tenter tetntente tenens 356 BlowdowntSequerntce s con etiem io t AT EAE EEAO eee inti timet vets ciatuedsuelsbalvetonsensverssetler 357 Non high integrity Interlock Bus ttt emeret tenter hte PR ira er e Ee ries rok LEA 357 META nel 357 Bottom Blowdown Parahmeters i i ar cti te tee c ma e p E Lp e eee pite eei ier 358 Example To Performia Boiler Blowdown 4 eti e iecit tet eee E eq ee Ee ar eU bep e 359 PDSAAPUE MOG Ue Em 359 APPENDIX A ORDER CODE sic ccsececececocececeoscesecesesesesececesesececesertcececescerecerecerecessesecesecesteeseees 360 liardwate cOdex edades tect a Rote e hated rte Meee Meee Meee eter e tte es prster quick start code Quickstart code examples t videam mtettame vie bue hase EC PO DID better fere 361 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 9 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 30 30 1 30 1 1 30 2 30 3 30 3 1 30 3 2 30 4 30 4 1 30 4 2 30 4 3 30 4 4 30 4 5 30 4 6 30 4 7 30 4 8 30 4 9 30 4 10 30 4 11 30 4 12 30 5 30 5 1 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 94 31 31 31 31 3d 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 31 ady 31 24 1 31 242 31 24 3 31 24 4 31 24 5 SDomNAWUBRWDH gt No No NO NO 2 La la La La La La La La WHA DOODANA
209. able if Enabled as described in section 7 2 many times as necessary to access the page header menu 2 Press A lor Y to select USER VALUES 3 Press to show Sub headers 4 Press lor Y to select User Val 1 to 12 dapi The list of User Value parameters available under this list header is shown in the following table 16 3 2 User Values Parameter Table Table Number This page allows you to configure User Values USER VALUES 16 3 2 User Val 1 Page Resolution User values resolution Ia Conf User values low limit Display min to display max High Limit User values high limit Display min to display max User Val Enu Allows a name chosen from User Not Enumerated Conf Text to be given to the User 01 Usr1 to 50 Usr50 Value The above table is repeated for User Values 2 to 12 Note It is often required to generate a User Value 1 and to wire this from a source A User Value can be used for this but this takes up one or more of the User Values available An alternative is to use the parameter Const 1 which is a User Value 1 This parameter is listed in Appendix D When using Custom Enumerations the Resolution should not be set to more than one decimal point since the User Text library is limited to 50 strings See also Example 16 6 1 3 228 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 16 4 USER MESSAGES A User Message takes the form of a pop window which will be
210. able should be daisy chained as shown from one instrument to the next and not connected from a star point The screen should be connected through as shown ev pgs 220 ohm termination resistors across the Rx terminals of the master Screen grounded Twisted pair tone throughout point 220 ohm termination resistors across the Rx terminals of the last Rx Tx controller in the chain Rx Com Tx Rx Com Tx Controller Controller Controller Controller Type 902 Type 2200 Type 94C Type 00EPC Up to 32 instruments Slave Terminal Numbers for Different Instruments Terminal 2200 902 3 4 94C 900EPC 818 5 Function 2400 2600 2700 Tx HE F1 11 X1 15 Tx HF F2 12 X2 16 Rx HB F3 13 X3 13 Rx HC F4 14 X4 14 Com HD F5 15 X5 17 Figure 21 2 Example Wiring RS422 or RS485 4 wire for Different Slaves Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 265 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller EIA485 2 wire Slave Terminal Numbers Terminal Function 2200 2400 2600 2700 A HE B HF Com HD 220 ohm termination lt resistors across the Rx Comms cable should be daisy chained as shown terminals of the master rom one instrument to the next and not connected from a star point The screen should be linked through as shown P d Screen grounded at Twisted pair throughout one point 220 ohm termination resistors across the Rx
211. ade and that input 1 is used as the cascade input If the block is in cascade and the status of input wire is bad the value given by the Casc Numlps Src wire will not be used in any calculations or added to the Num Ips output The select operation input the Casc Numlps input and the six data inputs are wireable The block outputs the result of the operation the number of inputs used in the calculation and status Operation Source Multiple Input Operator Output Value Operation Status Resolution Num Ips Units Casc Numlps Src gt Input 1 Src Input 2 Src Input 3 Src Input 4 Src Input 5 Src Input 6 Src Default Default Value Low Limit High Limit Figure 18 2 Multiple Input Operator Block 18 3 1 Cascading Multiple Input Blocks If the block is to be used to find an average of more than 6 inputs it can be cascaded to allow this to happen The correct way to cascade blocks for average is to perform sum operations and then cascade into an Average block at the end of the chain The diagram below indicates how to implement an average of more than six values Casc Numlps Input 1 Num Ips Input 2 Output Value Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Casc Numlps Input 1 Output Value Input 2 Num lps Input 3 Input 4 Input 5 Input 6 Average Figure 18 3 Cascading More Than S
212. against time The measured value may be any analogue value available in the controller 10 2 1 Full Scale High The Process Variable PV exceeds a set high level Alarm ON PV Alarm OFF Hysteresis is the difference between the alarm ON value and the alarm OFF value It is used to prevent relay chatter Hysteresis I Alarm setpoint NC duum mue cU Ned T I Li Time gt 10 2 2 Full Scale Low The Process Variable PV exceeds a set low level 4 Alarm ON E ee a S Alarm OFF 4 I I I l l I Alarm setpoint e JH RP E A l l 1 I 1 I 1 1 Time 10 2 3 Deviation High Alarm The alarm occurs when the difference between the process variable and the setpoint is positive by greater than the alarm setpoint Note For User Alarms the deviation is the difference between the two user wired analogue inputs PV Alarm ON Alarm OFF Setpoint Working Setpoint fmm I TUUM D X Process Variable Time 120 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 10 2 4 Deviation Low Alarm The alarm occurs when the difference between the process variable and the setpoint is negative by greater than the alarm setpoint Engineering Handbook Note For User Alarms the deviation is the difference between the two user wired analogue inputs 7 PV Working Setpoint g
213. al number of segments available is 100 per program with a maximum of 600 for the Time to Target Programmer and 480 for the Ramp Rate programmer The 2704 programmer may store up to 20 programs as standard with up to 60 if purchased It is often necessary to switch external devices at particular times during the program Digital event outputs can be programmed to operate during those segments 8 1 1 Synchronous Programmer In a synchronous programmer all PSPs are run on a common timebase That is they all start at the same time and the time duration of a segment is the same for each PSP This is shown in Figure 8 1 Program 1 Segment 1 ic m Profile Setpoint1 Segment 1 Target Profile Profile Setpoint 3 N Time f 3 l i Fc aM Start Run 1h 2h 3h 4h 5h 6h 7h 8h Time 16 Up to 16 Digital Events for the program Figure 8 1 An Example of a Synchronous Setpoint Program 72 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 8 1 2 Asynchronous Programmer In an asynchronous programmer up to three PSPs can be run with a different number of segments based on an independent time base Each PSP can start at the same time or can be started individually PV PSP1 PSP2 PSP3 7h 8h Time 16 I I I I I I I I I i Start Run 1
214. al state of the boiler and an effectiveness of the feedwater treatment Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 345 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 28 3 6 Driver O P The level of the driver signal i e the ac voltage between terminals A and D is monitored by the controller and displayed as a of the maximum possible signal 5Vpp In order to retain 0 4Vpp at the probe the driver signal will always be sufficiently greater than this to compensate for the voltage drop along the wires and the losses in the probe itself The compensation for probe losses applies only when 3 or 4 electrodes are employed and monitoring of Driver O P can be used to indicate the extent of probe scaling With 2 electrode probes provided the wire losses are relatively small the Driver O P will remain at less than 1096 whereas with clean 2 or 3 electrode probes it will be somewhere between 10 and 20 depending on probe geometry The latter may easily exceed 100 for heavily soiled electrodes A value gt 110 causes Sensor Break 28 3 7 Bubbles When measuring TDS in an environment where the liquid is hot for example a boiler system there is always the chance that bubble s are going to be generated and will interfere with the signal This is because the conductance of steam for example is less than that of water Therefore when bubbles come in contact with the electrodes of the TDS probe the effective conductance will drop If this were viewed on a graph the bub
215. alue Default Access Level Loop Type To configure loop type Single As order code Conf Cascade Override Ratio Control Type Control type See note 1 As order code Control Action Control action Reverse Reverse Conf Direct Aux Ctl Action 2 Control action of the auxiliar Reverse Reverse Conf y loop Direct Cool Type Cooling action Linear Conf Oil Water Fan Prog Setpoint Loop 1 PSP select Deriv Type Derivative type PV PV Conf Error FF Type Feedforward type None Conf Remote FeedFwd SP Feedforward PV Feedforward Force Man Mode Forced manual output mode Rate Lim Units Rate limit units Per Second Per minute Conf Per Minute Per Hour Bumpless PD Initialises the manual reset on Yes Yes Conf Auto Manual transfer No Ti Td Units Integral and Derivative time units ec sec Conf min Off n s OnOff SBk Type Sensor break action Only 100 appears if On Off control is 0 configured 100 Prop Bnd Units Proportional band units Eng Units and Enable Pwr Fbk Power feedback enable C Conf O Rem SP Config Remote setpoint configuration SP Only Conf LSP Trim RSP Trim SBrk Type Sensor break type Output Conf Hold Manual Track Manual track Off Conf Trac Remote Track Remote tracking Off Conf Trac f Program Track Programmer track Of Conf Trac Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 135 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller Table Number 11 1 1 LP1 SETUP Options Page This page determ
216. alues used by instrument to calculate TDS TDS Cal K Factor val Temp Coef val is valid Factor Coef As set by user As set by user As set by user As set by user however it applies only to temperatures outside the Table Determined by the As set by user TDS ca Determined by the As set by user however it applies only to TDS calibration temperatures outside the Table Determined by the Default value 296 C or the last value user set or TDS ca auto calculated before setting Temp Coef to AUTO Determined by the Extrapolated average value from the start and end TDS calibration points of the Table As set by user Determined by the last TDS calibration however it applies only to temperatures outside the Table As set by user Determined by the last TDS calibration Note that if Use Table parameter is selected as YES then for liquid temperatures within the tabulated region the temperature compensation is done using the values extrapolated from this table Also note that only when there is a TCF table available will the Use Table parameter show enumerations for Yes and No 350 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 28 4 4 3 Set up Parameter The TDS Function block is required to complete its installation set up and calibration while the system is running not in Conf access level It is therefore ne
217. alve is opened While a boiler is in the pre wait blowdown or cool down states all other boilers connected to the network will be inhibited from performing blowdown This is necessary as the blowdown pipe or vessel is only capable of dealing with one blowdown at a time If a blowdown is inhibited by another blowdown in progress the system will wait until the cool down period has expired before blowdown continues Figure 28 3 shows an overview of the high integrity bottom blowdown system connected to three boilers D Any digital I O terminal iler 3 Blowdown Valve 3 D D D Blowdown Valve 2 Blowdown Valve 1 D D Valve 1 open output Valve Controller 1 open closed Controller 2 Controller 3 Receiver Vessel limit switch feedback optional Blowdown inhibit and network integrity checking Figure 28 3 Blowdown Network Integrity Checking Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 355 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 28 5 2 Operating Principles of High Integrity Interlock Bus Interlocking of instruments is shown in Figure 28 4 D Input B B Inhibit I P A Relay B Inhibit O P AA l po j I oD Controller 1 4 B B Valve switch closed valve closed l 5V D Input B B Valve l Output It Figure 28 4 Interlock Bus Each controller contains a floating switch output and a digital input with a pull up The switches are no
218. amber Status Chamber fault as determined by Good ORing the status of each gauge Bad Graph Vac Lo High point for graph scaling Vacuum display range Graph Vac Hi Low point for graph scaling Vacuum display range Chamber Name A user defined name for the chamber Usr 01 to 50 Text Note Text shown in ta ics is the default which may be changed by the user u m I 200 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 13 13 CONFIGURATION LEVEL In configuration level you can choose the way in which you want the controller to operate the format of the operator display the name of the chamber in use and the names of the gauges The parameters available have already been listed in the preceding tables This section includes some examples of the configuration of a vacuum controller 13 13 1 To Configure the Vacuum Summary as the HOME Page The vacuum summary display shown in Figure 13 11 can be configured to be the start up page when the controller is powered up or when entering a new access level from configuration level Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press as many times as necessary to access INSTRUMENT We the page header menu 1 2 Press 4 lor Y to select INSTRUMENT Note The vacuum block can be Enabled or Disabled in the INSTRUMENT Options menu If it is disabled none of the vacuum parameters are shown 3 Press Le to select sub
219. amber down to an initial level before the high vacuum pump is started If a level of vacuum is not reached in a time both of which are settable by the user then the roughing pump timeout status is set The roughing pump timeout can be configured such that the vacuum measurement used for the timeout can be either the low vacuum gauge or the backing vacuum gauge When the roughing pump is started the PUMP TOUT Figure 13 11 indicator flashes and continues to flash until the timeout is complete If at the end of the timeout the required vacuum level is not reached the indicator stays permanently on 13 8 6 Leak Detection Vacuum chamber leaks are typically categorised into two areas virtual leaks and real leaks A virtual leak is a decrease in vacuum caused by outgassing of the workpiece and the chamber material gaskets etc Therefore in order for a leak to be detected the reduction in vacuum must be monitored over a period of time with the pumps turned off If there is a real leak the vacuum will continue to reduce whereas if a virtual leak is present the vacuum will appear to decrease at a constant rate but then level off to give a steady vacuum reading The leak detection provides a measure of the rate of change of vacuum in vacuum units min This is compared with an acceptable leak rate value after a timeout period If the leak rate is not acceptable a leak fault will be indicated using the leak status parameter When the measurement is being
220. amental characteristics of the controller and it is this level which is described in this manual View Config This is a read only level which allows you to view the configuration of the controller It is not possible to change parameter values in this level It is not possible to read passcodes in this level 6 2 PASSCODES On switch on the controller defaults to Level 1 which is not protected by a passcode A limited set of parameters can be changed in this level The parameter tables in each chapter list those parameters which can be changed Level 3 These are parameters which are generally required when commissioning the controller Any page at this level can also be configured to appear at Level 2 Level 2 level 3 and Configuration level are protected by passcodes The default passcodes set in a new controller are Level 2 Passcode 2 Level 3 Passcode 3 View Config Passcode 2704 Config Passcode 4 These passcodes with the exception of View Config can be changed in configuration level If a passcode of None has been entered for any level apart from View Config which is fixed it will not be necessary to enter a passcode to enter that level Note In configuration mode the controller enters a standby state in which all outputs are frozen If the controller is connected to a process it no longer controls that process when it is in Configuration mode 56 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controll
221. ameter value Only appears if a parameter is promoted Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 245 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 17 5 6 Parameter List Table Number This page allows you to configure a parameter list user page USER PAGES 17 5 6 User Page 1 to 8 Level Page Location Defines where the page is None Conf located Main Page Loop Summary Page Style Defines the style of the page Parameter List Conf Single Loop Dual loop Triple Loop 1 Triple Loop 2 Status Grid Bar Graph Blank Page Auto Man Key Auto manual button is associated None Conf with this user page Page Name Defines the name which appears Default Text Default Conf in the header at the top of the 01 to 100 User Text Text page Promote Add Promote parameter address ModbusAddress Address Modbus Address Conf Promote Name Promote parameter name from Default Text Default Conf user text 01 to 50 User Text Text Promote Acc Access level of the promoted Lev 1 Read Only Conf parameter Lev 1 Alterable Lev 2 Read Only Lev 2 Alterable Promote Value Promoted parameter value Only appears if a parameter is promoted 17 5 7 Blank Page The blank page is available for those applications which require the controller to operate but with the display switched off A typical application may be for use in a photographic dark room The Parameter Auto Man Key can still be associated with the Blank Page Remember however to ensure that the parameter
222. ameters for a Potentiometer Input MODULE IO Module xA 23 3 8 module Page Parameter Name Parameter Description Default Units Engineering units See section 32 2 Resolution Display resolution XXXXX to X XXXX or SCI scientifc SBrk Fallback Sensor break fallback Off Downscale Access Level R Conf Conf c O Upscale Eng Val Lo Engineering value low Display Eng Val Hi Engineering value high range Co Module 1A Val The current value in engineering units R O Module 1A can be a user defined name Channel Name User defined name for the channel Default Select from User Text Page Section 7 2 6 Text Cal State Allows the potentiometer to be Idle calibrated Pot Low Pos Pot High Pos Restore Fact Filter Time Input filter time Off to 0 10 00 0 R O Conf Co rc B This module has a single input Its parameters are displayed under channel A 23 3 9 PV Input Table Number This page allows you to set the parameters for a PV Input module MODULE IO Module 3 or 23 3 9 This module can only be fitted in slots 3 or 6 6 A Page Ident Module identification PV Input ju Channel Type Input Output type RTD Conf Thermocouple Pyrometer 40mV 80mV mA Volts HZVolts Log10 MENS Units Engineering units See section 32 2 Resolution Display resolution XXXXX to X XXXX or SCI SBrk Impedance Sensor break enable for high output Off Conf impedance sensors See section 23 6 3 SBrk fallback Sen
223. and Coarse Hola back qu EEN 87 Example To Set Up Each Segment of a Program eerte 88 PROGRAM EDIT Segment Parameters i orte terre tiere ir rene bep ee o ee e ETE AN eee Hope t epa eL eae Ped 88 TO RUN A SYNCHRONOUS PROGRAM sseeeeeeenee nennen EA a erret erinnere tenete nne 90 TO HOED A PROGRAMss accnnnanan cave e e PR RUE LEE E CE ERRARE LER ERE A ECHO RR rasio 90 TO RESETA PROGRAM iir p RR REOR RE r RES E Er ERE CHER ERES ERUE YE ee DERE ERE EHE ERE SERERE ERES eR Eee gage 90 rej DIre ir IMOUTS iig H 90 From Digital Communications ciet exte e ette teste eet Ln He RD CURL ERREUR NE AEE HH eee Fed deve 90 Fromithe PROGRAM RUN Pages iiiter cbe te i ient ette vckeesevedctsdsenekccduvedecsbseusvesend ig lovceas tevibastelovssecednnsaatedes 90 Example To View the State of a Running Program sss 91 Run Parameter Tables ei rete enr nete qe reet pete ter itle reiecta de keines Lepus PUER 91 PROGRAMMER WIRING EXAMPBPEES 3 531 00 retreat Rte c tta ete aerae ean 94 One Profile Three LOOPS rninn RE 94 Twe Profiles TWOLOGPS E HR E n A A N T RNE 95 AAO EA ole EI E E T T UU ED ET 96 Progra Mi Grou pSr onneen a REED OE CERO E RP UN AAA AAE EPEa Aa 97 Example TO CONFIGURE AN ASYNCHRONOUS PROGRAMM ER essere 98 Example TO CONFIGURE ASYNCHRONOUS PROGRAMMER TYPE sssssesseeseeseeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeenees 99 Program
224. annel Name User defined name for the channel Select Default Conf from User Text page section 7 2 6 text The following parameters are shown for Channel Type mA only Wire Src Source to which the channel is wired Modbus address Conf Electrical Lo Electrical low input level O P range 4 00 L3 min See Electrical Hi Electrical high input level O P range 20 00 output max scaling Electrical Val The current electrical value of the output in 4 to 20mA R O L3 operation mode Module 1 4 or The current output value in operation mode 100 0 R O L3 5 A Val can be a ve values are not user defined used name Cal state Allows the module to be calibrated Idle Conf Cal Low Confirm Go Now Trim O P Accept Cal High Restore Factory Save Cal Trim Output calibration trim Conf Only appears when Cal State Now Trim O P Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 303 Engineering Handbook 23 4 TDS INPUT MODULE 2704 Controller The TDS module is specific to TDS measurement and provides a hardware interface with a TDS probe It can be fitted into any module slot except slot 2 A 1KHz ac signal is produced at terminal A with respect to terminal D as earth The driver sense terminal B and the earth sense terminal C measures the return voltage and automatically compensates for cable resistance and other sources of voltage drop The module returns Conductance directly produced by the probe as the main variable T
225. apmarketing iom invensys com Taipei City Office T 886 2 8797 1001 F 886 2 2799 7071 E apmarketing iom invensys com UNITED KINGDOM Worthing Eurotherm Limited T 44 1903 268500 F 44 1903 265982 E info eurotherm uk invensys com U S A Ashburn VA Invensys Eurotherm T 1 703 724 7300 F 1 703 724 7301 E info eurotherm us invensys com ED70 Contact details correct at time of print All rights are strictly reserved No part of this document may be reproduced modified or transmitted in any form by any means neither may it be stored in a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates without the prior written permission of Invensys Eurotherm Limited Invensys Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement The specifications in this document may therefore be changed without notice The information in this document is given in good faith but is intended for guidance only Invensys Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility for any losses arising from errors in this document Represented by HA026933 7 CN29089 invensyss Eurotherm
226. arameters TIMER BLOCKS 15 6 1 Totaliser1 to 4 Page reuse Tomisermonteredpaameersurs Modbuseddress feo esse Towerrsetsouce Medbursdiee feo Rune Tewisernnsouee Wosa Gen Totaliser resolution XXXXX Conf Reset Resets the totaliser No Yes Run Runs the totaliser Run Reset Hold Holds the totaliser at its current value Hold Note Continue The Run amp Hold parameters are designed to be wired to for example digital inputs Run must be on and Hold must be off for the totaliser to operate This shows the totalised value 99999 t o 9999 Alarm Setpoint Sets the totalised value at which an alarm will occur Alarm Output This is a read only value which indicates the Off alarm output On or Off The totalised value can be a positive number or a negative number If the number is positive the alarm occurs when Total gt Alarm Setpoint If the number is negative the alarm occurs when Total gt Alarm Setpoint Input Val Totaliser monitored value 9999 to 99999 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 223 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 15 7 APPLICATION EXAMPLE 15 7 14 Compressor Timer This example uses the Min On Timer to start a compressor in an environmental chamber The compressor must be kept running for 5 to 15 minutes after the controller stops calling for cooling If the controller starts to call for cooling again the
227. arameters allow you to configure PID sets LP1 SETUP 11 5 2 PID Page Remote FFwd The above five parameters are only shown if FF Type LP7 SETUP Options Remote SP or PV FF Rem Sched IP Remote input Display range Only shown if Schedule Type below Rem Sched IP O O Note 1 off Calc Control Hold Control hold flag Freezes the control output Ye Ye Integral Hold Integral hold flag No Loop Brk Time Loop break time ff n s s Part No HA026933 Issue7 0 Nov 12 145 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller Table Number These parameters allow you to configure PID sets LP1 SETUP 11 5 2 PID Page Off Schedule Type Scheduling type Off Conf Set SP PV Error OP Rem Sched IP Wired Active PID Set The PID set in current use PID Set 1 to 6 R O L1 Active An Val Displays the current analogue value R O L1 being used 1 2 Boundary Sets the level at which PID set 1 Range units L3 changes to PID set 2 2 3 Boundary Sets the level at which PID set 2 Range units L3 changes to PID set 3 3 4 Boundary Sets the level at which PID set 3 Range units L3 changes to PID set 4 4 5 Boundary Sets the level at which PID set 4 Range units L3 changes to PID set 5 5 6 Boundary Sets the level at which PID set 5 Range units L3 changes to PID set 6 The boundary parameters do not appear if Schedule Type Set Prop Band 1 Proportional Band Set 1 1 to 9999 9 eng units i L1 Derivative 1 i Integral 1 Integral Time Set 1 Off t
228. as the start up control mode Selecting Continue ensures that on power up the loop control action will remain at its last state Selecting SBrk Output forces the relevant loop into the manual mode with SBrk OP Loopx SETUP Output applied to the output 15 Start WSP Mode Defines the Working SP action on power up None No Change The controller powers up in the same mode as power off PV The controller servos to PV on power up Target SP The controller servos to the target setpoint on power up 16 Ramp from WSP Parameter added from software versions 6 onwards Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 137 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 11 2 SINGLE LOOP CONTROL Single loop control is configured when Loop Type Options Page Single A block diagram of a simple single loop single output controller is shown below Setpoint Block Section 11 3 1 Wkg SP Control Block PID Output Blocks To plant PV mE VP Section 11 6 1 actuators On Off Error Section 11 5 2 Figure 11 1 Single Loop Controller 11 2 1 LOOP SET UP Wiring page SINGLE LOOP Table Number 11 2 1 Parameter Name PV Src Manual OP Sr OPRtLim En S OPRtLim Src Ctrl Hold Src Integr Hid Src Man Mode Src Pot IP Src Rem FFwd Src Rem Hi OP Src Rem Lo OP Src The above two parameters do not appear if Control Type section 11 1 1 O Rem SP Ena Src Remote SP Src SP Select Src SP1 Src SP2 Src Rt Lim Dis S
229. ascade Mode Cascade mode Full Scale FF Conf Full Scale Trim PV FF Trim SP FF Disable CSD Cascade disable status Off L1 It is sometimes useful to disable On cascade when starting a process This also returns the controller to single loop control using the local SP CSD TrimLo Cascade low trim limit CSD FF Value Cascade feedforward value i e Range of signal being fed forward The value being fed forward Cascade master PID feedback Range of slave loop ro value 156 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 11 10 8 Cascade Wiring Example This example shows how to configure Loop 1 to be a simple cascade controller The master PV is connected to the Main PV input and the slave PV is connected to a PV Input module fitted in Slot 3 The control output is a 4 20mA signal which uses a DC control module fitted in Slot 1 LP1 Cascade SP Working SP PV Src PV Input j Aux PV Src Aux LSP Src Master OP i Casc Disab Src PVIn Val Casc FFwd Src CascTrmLim Src This connection is made internally when Cascade is selected Module 3A ip Working SP LP1 Aux Module 1A Mod3A Val PV Src Aux PV Sre Aux LSP Src Casc Disab Src Casc FFwd Src CascTrmLim Src Figure 11 11 Wiring for Simple Cascade Control Loop 11 10 8 1 Implementation 1 In LP1 SETUP Options Page section set Loop Type Cascade 11 1 1 2 In LP1 SETUP Wiring Page sec
230. ased on input status nn and scaled PV 324 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 24 6 2 Parameter Notes 1 Enable Cal 2 Start Tare 3 Start Pnt1 Cal 4 Start Pnt2 Cal 5 Clear Cal 6 Threshold Val 7 Shunt Part No HA026933 This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch If not wired then the value may be changed When enabled the transducer parameters may be altered as described in the previous sections When the parameter has been turned On it will remain on until turned off manually even if the controller is powered cycled This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch If not wired then the value may be changed This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch If not wired then the value may be changed It starts the calibration procedure for 1 Shunt Calibration 2 The low point for Load Cell Calibration 3 The low point for Comparison Calibration This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch If not wired then the value may be changed It starts the calibration procedure for 1 The high point for Load Cell Calibration 2 The high point for Comparison Calibration This may be wired to a digital input for an external switch If not wired then the value may be changed When enabled the input will reset to default values A new calibration will overwrite the previous calibration values if Clear Cal
231. at least 1 hour must elapse from the time of restoring this connection before RTD calibration can take place e The instrument should be warmed up powered up for at least 10 minutes Before using or verifying RTD calibration e The above two points must be satisfied if the full accuracy is to be expected see Note 2 e The mV ranges must be calibrated particularly the OmV point RTD calibration is incomplete without accurately calibrated mV ranges Each instrument or module is calibrated to high standard in factory before shipment therefore the user does not need to perform mV calibration If for any reasons this calibration was altered then Restore Factory calibration and Save facilities of mV ranges can be used If on the other hand the RTD linearity is of a particular importance and the mV calibration was not checked performed for several years than see Note 1 Matched impedance IA H d L copper leads eS 7 a Decade Box 1169 v Controller Figure 27 2 Connections for RTD Note 1 Proceed with mV calibration as described in section 27 3 1 making sure that OmV is calibrated by short circuiting the connecting copper wires and the same 50 mV source is used to calibrate high point on both 40 and 80 mV ranges Also the calibration of both mV range should take place within short period of each other As mV calibration requires disconnecting RTD or decade box it may be quicker to do RTD calibration
232. ation see Chapter 11 170 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 12 3 2 Autotune Parameters Table Number These parameters allow you to autotune the loop AUTOTUNE 1232 Tune OL Auto tune low power limit 100 to 100 Sets a minimum output limit during tuning Tune OH Auto tune high power limit 100 to 100 L1 Sets a maximum output limit during tuning Autotune Loop Selects the loop number to tune LPI LPIA LP7 CSD Repeated for LP2 amp LP3 Autotune State Shows the current state of autotune Not Tuning Not L1 R O Measuring Noise Tuning Tuning at SP Tuning to SP Finding Minimum Finding Maximum Storing Time End Calculating PID ABORTED CSD Tune State Cascade tuning state Pies Tuning Slave Waiting Waiting Again Tuning Master Tune SP The SP selected by the controller at Display range which to tune Time spent in an individual stage 0 00 00 0 LE L3 12 3 3 To View the State of Autotune As autotune progresses its state is displayed on the loop overview screen and also in the autoune parameter list as follows Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes This parameter displays the state 1 From the previous display Press A AUTOTUNE of Autotuning The choices are LC J to display Autotune State NETUS ot Tuning easuring Noise Tuning A at SP Tuning to SP Finding Minimum Finding Maximum Storing Time Calculating PID End ABORTED In the releva
233. be Cal Note that Temp Coef and K Factor may be dependent on each other See section 28 4 4 2 Cal State Indicates whether calibration is active and Calibration Inactive the type of calibration being carried out Probe Cal TDScal TCFcal Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 349 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 28 4 4 Further Parameter Descriptions 28 4 4 1 TDS Status Values Enumeration Display Description 0 No temp This status indicates that the temperature input is required but is not valid therefore the temperature compensated outputs are invalid 1 Confirm This status indicates that there has been a manual change to either K or TCOEF that Change requires the user to confirm the change and make a decision about what action to take from the options given 2 Calibrating This status indicates that the function block is performing one of its calibration cycles The TDS Output parameters continue to be valid during any of the calibration cycles The values used within the system will not be updated until the calibration has passed and been accepted 3 Fail This status indicates that there is not a valid TDS input wired to the function block and therefore the TDS output is invalid 4 OK All output parameters valid 28 4 4 2 Temp Coef K Factor and Use Table parameters To aid the initial set up of TDS parameters in any situation the TDS Function Block allows th
234. ble Hi Alarm SP an alarm Time is indicated as soon as gt PV gt Hi Alarm SP 10 3 3 Deviation Band With Blocking The alarm only occurs after the start up phase when low deviation alarm has first entered a safe state The next time an alarm occurs whether high band or low band will cause the alarm to become active 7 Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm Alarm PV Off On Off On Off On Off e dtc e NC Tun dcos dvor eco Eu eee Alarm Hysteresis SO dE any ana ana Sn 4 Working Setpoint 7 Alarm Setpoint se Hysteresis T T x Process Variable Time Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 123 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 10 4 LATCHING ALARMS The alarm is indicated until it is acknowledged by the user Acknowledgement of an alarm can be through the controller front buttons from an external source using a digital input to the controller or through digital communications There are two ways that the alarm can be acknowledged 1 Automatic The alarm continues to be active until both the alarm condition is removed AND the alarm is acknowledged The acknowledgement can occur BEFORE the alarm condition is removed 2 Manual The alarm continues to be active until both the alarm condition is removed AND the alarm is acknowledged The acknowledgement can only occur AFTER the alarm condition is removed These are shown below for a Full Scale High Alarm 10 4 1 Latched Alarm Full Scale High
235. bles would appear as negative going spikes on an otherwise smooth graph 346 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 28 4 TDS FUNCTION BLOCK All the factors influencing derivation of the TDS PV described in section 28 3are taken into account and incorporated into TDS Function Block The TDS Function Block takes the Conductance reading from TDS Input Module as well as a temperature from another input and performs certain calculations to derive a TDS value The calculations are based on number of set parameters and various calibration procedures performed through this Block The TDS Function Block is enabled using the Boiler feature code The Boiler feature code also enables the Bottom Blowdown Function Block 28 4 1 Installation versus Operation Modes The Function Block has two distinct modes of operation The first mode is the Installation Mode that deals with setting up all the necessary parameters of the system to provide TDS readings This includes those determined by the calibration procedures that can only take part with the system running and hence they could not be obtained at configuration level The second mode is the system Operation Mode which permits for regular re calibration of TDS readings against titration readings Disabling the possibility of easily modifying the installation mode parameters is important because they form a reference against which the system deterioration is
236. book 17 5 2 Dual Loop Table Number 17 5 2 Parameter Parameter Description Name Defines where the page is located Page Style Auto Man Key Graph Style Grows from bottom up Grows from centre Defines the name which appears in the header at the top of the page Custom GraphLo Custom GraphHi Promote Param Promote Add Promote Acc Defines the style of the page Auto manual button is associated with this user page Defines the text which appears in the top section Defines the text in the lower section Parameter number Parameter address Parameter name from user text Graph low point Graph high point Promote parameter number Promote parameter address Promote parameter name from user text Access level of the promoted parameter Promote Value Promoted parameter value 242 This page allows you to configure a dual loop user page 2704 Controller USER PAGES User Page 1 to 8 Default Access Level T Conf Value None Main Page Loop Summary Parameter List Single Loop Dual loop Triple Loop 1 Triple Loop 2 Status Grid Bar Graph Blank Page None LP1 LP2 LP3 Absolute Error None Conf Conf Default Conf Text Default Conf Text Default Conf Text Default Text 01 to 100 User Text Default Text 01 User Text o 100 User Text Modbus Address Default Text 01 to 100 User Text 999 9 to 9999 9 999 9 to 9999 9 Modbus Address De
237. c representation of a vacuum furnace or freeze drier using a diffusion and roughing pump to achieve the required vacuum levels The roughing pump is used to achieve the first level of vacuum in the region of 10 mBar Atthis point the diffusion pump is switched on to remove the atmosphere down to a 10 mBar region Valves used in conjunction with the pumps are also switched by the 2704 vacuum controller When the vacuum reaches the required level it is possible to start a temperature profile There are other variations to this system for example a cryogenic pump may be used in place of the diffusion pump with appropriate changes to pipe and valve layout The 2704 vacuum controller allows for the use of up to three measurement gauges Typically these are low vacuum gauges such as the Pirani or higher vacuum gauges such as the Penning or Inverted Magnetron It is generally required to turn the power off to the higher vacuum level gauge when the vacuum is below its working range Roughing High vacuum Thermal valve Isolating insulation valve Water cooled jacket 5 Backing gauge Air admitance valve Heater elements Roughing Diffusion FSSP DER Chamber high low vacuum vacuum Gauge Gauge Figure 13 7 Representation of a Vacuum Chamber 192 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 13 8 VACUUM CONTROLLER FUNCTIONALITY The 2704 vacuum controller provides on off ou
238. ccess Level Name Program Number of the running program PSP1 01to PSP1 20 PSP1 01 L3 Or name from user text 00m Prog DOs Digital outputs summary L3 Up to 16 These are shown in this format if Named Dos No Prog DO 7 to f programmer event outputs have The name of the event is L3 16 been configured then as an alternative shown with its state o the previous presentation the event On or can be given a name Off PROGRAM EDIT Options Named Dos Yes Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 103 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller Table Number These parameters provide running information of the PSP PSP1 2 or 3 PROFILE 8 25 3 This page is available in operator and configuration level Run General Parameter Parameter Description Value Default Access Level Name Time Remaining Time remaining to end of program up Not Running or h mm ss L3 to 24 hrs Days Remaining Number of days left for the 0 to 255 L3 programmer to run Fast Run Allows the program to fast run No No L3 Alterable Yes in reset or complete Delayed Start Delay before the start of the program 0 00 00 0 Program Status Controls the program when not part of Reset L1 a group Run Hold Complete mugs wesaweruemme OOO iemwp d id oh ProgHold Pegranmerhotdsite iran __ Coot Prog Reset Programmers rere few Pens Peme ea _ cont Prog Cycles Prog Cycle Rem Remaining number of cycles 1 to 9
239. cess level None will hide the page until it is required Choices are Parameter List Single Loop Dual Loop Triple Loop 1 Triple Loop 2 Status Grid Bar Graph Blank Page This parameter is described in more detail in section 17 4 Absolute defines a bar graph which grows from zero at the base Error defines a bar graph which grows from zero at the centre It is scaled by Graph Hi and Graph Lo so that the origin can be offset from the centre Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook Do This 14 Press to select Page Name 15 Press to choose the heading which will appear in the top banner of the user page 16 Press c to select Custom Param 17 Press LA or Y to select required the parameter number 18 Press Le to select Custom Ad 19 Press 4 or Y select the parameter which you wish to display in the nominated position 20 Press Lo to select Custom Name 21 Press A or Y select from User Text the required name of the parameter This Is The Display You Should See USER PAGES User Page 1 xSEYx Additional Notes The page name can be chosen from User Text section 7 2 6 If Default Text is chosen the page heading will be User Page 1 to 8 The following two parameters Section 1 or 2 Name are selected in the same way and define the text which appears under section 1 or 2 names in
240. cessary to make certain parameters available at access level 3 while the installation and calibration are being completed This is accomplished by the Setup parameter If set to Enabled the parameters available in Level 3 are Setup itself K Factor Temp Coef Use Table PPM Conversion setting The ProbeCal becomes unavailable within the calibration state machine and TDScal amp TCFcal become available For more information please see the following calibration section Once the installation set up and calibration have been completed then the Setup parameter may be set back to Disabled while still in Level 3 This will make the Setup parameter and the additional parameters that were made available to disappear from the level 3 parameter list including set up parameter To restore access to the set up parameters and initial system calibration the unit will have to be placed into Conf level access and the Setup parameter set back to Enabled 28 4 4 4 TDS Calibration The calibration system within the TDS Function block consists of three calibration mechanisms One calibration mechanism is for regular calibration to adjust for probe scaling etc The other two are used only during system commissioning installation or annual maintenance service The 3 calibration systems are outlined below Probe Performed occasionally every month or so to Used during normal operation cal _ compensate for probe scaling deter
241. coaeEi Rem Lo OP Src Setpoint 1 Rem Enable Setpoint 2 pa a Rate Limit 1 SP2 Src Prop Remote SP Src PSP Src H OP Track Src eue LIP Track Src ERES Ex AA Relay Dig 101 Alarm LP1 Alm 1 Output MIESIE DIO1 Val Alm 1 Inhibit Src Alm 2 Output Module 3A gt Wire Src Figure 10 1 Loop Alarm Wiring 10 8 1 1 Implementation 1 In ALARMS LP1 Page section 10 7 2 set Alm1 Type Full Scale High 2 In ALARMS LP1 Page section 10 7 2 set Alm2 Type Full Scale Low Note other parameters such as alarm message alarm latching alarm blocking are also set in this page 3 In ALARMS LP1 Page section 10 7 2 Set Alm1 Inhibit Src 05402 DO1 Val This connects the alarm 1 inhibit to fixed digital input 1 4 In STANDARD IO AA Relay Page Set Wire Src 11592 L1Alm1 OP orion aAa N This connects Alarm 1 output to operate the AA relay 5 In MODULE IO Module 3A Page Set Wire Src 11602 L1Alm2 OP section 23 3 2 This connects Alarm 2 output to operate the relay fitted in module position 3 See Appendix D for list of Modbus addresses See Copy and Paste description in Chapter 5 132 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 10 8 2 Engineering Handbook Loop Alarm Inhibited if Programmer not in Run In this example the alarm is gated as in the previous example To determine if the programmer is in Run mode an Analogue Operator An Oper 1 may be us
242. compressor timeout timer deactivates until the cooling turns off again The same action is required for dehumidification 15 7 1 1 Implementation This example assumes that the controller has already been set up as a 2 loop temperature and humidity controller The controller will call for the compressor to be switched on when either the cool or de humidify outputs are switched on The cool output is DIO1 and the de humidify output is DIO2 The compressor output is the AA Relay DIO 1 DIO1 Val Min On Timer Logic 1 OR Output Wire Sre L Input 1 Src Output Input Src Input 2 Src DIO 2 DIO2 Val Figure 15 5 Compressor Timer Graphical Wiring Enter Config Mode In LOGIC OPERS Logic 1 Page Set Operation OR section 19 2 1 Set Input 1 Src 05402 Set Input 2 Src 05450 Connects cool and dehumidify outputs to the logic operator In TIMER BLOCKS Timer 1 Page Set Type Min On Timer section 15 3 1 Set Input Src 07176 LgOp1 OP Set Time 0 10 00 0 Uses logic 1 to trigger timer In STANDARD IO AA Relay Page Set Channel Type On Off section 22 5 1 Set Wire Src 08963 Tmr1 OP Assigns AA Relay to Timer OP 224 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 16 CHAPTER 16 ADVANCED FUNCTIONS 16 1 PATTERN GENERATOR The pattern generator allows groups of digital values to be selected from a single input number Thi
243. configured then as an alternative to the event is shown with its previous presentation the event can be state given a name On or PROGRAM EDIT Options Named Dos Off Yes 108 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook Table Number These parameters allow you to set up each segment in the program PSP1 2 or 3 PROFILE 8 25 6 Segment Edit Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default Access Level GoBack to Seg Allows repeat segments to be set up within 1to no of segments L1 a profile Go back defines the point in the See also Section program where the repeat segments are 8 42 entered Go Back Cycles Sets up the number of times the segments 1 to 999 1 L1 are repeated The above two parameters are only shown if segment type is Go Bac Allows a user defined name to be chosen Default Text to 50 Usr 50 Text Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 109 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 8 26 EXAMPLE TO SET UP AND RUN PROGRAM GROUPS Using the two examples from section 8 22 and the general navigation procedures Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 Setupa temperature program in See section 8 25 5 for the full list PSP1 01 diede d e of parameters Edit Function Set each parameter to suit your application 2 Setup each segment in the See section 8 25 6 for the full list PO1 PSP1 P1 program of parameters Set each parameter to suit your applicat
244. ct influence on its electrical conductivity By measuring conductive properties of such solution a relatively accurate estimate can be made of its TDS Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 343 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 28 3 HOW IS TDS MEASURED There are several factors to take into account when measuring TDS electronically The following sections describe these factors 28 3 1 Specific Conductance Specific conductance is a measure of the ability of a fluid to conduct an electrical current as measured using a 1 cm cell and is expressed in units of electrical conductance i e micro Siemens per centimetre Specific conductance is related to the type and concentration of ions in a solution and can be used for calculating the dissolved solids content of the water Commonly the concentration of dissolved solids in PPM is from 55 to 75 percent of the specific conductance in micro Siemens cm at 25 C This relationship is not constant and it may vary with changes in the composition of the water in particular its pH level We refer to this relationship as PPM conversion factor with a default value of 0 7 i e 70 for a typical water solution with neutral pH Increasingly often pS em 25 C micro Siemens cm at 25 C are used as alternative units for TSD indication as they are independent of the chemical constituents of the fluid and can be directly compared with readings of a calibrated conductance meter As the fluid under test may
245. ction Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 319 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 24 4 COMPARISON CALIBRATION Comparison calibration is most appropriate when calibrating the controller against a second reference instrument In this case the process calibration points are not entered ahead of performing the calibration The input may be set to any value and when the system is stable a reading is taken from the reference measurement device and entered into the controller The controller stores both this new target value and the actual reading taken from its input The process is repeated at a different value with the controller storing both the new target value and the reading taken from its input Reference ntroller under Measurement ee h i i Device T4DCR SCALING Txdcr1 On OFF OFF OFF 0 0 Input High 1000 Measurement Transducer Reference Transducer Load Figure 24 3 Comparison Calibration 320 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 24 4 1 To Calibrate a Controller Against a Second Reference The controller must have been configured for Cal Type Comparison and the transducer connected as shown in the User Guide Chapter 2 Then Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes Enable calibration as described in steps 1 7 of section 24 2 1 Then allow the process to settle at the low calibration point 1 Press j as many
246. ctthe parameter list for the required sub header The full list of parameters available under these list headers is shown in the following tables U 23 2 1 Idents Page Table Number This page allows you to read the type of module fitted MODULE IO Idents Page 23 2 1 Memory Module Memory module position No Module Module 2 Actual module fitted Senoe Module 3 Actual module fitted Senoe Module 4 Actual module fitted Senoei Module 5 Actual module fitted Seencte Tl Module 6 Actual module fitted Seenctet The module name is configurable by the user Note 1 Module Messages No Module Bad Ident Form C Relay Form A Relay Triac Dual Relay Dual Triac DC Control DC Retrans PV Input Tri Logic IP Tri Contact IP Tri Logic OP Transmitter PSU Transducer PSU DC Input Dual PV Input Sin Logic OP Pot Input Diff Input DC Control HR DC Out Dual DC Out 4W PT100 4W PT25 These are also listed in Table 23 1 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 285 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 23 3 MODULE IO PARAMETERS Each module has a unique set of parameters which depend on the function of the module fitted To view and alter parameters associated with each module Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes If a module is not fitted in the 1 From the MODULE IO sub header selected position the sub header is display press or Y to choose R not displayed she feum
247. d Open Closed Valve switch status Sets to Bad if the switch Good shows open when it should be closed Bad Output wired to the AA relay to inhibit or show Off Busy Busy Output wired to the valve I O point of the TDS Off module Indicates the current state of the blowdown BB Wait sequence Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 No N e None Lo N e Oo Oo 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook Table Number This list allows you to set up the parameters for Bottom Blowdown BOILER Blowdown 28 5 6 Parameter Parameter Description Value Default Access Level Name Alarm Indicates if there is a problem with the network or Off L3 the valve has failed to open On ACK Alarm Sr Source wire for the alarm acknowledge This will Modbus address None Conf usually come from a self resetting user switch ACK Alarm Alarm acknowledge No L3 Yes acknowledge Yes If the alarm acknowledge source is used the wire overrides this parameter 28 5 7 Example To Perform a Boiler Blowdown It is first necessary to set up the Real Time Clock if this has not already been done Then Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press as many times as necessary to display the page LEVEL setup header menu TDS Calibration i nn TDS Setup 2 Press or to scrollto BLOWDOWN Setup i STEAM WARM UP i REAL TIME CLOCK ACCESS 3 Press to se
248. dbus addresses 70 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 8 CHAPTER 8 PROGRAMMER CONFIGURATION This chapter explains The features of a setpoint programmer in general How to configure and edit a Synchronous Programmer How to configure an Asynchronous Programmer software versions 6 onwards Customisable Parameter Names Throughout this chapter parameter names shown in ta ics are customisable by the user when in configuration access level The name of the parameter may vary therefore from instrument to instrument Typical customisable parameter names are e Program names e Profile Setpoint names e Segment names e Digital Event Names Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 71 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 8 1 WHAT IS SETPOINT PROGRAMMING In a setpoint programmer you can set up a profile in the controller in which the setpoint varies in a pre determined way over a period of time Temperature is a very common application where it is required to ramp the process value from one level to another over a set period of time The 2704 controller will program up to three separate profiles These may be temperature pressure light level humidity etc depending on the application and are referred to as Profiled Setpoints PSPs The Program is divided into a flexible number of Segments each being a single time duration and containing details for each profiled setpoint The tot
249. ddress Coig X Yes R Pump TimeOut To set the timeout period 0 00 00 0 0 00 00 0 R Pump SP To set the target vacuum for the timeout 0 000E 0 L1 Vacuum Display range alarm Bad Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 199 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 13 12 7 Leak Detect Parameter Tables Table Number These parameters allow you to set up and configure the leak detection Leak Detect 13 12 criterion See also section 13 8 6 Vacuum Select Select the source of the vacuum None None Config Low Vac High Vac Backing Vac Chamber Vac Rate of change of vacuum Vacuum 0 00E 0 L3 R O Tgt Leak Rate To set the target leak rate Display range 0 00E 0 Turn Off Pump Turn pump off during leak detection Off Off L3 R O On On Leak T Start Start leak test No No L3 Yes To set the leak test time 0 00 00 0 0 00 00 0 L3 13 12 8 Vacuum display Parameter Tables Table Number These parameters allow you to set up the vacuum overview display Display 13 12 8 See also section 13 7 Show Sec Val To configure the second display No Second Value The current value of the above source Display range L3 Sec Val Src To configure the source of the value Modbus address Config shown on the second display Sec Val Name To configure a user defined name for Usr 01 to 50 Default Config the second display text Resolution This configures the display resolution XXXXX Config XXXX X XXX XX XX XXX X XXXX SCI 0 00E 0 L3 L3 Ch
250. deterioration of these electrodes will affect the conductance reading For example with the probe immersed in water lime scale will collect on the measuring electrodes That lime scale has a high resistance and will inhibit the probe from making an accurate reading This problem however is largely overcome by making a regular calibration of the system against a reading from the water sample i e titration The calibration directly affects K factor which tend to be larger for the scaled probes than the initial clean probe factor established during the system installation The 2704 makes a distinction between the initial probe factor calibration called TDS Cal and the subsequent probe factor calibrations called Probe Cal The difference between the latter and the former K factor values is a measure of the probe deterioration that is monitored by the instrument alerting user of the potential problems In case of 3 or 4 electrode probes the effect of scaling is largely compensated by the hardware of the instrument producing consistently accurate reading despite the scale and so the subsequent Probe Cal and the initial TDS Cal should produce very similar K value There is a limit to that compensation however and so the instrument monitors the extent of scaling by measuring the signal strength required to drive the probe called Driver O P Monitoring of scaling has also a benefit of providing a diagnostic about the intern
251. dewpoint and oxygen control using Zirconia probes Describes 2704 controller configured for temperature and vacuum control of vacuum furnaces Describes 2704 controller configured for measurement and control of melt pressure in extruders Describes the orderable option which allows an OEM to develop and install machine specific strategies Specific clone file description 11 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 1 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION Thank you for selecting the 2704 High Performance Programmer Controller This chapter provides a general overview of your controller to help you to become more familiar with its use and to ensure that it is the correct type for your process 1 1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL This manual is intended for those who wish to install commission and configure the controller An Installation and Operation sheet is supplied with the controller part number HA029465 Access to the parameters in the controller is achieved through five configurable levels of security Level 1 Operation only This level allows for example parameters to be changed within safe limits or programmers to be run held or reset Level 2 Supervisory level This level allows for example parameter limits to be pre set or programs to be edited or created Default Passcode 2 Level 3 Commissioning level This level is intended for use when commissioning the instrument It allows for example calibration offsets to be adjusted to match tran
252. displayed in operation level as a result of a particular action occurring The format of this window is shown below User defined Title gt Usr 1 User defined Text Usr 2 Press C to Ack Instruction This is a similar format to that which occurs for example when an alarm occurs This message however can be displayed when a particular event defined by the user occurs For example a User Message can be displayed if it has been wired to a digital input to alert an operator to a particular event User messages can only be set up in configuration level They can however be inspected in Level 1 Up to eight User Messages can be configured Message 1 has a higher priority than Message 2 and so on 16 4 1 To Configure A User Message Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press as many times as necessary to access the page header menu 2 Press 4 lor Y to select USER MESSAGES 3 Press e to show Sub headers A Y USER VALUES 4 Press or to select Msg 1 to 8 N E 5 Press C to show the parameter In operation mode a pop up list window as shown below will be displayed when digital input 1 is 6 Press eJ again to select Title USERMESSRGES sa 1 sSET TUS 7 Press or Y to choose a Danger user defined text set up as described in section 5 2 6 Hsa 205402 Vent Open Press D to Ack 8 Press to select Text If Timeout
253. displayed under channel A Default Conf Text R O 286 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 23 3 2 Relay Output Table Number This page allows you to configure a Relay Output module 23 3 2 Types included Form C Relay Form A Relay Dual Relay Parameter Parameter Description Value Name Ident Module identification Channel Type Channel Module Type On Off Time Proportion Valve Lower Valve Raise Invert Relay energised Normal Relay de energised Inverted The following five parameters only appear if Channel Type is set to Time Proportion in Pulse Time Minimum relay on or off time Auto 0 05s or 0 07 to 150 00 Eng Value Hi High display reading Elect Val Enum Enumeration for the electrical value Not Enumerated on off only See also Custom Enumerations section 16 6 Eng Value Enum Enumeration for the engineering value 01 Usr1 to 50 Usr50 on off only See also Custom Enumerations section 16 6 Electrical Val The current electrical value of the 0 00 or 1 00 time prop output in operation mode Module 1A Val The current output value in operation 100 0 mode ve values are not used Module 1A can be user text Channel Name User defined name for the channel Select from User Text Page Section 7 2 6 MODULE IO Module 1 A Page Default Access Level Default Conf Text The changeover relay and 2 pin relay are single output modules Th
254. e INSTRUMENT VACUUM Options Info Units Display Page Prom User Text Summary Standby To configure a library of text defined by the user for use with a range of features within the instrument Additional Notes Views are typical and may vary depending upon options in any particular controller The choice of page headers is It is only possible to configure chargeable options which have been ordered An example of a chargeable option is the number of loops For other chargeable options see Order Code Appendix A 58 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 7 2 TO CONFIGURE CONTROLLER OPTIONS Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 Select INSTRUMENT Options Page as in section 5 1 1 2 Press to display the list of parameters 1 2 or 3 loops can be lected if the option h 3 Press or Y to scroll Se ectee rne Dpuoniias been supplied around the parameters PP 4 Press C to selecta parameter In this example Num of Loops 5 Press A or Y to setthe number of loops required m INSTRUMENT Options xSBYx 6 Press to scroll to in 3 In this example the programmer Programmer function can be Enabled or Disabled 7 Press A or P to change the value or state of the parameter INSTRUMENT Options xSEYx Press C to scroll to Pr 8 9g N In this example the programmer Mode od mode
255. e 9 99 99 9 01 Usr01 to 100 Usr100 Disable Key Disable all keys Page Key Src Lower Key Src external source such as a Raise Key Src digital input for remote panel Modbus Default Text Default Text No No Conf Yes Auto Man View Loop Run Hold Func Key 2S Function Key 3 Function key 1 is Program Run Hold or disabled Func Pressed 1 State of function key 1 N o No No Func3 Pressed 1 State of function key 3 Part No HA026933 Issue7 0 Nov 12 61 Engineering Handbook Notes 2704 Controller 1 The 2704 stores the user interface in 2 languages English is always available plus French German or Spanish 2 The first page to be displayed when the instrument is switched on can be chosen from LP1 LP1 A LP2 LP2A LP3 or LP3 A In 2704 LPxand LPx A have the same effect Access Page Cycle Each Loop All Loops LP1 Trend LP2Trend LP3 Trend Program Mimic User Pages 7 to 8 may show user defined names Vacuum SUMMARY Program Run 3 These may be wired to function blocks to trigger other events in the system 4 Text in talics can be customised 5 A parameter marked as available in Access Level L3 means that it will be visible if the page is promoted from configuration level to Level 3 62 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 7 2 5 INSTRUMENT Page Promote Page Any page shown un shaded in the Navigation Diagram section
256. e Dig Common terminal and the appropriate Dig I O terminals of all controllers together As the name suggests this configuration is unable to determine reliably whether the signalling instrument is connected to the network 28 5 5 Valve Switch Option An option is provided to fit valve switches A parameter Valve Switches is available in the BOT BLOWDOWN parameter list which can be set to Yes if the option is used If a valve switch is fitted the controller will receive a Low signal when the valve is closed switch also closed and constantly checks the status of the switch If the line becomes broken and or the valve is opened at the incorrect time the network will show Busy and indicate that there is a problem with the switch Each controller supports one valve and switch only Note The current provided by the digital input is normally 1mA This may not provide a large enough wetting current for some contacts other than gold If this is the case an external supply of up to 30Vdc should be used with an appropriate pull up resistor to provide the necessary wetting current for the contacts being used Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 357 Engineering Handbook 2 28 5 6 Bottom Blowdown Parameters Up to three start times cam be set to initiate the blowdown sequence in any boiler 704 Controller Table Number 28 5 6 Parameter Name This list allows you to set up the parameters for Bottom Blowdown BOILER Blowdo
257. e High Deviation Band Deviation High Deviation Low Rate of Change The message which appears when an alarm occurs can be customised from the list of User Text messages This example chooses User Text number 05 previously set to Zone 1 Too Hot See also section 5 2 6 The choices are None Auto Manual Event See also 8 1 See section 8 4 for a description of alarm latching Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Do This This Is The Display You Should See Engineering Handbook Additional Notes To Configure Alarm Blocking Alarm Setpoint Alarm Hysteresis Alarm Delay Alarm Inhibit 1 Press Le to scroll to the parameter 2 Press A 1 Press C lto display Alm1 Inhibit Sr 2 Press A wire to or Y to choose the condition or value or Y to select the Modbus address of the source parameter which you wish to To Configure Alarm Inhibit Source ALARMS ILP 1 10 7 ALARM TABLES The following alarm pages are available Summary Alarms Loop 1 Alarms Loop 2 Alarms Loop 3 PV Input Analogue Input Module 1 3 4 5 amp 6 User 1 to 8 A summary of all alarms The alarm can be inhibited while an event is true Here it is shown soft wired to Digital Input 02 For a list of commonly used wireable parameters see Appendix D The next parameter is Alm1 Inhibit If this is set to No gt the event is ignored Yes the alarm waits for
258. e Modbus address e Press to change from parameter address to parameter mnemonic PV Src 05108 PVIn Val lt Press or Ylto change the parameter address by scrolling through a list of the most popular mnemonics A cursor under the parameter mnemonic flashes 5 Text eg Program Name User definable L3 Program Name Program 1 lt Press or Y to change the character Press to change to the next character A Program Name Program 1 Press or Vto change the character Up to 16 characters can be altered 6 Time eg Programmer Segment Duration A Seg Duration 0 01 00 lt Press or Y to increase or decrease the time setting This is an accelerating display Figure 3 4 Changing Parameter Values for Different Parameter Types Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 43 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 3 5 1 Confirmation Mechanism Having changed a value when the A or Lv J key is released the display will blink after a period of 1 5 seconds indicating that the new parameter value has been accepted If any other key is pressed during the 1 5 second period the parameter value is accepted immediately There are exceptions for specific parameters Examples of these are Output Power adjustment when in Manual mode The value is written continuously as the value is changed Alarm Acknowledge Ifthe Alarm Acknowledge is changed from No to Acknowledge a confir
259. e analogue input OK R O Diagnostic messages are displayed to show the state of the Input if not OK See Appendix D SBrk Trip Imp Sensor break value 0 to 100 R See section 22 3 3 An Input Name User defined name for the Default Conf analogue input Select from User Text Text Page Section 7 2 6 Notes 1 Input Linearisation J Type K Type L Type R Type B Type N Type T Type S Type Platinel Il C Type PT 100 Linear Square Root Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 277 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 22 3 3 Sensor Break Value The controller continuously monitors the impedance of a transducer or sensor connected to any analogue input including plug in modules described in the following chapter This impedance expressed as a percentage of the impedance which causes the sensor break flag to trip is a parameter called SBrk Trip Imp and is available in the parameter lists associated with both Standard and Module inputs of an analogue nature The table below shows the typical impedance which causes sensor break to trip for various types of input and high and low SBrk Impedance parameter settings The impedance values are only approximate 25 as they are not factory calibrated PV Input Also applies to PV Input module and Dual PV Input Analogue Input module mV input 40mV or 80mV Volts 10V SBrk Impedance High 10KQ SBrk Impedance High 50KQ SBrk Impedance
260. e can also be configured for a single input when the update rate becomes 10Hz Table Number This page allows you to set the parameters for Channel A of a Dual PV MODULE IO Module 23 3 11 Input module HA Page This module can only be fitted in slots 3 or 6 This module has two inputs Parameters are displayed under channel A and channel C Channel A is the high level input channel C is the low level input This assumes that En Dual Mode Yes in the Channel C menu If En Dual Mode No then this module will behave as a single PV Input module see section 23 3 9 This table shows Module 3 or 6 A parameters Channel identification High Level Inp Channel Type Input Output type HZ Volts me Volts Resolution Display resolution XXXXX to Conf X XXXX or SCI scientific SBrk Impedance Sensor break impedance for sensors Conf with high output impedance M SBrk Fallback Sensor break fallback Conf NS Upscale Electrical Lo Input range Electrical Bi units depend on channel type See To Scale Eng Val Lo Display range P PV Input Filter Time Input filter time Off to 0 10 00 0 Electrical Val The current electrical value of the Input range units as configured NM M input Module 3A Val The current value in engineering for 6A Val units Module 3A or 6A can be user defined text Offset Transducer scale offset Range limits SBrk Trip Imp Current sensor break value See section 22 3 3 R
261. e display will either show Passed or Failed If Failed check the connections and repeat the procedure Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 6 Re connect the A terminal wire as shown in Figure 27 8 and allow at least 4 minutes for the instrument to stabilise Refer to section 27 5 6 4 7 Press Le 4 wire Resistance Reference C9 2000 or 500 Boog 3A or 6A 3B or 6B 2704 3C or 6C Controller 3D or 6D Figure 27 8 High Point Calibration Connections Do This until the parameter Cal State is displayed 8 Press 9 Press 10 Press 11 Press Part No HA026933 or Y to select Cal High A or Y to select Go to Accept A or M to select Save Issue 7 0 Nov 12 This Is The Display You Should See Cal State Idle 3 Sec Cal State Cal High ry Cal State Confirm Cal State Go Wi Sec Cal State Passed Cal State Accept 3 3 Sec Cal State Idle 3 Sec Cal State Save E Cal State Idle Additional Notes Confirm will automatically appear The controller will automatically calibrate and the display will either show Passed or Failed If Failed check the connections and repeat the procedure It may also fail if the reference resistance is more than 3 out of that specified Values must be saved otherwise t
262. e instruments should be fixed or Dynamically allocated by a DHCP server If the IP Addresses are to be dynamically allocated then all MAC addresses must be supplied to the network administrator For fixed IP Addresses the Network Administrator will provide the IP address as well as a SubNet Mask These must be configured into the instrument during set up through the COMMS page Remember to note the allocated addresses 20 4 3 Instrument setup Note1 It is recommended that you setup the communications settings for each instrument before connecting it to any Ethernet network This is not essential but network conflicts may occur if the default settings interfere with equipment already on the network By default the instruments are set to a fixed IP address of 192 168 111 222 with a default SubNet Mask setting of 255 255 255 0 Note2 IP Addresses are usually presented in the form xxx xxx xxx xxx Within the instrument each element of the P Address are shown and configured separately IP address 1 relates to the first set of three digits IP address 2 to the second set of three digits and so on This also applies to the SubNet Mask Default Gateway and Preferred master IP Address 20 4 4 Network Connection Screw the RJ45 adapter into the instrument H port as shown in the Appendix F 4 3 Use standard CAT5 cable to connect to the Ethernet 10BaseT switch or hub Use cross over cable only if connecting one to one with a PC acting as network
263. e master trims the setpoint of the slave rather than controlling it directly By limiting the amount of trim the temperature of the furnace will remain within bounds Feedforward allows either the master PV master SP or a user defined variable CSD FFwd Src to be fed forward so that it directly influences the slave setpoint A typical application for SP feedforward could be in a heat treatment furnace where it can be used to extend the life of heating elements by limiting their maximum operating temperature An application using PV feedforward could be in autoclaves or reactor vessels where it is sometimes required to protect the product from excessive temperature gradients also referred to as Delta T Control The effect of this is to limit the furnace temperature to a band around the target temperature Feedforward can also be a user defined variable in trim mode in the same way as full scale mode The implementation of cascade control in the 2704 is available as a standard option ie it is not necessary to order a dual loop controller to perform cascade control Furnace Load Temperature Furnace Temperature Master Controller Temp SP p d PV Feedforward Heating Element l SP Feedforward y Slave Controller SP Feedforward or PV Feedforward may be selected Figure 11 8 Cascade Trim Control 11 10 4 Auto Manual Operation in Cascade There are three modes of operation Manua
264. e modules are fitted User 1 Ack User defined alarm 1 acknowledge L1 Yes The above alarm is repeated for up to eight user alarms if they have been configured New Alarm Set to true on a new alarm No R O Yes Ack All Alms Acknowledges all alarms Global acknowledge No EN L3 L1 1 No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes No Yes o Yes o Yes o L Yes Yes Ack All Src Global Acknowledge Source Modbus Address Conf 128 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 10 7 2 ALARMS P7 2or 3 Page Parameters Table Number 10 7 2 These parameters configure the Loop alarms Alarm 1 parameters only appear if the Alm 1 Type None ALARMS LP1 2or 3 Alarm 2 parameters only appear if the Alm 2 Type z None Off Alm1 Type Alarm 1 Type LP1 Ack Group alarm acknowledge for loop 1 Acknowledges both loop alarms Alm1 Message Alarm 1 message Use A or 7 to choose from the User Text messages set up in section 7 2 6 Alm1 Latching Alarm 1 latching Use A or v to choose latching type 1 Blocking arm 1 blocking se A or Y to enable disable 1 Setpoint 4 arm 1 Setpoint Hyst arm 1 1 Delay arm 1 delay 4 Output arm 1 output m1 Inhibit Src arm 1 inhibit source m1 Inhibit arm 1 inhibit Full Scale Low Full Scale High Deviation Band Deviation High Deviation Low As order Conf code Rate of Cha
265. e output Channel Name A name which replaces AA Re ayfrom User Text Relay AAVal Enu Enumeration for the relay Not Enumerated See also section AA value on off only Not 16 6 Elec Value Enum Enumeration for the 01 Usr1 to 50 Usr50 Enumerated See also section electrical value on off only 16 6 Note 1 If the relay is wired to a source such as a loop output Ch1 or Ch2 the value will read in a positive direction only i e it does not signify heating or cooling but just the position of the relay If configured for control 0 Relay off 100 0n 1to99 time proportioning If configured as On Off 0 Relay Off Any other value or Relay On 280 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 22 6 STANDARD IO DIG I OPARAMETERS This page allows access to parameters which set up the fixed digital IO connected to terminals D1 to D7 and DC The standard digital O1 to 7 can either be input or output and is set up in configuration level The choices are 1 Digital Input IO configured as a digital input 2 On Off IO configured as a digital output 3 Time Proportion IO configured as a control output 4 Valve Lower IO configured to raise the output of a motor valve controller 5 Valve Raise IO configured to lower the output of a motor valve controller The parameters which appear in the Dig IO pages depend upon the function of the digital IO configured These are shown in the following section When
266. e parameters above are displayed under channel A only Dual Relay has two outputs The parameters above are displayed under Channel A and C Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 287 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 23 3 3 Triac Output Table Number This page allows you to configure a Triac Output module MODULE IO Module 23 3 3 Types included Triac Dual Triac f A Page Parameter Name Parameter Description Default Access Level Ident Module identification Triac Channel Module Type On Off Time Proportion Valve Lower Valve Raise Invert Invert triac operation Normal Inverted The following five parameters only appear if Channel Type is set to Time Proportion Min Pulse Time Minimum triac on or off time Auto 0 05s or 0 07 to 150 00 Electrical Lo Electrical low input level O P range Electrical Hi Electrical high input level O P range Elect Val Enum See Enumeration for the electrical value Not Enumerated on off only See also Custom Enumerations section 16 6 Eng Value Enum Enumeration for the engineering 01 Usr1 to 50 Usr50 value on off only erated See also Custom Enumerations section 16 6 Electrical Val The current electrical value of the 0 00 or 1 00 time prop R O L3 output in operation mode Module 1A Val The current output value in operation 100 0 ve values are not R O L3 mode used Module 1A can be user defined text Channel Name User defined name for the channe
267. e re ri tme Dre eb PERIERE 44 3 6 PARAMETER TABLES 1 here tie np pn peg nere ne 45 3 7 PARAMETER AVAILABILITY AND ALTERABILITY essent nnne 45 3 8 NAVIGATION DIAGRAM scores im tette Het Commit ute edad et eee 46 4 CHAPTER 4 FUNCTION BEOCKS terrere terrere 49 4 1 Whatis afFurction Block aims Weed 49 ATT VAS m OE MM CERA 49 Ca uou EE 49 Lucha 49 5 CHAPTERS SOFT WIRING 2 reete itte o uento espoir onto ato eno Tor nene a Do Tta a Ie apa ae dpa 50 5 1 WHA IS SOI WIRIN SS ica deutet de cst ote u tule Males oe ERE e RIEN ch ase IER af eto at tese ate tert 50 54 An Example of Soft WIfIhiguius iiec tette DIR ICA TI EXTRAER EX TUERI T UB NX ELA BONUM GUERRE RES S 51 5 51 27 Configuration of the Simple PID Lopresti EEVEE VEETEE CE EEEE RNE 52 6 CHAPTER O ACCESS D EVELS tiro een cotto ESENE rey etes ete y EESE EEEE EEKEREN EASES 56 6 1 THE DIFFERENT ACGESS LEVELS 1 5 5 8 68 nete a o ROTER PREIS 56 6 2 PASSCOBESS LixoXRslxXpew IN INIM IRI Tid leu TENE NEU IPs AER ees eU ACESS AGS uides x 56 6 3 TOGENTER CONFIGURATION LEMEL 5 reno rre eterne rhe bid toet re ESR I E AROE os 57 6 4 S O ENTER NEW PASS CODES x 2 tener th TTD HORE 57 6 5 TGXEXLI GONEBIGURATIORN LEVEE 22 2084 tee Reka tette tects Pesce testa rte xt ee e xb rte sett 57 2 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 7 7 1 FAA 7 2 7 2 1 7 2 2 7 2 3 7 2 4 7 2 5 7 2 6 7 2 7 7 2 8 7 3
268. e user to set the known parameters while attempting to calculate the parameters which have been set to AUTO utilising the last TDS calibration If however the setting of one parameter causes the other parameter to go beyond its limit threshold then the user is prompted with a message to check the Confirm Change parameter Under these circumstances the Confirm Change parameter will indicate the out of range condition and only give an option to cancel the last change The calculated parameters K Factor val and or Temp Coef val are displayed only if K Factor and or Temp Coef are setto AUTO respectively They are displayed for the user to verify that the values are within expected limits The table below shows all the possible combinations of these parameter settings together with the option of using the TCF Table In boiler control applications the second option AUTO SET is the most commonly used as typical boiler probes have a poorly defined probe factor and in addition this could change during installation refer to the table If however the user chooses to set both parameters manually SET SET option then he will again be prompted to check the Confirm Change parameter This time the Confirm Change parameter will indicate that the current action will invalidate the last TDS calibration The user will be supplied with options to cancel the last change or Override Cal User settable parameters The actual parameter v
269. e values of Scale High and Scale Low Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 323 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 24 6 TRANSDUCER SCALING PARAMETERS The parameters listed in the table below allow you to soft wire to sources within the controller to provide for example operation of calibration procedure via external switches 24 6 1 Transducer Scaling Parameter Table Table Number This page shows the Transducer Scaling parameters TXDCR SCALING 7xdcr 1 24 6 1 Cal Type Type of calibration Conf RUM Load Cell Comparison TxderName Name Transducer name Transducer name Enable Cal KIC Enable calibration on Start Tare Start auto tare calibration L1 o Start Pnt1 Cal Start the calibration at point 1 Off Of L1 normally the low point On Start Pnt2 Cal Start the calibration at point 2 Morrai i the high pori 9 Tare Value Sets the value that the controller will eS range read after an auto tare calibration Sets the soins ne low pou Threshold Val 9 The allowed difference between two 0 99 999 mins consecutive averages during calibration Shunt State Indicates that the shunt resistor is connected or not Cal Active Indicates calibration in progress EL Input Value Pre Pre scaledinputvalue Pre scaledinputvalue value p to 100 Scaled Value Output from the scaling block Adjust Value Sets the value read by the reference source in comparison calibration only OP Status Output status b
270. ead as a of the SBrk Impedance Channel Name User defined name for the channel Default Conf Select from User Text Page Section Text 7 2 6 Cal State Allows input calibration See Chapter 27 Conf Only shown when En Dual Mode No section 23 3 11c Notes 1 Input Linearisation J Type K Type L Type R Type B Type N Type T Type S Type Platinel Il C Type PT 100 Linear Square Root Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 PT 25 5 294 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook Table Number This page allows you to set the parameters for Channel C of a Dual PV MODULE IO Module 23 3 11c Input module HAC Page This module can only be fitted in slots 3 or 6 Parameter Description Value Default This module has two inputs Parameters are displayed under channel A and channel C Channel A is the high level input channel C is the low level input This table shows Module 3 or 6 C parameters Channel identification Low Level Input Ps RO R O Channel Type Input Output type DC Input DC Conf Input En Dual Mode Enable dual mode Yes See note 2 No Resolution Display resolution XXXXX to Conf X XXXX or SCI scienfific SBrk Impedance Sensor break impedance for high impedance Off Conf output sensors SBrk Fallback Sensor break fallback Off Conf Downscale Upscale Filter Time Input filter time Off to 0 10 00 0 Emissivity Emissivity Off to 1 00 CJC type Internal Internal Con
271. ear in the Main Menu or in the Main Page Summary Page Summary Page Note 1 Parameters only available if the relevant User Value Yes 102 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 8 25 2 PSP1 20r 3 PROFILE Wiring This table is only available in Configuration Level Table Number These parameters allow you to soft PSP1 2 or 3 PROFILE 8 25 2 wire programmer functions Wiring Page Press C to select Modbus Address Parameter Mnemonic Note 1 The PSP Reset Source defines the programmer starting conditions To servo to setpoint wire the relevant reset source into the SP To servo to PV wire the relevant reset source into the PV The value which is wired into the Reset Source is the value which appears at the programmer output Note2 By default these parameters are not soft wired The above table is repeated for PSP2 and PSP3 The default wiring is shown below PSP2 Reset Src PSP2 reset source 01025 LP2 PV Note 1 PSP3 Reset Src PSP3 reset source 02049 LP3 Note 1 8 25 3 PSP1 2 OR 3 PROFILE Run General Pages This page is similar to the PROGRAM RUN page for the synchronous programmer and provides information on the running program Table Number These parameters provide running information of the PSP PSP1 2 or 3 PROFILE 8 25 3 This page is available in operator and configuration level Run General Parameter Parameter Description Value Default A
272. ears if ratio is configured see section 11 1 1 and LP1 SETUP 11 11 44 allows you to set up parameters specific to ratio controllers Ratio Page Ratio Resol Ratio display resolution Ratio Type Ratio type Divide Conf Multiply Lead PV The value of the lead process variable M LE Ratio Trim Ratio trim value 160 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 11 11 5 Ratio Wiring Example This example shows how to configure Loop 1 to be a simple ratio controller The main PV is connected to the PV Input rear terminals V amp V and the lead PV is connected to the Analogue Input rear terminals BA amp BB The control output is a valve position signal which uses a dual triac control module fitted in Slot 1 PV Input LP1 Ratio PV Src Lead PV Src Module 1A Ratio SP Src Ratio Trim Src Ctrl Hold Src Integr Hld Src An Input Man Mode Src Pot IP Src Rem FFwd Src Rem Hi OP Src Rem Lo OP Src Rem SP Ena Src Remote SP Src SP Select Src SDIBSTG SP2 Src Prog SP Src PID Set Src AuxPID Set Src Power FF Src Ena OP Trk Src OP Track Src Figure 11 13 Wiring for Simple Ratio Control Loop 11 11 5 1 Implementation 1 In LP1 SETUP Options Page section set Loop Type Ratio 11 1 1 2 In LP1 SETUP Ratio Page section 11 11 4 set Enable Ratio On Set other parameters as required 3 In LP1 SETUP Wiring Page section set PV Src 05108 PVIn Val 11 11 3 Append
273. echanisms It is done in the same way as the above calibration but by the system installer or the annual maintenance servicemen TDScal is used primarily to determine the initial probe factor although if the initial probe factor is known and entered into the instrument then this mechanism will try to modify the temperature coefficient Essentially if the probe factor is fixed then the temperature coefficient is adjusted to make the calibration valid TDScal is not available outside Conf access level when Setup is set to Disable This calibration mechanism is available in all access levels when the Setup parameter is set to Enabled Otherwise it s only available in Conf Access level For more details regarding the mechanisms involved with this calibration system see section 28 4 4 5 Cal State Parameter TCF Cal The TFC Cal calibration is also part of the installation set up This is not available outside Conf Level if Setup parameter is set to Disable To calibrate TCF the boiler must be filled with water and fired At some water temperature preferably well below 100 C all the outlets should be shut off and the temperature of the boiler should be slowly raised to its maximum operating temperature Just as the outlets are shut the user should start TCF Cal The instrument will then take readings every time a decimal temperature point is reached For example if TCF Cal was started when boiler water was at 5
274. ect the power supply V and allows for multiple power supplies to be connected 2 fuses or circuit breakers to protect the bus from excessive current which could damage the cable and connectors The earth connection HF to be connected to the main supply earth terminal 26 Part No HA026933 Issue7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 2 6 2 2 Wiring Interconnections for DeviceNet Communications 1210 terminating resistor DOM required fitted if not Red internaly 2704 Controller L llo HA V N Wht CAN H 4 5 u HB CAN H E Drain 3 E l i HC Drain Blu I CAN L 2 T Blk HD CAN L V 1 HE V Card Top HF SLAVE Address 11 Diag 2704 Controller L DB 9M HA is N RDY RUN Eu De om e O O HC Drain NET MON HD CAN L Typical Interface Card HE y MASTER HF SLAVE Address 12 2704 Controller L V HA V N Network Supply HB E 24Vdc 1 250mV p p Ripple HC 1210 HE V HF SLAVE Address N 1 Daisy chain to further Fit terminating resistor to last instruments instrument in the chain Figure 2 16 Devicenet Wiring Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 2 6 3 Ethernet Connections When the controller is supplied with the Ethernet communications option a special cable assembly is also supplied This cable mus
275. ed Programmer PV1 Src PSP1 Reset Src PV2 Src PSP2 Reset Src PV3 Src PSP3 Reset Src Run Src Hold Src Reset Src Run Hold Src Run Reset Src Prog Num Src Advance Seg Hbck1 Dis Src Hbck2 Dis Src Hbck3 Dis Src WaitA Src WaitB Src WaitC Src Figure 10 2 10 8 2 1 Implementation 1 In LOGIC OPERS Logic 1 Page section 19 2 1 2 In ANALOGUE OPERS Analogue 1 Page section 18 2 1 3 In STANDARD IO AA Relay Page section 22 5 1 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 Program Status Alarm LP1 Alm 1 Output Logic Operator 1 AA Relay Invert ie Input 1 Src Output Value 9 Wire Src r Input 2 Sre Analogue Operator 1 Input 1 Src Status gt Input 2 Src Loop Alarm Inhibited if Programmer not in Run set Operation AND set Invert Invert Input 1 Invert input 1 is necessary because the previous operation results in 0 for a true state Set Input 1 Src 06239 This is the Status of the Logic Operator Set Input 2 Src 11592 L1AIm1 OP This sets the logic operator such that both inputs must be true before the output status is true set Operation Select Max set Input 1 Src 05844 This is the Programmer Status set Input 2 Src 05844 It is necessary to connect both inputs of an analogue operator set Input 1 Scalar 1
276. ed Test1 will change between 09 On and 10 Off i You can use any text for the enumeration for example Open Closed Up Down etc Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 69 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 7 3 5 To Assign Custom Units Most commonly used units can be selected for display on the user interface In addition to the standard selection up to six custom units can be created In this example the units of the PV Input will be Gal m 7 3 5 1 Implementation 1 In INSTRUMENT User Text Page set User Text Enabled set Text Number 6 or any unused text no set Usr Gal m This defines Text Number 6 to be Gal m 2 In INSTRUMENT Units Page set Custom 1 Units 06 Gal m This sets Custom Units 1 to Gal m 3 In STANDARD IO PV Input Page set Units Custom 1 7 3 6 To Customise the Power Up Display In this example the users company name will be used provide the start up message when the controller is switched on The company name will be CML Controls and is based in Scotland 7 3 6 1 Implementation 1 In INSTRUMENT User Text Page set User Text Enabled set Text Number 7 or any unused text no set Usr7 CML Controls This defines Text Number 7 to be CML Controls set Text Number 8 or any unused text no set Usr8 Scotland 2 In INSTRUMENT Display Page set Startup Text 1 07 CML Controls set Startup Text 2 08 Scotland See Appendix D for list of Mo
277. ed in configuration mode for example to disable the gas valve The following parameter is not relevant to Probe Type Oxygen PV Frozen PV Frozen This is a boolean which freezes the PV during a purging cycle It may have been wired in configuration mode for example o disable control output during purging Note 1 Probe types supported Probe mV Bosch Carbon Barber Colman MMI Carbon MMI Dewpoint AACC Drayton ACP SSI MacDhui Oxygen Log Oxygen Bosch Oxygen Dewpoint Note 2 To configure Oxygen in ppm select Probe Type Oxygen and Oxygen Exp 4 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 183 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 13 2 2 Wiring Page Table Number These parameters configure zirconia probe block wiring ZIRCONIA PROBE 13 2 2 Wiring Page Zirconia probe mV input source Modbus address Zirconia probe temperature inputsource Modbus address Clean Src Zirconia clean probe input source Modbus address Not available for Oxygen Probe Types Rem Gas Src Remote gas reference Process factor Modbus address source Not available for Oxygen Probe Types 13 3 ZIRCONIA WIRING EXAMPLE 13 3 1 The Zirconia Function Block Zirconia Temp Src Zirc PV mV Src Zirc Status Renan Clean Output Clean Src Sooting Alarm Figure 13 2 Zirconia Function Block 13 3 1 1 Main Features Calculation of PV The Process Variable can be carbon potential Dewpoint or Oxygen concentration The PV is d
278. een A and D terminals Bulb Current from Ato 2004A 735uA D Calibration Accuracy 4mQ 200 1mQ 50 23 3 C 8mQ 1000 2mQ 925 50 o Ea M 10mQ 2000 2 5mQ 500 ae 14mQ 3000 3 5mQ 760 Ambient temperature 5ppm of reading 5ppm of reading 0 07mQ C drift within 15 C and 0 25mQ C 35 C Long term drift 70ppm of reading 25ppm of Span year 15 C to 35 C 50 20 RH Resolution with f t c OFF Resolution as peak deviation from mean value 6mQ 16mK 1 5mQ 16mK 4mK Mois Hospes 1 5mQ mk 0 4mQ t4mK 1mK Puce secs 0 8mQ 2mK 0 2mQ 2mK 0 5mK Linearity 4 2mQ Typ 0 6mQ Typ within 0 to 80 of Span linearization 5mK_ maximum deviation within 200 C to 850 C Pt100 and Pt25 5 from the standard characteristic that assumes precise 100 000Q and 25 500Q PRT resistances at 0 C Other Features a c sensor break detection User Calibration Immunity to EM field interference EN61326 Industrial levels Maximum deviation on measured values during the tests is within 0 005 of Full Span For description and remedies of other possible sources of error see section 27 5 6 31 17 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS Allocation Modbus Profibus DP DeviceNet EtherNet 2 modules fitted in slots H amp J isolated RS232 2 wire or 4 wire RS485 max baud 19 2KB in H module amp 9 6KB in J module High speed RS485 1 5Mbaud H slot ony
279. eering Handbook 2704 Controller 15 2 3 One Shot Timer Mode This timer behaves like a simple oven timer e When the Time is edited to a non zero value the Output is set to On e The Time value is decremented until it reaches zero The Output is then cleared to Off e The Time value can be edited at any point to increase or decrease the duration of the On time e Once set to zero the Time is not reset to a previous value it must be edited by the operator to start the next On Time e The Input is used to gate the Output If the Input is set the time will count down to zero If the Input is cleared to Off then the Time will hold and the Output will switch Off until the Input is next set Note since the Input is a digital wire it is possible for the operator to NOT wire it and set the Input value to On which permanently enables the timer e The Triggered variable will be set to On as soon as the Time is edited It will reset when the Output is cleared to Off The behaviour of the timer under different input conditions is shown below Input Time Edited Time Edited Output Time Triggered This diagram shows how the Input can be used to gate the Timer as a type of hold Input T bt iy dh Time Edited EM lt E gt lt gt 4 A B C D Time Output A B C D Figure 15 3 One Shot Timer 218 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 15 2 4 Compressor or Minimum On Timer Mode
280. eipt the packaging or the instrument are damaged do not install the product but contact your supplier If the instrument is to be stored before use protect from humidity and dust in an ambient temperature range of 30 C to 75 C 30 3 SERVICE AND REPAIR This controller has no user serviceable parts Contact your supplier for repair Caution Charged capacitors Before removing an instrument from its sleeve disconnect the supply and wait at least two minutes to allow capacitors to discharge It may be convenient to partially withdraw the instrument from the sleeve then pause before completing the removal In any case avoid touching the exposed electronics of an instrument when withdrawing it from the sleeve Failure to observe these precautions may cause damage to components of the instrument or some discomfort to the user 30 3 1 Electrostatic discharge precautions When the controller is removed from its sleeve some ofthe exposed electronic components are vulnerable to damage by electrostatic discharge from someone handling the controller To avoid this before handling the unplugged controller discharge yourself to ground 30 3 2 Cleaning Do not use water or water based products to clean labels or they will become illegible Isopropyl alcohol may be used to clean labels A mild soap solution may be used to clean other exterior surfaces of the product 362 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 3
281. el Il C Type PT 100 Linear Square Root Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 PT 25 5 296 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 23 3 13 Dual DC Output This module order code DO can be fitted in slots 4 5 and 6 with a maximum of three in any single controller It contains two output channels Each channel can be either 4 20mA control output with 12 bit resolution or a 24Vdc 20 to 30Vdc transmitter supply The module provides full 240Vac isolation This module may be used if extra analogue outputs are required to implement the control functionality extra precision and stability of control is desired This because the module is power efficient and therefore does not cause significant temperature fluctuation inside the instrument extra power sources fully isolated are needed for passive current transmitters active transducers requiring 20V to 30V source or I Os of open collector type Dual DC Channel 1 20V 4 20mA control output Bis Output Module MM ec 7 Channel2 21mA e Transmitter supply Volts TRE A resistor of approx 56KQ should be added if the current load 0 5mA Figure 23 1 Ch1 amp Ch2 Configured as Current Control amp PSU 16mA bipolar current Spe a n output Current load resistor should Channel 2 be less than 1000 4 20mA output Channel 1 4 20mA output Channel 1 amp 2 set up Eng
282. en to User string the program number Each character can be set in urn 8 14 2 Fine and Coarse Holdback Fine and Coarse Holdback values are only displayed when Holdback Mode Per Segment They allow you to apply one value of holdback to selected segments and another value to other segments For example you could apply Fine Holdback to one or more Dwell segments and Coarse Holdback to one or more Ramp segments The segments in which Fine and Coarse Holdback are applied are selected in PROGRAM EDIT Segments Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 87 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 8 15 EXAMPLE TO SET UP EACH SEGMENT OF A PROGRAM Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes D 1 From any display press to access the page header menu 2 Press or Y PROGRAM EDIT to select e 3 Press to show sub headers IM RUN PROGRAM EDIT 4 Press or Y if necessary to select Segment If the program is new confirm as instructed on the display Create Prg 2 If the program exists the D gt Cancel C OK 5 Press C to select the segment arameters P segment details are displayed A Y FROGRAM EDIT Segment xSBYx 6 Press or to scroll up or PO down the list of parameters Up to 100 segments are 7 Press again to edit the available per program parameter The value or state of a parameter prefixed by can be changed
283. equired location ensuring that the raised section on the plastic cover ofthe module slides into the slot in the retaining housing 4 Slide the controller back into its sleeve and turn power back on 5 After a brief initialisation period the message Module Changed will appear on the display 6 Press and C together as instructed to acknowledge 7 Ifthe message Bad Ident is displayed this indicates that the wrong type of module has been installed for example an unisolated logic output module from 2400 series 16 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 2 3 WIRING WARNING You must ensure that the controller is correctly configured for your application Incorrect configuration could result in damage to the process being controlled and or personal injury It is your responsibility as the installer to ensure that the configuration is correct The controller may either have been configured when ordered or may need configuring now Before proceeding further please read Appendix B Safety and EMC information 2 3 1 Electrical Connections All electrical connections are made to the screw terminals at the rear of the controller They accept wire sizes from 0 5 to 1 5 mm 16 to 22 AWG and should be tightened to a torque of 0 4Nm 3 5lbin If you wish to use crimp connectors the correct size is AMP part number 349262 1 The terminals are protected by a clear plastic hinged cover to prevent hands
284. er This Is The Display You Should See Menu Level 3 6 3 TO ENTER CONFIGURATION LEVEL Do This 1 From any display press to return to the page header menu Press or Y to select ACCESS Press Le to select the access level parameters v Press or to select Config A Press or Y lto enter the passcode When the correct passcode is entered the display momentarily changes to PASS then back to the start level to confirm correct entry To go from a higher level to a lower level does not require entry of a passcode 6 4 1 Do This From the previous display press LO to scroll to the level at which you wish to change the passcode Press i or Md to enter the new passcode from 0 to 9999 6 5 TO ENTER NEW PASSCODES ACCESS This Is The Display You Should See ACCESS SEYE TO EXIT CONFIGURATION LEVEL Engineering Handbook Additional Notes This is the page header which contains the access levels The default passcode of a new controller is 4 to enter Config evel If a new passcode has been entered in Config level this will be in the form 0 to 9999 f an incorrect passcode is entered the display returns to 0 Note n the special case that the passcode has been configured as None the display will blink momentarily when Config level is selected and Config level will be entered immediately Additional Notes This w
285. er Electrode Inner Electrode Screened Compensating Cable Figure 2 22 Screening connections dual input configuration Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 35 Engineering Handbook CHAPTER 3 OPERATION This chapter describes day to day operation of the controller 3 3 1 2704 Controller OPERATOR INTERFACE OVERVIEW The front panel of the 2704 consists of a 120 x 160 pixel electroluminscent display and seven operator push buttons Figure 3 1 shows an example of a single loop display The display is used to show the process conditions The seven operator buttons allow adjustments to be made to the controller Alarm Beacon appears at the left of the banner when an alarm is present Program number Name Autotune status Setpoint Source Auto Manual Loop Type text shown for example if cascade CSD is configured LP1 C Units or SBY FOL Final Bake 501700 F 0 PV 0 SP Output level Operator buttons Figure 3 1 Operator Interface Single Loop Units If units have been selected in configuration level they will be displayed on the status bar The choices are C PF PK V mV A mA PH mmHg psi bar mbar mmWg inWg inWW PSIG Ohms 76 RH 6O2 6CO2 CP PPM Custom units are also possible 36 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 3 1 1 The Operator But
286. erage R O L1 The output will be the sum of up to six inputs Sum The output will be the maximum of up to six inputs The output will be the minimum of up to six inputs Min Casc Numlp Address of the Num Ips parameter in the previous Modbus address Conf block of a cascade If not wired not in a cascade nl CasSrc Source for cascade input Modbus address Conf If not in a cascade Source for input 1 Source for input 2 Modbus address None Conf Source for input 3 Modbus address Conf Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 251 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller Table These parameters allow you to configure the selected multi operator Press C MULTI OPERATOR Number to select each parameter MultiOp1 to 3 Page 18 5 1 Parameter Parameter Description Value Default Access Level Name Source for input 4 Modbus address None Conf Source for input 5 Modbus address None Conf Source for input 6 Modbus address None Conf OP Resolution 0 to 4 decimal places or XXXXXX Conf Resolution SCI scientific Default To define the fallback condition Clip Bad Clip Bad Conf See section 18 5 2 Fallback Bad Clip Good Fallback Good Output Result of operation L3 value Bad Note 1 Units None C F K V mV A mA PH mmHg psi Bar mBar RH mmWG inWG inWW Ohms PSIG 9602 PPM 96CO2 96CP 96 sec C F K rel Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4 Custom
287. erived from the probe temperature input the probe mV input and remote gas reference input values Various probe makes are supported Endothermic Gas Correction This enables the user to set the percentage of carbon monoxide CO present in the Endothermic Gas This value can be measured via a gas analyser and fed into the controller as an analogue value Probe Clean As these sensors are used in furnace environments they require regular cleaning Cleaning Burn Off is performed by forcing compressed air through the probe Cleaning can be initiated either manually or automatically using a timed period During cleaning the PV output is frozen Health Alarm Zirconia Probe Status After cleaning an alarm output is generated if the PV does not return to 95 of its value within a specified time This indicates that the probe is deteriorating and should be replaced Sooting Alarm An output is generated which indicates that the furnace is about to soot 184 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 13 3 2 Configuration of a Carbon Potential Control Loop This example assumes that the probe temperature Type K input is connected to module 3 and the milli volt input to module 6 Loop 1 normally controls temperature so the carbon loop will be Loop 2 Carbon control and alarm outputs are relays and configured as On Off Mod 1A Poen Wire Src Mod3A Va Mod1C Zirconia gt Wire Src
288. erride Override control is available with analogue time proportioning and ON OFF control outputs It is not available with valve position outputs Figure 11 14 shows a simple override control loop The main and override controller outputs are fed to a low signal selector The override controller setpoint is set to a value somewhere above the normal operating setpoint but below any safety interlocks There is only one Auto Manual switch for both loops In manual mode the control outputs of both loops track the actual output ensuring bumpless transfer when auto is selected The transfer between main and override PID control is also bumpless Main SP Main PV Main Control Loop Main OP PID only Control Output Override SP Min select Override Control Loop PID or Override OP Override PV On Off Figure 11 14 Simple Override Control Select Minimum 162 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 11 12 3 Sensor Break Action As from firmware version 6 10 the action of the control loops during sensor break will be determined by the Sensor Break Type parameter Sbrt 11 12 4 Sensor Break Type Output 0 In this mode then no matter which sensor fails the output will go to the Sensor Break Power oSbOP 11 12 5 Sensor Break Type Hold 1 In this mode the action is dependent on whether the loop to which the sensor is attached is the controlling loop If itis the con
289. es fully on corresponding to the Electrical High setting If the module is Analogue 100 100 output 309 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 23 5 5 Retransmission Output The retransmission output can be scaled so that the output value corresponds to range of the signal to be retransmitted Figure 23 10 shows an example where the retransmitted signal is PV or SP and an electrical output of 4 20mA represents 20 0 to 200 0 units Display Reading eg 200 0 Display Lo Electrical Output Electrical Lo Electrical Hi eg4mA eg 20 mA Figure 23 10 Scaling a Retransmission Output 23 5 5 1 To Scale A Retransmission Output The procedure is the same as scaling a Control Output as described in section 23 5 4 310 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 23 5 6 To Scale the Potentiometer input Engineering Handbook When using the controller in bounded valve position control mode it is necessary to calibrate the feedback potentiometer to correctly read the position of the valve The value of the potentiometer input is read by the parameter Module xA Val where x is the number of the slot in which the Pot Input module is fitted To calibrate the potentiometer input it is necessary to carry out this procedure in access level 3 Do This 1 From the relevant LOOP SETUP page header select Motor 2 Press e to select Motor Parameters 3 Press A Cal 4 Press C J to select edit A
290. ess C to select GroupNum GroupNum Group number source Group number source source M GCDHS address directly if known or select from Hold Src Hold Source the listin Appendix D Run Hold Src Run Hold Source Group Adv Group advance move to the next group 8 24 8 PROGRAM GROUPS Group Edit Page This page is available in operator and configuration level Table Number These parameters allow you to set up individual Program Groups PROGRAM GROUPS 8 24 3 Group Edit Page Level Group Number To select the Group number Load Programs or select from 1 Load L1 Load Programs allows a program to 20 Programs to be entered and run directly Delayed Start To set a time delay before the h mm ss 0 00 00 program will run Group Status The program group can be Reset controlled from this parameter Run The status of the program is also Hold shown by text and symbols at the Complete top of this display PSP1 To select the profile to be run in Not Used L1 the group 01 PSP1 P1 to 20 PSP1 P20 Not Used means PSP1 is not part of the group 01 PSP1 P1 means PSP1 is selected from P EE 1 to 20 Group Name A user eb rssipurs 7 name USER SELECT By default if Group Number Group 1 to 20 Load Programs then Group Name USER SELECT To customise the name press A or V to change the digit with the flashing cursor Press C to advance the cursor 100 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 8 2
291. et up the fixed digital IO connected to to terminals D1 to D7 and DC Dig 107 Page Diagnostic Allows access to parameters which set up the fixed digital Input connected to Page terminal D8 and DC Note Names shown in ta ics can be customised Table 22 1 Standard I O 22 2 PV INPUT Allows access to parameters which set up the fixed Process Variable Input connected to terminals VH VI V and V This is the PV input for a single loop controller 22 2 1 To Scale the PV Input Scaling of the PV input applies to linear process inputs only eg linearised transducers where it is necessary to match the displayed reading to the electrical input levels from the transducer PV input scaling is not provided for direct thermocouple or RTD inputs Figure 22 1 shows an example of input scaling where an electrical input of 4 20mA requires the display to read 2 5 to 200 0 units Display Reading Display Hi eg 200 0 Display Lo eg 2 5 Electrical Input Electrical Lo Electrical Hi eg4mA eg 20 mA Figure 22 1 Input Scaling Standard IO Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 273 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 22 2 2 Offset Offset has the effect of moving the whole curve shown in Figure 22 1 up or down about a central point The Offset parameter is found in the STANDARD IO PV Input page as shown in the controller view in Section 22 2 4 To scale a linear PV Input proceed as follows
292. etpoint for the other the slave For cascade control to be effective the slave loop should be more responsive than the master 11 10 2 Full Scale Cascade Mode An example of Full Scale Cascade Mode is shown in Figure 11 7 A controller the slave regulates the fuel flow to a furnace A second controller the master measures the temperature but instead of regulating the valve it regulates the setpoint of the flow controller In full scale mode the scaling is such that the master is allowed to adjust the slave by 0 100 Remote feedforward is a user defined wireable parameter It may be used if there is a requirement for some additional parameter for example an analogue input to trim the master PID output value before the slave setpoint is applied An application may be a liquid temperature control system using cascade control of heater temperature where variations in control rate can be directly fed forward into the slave loop modifying heater temperature and giving rapid compensation Temp PV gt Furnace Master Temp SP Controller PID OP PID OP Flow SP Slave Valve Controller Flow PV Figure 11 7 Full Scale Cascade Control 152 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 11 10 3 Trim Mode In this example the slave controls the temperature within a furnace The master is measuring the temperature of the workpiece and controlling the temperature of the slave In this case th
293. ey LP2 so that loop 2 can be put into auto or manual mode when User Page 2 is being displayed 240 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 17 5 USERPAGE PARAMETER TABLES Engineering Handbook The parameter tables are listed for each type of User Page 17 5 1 Single Loop Table Number WASI This page allows you to configure a single loop user page USER PAGES User Page 1 to 8 Default Access Level Defines where the page is located Page Style Auto Man Key Defines the style of the page Auto manual button is associated with this user page Defines the name which appears in the header at the top of the page Parameter name from user text Promote Add Promote parameter address Modbus Address Promote parameter name from user text Promote Acc Access level of the promoted parameter Promote Value Promoted parameter value Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 None None Conf Main Page Loop Summary Parameter List Single Loop Dual loop Triple Loop 1 Triple Loop 2 Status Grid Bar Graph Blank Page Default Conf Text Default Text 01 User Text o 100 User Text Conf Conf Default Conf Text Default Text 01 User Text to 100 User Text Conf Conf Default Conf Text Default Text 01 User Text o 100 User Text Lev 1 Read Only Lev 1 Alterable Lev 2 Read Only Lev 2 Alterable Only appears if a parameter is promoted 241 Engineering Hand
294. f Only shown if Channel Type Thermocouple 0 C 45 C 50 C None NE LANE L3 Only shown if Channel Type Pyrometer E Electrical Val The current electrical value of the input Input range units R O depend on channel type Module 3 or 6 A The current value in engineering units R O Val Module 3A or 6A can be user defined text Offset Transducer scale offset Range limits Sami REN CJC Temp Temperature read at the rear terminals C R O Thermocouple inputs only SBrk Trip Imp Current sensor break value See section 22 3 3 R O Read as a of the SBrk Impedance configured Channel Name Channel name Default R O Text Note 2 The parameters in the above two tables are displayed when En Dual Mode Yes If En Dual Mode No then the module can be used as a single input with an update rate of 10Hz Channel C parameters are then not applicable and the list of Channel A parameters becomes identical to the parameter list for the single PV Input module see section 23 3 9 To calibrate the module it is necessary to set En Dual Mode Yes Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 295 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 23 3 12 4 Wire RTD Input Two special input modules for PRT type sensors are available that can satisfy basic requirements of metrology applications in terms of stability and resolution Module code PH is optimised to work with Pt100 and module code PL is optimised to work with Pt25 5 It is
295. f electrodes that are present A 2 electrode design is the most commonly used in boiler installations although both 3 and 4 electrodes are also found The basic construction of the 2 electrode is shown below where the boiler metal work is used as one of the electrodes The conductance is therefore measured between the centre electrode and the probe casing or the boiler s body shell The 2704 TDS Module delivers a 1Khz alternating signal of 0 4Vpp peak to peak amplitude from the driver terminal A The driver sense terminal B and ground sense terminal C measures the return voltage and automatically compensates for cable resistance by adjusting the driver voltage to obtain 0 4Vpp at the probe The PV is a conductance a reciprocal of resistance in units of Siemens S 1 0 measured between terminals A B amp C D from which the water specific conductivity and hence TDS is derived Normally a temperature sensor usually Pt100 is included within the probe construction and connected to another 2704 module This allows the conductance to be compensated for temperature fluctuations Driver Inner Electrode TDS Module Terminals Outer Electrode or Boiler Wall Boiler Ground Figure 28 2 Two Electrode TDS Probe 28 3 5 Probe Deterioration When a probe is immersed in a fluid a certain amount of solids will bind to the probe This can be seen as scaling on the probe itself In case of only two electrode probes any scaling or
296. f power fail to the controller a strategy may be set in configuration level which defines how the controller behaves on restoration of the power These strategies include Continue The program runs from the last setpoint This may cause full power to be applied to the process for a short period to heat the process back to its value prior to the power failure Ramp The PV will ramp back to its back original value at the rate last encountered In a Dwell segment the period continues when the PV recovers to the SP value The power fail time the recovery time is added to the dwell time set A special case exists if no ramps have been encountered The diagram shows the behaviour following a power fail in segment 3 2704 Controller Behaviour during ramp Behaviour during dwell Power fail Power fail Behaviour during ramp Behaviour during dwell Power fail Power fail xX Recovery at previous ramp rate Dwell time t1 t2 t3 t4 where t1 t4 dwell time set Power fail Segment 1 The process is aborted by resetting the program Hold The programmer will enter the HOLD state The operator may then change the state to Reset or Program Run On exiting from Hold into Run the program will continue it will not ramp back This delay should be taken into consideration when setting up the Test Time recovery parameter 78 Test Time This option makes use of the real time clock in the controller
297. f program Not shown for segment 1 PSP1 Type Profile setpoint 1 type Only shown if Program Type Ramp Rate and program not in End PSP7 Target Profile setpoint 1 target value SP1 lo limit to L1 SP1 hi limit PSP7 Dwell Tm Profile setpoint 1 dwell time 0 00 00 0 Only shown if Program Type Ramp Rate Segment Type Dwell and program not in End PSP7 Rate Profile setpoint 1 rate L1 Only shown if Program Type Ramp Rate Segment Type Dwell and program not in End PSP1 Hbk Type Profile setpoint 1 holdback type Off Off L1 Only shown if holdback is configured per Fine Lo segment Fine Hi Fine Band Course Lo Course Hi Course Band Seg Duration Segment duration for Time to Target d h m s 0 00 00 0 L1 programmer only L1 Wait Event Wait if selected event is true No wait No Wait Only shown if wait events configured Event A Event B Event C Prog User Val 1 Allows a Programmer User Val to be 0 to 100 chosen See also section 8 7 Only shown if Prog User Val 1 is configured Prog User Val 2 Allows a Programmer User Val to be 0 to 100 chosen See also section 8 7 Only shown if Prog User Val 2 is configured a Prog DO Values Digital outputs summary These are shown in this format if Named Dos No The number of DO values is set by Num of Prog DOs PROFILE SP1 Options Not shown if Num of Prog Dos None Seg Edit 1 to 16 If programmer event outputs have been The name of the Off L1
298. fault Text 01 to 100 User Text Lev 1 Read Only Lev 1 Alterable Lev 2 Read Only Lev 2 Alterable Conf Conf Default Conf Text Conf Conf Conf Conf Default Conf Text Conf Only appears if a parameter is promoted Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 17 5 3 Triple Loop 1 and 2 Table Number This page allows you to configure a triple loop 1 and 2 user page USER PAGES 17 5 3 User Page 1 to 8 Level Page Location Defines where the page is None Conf located Main Page Loop Summary Page Style Defines the style of the page Parameter List Conf Single Loop Dual loop Triple Loop 1 Triple Loop 2 Status Grid Bar Graph Blank Page Auto Man Key To associate the Auto manual None LP1 None Conf button with this page LP2 LP3 Graph Style Grows from bottom up Absolute Conf Grows from centre Error Page Name Defines the name which appears Default Text Default Conf in the header at the top of the 01 to 100 User Text Text page Section 1 Name Defines the text which appears in Conf the left section Default Text Section 2 Name Defines the text in the mid section 01 User Text Default Conf to Text Section 3 Name Defines the text in the right 100 User Text Default Conf section Text Parameter number 1 to 15 or 18 Conf Parameter address Modbus Address Ho Conf Custom Name Parameter name from user text Default Text Default Conf 01 to 100 User T Text Custom Grap
299. fines Text Number 2 to be High Temp set Text Number 3 or any unused text no set Usr3 Check Chiller 2 In ALARMS User 1 Page set Name 02 High Temp This replaces the default name with High Temp Set Message 03 Check Chiller 7 3 3 To Re Name Module 1 to be called Heat Output Individual modules can be re named to simplify plant diagnostics 7 3 8 1 Implementation 1 In INSTRUMENT User Text Page set User Text Enabled set Text Number 4 or any unused text no set Usr4 Heat Output This defines Text Number 4 to be Heat Output 2 In MODULE IO Module 1A Page set Module Name 04 Heat Output This replaces the default name with Heat Output 68 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 7 3 4 To Rename a Digital Input and show in the Summary Page This example will display the value of the digital input alongside the text Test 1 in the Summary Page for Digital Input 1 7 3 4 1 Implementation 1 In INSTRUMENT User Text Page set User Text Enabled set Text Number 5 or any unused text no set Usr5 Test 1 2 In STANDARD IO Dig IO1 Page set Channel Type Digital Input This page also allows you to set the input for inverted operation 3 In INSTRUMENT Summary Page set Show Summary Yes set Promote Param 5 or the text no above set Promote Addr 05402 DIO1 Val This connects digital input 1 to the first parameter of the Summary d
300. first However do remember about 1 hour delay before being able to verify the calibration Note 2 Typical extra errors to expect 0 5 C within the first minute 0 2 C within first 15 minutes 0 1 C within first 1 hour Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes STANDARD IO IPM Input SBYE 1 Fora controller calibrated for RTD type PT100 the view on the display should be as shown ES 1 2 Press until the parameter Cal Cal State Idle State is displayed Calibrate at 150 ohms 3 Set the decade box for 150 000 mE 4 Repeat procedure 25 3 1 steps 9 to 10 v Cal State Confirm Doing Fine Cal for RTD takes deesse about 30 seconds This is about Calibrate at 400 ohms seven times longer than when calibrating mV 5 Set the decade box for 400 000 Cal State High 4000hms p 6 Repeat procedure 27 3 1 steps 11 to 14 Confirm Cal State T i 334 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 27 4 ANALOGUE INPUT Calibration of the Analogue input is carried out using an 8 volt 2mV source mA calibration is included in Volt calibration and assumes 100Q burden resistor across terminals BA amp BB There are three conditions to be calibrated Offset Common Mode Rejection and Gain The use of a pre wired jig is recommended assuming that all three conditions are to be calibrated The connections for this are shown in
301. g Bad Logic 1 to Bad Logic 7 CPU Add Err Calc CRC Err Bad Cal Restore Bad Cust Lin Bad Instruct Bad Slot Instr DMA Addr Err Reserved Int Undefined Int SPC Init Err H Rx Timeout J Rx Timeout 329 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 27 CHAPTER 27 CALIBRATION The 2704 controller is calibrated in three ways These are 1 Factory Calibration The controller is calibrated to very high accuracy during manufacture and the calibration values are permanently stored within the controller Factory calibration is not available to the user but it is always possible to revert to the factory values if required 2 Transducer Scaling This is described in Chapter 24 Transducer scaling allows offsets to be entered to compensate for errors or differences in the process measurement system 3 User Calibration This allows the instrument to be calibrated against a certified field calibration source This chapter describes User Calibration 27 1 USER CALIBRATION The following inputs can be calibrated 1 PV Input This is the fixed PV input on terminals VH V1 V V The PV Input can be configured for Thermocouple Platinum Resistance Thermometer RTD Pyrometer mV Volt High Impedance Input Volts or mA inputs Pyrometer and mA ranges are included in the mV range Thermocouple calibration involves calibrating the temperature offset of the CJC sensor only Other aspects of thermocouple calibration are also included in mV calibration
302. gapore Thailand Vietnam Invensys Process Systems S Pte Ltd T 65 6829 8888 F 65 6829 8401 E info eurotherm asean invensys com AUSTRALIA Me bourne Invensys Process Systems Australia Pty Ltd T 61 0 8562 9800 F 61 0 8562 9801 E info eurotherm au invensys com AUSTRIA V enna Eurotherm GmbH T 43 1 7987601 F 43 1 7287605 E info eurotherm at invensys com BELGIUM amp LUXEMBOURG Moha Eurotherm S A N V T 32 85 274080 F 32 85 274081 E info eurotherm be invensys com BRAZIL Campinas SP Eurotherm Ltda 5519 3112 5333 5519 3112 5345 info eurotherm br invensys com HINA Eurotherm China 86 21 61451188 86 21 61452602 info eurotherm cn invensys com amn m m 4 Beijing Office T 86 10 5909 5700 F E 86 10 5909 5709 10 info eurotherm cn invensys com FRANCE Lyon Eurotherm Automation SA T 33 478 664500 F 33 478 352490 E info eurotherm fr invensys com GERMANY Limburg Invensys Systems GmbH gt EUROTHERM lt Copyright Invensys Eurotherm Limited 2012 Invensys Eurotherm the Invensys Eurotherm logo Chessell EurothermSuite Mini8 EPower nanodac Eycon Eyris and Wonderware are trademarks of Invensys plc its subsidiaries and affiliates All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners T 49 6431 2980 F 49 6431 298119 E info eurotherm de invensys com INDIA Mumbai Invensys India Pvt Ltd T 91 22 67579800 F 91 22
303. grammer Example To Run a Program Using the PROG Button sssssssssssseseeeneeneeeeeeenerenenrenennns 113 Asynchronous Programmer Status Bar ect enitn es tre e oii bre ee ree ede ee Lave ee e bec deve tre eret 114 CHAPTER 9 DIGITAL PROGRAMMER e eeeeee eene tn nennen seta seta senn setas ets sea sen senses sena 115 WHATS THE DIGITAL PROGRAMMER tis 4 iden en etch redemit 115 LOVED THE DIGIEAL PROGRAMMER se tdt Ee 116 Digital Program Edit Page Digital Program 1 to 4 Page E POWER FAIL RECOVERY 22 352 2 eee Quee pie p eR RHEHDHBHEHIER 117 Cascade Trim Mode Earlier Controll trs s ettet eee tees 118 Cascade Parameters priorito April 20071 retener e n v re Y PR HERE CR IEEE e td 118 CHAPTER 10 ALARM OPERATION eeeeeeeee etienne ennt nn sena stn senses setas esses setas senses sena 119 DEEINLTIOIN OF ADPARMS AND EVENTS 2 2 rite o t rete Perte rete ti 119 Customisable Parameter Namies cein certc cr iter itr ne Re ee ci eee titio et 119 TYPES OF ALARM USED IN 2704 CONTROLLER 120 F llSeale High edet ete ette 120 Full Scale Low 120 Deviation High Alarm 120 Deviation Low Alarm 121 Deviation Band rne 121 Rate Of Change Alarm Negative Direction zx 122 Rate Of Change Alarm Positive Direction retener entere teen 122 BEOCKINGZABABMYS ettet titm rrr eite peeled tiene etie nn 123 Full Scale Low With Blocking ue 1
304. gue A B C refer to the output channel of a single dual or triple module respectively The name of the module is user configurable If the channel is not used the message No Parameters is displayed 2 Press C to show the list of parameters for the selected module 3 Press S again to select the first parameter DFF 4 Press again to scroll to a parameter which you wish to change 5 Press or Y to change its value Tables in the following pages show the parameters available for different module types 23 3 1 DC Control and DC Retransmission U Table Number This page allows you to configure a DC Output module for control or MODULE IO 23 3 1 retransmission Module 7 A This does not apply to the Dual DC or High Resolution Retransmission output modules Access Level Ident Module identification DC Output R Channel Type I O type Volts Conf mA Eng Value Hi High display reading Electrical Val The current electrical value of the output 0 to 10 00V in operation mode or 0 to 20mA Conf L3 See output scaling Module 1A Val The current output value in operation 100 0 mode ve values are not used Module 1A can be a user defined text Cal Trim Analogue output calibration trim Only available in calibration mode See section 27 5 1 Channel Name User defined name for the channel Select from User Text Page Section 7 2 6 This module has a single output Its parameters are
305. h integral time constant Such systems usually operate at a fixed set of conditions so that a once only calculation or manual setting of the Manual Reset can be acceptable Manual Reset should be set to 0 when the integral term is set to a value 146 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 11 5 3 PID Aux Parameters Table Number 11 5 3 Cascade only Parameter Description Remote input Parameter Name Rem Sched IP Only shown if Schedule Type Rem Sched IP Aux Control hold flag Freezes the control output Aux Integral hold flag changes to PID set 2 Sets the level at which PID set 2 changes to PID set 3 Control Hold Integral Hold Schedule Type Num of Sets Active PID Set Active An Val 1 2 Boundary 2 3 Boundary The boundary parameters do not appear if Schedule Type These parameters allow you to set up the PID sets Override amp Display range No Yes Yes As main loop 1 to 3 PID set 1 Range units Range units e Engineering Handbook LP1 SETUP PID Aux Page Value Access Level Conf Conf L R O L3 L 1 3 L3 L3 L3 1 3 3 L Eu E Set i a eee EN E EE Manual Reset Set 1 only applies to prom 4 a PD controller Relative cool gain set 1 L1 The above ten parameters are repeated for set 2 and again for set 3 if the number of PID sets has been configured to 2 or 3 respectively Derivative 1 Cutback Low 1
306. hLo Graph low point 999 9 to 9999 9 all Conf Custom GraphHi Graph high point 999 9 to 9999 9 Conf Promote Add Promote parameter address Modbus Address Conf Promote Name Promote parameter name from Default Text Default Conf user text 01 to 100 User T Text Promote Acc Access level of the promoted Lev 1 Read Only Conf parameter Lev 1 Alterable Lev 2 Read Only Lev 2 Alterable Promote Value Promoted parameter value Only appears if a parameter is promoted Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 243 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 17 5 4 Status Grid Table Number This page allows you to configure a status grid user page USER PAGES 15 5 4 User Page 1 to 8 Level Page Location Defines where the page is None Conf located Main Page Loop Summary Page Style Defines the style of the page Parameter List Conf Single Loop Dual loop Triple Loop 1 Triple Loop 2 Status Grid Bar Graph Blank Page Auto Man Key Auto manual button is associated None Conf with this user page Page Name Defines the name which appears Default Text Default Conf in the header at the top of the 01 to 100 User Text Text page eom taram Parometernumber iem o e Custom Name Parameter name from user text Default Text Default Conf 01 to 100 User T Text ee Wemespemsw a O 9 Promote Add Promote parameter address Modbus Address Promote Name Promote parameter name from Default Text Default Conf user text 01
307. he modbus address of Pattern Generator Digital OP 1 This Is The Display You Should See Menu Level 3 Lai PATTERN GEN Dig Group 11 SET PATTERN GEH Dig Group 1 564 nooo00 400000 O00000 oooo00 oooo00 This Is The Display You Should See 10 EXPHNDEH e Tip Use the copy and paste procedure described in section 3 1 2 to select these parameters Additional Notes The PATTERN GEN page is only available if Enabled as described in section 7 2 Programmer User Value 1 is wired to the Pattern Source Pattern is read only when wired It can only be used to select the pattern if it is not wired Pattern High Lim can be used to limit the number of patterns in any particular application A limit of 8 allows patterns 0 to 7 This parameter allows you to select a name or Enumeration for the pattern See also section 7 3 for User Text examples and section 16 6 for enumeration examples Width limits the number of digits in each pattern six in this example Current OP displays the currently selected output Repeat the above to set up further patterns Additional Notes The modbus addresses of the digital outputs are 1 Group 1 OP 1 9973 to to OP16 9988 Group 2 OP 1 10037 to to OP16 10052 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 16 2 Engineering Handbook ANALOGUE SWITCHES Analogue Sw
308. he automatic transfer of control between one set of PID values and another Gain scheduling may be used in very non linear systems where the control process exhibits large changes in response time or sensitivity see Figure 11 6 below This may occur for example over a wide range of PV or between heating or cooling where the rates of response may be significantly different The number of sets depends on the non linearity of the system Each PID set is chosen to operate over a limited approximately linear range In the case of the 2704 controller this is done at a pre settable strategy defined by the parameter Schedule Type found in the Loop SETUP PID page in configuration level The choices are PV The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the PV SP The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the SP Error The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the error OP The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value of the OP demand Set The PID set can be selected manually Rem Sched IP The transfer between one set and the next depends on the value from a remote source for example a digital input Soft Wired To a parameter chosen by the user The 2704 controller has six sets of PID values the maximum number which you may wish to use is set up in Loop SETUP PID Num of Sets parameter You can select the active set from 1 A digital input 2 A parameter in
309. he module software provides signal conditioning such as filtering cable capacitance compensation over range calibration and error trapping and diagnostic variable Driver O P and SBrk flags 23 4 1 Table Number 23 4 1 Parameter Name Ident A TDS Input Module Parameters This list allows you to set up the parameters for the TDS input module Parameter Description Module type shows the slot in which the module is fitted MODULE IO Module A Page 1 3 4 5 6 Channel Type Used to select the probe type 2 elec Prob Conf 3 4 elec Prob Resolution SBrk Cond SBrk Fallback Display resolution Sensor break value in mS Used to set the level that triggers a sensor break See also Note 1 Sensor break fallback state 7 NN ci au UM Scale Up Scale Filter Time Input filter time Off to 0 10 00 0 2 00 00 lE Module A Val Module Status Cable Offset Driver O P Channel Name Cal State Note 1 The measured conductance shows the slot in which the module is fitted Module status See section 32 3 Compensation for length of cable capacitance See next section for further details Percentage usage of the module s driving capabilities for driving TDS probe and its wiring A value gt 110 causes SBrk Name for the channel selected from User Text Calibration state See Calibration Chapter 27 for further details pene ce 0 000 to L3 99 999 NENNEN l Default C
310. he one required High Vacuum gauge Low Vacuum gauge Backing Vacuum gauge Gauge Switch 5 Press C to display the parameter Setpoint list Pump Control Leak Detect 6 Press Jor Y to scroll through Display the list of parameters associated with the chosen subject These are listed in section 13 12 7 Press or Y to scroll to the required parameter 8 Press to underline the parameter 9 Press or Y to change its value Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 197 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 13 12 PARAMETER TABLES The following tables list all parameters which are available in all levels including configuration level They are accessed using the principle described in the previous section 13 12 1 High Vacuum Parameter Tables Table Number These parameters allow you to set up and configure the high vacuum High Vacuum or takes a 13 12 1 gauge parameters See also section 13 8 3 user name Gauge Src The source from which the high vacuum Modbus address Config gauge is wired Gauge Val The value read by the high vacuum Vacuum Display range L3 R O gauge The source from which the gauge status Modbus address is wired Bad Enable Select The source from which the gauge enable Low Vac Low Vac Config is wired Backing Vac Gauge Off The value at which the high vacuum Vacuum Display range L3 gauge is switched off Gauge On The value at which the high vacuum Vacuum Display range L3
311. he position of each parameter is fixed and dictated by its number indicated next to the parameter Bar graph parameters ABC Parameter name ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC itis not possible to mix Error di edi text i the and Absolute graph styles on irst characters from any one page default text Scroll List Up to 10 parameters can be promoted to the scroll list Figure 17 7 Bar Graph User Page Similar to the Status Grid style and the Status Indicators the position and width of the bar graph will depend on the number of configured parameters This allows more characters to be printed below each graph The maximum number of graphs is ten 17 2 7 Parameter List Style In addition to the six styles listed above parameters can be listed in exactly the same way as the Summary Page listed in section 7 2 7 In effect this allows a further eight summary pages to be defined if required The parameters appear in the order in which they are defined Page name can gt Page Name be chosen from user text Parameter name Parameter names can Parameter name be chosen from user Parameter name text Figure 17 8 Parameter List Style Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 237 Engineering Handbook 17 3 TO CONFIGURE A USER PAGE 2704 Controller Configuration of the Parameter List style is identical to that described in section 7 2 7 Configuration of other styles is the same in principle for all ot
312. he supply line due to lightning strikes or inductive load switching Devices are available in a range of energy ratings and should be selected to suit conditions at the installation 30 4 10 Conductive pollution Electrically conductive pollution must be excluded from the cabinet in which the controller is mounted For example carbon dust is a form of electrically conductive pollution To secure a suitable atmosphere in conditions of conductive pollution fit an air filter to the air intake of the cabinet Where condensation is likely for example at low temperatures include a thermostatically controlled heater in the cabinet 30 4 11 Over temperature protection When designing any control system it is essential to consider what will happen if any part of the system should fail In temperature control applications the primary danger is that the heating will remain constantly on Apart from spoiling the product this could damage any process machinery being controlled or even cause a fire Reasons why the heating might remain constantly on include e the temperature sensor becoming detached from the process e thermocouple wiring becoming short circuit e the controller failing with its heating output constantly on e anexternal valve or contactor sticking in the heating condition e the controller setpoint set too high Where damage or injury is possible we recommend fitting a separate over temperature protection unit with an independent te
313. hen are the internally used values updated If the calibration or manual adjustment are cancelled at any time then the original values from before the calibration or manual adjustment were made are restored Each of these calibration mechanisms are detailed below Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 351 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller ProbeCal The ProbeCal is periodic calibration that will involve the user directly measuring the conductance of the boiler water through titration This value usually measured using calibrated reference conductance meter is then entered into the instrument The value must be entered in the same units as the units set for the TDS PV PPM or uS cmQ25 C The value entered and initial K Factor value are used to calculate Apparent K This Apparent K will then be substituted as the current probe constant throughout the TDS Function block The user may wish to indicate to the instrument the instant the titration sample was taken This is done by starting the calibration The instrument will then immediately acquire and store the read value The calibration however will become valid once the user enters the cal value This is because it may take some time to acquire a titration value by which time the instrument could have a different reading ProbeCal is not available when Setup is set to Enabled or when in CONFIG access level TDScal The TDScal is one of the installation calibration m
314. her pages The example below configures a Dual Loop style Do This From any display press jas many times as necessary to access the page header menu 2 Press or Y to select USER PAGES 3 Press lto display sub headers 4 Press or Y to select the User Page to be configured 5 Press C to show the list of parameters in the User Page selected 6 Press again to choose the parameter 7 Press 4 or Y to select Main Page Loop Summary or None 8 Press to select Page Style 9 Press Al or Y to select Dual Loop 10 Press to select Auto Man Key 11 Press Al or Y to choose the loop to be put into auto manual mode 12 Press l to select Graph Style 13 Press Al or Y to choose Absolute or Error 238 This Is The Display You Should See Menu Config USER SHITCHI USER PAGES Usri gle Le LP1 O1 Usri 1 Default T USER PAGES User Page 1 xSEY USER PAGES User Page 1 SBi s Additional Notes Usr1 is the name which has been given to a User Screen see paragraph 12 Usr1 will normally be replaced by user defined text Page Location defines how to access the page If Main Page is selected the User Page will appear in the main menu following USER PAGES It is available in all access levels If Loop Summary is selected the User Page will be found by pressing the LOOP button in Operator ac
315. hey will be lost when the controller is powered down 341 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 27 5 6 2 Cable Connection Errors Thermally induced e m f along any non copper connection may contribute to reading errors It is worth remembering however that a significant error can only be induced by the net e m f on inner B amp C cable connections see Figure below The 2704 rear terminal connector is made of beryllium copper alloy which minimizes thermally induced e m f at the instrument end The user must ensure that any non copper connections between the RTD and the instrument are either eliminated or the temperature gradients along both the inner connections are identical Nevertheless at thermal equilibrium any net e m f can be calibrated out by doing Low Point Calibration see Figure 27 7 IQ 3A or 6A eS G9 x mC 3B or 6B 2704 x x Inner Wires re 3C or 6C Controller LL C9 3D or 6D us Outer Wires L Figure 27 9 Thermally Induced E M F s in RTD Connections 27 5 6 3 Maximum Resistance of Outer Wires The maximum resistance of outer wires is the difference between the total maximum resistance connected between A and D terminals and the expected maximum resistance of the RTD Therefore the maximum resistance of each outer wire for guaranteed operation up to the maximum of PV resistance reading is 30 for Pt100 module and 5 50 for Pt25 module However using the appropriate RTD fo
316. hould be symmetrical and chosen such that the slave stays in control typically 0 5 slave proportional band This amount however may not be sufficient to disturb the master to achieve a successful tune If the proportional band of the master is in engineering units the tune hysteresis of the master will be 1 engineering unit For a temperature loop therefore the master must be disturbed by at least 1 degree Tune OL and Tune OH are set in Although it is the master which is being tuned it is the slave working SP which has to be modified in order to achieve a change in the output and hence measure a disturbance in the master PV Therefore Tune OL and Tune OH relate to a percentage of the slave range by which the slave working SP will be changed For example if the slave has a range of 200 to 1372 the slave range is 1572 and Tune OL and Tune OH are 1 then the slave working setpoint will be modified by 15 72 degrees In AUTOTUNE Set Autotune Loop to LP7 In LP1 Set Disable CSD to No SETUP Cascade This is to re enable cascade mode and must be done before the time out period of 1 min Page 11 10 7 Step 8 Return to control The slave and master loops should now be tuned Try changing the main setpoint and observe the response If the master PV response is oscillatory then you may not have restricted the disturbance of the slave enough Try decreasing the values of Tune OL and Tune OH and retune the master 1
317. ibus DeviceNet Modbus TCP Ethernet 12 Comms J None Fitted 232 Modbus 2 wire EIA 485 4 wire EIA 485 e 2 Profile DO Dual 4 20mA OP 24Vdc 232 Master ERO 3 Profile psu 2 wire 485 Master slots 1 4 5 4 wire 485 Master Application Hi resloution DC retrans Standard amp 24Vdc PSU Manual Zirconia slots 1 4 5 9 English 1 Gauge Vacuum TDS input French 3 Gauge Vacuum Boiler Function Hardware notes 4 wire PT100 slots 3 6 4 wire PT25 slots 3 6 German Dutch Spain Sweden Italian IS TS4 TS8 18 XX 1 Basic controller includes 8 digital registers 10 User Values 4 timers 4 totaliser and RT Clock 2 Hours 4 Hours 8 Hours Config Tools None 2 Toolkit 1 includes 16 analogue 16 digital pattern generator digital programmer analogue switch wiring block amp 30 user values NO aR Oo Hardware Code Example 2704 VH 323 XX RR PV D4 TP PV XX A2 XX ENG U1 IT ET module in H slot includes terminal adaptor Dual analogue input suitable for carbon probes inputs not isolated from each other Each channel of the DO module can be 4 20mA control or 24V PSU The HR module has one high resolution DC output and one 24Vdc power supply Toolkit 2 includes Toolkit 1 plus extra 16 analogue 16 digital operations and 20 user values Three loop controller with capability to store 20 three profile programs Supply voltage 100 240 Vac Modules 2 x PV input 1 x Dual relay 1 x DC control 1 x Triple logic
318. ics of the plant Examples of parameters available to the user are shown in Figure 4 1 as Settings In this manual these parameters are shown in tables an example of which is shown in Section 3 6 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 49 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 5 CHAPTER 5 SOFT WIRING 5 1 WHAT IS SOFT WIRING Soft Wiring sometimes known as User Wiring refers to the connections which are made in software between function blocks This chapter describes the principles of soft wiring through the operator interface of the instrument iTools configuration software available from your supplier enables you to configure this feature using a PC In general every function block has at least one input and one output Input parameters are used to specify where a function block reads its incoming data the Input Source The input source is usually soft wired to the output from a preceding function block Output parameters are usually soft wired to the input source of subsequent function blocks It is possible to wire from any parameter using its Modbus address In practice however it is unlikely that you will wish to wire from many of the available parameters A list of commonly wireable parameters has therefore been produced and these are displayed in the controller with both their Modbus address and a mnemonic of the parameter name An example is shown in the Section 5 1 2 1 i e 05108 PVIn Val The full list of these commonly
319. ient temperature Linearity error Leakage 31 24 1 mV Input Two ranges working range 40mV full linear range 60mV noise resolution 1uV OFF O 5uV 0 4sec 0 25uV 1 6sec working range 80mV full linear range 105mV noise resolution 2uV OFF 1uV 0 4sec 0 5uV 1 6sec Calibration accuracy 25 C lt 1 5uV 0 05 of reading T orst case Maximum error at 0 50 C Drift with ambient temperature lt 0 05uV 0 003 of reading per C Linearity error lt 0 002 ofspan i e 1uV 2uV typical case teak Maximum eakage error at 25 C lt 1nA_ typically 200pA 40 60 mV Input 105 mV mv lt gt Figure 31 1 Error Graph mV Input 31 24 2 Mid range high impedance Input 0 2V Input type Range working range 1 4V to 2V full linear range 1 8V to 2 4V noise resolution 100uV OFF 50uV 0 4sec 35uV 1 6sec Calibration accuracy 25 C lt 0 5mV 0 05 of reading Drift with ambient temperature lt 0 05mV 0 003 of reading per C Error Error Worst case Linearity error lt 0 01 ofspan i e 200uV Input Impedance amp Leakage gt 100MQ lt 1nA Max errors at 0 50 C Typical case Figure 31 2 Error Graph 0 2V Input Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 371 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 31 24 3 High Level Input 0 10V Input type Range working range 3V to 10V full linear range 5V to 14
320. ies This section applies specifically to 2000 series instruments If the slave is not a series 2000 instrument a knowledge of the communications format for the slave is required One of the main limitations of Modbus is that only 16 bit integer representations of data can normally be transferred In most cases this does not cause a problem since appropriate scaling can be applied to the values without losing precision If the slave is a series 2000 instrument where all values are shown on a 4 digit display values may be transferred in this way However this has the significant drawback that the scaling factor to be applied needs to be known at both ends of the communications link One further problem is that certain time parameters notably those used for the programmer function can be returned over the communications link in tenths of seconds minutes or hours It is possible therefore for long durations to overflow the 16 bit Modbus limit To overcome these problems a sub protocol has been defined using the upper portion of the Modbus address space 8000h and upwards allowing full 32 bit resolution floating point and timer parameters This upper area is known as the IEEE region This sub protocol provides two consecutive Modbus addresses for all parameters The base address for any given parameter in the IEEE region can easily be calculated by taking its normal Modbus address doubling it and adding 8000h For example the address in the
321. if it is known Tip You can page back by holding down the button and pressing A button You can scroll back by holding down the Lo button and pressing button 5 1 2 3 To connect Digital Input DIO1 to Loop 1 Manual Input The following description is given as a quick summary of the previous two examples 1 Select the Wire Source 2 Copy 3 Select the Wire Destination 4 Paste 05402 DIO1 Val LP1 Man Mode Src The source and destination of parameters is given in the Parameter Tables listed in following chapters Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 55 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 6 CHAPTER 6 ACCESS LEVELS Parameters are protected under five different levels of access for which security codes may be necessary This chapter describes the different levels of access to the operating parameters available in the controller 6 1 THE DIFFERENT ACCESS LEVELS What you can do Password Protection Level 1 This is sometimes referred to as Operator Level since it allows operators to view and adjust parameters within limits set in higher levels Any page available in levels 2 or 3 may be configured to appear in level 1 This is done from the configuration level using the page promote feature Level 2 This is sometimes referred to as Supervisor level since all the parameters relevant to a particular configuration are visible All alterable parameters can be adjusted Config This level allows access to configure the fund
322. ill change the passcode for the configuration level The display will blink to accept the new passcode When the controller is in Configuration Level SBY will flash in the status bar To exit configuration level it is only necessary to select the level which you wish to go to When entering a new level from a higher level it is not necessary to enter the passcode for this level It is only necessary to enter the passcode when going from a lower level of access to a higher level Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 57 Engineering Handbook 7 CHAPTER7 INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION 7 1 WHAT IS INSTRUMENT CONFIGURATION Instrument configuration allows you to enable and set up features within the instrument such as 1 The number of loops 2704 Controller 2 Control application PID Programmer Zirconia Humidity Input Operators Timer Blocks Analogue and Logic Operators Transducer Scaling Display Units The format of the display The functions of the keys buttons Format of the Summary Page SOn 9m ME Oso OU ov 69 Standby Behaviour Promotion of selected parameters to different levels 7 1 1 To Select the Instrument Configuration Pages Do This This Is The Display You Should See 1 From any display press as many times as necessary to access the page header menu 2 Press or Y to select INSTRUMENT 3 Press C to display the list of sub headers 4 Press orl Y to scroll around the sub headers Not
323. in modules as follows e Terminals marked 2A to 2D are reserved for a Memory Module only No connections should be made to these terminals e Terminals marked HA to HF are connections for optional EIA232 EIA485 or EIA422 communications modules e Terminals marked JA to JF are connections for an optional slave communications module or second communications port used to communicate with other instruments The modules fitted into the above two communications slots can be inter changed For a full list of available modules refer to the Ordering code Appendix A and the Technical Specification Appendix C Warning Take care that mains supplies are connected only to the power supply terminals 100 to 240Vac only the fixed relay terminals or to relay or triac modules Under no circumstances should mains supplies be connected to any other terminals Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 17 Engineering Handbook 2 4 The functionality of the two outer rows of terminals is common to all instrument variants as follows Digital VO lt IBI PV input lt lt db YOO EOS PV input Analogue input I O expander Fixed changeover relay Digital I O channels Power supply REAR TERMINALS 2704 Controller Power Supply mr ecosz Digital Input I O Expander or Digital input ee ye
324. inal Temperature Auto means that the controller automatically measures the temperature at the rear terminals for use with cold junction compensation The temperature of the rear terminals can be measured externally if required and this measured value can then be entered manually when calibrating CJC 276 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 22 3 ANALOGUE INPUT Allows access to parameters which set up the fixed Analogue Input connected to terminals BA BB and BC This is the high level input from a remote source 22 3 1 To Scale the Analogue Input The procedure is the same as that described in section 22 2 1 22 3 2 Standard IO Analogue nput Parameters Table Number This page allows you to configure the Analogue Input Parameters STANDARD IO An nput 22 3 2 mA SBrk fallback Sensor break fallback Off Conf Down scale Up Scale SBrk Impedance Sensor break enable for certain Off Off Conf high output impedance sensors Low High Resolution Display resolution XXXXX to Conf X XXXX or SCI Electrical Lo Electrical low input level Input range Units depend on l ter i configuration Electrical Hi Electrical high input level 3 ah Ze e e E q8 ae d MS NE 0 10 00 0 n D I Nc PV input amm O An InputNal The current value of the Display range O Analogue input in engineering units An Inputcan be a user defined name O 3 3 3 3 R R An In Status Status of th
325. ineering Handbook 2704 Controller 18 1 1 Analogue Operations The following operations can be performed ff The selected analogue operator is turned off d Subtract The output result is the difference Input 1 and Input 2 where Input 1 gt Input 2 Multiply The output result is the multiplication of Input 1 and Input 2 The output result is Input 1 divided by Input 2 Absolute The output result is the absolute difference between Input 1 and 2 Difference The output result is the maximum of Input 1 and Input 2 The output result is the minimum of Input 1 and Input 2 Hot Swap Input 1 appears at the output provided input 1 is good If input 1 is bad then input 2 value will appear at the output An example of a bad input occurs during a sensor break condition Sample and Hold Normally input 1 will be an analogue value and input B will be digital The output result is the addition of Input 1 and Input 2 The output tracks input 1 when input 2 1 Sample The output will remain at the current value when input 2 0 Hold Input 2 can be an analogue value and must change from 0 to 100 to provide a sample and hold at the output The output is the value at input 1 raised to the power of the value at input 2 l e input 1 The output result is the exponential of Input 1 e Input 2 has no effect The output result is 10 raised to the power of Input 1 10 Input 2 has no effect Select Logic 1 Logic Operator 1 to 32 i
326. ines the control action See notes for further parameter descriptions SRL Mode None No Change Hold Defines Setpoint Rate Limit action on power up WSP Mode Clear Hold No Change Local 7 Defines Local Remote action on power up Remote up Mode Manual mode on power up Continue Continue Conf SBrk Output Defines the Working SP action on None power up PV Target SP Lf Ramp from WSP 9 To allow servo from the current No No servo Conf working setpoint or current PV Yes from PV Notes 1 Control Types PID Ch1 Only OnOff Ch1 Only VP Ch1 Only VPB Ch1 Only PID Ch1 PID Ch2 PID Ch1 OnOff Ch2 OnOff Ch1 amp 2 1 Control Action Direct Reverse 3 CoolType Linear Oil Water Fan 4 ProgSetpoint Channel 1 PID only Use for single channel control only Channel 1 On Off Use for On Off control Channel 1 Motorised valve position output boundless mode Channel 1 Motorised valve position output bounded mode Both output channels PID Use for heat cool type applications Channel 1 PID control channel 2 On Off Use for single channel PID control plus On Off Control Both output channels On Off Use for On Off control The output will increase positively if the PV SP The output will increase positively if PV SP The control output follows linearly the PID output signal i e 0 PID demand 0 power output 50 PID demand 50 power output 100 PID demand 100 p
327. int from a programmer function block The output from the PID block typically drives an analogue output to a thyristor unit Further examples of PID block wiring are given in Chapter 11 Mod 6A vacui Blade Digital Outputs Lo Guage Src SP 1 Out Wire Src DO1 Mod A Val TE Status Src SP 2 Out 52457 Enable Vac Src SP 3 Out Mod 3A r JHi Gauge Src SP 4 Out QGAN Status Src SP 5 Out AA Relay Output Mod3A Val oaa B Gauge Src SP 6 Out 1 Wire Src Status Src R Pump Status Mod 4A Sec D Val Src Chamber Fault 96707 Mod 5A Output OP Stat 04628 Pump On Src atus Mod4A Val Leak T Src Pump OFF Wire Src 06773 Numbers in italics are the MODBUS addresses Programmer block being wired trom PV1 Src PSP1 Reset Src Control Loop 1 block PSP1 Prog Setpoint PSP1 Reset Src WaitA Src Mod 1A Output CH1 OP Wire Src 06773 CH2 OP 50013 Figure 13 13 Vacuum Temperature Control Wiring Example 203 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 Engineering Handbook 13 1 204 14 1 1 Implementation In VACUUM Low Vacuum Page section 13 12 2 In VACUUM High Vacuum Page section 13 12 1 In VACUUM Back Vacuum Page section 13 12 3 In STANDARD IO Dig IO 1 Page section 22 6 1 In STANDARD IO AA Relay Page section 22 5 1 In MODULE IO Module 5A Page section 23 3 2 In LP1 SETUP Opti
328. invensys Eurotherm 2700 User Manual 2704 Process Controller HA026933 7 Nov 2012 2012 Eurotherm Limited All rights are strictly reserved No part of this document may be reproduced modified or transmitted in any form by any means nor may it be stored in a retrieval system other than for the purpose to act as an aid in operating the equipment to which the document relates without the prior written permission of Eurotherm Limited Eurotherm Limited pursues a policy of continuous development and product improvement The specification in this document may therefore be changed without notice The information in this document is given in good faith but is intended for guidance only Eurotherm Limited will accept no responsibility for any losses arising from errors in this document 2704 Controller List of Chapters T CHAPTER 1 2 CHAPTER 2 3 CHAPTER 3 4 CHAPTER 4 5 CHAPTER 5 6 CHAPTER 6 7 CHAPTER 7 8 CHAPTER 8 9 CHAPTER 9 10 CHAPTER 10 11 CHAPTER 11 12 CHAPTER 12 13 CHAPTER 13 14 CHAPTER 14 15 CHAPTER 15 16 CHAPTER 16 17 CHAPTER 17 18 CHAPTER 18 19 CHAPTER 19 20 CHAPTER 20 21 CHAPTER 21 22 CHAPTER 22 23 CHAPTER 23 24 CHAPTER 24 25 CHAPTER 25 26 CHAPTER 26 27 CHAPTER 27 28 CHAPTER 28 29 APPENDIX A 30 APPENDIX B 31 APPENDIX C 32 APPENDIX D Engineering Handbook MODEL 2704 CONTROLLER ENGINEERING HANDBOOK INTRODUCTION EE 12 INSTALLATION 5 2 5 2 tear anen
329. ion 3 Setup a pressure and Humidity These are the same as Example 1 program in PSP2 01 and PSP3 01 shown in section 8 22 4 Setup further programs as required in PSP1 02 to 20 PSP2 02 to 20 and PSP3 02 to 20 5 When all PSPs have been set up 2 1601 Group 1 place them in Groups These are the same as Example 2 shown in section 8 22 6 Repeat for futher groups In this example a delayed start of 3 hours has been placed on Group 2 which will run two profiles PSP1 P1 and PSP2 P6 7 Torun the program press Bun Group Status Select the group to run PROG PROG e Press selected group again to run the This is also described in sections 8 30 and 8 31 110 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 8 27 EXAMPLE TO COPY A PROGRAM Do This 1 From any display press Ito access the page header menu 2 Press Aor Y to select PROFILE SP1 o 3 Press to select sub headers v 4 Press Aor to select Program Edit 5 Press to select parameters and again to edit Program Number 6 Press or Y toselectthe program number to be copied 7 Press Le to scroll to Edit Function 8 Press Aor Y Program to Copy 9 Press C and 4 to scroll back to Program Number 10 Press or Y to select the program to paste to in this case program 2 11 Press e Function again to scroll to Edit 12 Press 4 or Y to Paste Pr
330. ion 23 3 2 set Wire Src 01037 L2 Ch1OP This connects LP2Ch1 output to Module 1A 10 In MODULE IO Module 1C Page set Channel Type Time Proportion section 23 3 2 set Wire Src 01038 L2 Ch20P This connects L21Ch2 output to Module 1C See Appendix D for list of Modbus addresses Tip See Copy and Paste description in Chapter 5 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 191 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 13 7 VACUUM CONTROLLER The 2704 Vacuum Controller is designed for a variety of applications including e Melting Casting furnaces e Annealing Sintering furnaces e Brazing CVD furnaces e Freeze Dryers e Diffusion MBE furnaces e Autoclaves It can be used for vacuum control only and can be supplied for use with one vacuum gauge or three gauges Alternatively the vacuum block can be used together with another control loop such as temperature control in the same unit Analogue and digital IO is achieved using the fixed IO and plug in modules described in the above handbooks Note e For measurement of temperature use the standard PV Input terminals V to VH or the PV Input module part no HA026359 e For measurement of vacuum use the standard PV Input the PV Input module or the Analogue Input module part no HA026686 e Additional analogue and digital IO can be achieved with further plug in modules or the IO Expander unit 13 7 1 Vacuum Chamber Example Figure 13 7 shows a diagrammati
331. ioration etc Only available when NOT in config mode AND robe calibration used to determine and set up nstallation Calibration Available in all access initial probe factor performed just after system levels when Setup Enabled or only in CFG temperature correction factors for the particular levels when Setup Enabled or only in CFG ype of boiler fluid level access when Setup Disabled The function block status will show Calibrating while in any of the calibration modes Although the status will show Calibrating the Invalid O P parameter will not be set as the calibration routines do not affect the output validity If there is a power failure cycle during any of the calibration cycles then the calibration cycle will be aborted The internal parameter Cal State indicates to the function block status the actions of the calibration system The Calibration parameter will only be alterable when the function block status is OK or calibrating The Cal Data Entry parameter will only be available alterable when the Cal mode is in one of the Enter Data states described in more detail later The following table shows Cal State enumerations Vs calibration mode The actual values the TDS function block uses during the calibration are unchanged stored internally and only updated once the calibration or manual adjustment is completed and accepted Only t
332. ireable OP Rate Limit Dual OP Scales the Rem IP value as Remote IP 100 0 FF Pb FF tr Figure 11 5 PID Block Diagram 11 4 6 Remote External OP Feedback The Remote OP Feedback shown in the PID block diagram allows an external source of output to stop integral wind up in some applications such as cascade control The integral will calculate a PID output to match the external value when manual to auto bumpless transfer is activated If Ena OP Track LP7 SETUP Output Yes the output will be replaced by the OP Track Value The feedback signal is used for the integral de saturation When the Remote OP Feedback is wired the feedback signal is forced to a remote output feedback When not wired the default internal OP is used for the integral calculation 11 4 7 Analogue Value The Analogue Value is a customisable parameter available in the PID and PID Aux pages which provides the user with additional flexibility when designing a control strategy This parameter is called Analogue Value An Value 1 to 3 It is available for each PID set if Gain Scheduling has been configured and for each loop configured It can be soft wired in configuration mode to perform a specific function relevant to the particular process being controlled Examples include Output Power Limit SP Feedforward Trim etc Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 143 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 11 5 GAIN SCHEDULING Gain scheduling is t
333. irst Parameter which is to Appear on the Summary Page INSTRUMENT Summar 5543 As Press to select Promote Param Up to 10 parameters are available 2 Press necessary or Y Ito select 1 if TOTEM The flashing _ indicates the value 3 Press to select Promote Ad to be changed 4 Press or Y to select the required parameter using its Modbus address If the Modbus Address is not known it is possible to select the required parameter from a list of commonly used parameters This list is shown in Appendix D INSTRUMENT Summary xSET e 5 Press again 6 Then press or to scroll through a list of commonly used parameters To Select a User Defined Name for the First Parameter in the List Q h 1 Press to select Promote IMSTRUHEMT Summaru SBT The name of the parameter is Name chosen from the User Text library set up as described in section 5 2 5 2 Press or toselect the name from the User Text library 1 Press to select Promote Access This sets the level to which the parameter is promoted The choices are Lev 1 Read Only Lev 1 Alterable Lev 2 Read Only Lev 2 Alterable v 2 Press or to select the Access Level INSTRUMENT Summar zoey The actual value of the parameter is shown in this display together with its allocated units 3 Press T This shows the first parameter which will appear in the operation level selected in 7 abo
334. is blowing down the network is pulled to a low condition to lock out any other controller at this time Pre BB Wait is shown for a settable period such as 15 minutes half of Cool Duration b After Pre BB Wait the blowdown output will come on for a few seconds set by the BB Duration parameter and the Bldown State will show Blowing Down c The Bldown State will then show Cooling Down for a settable period such as 15 minutes the other half of cool time d After Cooling Down the blowdown sequence is complete and the network will go high allowing other controllers to blowdown if they want The sequence is shown graphically below Blowdown Request I I I Message on BB Wait Check Pre BB Blowing Cooling l controller i Network l Wait Down Down l l l l l Network i Inhibit l I Network Low If another controller is holding the network as determined by an appropriately configured digital input the message Network Busy is displayed and the NTWRK beacon lights If the network is not connected the message Network Open is displayed 28 5 4 Non high integrity Interlock Bus Two digital I O ports can be used shorted together on each instrument to implement the non high integrity bus interlock One of the I O must be configured as B B Inhibit Input and the other as B B Inhibit Output Only two wires are used in this configuration to connect th
335. is not enabled between calibrations The input needs to settle within a range which has been set in configuration level The threshold value sets the required settling time for shunt load cell and auto tare calibration This parameter is an output from the function block which can be wired to a transducer scale module to close the shunt circuit and introduce the calibration resistor It may be used in copy and paste wiring Issue 7 0 Nov 12 325 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 25 CHAPTER 25 IO EXPANDER 25 1 WHAT IS IO EXPANDER The IO Expander is an external unit which can be used in conjunction with the 2704 controller to allow the number of digital IO points to be increased There are two versions 1 10 Inputs and 10 Outputs 2 20 Inputs and 20 Outputs Each input is fully isolated and voltage or current driven Each output is also fully isolated consisting of four changeover contacts and six normally open contacts in the 10 IO version and four changeover and sixteen normally open contacts in the 20 IO version Data transfer is performed serially via a two wire interface as shown in Figure 25 1 U 10 20 Inputs Ely N El E2 E2 IO Expander 2704 Controller J 10 20 Outputs Relays E1 and E2 are the terminal numbers on both Controller and IO Expander It is recommended that a cable length of 10 metres is not exceeded however no shielding or twisted pair cable is required
336. is set to a value of 9 Press lor Y tochoosea user defined text set up as Bede described in section 5 2 6 10 sec e 1 min 10 Gar to select Show Msg Bonn rc or 10 min 11 Press or Y to choose the the user message will disappear Modbus address of the parameter after this period and will only re which will trigger the message appear when the digital input when the controller is in operation becomes true once more mode The parameters Show Msg and Dismissed are intended for use over digital communications Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 229 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 16 5 USER SWITCHES User Switches are similar to User Values when the User Value is used in a digital operation They may however be configured as Auto Resetting or Manual Resetting and typically utilised in User Pages see Chapter 17 to perform a specified task A User Switch can be given a user defined name using the User Enumeration feature described in previous pages Up to eight User Switches are available 16 5 1 To Configure User Switches Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press as Menu Config The USER SWITCHES page is only many times as necessary to available if Enabled as described access the page header menu in section 7 2 Us ES 2 Press or Y to select USER SWITCHES 3 Press C to show Sub headers M Switch 1 4 Press lor v Switch 1 t
337. ise free resolution Speed 50ms response Can be configured as 20V min at full 22mA current load 30V max at open circuit Transmitter logic PSU Short circuit protected at 22 24mA 31 13 HIGH RESOLUTION DC OUTPUT Current Output 4 20mA 20V output span see section 23 3 15 Accuracy 1 15 bit noise free resolution Speed 40ms response Transmitter logic PSU 20V min at full 22mA current load 30V max at open circuit Short circuit protected at 21 28mA Isolation Fully isolated from the instrument and the PSU 31 14 POTENTIOMETER INPUT Pot resistance 100Q to 15KQ excitation of 0 5 volts isolated 31 15 TDS MODULE Meas Frequency 1KHz Conductivity range 40uS to 500 000uS equivalent resistance 25 KO to 2Q Max cable length 100m Isolation Fully isolated from the rest of the instrument 368 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 31 16 4 WIRE RTD INPUT PT100 Module PT25 Module Allocation Can be fitted to I O slots 3 and 6 Isolation Fully isolated from the rest of the instrument Sample rate 9Hz Typical Input filtering OFF to 999 9 seconds of filter t c default f t c 1 6 sesc Measured temperature 200 to 850 C 200 to 850 C range with Pt100 linearization with Pt25 5 linearization 200 to 50 C with Pt100 linearization when Pt25 module is used for reading Pt100 sensor Measured resistance 0 4400 0 1250 range Maximum resistance 5000 1350 betw
338. isplay set Promote Name 05 Test 1 SUMMARY In Operation Level the text in the Summary page will show In place of 0 or 1 you may wish to display On or Off There are two ways to achieve this In earlier instruments it is necessary to use a Logic or Analogue Operator The implementation using Logic Operator 1 is as follows 1 In INSTRUMENT User Text Page set User Text Enabled set Text Number 5 or any unused text no set Usr5 Test 1 2 In STANDARD IO Dig IO1 Page set Channel Type Digital Input This page also allows you to set the input for inverted operation 3 In LOGIC OPERS Logic 1 Page set Operation OR set Input 1 Src 05402 DIO1 Val set Input 2 Src 05402 DIO1 Val This connects digital input 1 to logic operator 1 Note it is necessary to wire to both inputs of a logic or analogue operator 4 In INSTRUMENT Summary Page set Show Summary Yes set Promote Param 1 or the text no above set Promote Addr 07176 LgOp1 OP The logic operator is defined simply to provide On Off annunciation in the display Summary page 1 In later instruments you can use Custom Enumerations 1 In INSTRUMENT User Text Page set User Text Enabled select a User Text Number e g 9 or any unused text set Usr On select the next User Text Number e g 10 set Usr10 Off 2 In STANDARD IO Dig IO1 Page set DiglO Enum User Text 6 i e 09 On The enumeration of the parameter call
339. it Auxiliary setpoint 1 high limit 1372 OVR SP Trim Override loop setpoint trim L3 Ony appears when Override Range units control is configured Local SP The setpoint which the controller reverts to when not in cascade ratio or override Working SP The current value of the setpoint L1 in use f temp units This table does not appear if the Loop Type is Ratio or Single Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 141 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 11 4 PID CONTROL PID control also referred to as Three Term Control is a technique used to achieve stable straight line control at the required setpoint The three terms are P Proportional band Integral time D Derivative time The output from the controller is the sum of the contributions from these three terms The combined output is a function of the magnitude and duration of the error signal and the rate of change of the process value It is possible to set P PI PD or PID control 11 4 1 Proportional Term The proportional term delivers an output which is proportional to the size of the error signal An example of this is shown in Figure 11 3 for a temperature control loop where the proportional band is 10 C and an error of 3 C will produce an output of 30 Output o gt Proportional 4 10 C 100 band 30 disse o N 3 Cerror 096 Temperature Setpoint Figure 11 3 Proportional Action Proportional only cont
340. ital inputs Digit 1 units Units value of the first switch Co Digit 2 Tens Tens value of the second switch C Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 211 Engineering Handbook 14 7 14 7 1 2704 Controller INPUT OPERATORS WIRING EXAMPLES Switch Over Loop With Custom Linearised Input PV Src Mod3A Va Input Src Mod 3A Cust Lin 1 Ctrl Hold Src CLin1 OP Mod 1A Integr Hld Src Man Mode Src Wire Src Pot IP Src Rem FFwd Src Rem Hi OP Src gt Input 1 Mod6A Va Input 2 Mod 6 A Switch Over Rem Lo OP Src Rem SP Ena Src Remote SP Src SP Select Src SwOv1 OP SP1 Src SP2 Src Prog SP Src PID Set Src AuxPID Set Src Power FF Src Ena OP Trk Src OP Track Src Figure 14 4 Example Wiring Switch Over Loop with Custom Linearised Input 14 7 1 1 Implementation 1 In INPUT OPERS Custom Lin 1 section 14 3 1 In INPUT OPERS Switch 1 Page section 14 4 1 In INPUT OPERS Switch 1 Page section 14 4 1 In LOOP SETUP Wiring Page section 11 2 1 In MODULE IO Module 1A Page section 23 3 1 if analogue output set Input Src 04468 Mod3A Val Appendix D This connects the input of the custom linearisation block to the output of Module 3A fitted as a PV input module set Input 1 Src 03365 CLin1 OP Appendix D This connects input 1 of the switch over block to the output of custom li
341. itches allow groups of analogue values to be selected from a single input number This number may be provided from a user defined analogue source or if not wired the analogue values can be selected from this numbe r As with the Pattern Generator the switch can be given a user defined name using the User Enumeration feature There are 8 Ana ogue Switches displayed as Switch 1 to Switch 7 and each switch can store up to 8 values displayed as Value 0 to Value 8 Value 0 O Value l Select Analogue input value Value 2 ___ Repeated for Value 3 OY Switch 1 Value 4 Output 1 to Value 5 L QO Switch 8 Value 6 Q Value 7 An analogue input of 0 1 selects Value 0 An analogue input of 1 1 2 selects Value 1 to An analogue input of 7 1 8 selects Value 7 Figure 16 3 Representation of an Analogue Switch Part No HA026933 16 2 1 To Set up an Analogue Switch Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes From any display press D jas The ANALOG SWITCH page is only many times as necessary to access the page header menu and Le to show sub headers Press 4 lor Y to select the required switch e g Switch 1 Using LO button to scroll to the required parameter andl or Y buttons to change the value of the parameter set up the values as required Issue 7 0 Nov 12 PATTERN GEN ANALOG SHITCH
342. its CP set Resolution XXX XX set H CO Reference Required Value 185 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller This value defines the carbon monoxide CO in the gas used for carburising This configures the zirconia probe 6 In ZIRCONIA PROBE Wiring set Clean Src 05402 D101 Val Pagelsecti n 0 set mV Src 04948 Mod6A set Temp Src 04468 Mod3A This connects inputs to the Zirconia block 7 In LP2 SETUP Options Page set Loop Type Single Semon TITO set Control Type OnOff gt Ch1 amp 2 8 In LP2 SETUP Wiring Page set PV Src 11059 Zirc PV section 11 2 1 This connects the PV to Loop 2 PV 9 In MODULE IO Module 1A set Channel Type On Off Page section 23 3 2 set Wire Src 01037 L2 Ch1OP This connects LP2 Ch1 output to module 1 10 In MODULE IO Module 1C set Channel Type On Off Page section 23 3 2 set Wire Src 01038 L2 Ch20P This connects LP2 Ch2 output to module 1 11 In MODULE IO Module 4A set Channel Type On Off Page section 23 3 2 set Wire Src 11066 Zirc Stat This connects the health probe status to module 4A 12 In MODULE IO Module 4C set Channel Type On Off Page section 23 3 2 set Wire Src 11067 Zirc Clean This connects the clean outputs to module 4C 13 In STANDARD IO AA Relay set Channel Type On Off Page section 22 5 1 set Wire Src 11068 Zirc SAlm This connects the sooting a
343. iven in specific chapters throughout this manual 50 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 5 1 1 An Example of Soft Wiring To make this connection see section 5 1 2 1 STANDARD IO Loop 1 PV Input hip 73 PV Src PVIn Val Ctrl Hold Src Integr Hld Src Man Mode Src Pot IP Src Rem FFwd Src To make this connection Rem Hi OP Src see section 5 1 2 3 Settings Rem Lo OP Src Setpoint 1 Rem Enable Setpoint 2 SP1 Src SP2 Src Remote SP Src PSP Src OP Track Src IP Track Src STANDARD IO DIO1 Rate Limit Prop DIO1 Val Ti Engineering Handbook To make this connection see section 5 1 2 2 4 MODULE IO Module 1A Wire Src Figure 5 1 A Simple Wiring Example of a PID Function Block Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 51 Engineering Handbook 5 1 2 Configuration of the Simple PID Loop The following description explains how the wiring connections are made to produce the simple PID controller shown in Figure 5 1 5 1 2 1 To connect the PV input to the Loop 2704 Controller The example is to connect the output from the PV Input to the PV Source of Loop 1 Firstly enter Configuration mode as explained in Chapter 6 Then Do This 1 From any display press l as many times as necessary to access the page header menu 2 Press A or LY ito select STANDARD IO 3 Press to display the list of sub headers 4 Press A or Y to select PV
344. ix Inputs To average more than eleven inputs two sum blocks can be cascaded into each other and then into an average block 250 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 18 4 TO ENABLE MULTI OPERATORS In INSTRUMENT OPTIONS Page enable An Logic Opers 18 5 TOLOCATE MULTI OPERATOR PARAMETERS Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes The actual view may vary 1 From any display press to Anita depending on options enabled access the page header menu 2 Press A or Y to scroll to MULTI OPERATOR 3 Press 7 to display sub headers MultiOp1 4 Press lor Y to select the MultiOp block required MultiOp2 MultiOp3 5 Press to display parameters 00001 L1 PV Operation Average v v Cas Numlp None 6 Press or to scroll to the inicas Sre Nohe required parameter Int Val m In2 Src None In2 Val 0 0 7 Press to edit the parameter vj 8 Press or Y to change its value The following table lists further parameters in this page U 18 5 1 MULTI OPERATOR MultiOp1 to 3 Page Table These parameters allow you to configure the selected multi operator Press C MULTI OPERATOR Number to select each parameter MultiOp1 to 3 Page 18 5 1 Parameter Parameter Description Default Access Level Name Source for Operation Modbus address Conf Operation Selected operation None Conf The output will be the average of up to six inputs Av
345. l manual control of the actual output Auto Slave operates in automatic with local setpoint Cascade Master controls the slave setpoint Slave is in auto When the controller is placed in manual the slave working setpoint will track the value of the slave process value continually therefore ensuring bumpless transfer When cascade is deactivated the master loop will monitor the setpoint of the slave loop and provide a smooth transition of output power when the loop moves back to cascade mode Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 153 Engineering Handbook 11 10 5 Cascade Controller Block Diagrams CSD FFwd Src 2704 Controller not included in version 4 0 e Slave LSP Master WSP e FeedFwT Master PV Trim Limit Scale to Slave PV units Visor Wire u SPHi v SP Limit Master OP M in T AuxHR AuxLR EU Slave SP a 100 SPLo int FF_SP Trim Limit Re scale to 100 User wire ind X 100 Master es AuxHR AuxLR lt lt x in2 FF_SP Note This diagram applies to controllers with software version 4 0 or greater For earlier versions see Appendix E Figure 11 9 Cascade Controller in Trim Mode 0 no feedforward Slave LSP FeedFwT CSD FFwd Src Trim Limit User wire Scale to Slave PV units SP Limit SPHi v in f AuxHR AuxLR ae Slave SP Master OP _ 100 AuxL
346. l Default Conf Select from User Text Page Section Text 7 2 6 A The triac output is a single output module The parameters above are displayed under channel A only Channel B and channel C show No IO Channel The dual triac has 2 outputs The parameters above are displayed under Channel A amp C 288 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 23 3 4 Triple Logic Output and Single Isolated Logic Output Table Number This page allows you to configure a Logic Output module MODULE IO Module 23 3 4 XA Page Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default Access Level Module identification Logic Output R O Channel Type Channel Module Type On Off Conf Time Proportion Valve Lower Valve Raise Ident Wire Src Wire source Modbus address Conf Invert Invert logic operation Normal Conf Inverted The following five parameters only appear if Channel Type is set to Time Proportion Min Pulse Time Minimum on or off time Auto 0 05s Auto L3 or 0 07 to 150 00 Only Eng Value Lo Low display reading Disp range prop Elect Val Enum Enumeration for the electrical value Not Enumerated to Not Conf on off only Enum See also Custom Enumerations section erated 16 6 Eng Value Enum Enumeration for the engineering value 01 Usr1 to 50 Usr50 Not Conf on off only Enum See also Custom Enumerations section erated 16 6 Electrical Val The current electrical value of the
347. l and program not in End PSP1 Rate Profile setpoint 1 rate Only shown if Program Type Ramp Rate Segment Type Dwell and program not in End PSP1 Hbk Type ile setpoint 1 holdback type Off Fine Lo Fine Hi Fine Band Course Lo Course Hi Course Band Only shown if holdback is configured per segment The above five parameters are repeated if PSP2and PSP3 are configured Seg Duration Duration for Time to Target d h m s L1 programmer only Wait if selected event is true Only shown if wait events configured Prog User Val 1 Prog User Val 2 Prog DO Values Seg Edit 1 to 16 GoBack to Seg Go Back Cycles Allows a Programmer User Val to be chosen See also section 8 7 Only shown if Prog User Val 1 is configured Allows a Programmer User Val to be chosen See also section 8 7 Only shown if Prog User Val 2 is configured Sets programmer event outputs on or off The number of DO values is set by Num of Prog DOs PROGRAM EDIT Options Not shown if Num of Prog Dos None f programmer event outputs have been configured then as an alternative o the previous presentation the event can be given a name PROGRAM EDIT Options Dos Yes Named Allows repeat segments to be set up within a profile Go back defines the point in the program where the repeat segments are entered Only shown if segment type is Go Back Sets up the number of times the segments are repeated
348. l value on off 01 Usr1 to Enumerated See also section only 50 Usr50 16 6 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 281 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller Note 1 Only settings between 0 amp 100 are valid for Dig IO Val The corresponding Electrical value is shown in the following table Channel Type Dig IO Val Electrical Value Time Proportion Oto 100 0 00 off to 1 00 on Time proportions between 0 00 1 00 for other positive settings of Dig IO Val Valve Raise Lower Oto 100 0 00 to 100 00 282 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 22 7 STANDARD IO DIAGNOSTIC PARAMETERS This page allows you to configure a name for the digital input and to inspect its status or that of the IO Expander if fitted The parameters are shown in the following table 22 7 4 Standard IO Diagnostic Parameters Table Table Number This page allows you to inspect Digital Input STANDARD IO Diagnostic Page 22 7 1 8 or IO Expander status On Dig In E1 Val Status of IO expander input Of R O On Bad Channels A bad input or output will be to MEBNEEEN R O displayed as and will occur if the I O is either a short or open circuit Dig In 8 Name A name which replaces Dig n8 Conf from User Text Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 283 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 23 CHAPTER 23 MODULE IO 23 1 WHAT IS MODULE IO Additional analogue and digi
349. larm to the fixed relay output See Appendix D for list of Modbus addresses Tip See Copy and Paste description in Chapter 5 13 3 3 Probe Impedance Probe impedance can be read by the parameter SBrk Trip Imp This parameter is found in the Standard IO or Module IO PV or Analogue Inputs It is however normal to use the Dual PV Input module for use with a Zirconia probe so the SBrk Trip Imp parameter will be found in MODULE IO Module 3 or 6 page The units for this parameter is and depends upon the setting of the SBrk Impedance parameter found in the same page as follows If SBrk Impedance 2 Low then a SBrk Trip Impedance reading of 100 is approximately 100KQ If SBrk Impedance High then a SBrk Trip Impedance reading of 100 is approximately 500KQ For a Zirconia probe the normal setting for SBrk Impedance High 186 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 13 4 HUMIDITY CONTROL 13 4 4 Overview Humidity and altitude control is a standard feature of the 2704 controller In these applications the controller may be configured to generate a setpoint profile see Chapter 8 PROGRAMMER CONFIGURATION Also the controller may be configured to measure humidity using either the traditional Wet Dry bulb method Figure 13 4 or it may be interfaced to a solid state sensor The controller output may be configured to turn a refrigeration compressor o
350. lay You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press LD J as This page is only available if many times as necessary to access Zirconia is Enabled in the the page header menu INSTRUMENT Options page 2 Press A or Y to select ZIRCONIA PROBE Menu Confia Options Configure and djust zi i 3 Press to display sub headers CIN parameters Wiring Soft wires zirconia parameters 4 Press or Y to scroll to the required sub header 0 5 Press to select the parameter list for the required sub header The full list of parameters available under these list headers is shown in the following tables 13 2 1 Zirconia Parameters U Table Number This table allows you to view or adjust zirconia probe parameters ZIRCONIA PROBE 13 2 1 Options Page Zirconia Value Zirconia control process value Range units R O The O2 or dew point value derived from temperature and remote gas ref inputs Probe Type Zirconia probe equation See note 1 for types Conf supported Resolution Zirconia display resolution XXXXX to XX XXX Note 2 Only available for Probe Type Log Oxygen Oxygen Exp Oxygen units Oto 19 The following 10 parameters are not relevant to Probe Type Oxygen L3 Enable Rem H CO Remote gas enable Internal Remote Internal This can be an internal value from the user interface or remote from an external source Working H CO Working gas reference or process factor 0 0 to
351. lculate the desired control setpoint Prior to the setpoint calculation the ratio setpoint can be offset by the ratio trim value and must obey the overall ratio setpoint operating limits Another useful feature of the is the automatic calculation of the actual measured ratio which is then available to be displayed on the controller front panel Ratio SP eet Q9 Ratio Trim Ratio Hi Limit Ratio SP Limits Ratio Lo Limit Working Ratio SP Lead PV A gt Local Trim Q Range Hi A Main Control Control OP Range Lo Loop _ Main Process PV gt Figure 11 12 Simple Ratio Control Block Diagram The measured ratio is calculated from the Lead PV and the Process PV It is also possible to enable Ratio Track If Enable Ratio is set to Off and Ratio Track is set to On then the Ratio SP will track the measured ratio This feature allows the user to set the Ratio SP according to the condition of the process 158 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 11 11 3 Controller Configured For Ratio Engineering Handbook A controller is configured for ratio operation if Loop Type Ratio in LOOP SETUP Options page section 11 1 1 Table Number 11 11 3 Parameter Name PV Src anual OP Sr OPRtLim En S Lead PV Src Ratio SP Src Ratio Trim Src Ratio Enab Src Ctrl Hold Src ntegr Hld Src an Mode Src Pot IP Src Rem FFwd Sr Rem Hi OP Src
352. lect the list of i If required set up a Day and Time parameters Blowdown 1 Every Day p for a second and third blowdown Day This allows up to three 4 Press again to edit the parameter i Blowdown 1 Time 10 0 00 blowdowns on each boiler to be mn i Blowdown 2 Day Every Day i performed each day 5 Press or v to set the day i Blowdown 2 Time 16 06 00 Blowdown 3 Day Never Blowdown 3 Time 0 0 Duration 6 Press to select the Duration of Blowdown 3 Time 0 00 00 the blowdown Duration 0 00 05 i 0 7 Press or Y tosetthe duration i Suspend i 4 i Blowdown time 8 Press C to select the Inst Number t This is necessary so that the Suspend interconnection network knows A Blowdown Valve Switches number from 1 to 8 Inst Number 9 Press or Y to setan instrument i Note 1 which instrument has priority f more than one boiler attempts a blowdown at the same time then the Inst Number parameter determines which has priority 8 has the highest priority i Times may be set by holding the raise or lower buttons until the correct time has been set Alternatively hold down the scroll button and use the raise lower buttons _Y to move the cursor between hours and minutes then use 4 Y to change these independently 28 6 TDS INPUT MODULE For details of this module and calibration of Cable Offset see the Module IO Chapter 23 For Calibration of Conductance see
353. linear and typically has a high degree of error This area of operation is only selected if the currently selected gauge goes into sensor break The minimum vacuum and maximum vacuum values are defined as the total operating range of the two gauges and define the total range of the chamber 194 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 13 9 WIRING CONNECTIONS The actual wiring of the vacuum controller depends upon the number and type of modules fitted Figure 13 10 below shows wiring for the following configuration e Fixed PV Input assigned as Thermocouple Input e PV Input module fitted in slot 3 assigned as High Vacuum Input e PV Input module fitted in slot 4 assigned as Backing Gauge Input e PV Input module fitted in slot 6 assigned as Low Vacuum Input e SP 1 turns on off the roughing pump via fixed digital output 1 e The AA Relay turns on off an external power supply to the high vacuum gauge e Module 1 fitted as an analogue output to drive a thyristor unit for temperature control Before proceeding further please read Appendix B Safety and EMC Information Diffusion pump Backing Gauge aa
354. lt Access Level Ident Module identification Transmitter PSU EN R O Channel Type Input Output type Transmitter PSU Conf PSU Module 1A Val The current value in engineering units R O Module 1A can be user defined text Channel Name User defined name for the channel Default Text Conf Select from User Text Page Section 7 2 6 This module has a single output providing 24Vdc at 20mA Its parameters are displayed under channel A 23 3 7 Transducer Power Supply Table Number This page allows you to set the parameters MODULE IO Module xA Page 23 3 7 for a Transducer Power Supply module Parameter Description Default Module identification Transducer PSU Voltage select 5 Volts 10 Volts Shunt Selects calibration resistor fitted internally External within the controller or externally eg in Internal Access Level Parameter Name z O Ident Voltage the transducer Electrical Value The current output electrical value in 0 00 to 10 operation mode Module 1A Val The current value in engineering units Module 1A can be a user defined name Channel Name User defined name for the channel Select from User Text Page Section 7 2 6 This module has a single output Its parameters are displayed under channel A R O Default Text Conf 290 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 23 3 8 Potentiometer Input Table Number This page allows you to set the par
355. lue 1 01 Usr1 to 100 Usr100 Default Text Usr Val1 Enum First user string for programmer user value 1 custom 01 Usr1 to 100 Usr100 Default Text enumeration The above parameters are repeated for User value 2 Recovery Type Defines the power recovery strategy Ramp Back Continue See also section 8 5 Reset Continue Hold Test Time mea Feemwmeymaum i ne Seno Tine teemwmeymeedm nei Num of Prg DOs Defines tre umbera aora meam fone OOOO To allocate a name for digital event output 1 from User User Text 1 to 100 Text This parameter only appears if Named Dos Yes The above parameter is repeated for every digital event output configured PSP1 Units Units to be displayed for PSP1 See Appendix D PSP1 Resol PSP1 decimal point resolution a PSP7 Low Lim PSP1 low limit Display range PSP1 High Lim PSP1 high limit Display range PSP7 Reset Val Safe state target setpoint Prog SP lo lim to Prog SP hi lim Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 101 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller Table Number These parameters allow you to configure parameters PSP1 2 or 3 PROFILE 8 25 1 associated with the PSP Options Page Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default Press C to select PSP1 Rate Res PSP1 rate resolution PSP1 Name To choose a name for PSP1 from user text Default Text to 100 User100 Default Text Mimic Page The program mimic page may be turned off or Off configured to app
356. ly midway between 0 and 1 2 Boundary 00 ite OS eRe eoa TS Select Autotune as described in section 12 3 At the end of tune the values will be automatically stored into PID Set 1 It is possible to limit the output power in each set 9 Repeatthe above for all PID sets For each set adjust the SP approximately midway between the two boundaries Figure 12 1 10 When all PID sets have been determined go back to configuration level and re set Schedule Type to the type required for the process Note It is possible to tune each set when Gain Scheduling is selected but this is not recommended since it is possible that at the end of tune the values could be stored into the incorrect PID set This might occur for example if the system is highly oscillatory and the values for say PID set 2 are stored when the excursion is in PID set 1 174 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 12 6 CASCADE TUNING Engineering Handbook Cascade control uses a combination of two PID controllers where the output of one the master provides the setpoint for the second the slave Cascade control was described in more detail in section 11 10 Figure 12 2 shows a cascade controller applied to the control of a furnace load Load Thermocouple Air Thermocouple Slave Aux PV e
357. made the LEAK DET Figure 13 11 indicator on the summary screen flashes It remains permanently lit if a fault is detected 13 8 7 Gauge Switchover Gauge switchover allows the chamber vacuum measurement to transfer from one gauge to another ina controlled bumpless way The switchover block described in Chapter 14 performs this Figure 13 9 below gives an example of how the gauge outputs relate to the switch over settings Vacuum values are given for reference purposes only 400EET uec Sh eh a a ee eL Ls eee ie a Low vacuum gauge Gauge enable operating region setpolnt o ees ME 1 00E 2 1 00E 3 mmm Switch Vac Lo Switchover region vacuum 1 00E 5 EM Switch Vac Hi Increasing High vacuum gauge operating region v 1 00E 8 X Figure 13 9 Gauge Switchover The operating regions of each gauge must be chosen such that the gauge output is guaranteed The switchover region should be selected such that both readings are valid and the error is minimal The high gauge must be enabled before the lowest setting of the switchover point The gauge enable setpoint consists of a pair of gauge on and gauge off values These should be chosen to give sufficient hysteresis such that the gauge output has a decisive on off action Both gauges read outside the switchover region even though the output has switched to the other gauge This region of the gauge is usually very non
358. mation message appears Press Lo key to confirm the change If no key is pressed for 10 seconds the value is restored to its previous value 3 5 2 Invalid key actions At any time some state transitions may be invalid due for example to contention with digital inputs or to the current operating state of the instrument Examples are 1 Digital inputs have priority over the operator buttons 2 If a parameter value cannot be changed the prompt is not shown 3 If the 4 or button is pressed for a read only parameter a number of dashes is displayed 44 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 3 6 PARAMETER TABLES Subsequent chapters in this manual refer to parameter tables These tables provide the full list of parameters available in Config level in a particular page The table below is an example Column 1 gives the name of the parameter as it appears on the display Column2 isa description and possible usage of the parameter Column3 isthe range of values which can be set This may be a numerical value eg n to n or the condition enumeration of a parameter eg the parameter Program Status has enumerations Run Hold Reset Column 4 isthe default value if applicable of the parameter set during manufacture Column 5 _ is the access level required to change the parameter value L1 means that the value is only shown in Level 1 L2 means that the value is only shown in
359. meter which you wish to change The parameter can only be altered if the value is preceded by 8 Press or Y to change If the value is read only it will be replaced by the value for as long as the raise or lower buttons are pressed Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 41 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 3 3 3 To Change Next Parameter in the List This section describes how to select further parameters in the list which you may wish to alter or to view Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From the previous display The button will allow you to scroll down press to select the next LE the list parameter which you wish to change If this button is held down it will continuously Almi Dutp m scroll around the list which will enable you to change a previous parameter 2 Press or Y to change cai P the value 3 3 4 To Change Any Parameter in the List As stated above you can keep pressing or hold down the button to continuously scroll around the list of parameters There are two other alternatives The first is to return to the highlight bar described below The second is Backscroll described in the next section Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From the previous display ALARMS ILP1 1 press dto highlight the parameter value and its name Imi Hust Pili 2 Press or Y to scroll a up or down the list
360. moving the controller from its sleeve Allow at least 10 minutes for the controller to warm up after switch on Failure to observe these precautions will result in the controller not being calibrated to its full capability 330 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 27 3 PV INPUT 27 3 1 To Calibrate mV Range Calibration of both 40 and 80 mV ranges for the PV Input is carried out using the same 50 milli volt source Pyrometer and mA calibration is included in this procedure To calibrate thermocouples it is first necessary to calibrate the 40mV and 80mV ranges followed by CJC described in section 27 3 2 cis LIS VI 2704 X Controller i Pd Copper cable Leg ud N LIX v For best results OmV should be calibrated by disconnecting one of the copper wires from the mV source and short circuiting it to the other wire This is particularly important to obtain best accuracy for RTD calibration Figure 27 1 Connections for mV Range Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press as many times as necessary until the STANDARD s IO page header is displayed To choose PV Input en MODULE e 2 Press to select sub headers and PV DIE Input eJ i 3 Press to select the parameter list TTRYWIUTUTEXID CE e To choose mV input range 4 Press again to select Channel Type 5 Press A or y lto choose the 40mV or 80mV
361. mperature sensor which will isolate the heating circuit Please note that the alarm relays within the controller will not give protection under all failure conditions 30 4 12 Grounding of the temperature sensor shield In some installations it is common practice to replace the temperature sensor while the controller is still powered up Under these conditions as additional protection against electric shock we recommend that the shield of the temperature sensor is grounded Do not rely on grounding through the framework of the machine 30 5 INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS FOR EMC To ensure compliance with the European EMC directive certain installation precautions are necessary as follows e For general guidance refer to EMC Installation Guide HA0254064 e When using relay or triac outputs it may be necessary to fit a filter suitable for suppressing the emissions The filter requirements will depend on the type of load For typical applications we recommend Schaffner FN321 or FN612 364 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 30 5 1 Routing of wires To minimise the pick up of electrical noise the wiring for low voltage dc and particularly the sensor input wiring should be routed away from high current power cables Where it is impractical to do this use shielded cables with the shield grounded at both ends In general keep cable lengths to a minimum 31 APPENDIX C TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION All figures qu
362. n 1 In INSTRUMENT Options Page set Num of Loops 2 section 7 2 1 set Humidity Enabled 2 In STANDARD IO PV Input Page set Channel Type RTD section 22 2 set Linearisation PT100 set Units C F K set Resolution XXXX X set SBrk Impedance Low set SBrk Fallback Up Scale This configures the PV Input to measure dry temperature 3 In MODULE IO Module 3A Page set Channel Type RTD section 23 3 9 set Linearisation PT100 set Units C F K set Resolution XXXX X set SBrk Impedance Off set SBrk Fallback Up Scale This configures Module 3 to measure wet temperature 4 In HUMIDITY Options Page set Atm Pressure 1013 0 for sea level section 13 5 1 190 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 5 In HUMIDITY Wiring Page section set Dry Bulb Src 05108 PVIn Val 13 5 2 set Wet Bulb Src 04468 Mod3A Val This connects the sensors to the humidity block 6 In LP2 SETUP Options Page set Control Type PID gt Ch1 PID2 Ch2 section 11 1 1 set PV Src 11105 Humid Rel 7 In LP2 SETUP Wiring Page section Note For Dewpoint select 11106 11 2 1 11 1 1 This connects the RH output to Loop 2 PV 8 In LP2 SETUP Output Page set OP Low Limit 100 0 section 11 6 1 set OP High Limit 100 0 9 In MODULE IO Module 1A Page set Channel Type Time Proportion sect
363. n 1 Cust Lin 2 Cust Lin 3 Switch 1 Page Chapter 23 MODULE IO e 1A page e 1B page e 1C page e 3A page e 3B page e 3C page e 4A page e 4B page e 4C page e 5A page e 5B page e 5C page e 6 page e 6B page e 6C page Chapter 22 STANDARD IO PV Input page An Input Page Dig IO1 Page Dig IO2 Page Dig IO3 Page Dig 104 Page Dig IO5 Page Dig 106 Page Dig IO7 Page Chapter 8 RUN PSP1 Page PSP2 Page PSP3 Page Prg PSP2 Programmer working SP2 Prg Uval1 Programmer user value 1 Prg Uval2 Programmer user value 2 PROGRAM EDIT Segment Page 374 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Modbus Address 00000 Nov 12 2704 Controller O O O OJO OJO ProgEnd 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 LgOp1 OP Logic operator output 1 C2 NO LgOp5 OP Logic operator outpu LgOp6 OP Logic operator outpu o o1 5 oo Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 Parameter Description Engineering Handbook Modbus Address Refer To Section PregEnd Endof Program AnOp1 O Analogue operator OP1 p LgOp2 OP Logic operator outpu LgOp3 OP Logic operator outpu LgOp4 OP Logic operator outpu CIA Tot1 Alm Totaliser 1 alarm output Tot2 Alm Totaliser 2 alarm output Tot3 Alm Totaliser 3 alarm output Tot4 Alm Totaliser 4 alarm output Chapter 8 Chapter 18 Analogue 1 ogue 2 ogue 3 ogue
364. n and off operate a bypass valve and possibly operate two stages of heating and or cooling Dehumidify valve 13 4 2 Example Of Humidity Controller Connections r SCR for temperature control ib z Humidify Solenoid Drive capability of digital outputs 1 5mA using the internal power supply or 40mA with an external supply wD wD OG GO GOD CO CO CORO CDI CO COO G8 G2 60 GO GO G2 2 2 COOMBS CS COCO GO GO GO GO OO GO C Dry bulb temperature Wet bulb temperature Figure 13 4 Example of Humidity Controller Connections In the above example the following modules are fitted This will change from installation to installation Module 1 Analogue or relay to drive dehumidify valve Module 3 PV input module for wet bulb temperature RTD Standard Digital I O Used as logic outputs for humidify solenoid valve and temperature control SCR Standard PV Input For the dry bulb RTD used for the temperature control and humidity calculation Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 187 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 13 4 3 Temperature Control Of An Environmental Chamber The temperature of an environmental chamber is controlled as a single loop with two control outputs The
365. n plugging the controller back into its sleeve ensure that the latching ears click into place It is recommended that the power to the controller is switched off when un plugging or plugging the controller into its sleeve This is to prevent premature wear on the controller connectors when current is flowing through them Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 15 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 2 2 I O MODULES The 2704 controller has the facility to fit optional plug in modules The connections for these modules are made to the inner three connector blocks as shown below The modules are e Communications modules e O modules A list of available modules is given in Table 23 1 These modules are fitted simply by sliding them into the relevant position as shown below Figure 2 3 View of the Plug in Modules 2 2 1 To Add or Change Modules Should it be necessary to add remove or change the position of modules the following procedure is recommended Remove the controller form its sleeve It is recommended that the controller is switched off before it is removed from its sleeve 1 To remove the controller from its sleeve push both latching ears Figure 2 1 outwards and ease the controller forwards from its sleeve It should not be necessary to use any tools for this 2 To remove a module it may be gripped by the rear terminals and pulled out from its location 3 To fit a new module gently insert it into the r
366. n procedure before the system has settled at a stable value The controller continuously takes blocks of 50 samples When the average value between two consecutive blocks is within the Threshold Value the controller will then calibrate The Threshold Value defaults to 0 5 but can be adjusted in configuration level If the readings are not stable within this period the controller will abort the calibration 318 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 24 3 LOAD CELL CALIBRATION A load cell with V mV or mA output may be connected to the PV Input Analogue Input or Modules 1 3 4 5 6 supplied as analogue inputs The wiring connections are shown in Chapter 2 INSTALLATION The load cell is calibrated as follows 1 Remove any load and start the procedure using the low point calibration parameter Start Pnt1 Cal or a digital input wired to this parameter The controller will calculate the low calibration point 2 Place a reference weight on the load cell and turn on the high point calibration parameter Start Pnt2 Cal or a digital input wired to this parameter The controller will then calculate the high calibration point Note If Start Pnt1 Cal On Start Pnt2 Cal cannot be turned to On If Start Pnt2 Cal On Start Pnt1 Cal cannot be turned to On Either must complete before the other can be set to On Controller under Calibration Reference
367. ndbook 10 CHAPTER 10 ALARM OPERATION 10 1 DEFINITION OF ALARMS AND EVENTS Alarms are used to alert an operator when a pre set level or condition has been exceeded They are normally used to switch an output usually a relay to provide interlocking of the machine or plant or external audio or visual indication of the condition Soft Alarms are indication only within the controller and are not attached to an output relay Events can also be alarms but are generally defined as conditions which occur as part of the normal operation of the plant They do not generally require operator intervention An example might be to open close a vent during a programmer cycle The controller does not display the alarm status on the front panel For the purposes of the configuration of this controller alarms and events can be considered the same 10 1 1 Customisable Parameter Names Throughout this chapter parameter names shown in ta ics are customisable by the user The name of the parameter may vary therefore from instrument to instrument Typical customisable parameter names are e Alarm names e Loop names e Module and Input names e Custom units e Promoted parameters Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 119 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 10 2 TYPES OF ALARM USED IN 2704 CONTROLLER This section describes graphically the operation of different types of alarm used in the 2704 controller The graphs show measured value plotted
368. nearisation block 1 set Input 2 Src 04948 Mod 6A Val Appendix D This connects input 2 of the switch over block to the output of module 6A fitted as an analogue input module Set PV Src 03477 SwOv1 OP Appendix D This connects the PV input of Loop 1 to the output of the switch over block Set Wire Src 00004 L1 Wkg OP Appendix D This connects the input of module 1A to channel 1 output of loop 1 This module may be fitted as an analogue relay triac or logic output See Appendix D for list of Modbus addresses Tip See Copy and Paste description in Chapter 5 212 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Con troller Engineering Handbook 14 7 2 Configuring the BCD Input to Select a Program 1 Decade 2 Decade BCD Function Block T Input Src 9 Input2 Src 3 Input 3 Src v Input4 Src 0 Input5 Src gt Input Src Input7 Src Input8 Src BCD Value Decimal Value Digit 1 units Digit 2 units Figure 14 5 BCD Function Block This example assumes that the digital inputs are connected to the standard IO 14 7 2 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 In INP 10 In INP 11 In INP 12 In INP 13 In INP 14 In INP 15 In INP 16 In INP 17 In INP Standard IO DIO1 Val DIO2 Val DIO3 Val
369. ned primarily for use in boiler control applications and is described in Chapter 28 Isolated single logic output Dual DC output High resolution DC retransmission output Dual PV input Dual PV In Dual Probe Input Table 23 1 I O Modules Parameters for the above modules such as input output limits filter times and scaling of the IO can be adjusted in the Module IO pages The procedures are very similar to those covered in Chapter 22 STANDARD IO 284 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 23 2 MODULE IDENTIFICATION To identify which module is fitted into which slot Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes Menu Level 3 Fil OFERE 1 From any display press DJ as many times as necessary to access the page header menu A 5 2 Press or Y to select MODULE n 10 Idents Summary of modules fitted Module XA X Module number Module XB A B C STANDARD In t Module XC Single Two Three DIAGNOSTIC channels respectively 3 Press e to show Sub headers The above is repeated for every module fitted The name of the module is user configurable This view shows the Ident page A v or which is read only 4 Press to scroll to the required sub header If a module is fitted in any module position it s type as listed in Table 23 1 is displayed No Module is displayed if the slot is empty 5 Press lto sele
370. nein eee e doce tan 15 2 2 OMODU LES an anae 16 2 2 1 NOAA or ChangeModules ennie aiit EREET EEEE AE OA 16 2 3 ludere c PIC 17 23 1 Electrical Connections eee recie n e EVA Se PHOT ces RIT IRL IXR d UTAH RARE TESI 17 2 3 2 Rear Terminal Layouts cos ROO NOR ORO QU inte e DER Ae RI RR a eed 17 2 4 Rear OMA NaS cases robot eere teni OCC Pe P Det ei bete ede tene Ye Pe ded ce a ge e aeu ee San gere 18 2 5 STANDARD CONNECHONS 2 5 tau hoc oie ctae re EP E entiers 19 2 5 1 Power Supply Wiring 2 52 Relay QUtpUti ee ce eco ORO PEOR EEEE EENES EEEE DX ID NUR HR UG Ra v Hn o re REL CH ER et i eid iod 2 9 9 Sensor Input Connectlons c een ERR RR RO RE OE RE DE EE ERR a e ERN 20 2 53 Analogue Input Gonn ctions oon eie mtt UHR ERU EOS oncsueanes RUE NOUO PIED ME theta renti thee eie Red 21 2 5 5 I O Expander or Additional Digital Inp t e tt neret senudassisbassasonsdesteeasansay 22 PS ENPIIMOT C 23 2 6 OPTIONAL PLUG IN MODULE CONNECTIONS essent enne nre enne nnne 24 2 6 1 Digital Communications Connections tiere nitri ento ti tihi uss AA a tee Po e ERAN AE ATE Ea 24 2 6 2 De vicelNets Wiririg eoe ERE OT WU RERO CU EUER RE E EE CUR HE E Ead 26 2 60 9 Ethernet Cohnectlons s enemies tee ripe terae itat exse mittere ted tom dete ese e irt mer EDEN 28 ZI E VEEE IUe 29 2 7 TO CONNECT ZIRCONIA DUAL SIGNAL PROBE sese nee enne n
371. nel o block ground 750 0 1 0 2W PID Loop SP 0 100926 Precision PV Input mA 0 100 Precision PV Input mA set up PID Loop set up Elec Lo OmA Proportional band PB 12596 Elect Hi 13 333mA Integral time Ti 0 4sec Filter time 0 2sec Derivative time Td Off All the internal variables of the loop and their limits are set to 0 100 range Figure 23 5 0 10V Voltage Retransmission 15bit Notes 1 Range of the retransmitted voltage can be scaled by using different burden resistors 1500 will produce 0 2V range 1000 will produce 0 1 333V range 2 To guarantee that the 4 20mA range is fully covered the channel output is calibrated at 3 8mA cal low and 20 5mA cal High 3 To utilise the full potential for high accuracy resolution extra care should be taken to ensure low levels of EM interference as follows keep connecting cables away from power cables ground Dig Common of the controller to local panel ground use shielded cables with the shield connected to local panel ground Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 301 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller Precise 0 10V Voltage Retransmission 14bit Using a Dual probe input PSU output and a feedback loop with input from channel A Retransmission Variable 0 100 L Txdcr Scaling Panel Burden resistor block g 0 5Watt ground 7509 0 1 0 2W eee l 1 PID Loop
372. ng Wiring Page Dry Bulb Src Dry bulb temperature source Conf Wet Bulb Src Wet bulb temperature source Modbus Atm Press Src Atmospheric pressure source address PMtric Cst Src Psychrometric Constant source Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 189 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 13 6 HUMIDITY WIRING EXAMPLE 13 6 1 The Humidity Function Block Humidity Dry Bulb Src Humid Rel Wet Bulb Src Dew Point WWERSESSEO Sensor Failure Pmtric Cst Src Figure 13 5 Humidity Function Block 13 6 1 1 Main Features Calculation of PV The Process Variable can be Relative Humidity or Dewpoint The PV is derived from the wet and dry bulb inputs and atmospheric pressure Pressure Compensation This value can be measured via a transmitter and fed into the controller as an analogue value Alternatively it can be set as a fixed parameter 13 6 2 Configuration of a Humidity Control Loop This example assumes that the dry temperature Pt100 input is connected to the main PV and the wet input Pt100 to module 3 Loop 1 normally controls temperature so the humidity loop will be Loop 2 Humidity control outputs are relays and configured as time proportioning Loop 2 Mod 1A Main PV Humidity PV Src WS PVIn ValF Dry Bulb Src Humid Rel CH1 OP Wet Bulb Src Dew Point CH2 OP Mod1C Mod 3A Wire Src o Mod3A Va Figure 13 6 Humidity Control Loop 13 6 2 1 Implementatio
373. ng processes Delay time can only be set in Configuration level If delay time has been configured for the alarm the user may be aware that the occurrence of an alarm may not necessarily correspond with the display of the alarm Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 125 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 10 6 TO CONFIGURE AN ALARM The example below is shows how to configure a Loop 1 Alarm Each loop has two alarms shown on the display as Alm1 and Alm2 The procedure described below is the same for all alarms Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes From any display press as many times as necessary to access the page header menu Press or Y to select ALARMS Press to display sub headers A Press or Y to select LPT Press to display LP7 alarm parameters Press 2 again to edit Alm1 Type Press 4 or Y to configure the alarm type Press Ls to scroll to Alm1 Message Press or Y to select the message Press Le to scroll to Alm1 Latching Press or Y to choose the latching type Menu Config The first sub header is Summary Further sub headers allow other alarms to be configured Text shown in ta ics is user definable and will appear if User Text is enabled in INSTRUMENT page see section 5 2 6 2 The text has been assigned to this parameter The choices are Off Full Scale Low Full Scal
374. ng Handbook 2704 Controller Table Number These parameters provide information on PROGRAM RUN General Page 8 19 1a the running program Parameter Name Parameter Description programmer to run Fast Run To fast run the program No Program Status Displays the status of the program Complete Programmer run status Programmer hold status Programmer reset status Programmer end status New segment loaded Program time elapsed h mm ss up to 24Hrs Remaining number of cycles 1 to 999 Only if Prog Cycles gt 1 Number of segments in the running O to 100 program The currently running segment number 1 to 100 Segment Type Current segment type Profile Profile Prog Run Prog Hold Prog Reset Prog End New Seg Prog Time Elap Prog Cycle Rem Total Segments Segment Number terable in Hold Profile normal segment End Segment Go Back repeat part of prog Go Back Segment Name A user defined name for the segment Default L1 R O Text Seg Time Rem Time remaining in the current segment L1 R O Alterable if Time To Target prog and in Hold Wait Status Wait Status No Wait No Wait L1 R O Event A Event B Event C End Segment End of prog Wait Condition Wait condition for the running segment No Wait L1 Alterable Event A Event B Event C Prog User Val 1 Active User Val 1 S Prog User Val 2 Active User Val 2 Eoo Goback Rem Go back cycles remaining 1 to 999 End Action The state required in the
375. nge o No L1 Yes Default Text or User Default Conf defined Text 01 to Text 50 No Controller range 0 00 00 0 No Yes On No es No L3 Y m2 parameters are the same as Alm1 parameters if Alm2 Type z None Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 129 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 10 7 3 ALARMS PV Input Page Parameters Table Number These parameters set up the alarms associated with the PV input ALARMS 10 7 3 signal PV Input They are only displayed if enabled using the parameter FS Hi Alarm or FS Lo Alarm FS Hi Alarm Full scale high alarm enable disable Disabled Disabled Conf Enabled PV Alm Ack Group acknowledge Acknowledges No L1 both Hi and Lo alarms Acknowledge FS Hi Message Full scale high message Default Text or User Default Conf Use A or to choose from the User Text defined Text 01 to 50 Text messages set up in section 7 2 6 FS Hi Blocking Full scale high blocking No Conf Use A or v to enable disable Yes FS Hi Latching Full scale high latching None Conf Use A or v to choose latching type Auto Manual Event FS Hi Setpoint Full Scale High Alarm 1 Setpoint Controller range SS 4 FS Hi Hyst Full Scale High alarm 1 hysteresis Controller range 8 o FS Hi Delay Full Scale High alarm 1 delay 0 00 00 0 o Cm FS Hi Output Full Scale High alarm 1 output Off Off R O On FS Lo Alarm Full scale Low alarm enable disable Disabled Disabled Conf Enabled FS L
376. nne enne 34 2 1 Zireonia Probe Screenirig sine terit erben hene b irr prd eb ir rece ti err ra eee ree eR EHE eb ei TEPAS TIER veasanead 35 3 CHAPTER 3 OFERA TION tereti ceese sccevssesenevasesceevssevasesasesuedssesauetasetesseevesessverssesteenssess 36 3 1 OPERATOR INTERFACE OVERVIEW 5 2 ee EO EE SM RE REEL SR RE Ere iS NEE 36 SA Tne Operator B ttohs n eset eg t ree ee LU Ret Pe En HE Pee ne E Fee E OA CAR LET Me tee ree TEL eran 37 35127 Status Messages hsara EE oiv Tt SEE HA PH Meer ELS A MM Lee rst edle AAAA Mi ete SA Rit 38 3 2 PARAMETERS AND HOW TOJAGGESS THEM i c tH EEBSRDNUAODSHUPES 39 Sl Pagesx tits d E E EE ALUNES acordes eben siipra t ebvvt ces tie vM DEN ND v cU T p At Manan DH oo 39 3 3 NAVIGATION OVERVIENM c tacent ae etre IHRER ERE ER PATI RI ENEE oe RR ETE PER RR SE gens 40 3 311 Mo Selectia Page Header ttn IRR RETIRO RUNE MARO NUIT ETICA EXER CERNI 40 3 32 To Navigate toa Parameter froma Page Header ette ette Hee tH Hee P ee Ee CER 41 3 3 3 To Change Next Parameter in the List ettetrtntntettetetntntee tete tentetee tnter tetee tette 42 3 34 To Change Any Parameter in the Llst erint p ee t rte eee nire eee e beer etie 42 3 4 BACKSGROLDL I 4 entrent aam m UDIN Uit Hart LI ARCO CIE LEA 42 3 5 PARAMETER VALUES 3 3 cessat peteret tren retra ttes deter bes rre es e obe e aes ERE 43 3 51 econtrmnation MechablsImihssuecne eet sm E rU 44 35 2 PInvalid key actOns ss eite etitm eerie e metere em
377. nnected to both and input terminals while the screen is floating The procedure is now the same pect hs 9 10 and 14 for 8 P A Y Jto ch Gain PUR as paragrap A ics S UMS f Cal State Gain mV calibration Part No HA026933 Issue7 0 Nov 12 335 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 27 5 MODULE I O 27 5 1 DC Output Module The DC output module is calibrated in the factory at 10 and 90 of output level This is 1 and 9V for 0 to 10Vdc output 2mA and 18mA for a 0 to 20mA output 4mA and 18mA for A dual DC output The factory calibration can be modified by the user by adjusting the Cal Trim parameter i e Actual Output Factory Cal Low amp High Value User Cal Low amp High Trim Value The user trim value can be accepted and saved as for input calibration data Voltage or Current m meter Q LIS A 5 69 Hie B 2704 69 Controller Module 1 2 4 5 or Figure 27 4 DC Module Connections Volts or Current Output Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes Menu Config 1 From any display press as many times as necessary until the MODULE IO page header is displayed 2 Press _ amp to show sub headers 3 Press or T to choose the module in which the DC Output module is fitted Other choices are re f Cal Low 4 Press until the parameter Cal Cal High State is displayed Restore Factory Save only appears after cal procedure complete 336 Pa
378. nnel A Notes 1 Input Linearisation J Type K Type L Type R Type B Type N Type T Type S Type Platinel Il C Type PT 100 Linear Square Root Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 PT 25 5 292 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 23 3 10 DC Input Table Number This page allows you to set the parameters for a DC Input module 23 3 10 This module can only be fitted in slots 1 3 4 or 6 Engineering Handbook MODULE IO Module xA Page Access Level Parameter Name Parameter Description Default Ident Module identification DC Input Channel Type Input Output type RTD Thermocouple Pyrometer mV mA Volts HZVolts Log10 Linearisation Input linearisation Units Engineering units See section 32 2 Resolution Display resolution XXXXX to X XXXX or SCI SBrk Impedance Sensor break enable for high output impedance Off sensors Low High Sensor break fallback Off Down scale Up Scale SBrk fallback CJC Type CJC type Only shown if Channel Type thermocouple The following four parameters are only shown for Channel Type mV V mA and HZVolts Electrical Lo Electrical low input level Input range Electrical Hi Electrical high input level units depend on channel type Eng Value Lo Low display reading Display range Eng Value Hi High display reading Filter Time Input filter time Off to 0 10 00 0 Emissivity Emissivity Pyrometer input only Off to 1 00 Electrical Val The curre
379. no button is pressed for 10 seconds the display reverts to previous The following table lists further parameters in this page U 8 24 1 Program GROUP Options Page The following pages allow you to set up and configure the Program Groups It consists of three sub headings the Options page is to configure the overall program the Wiring page allows internal soft wiring to different parameters the Active Group page allows each individual group to be set up and is available in operator level access Table Number These parameters allow you to configure Program Type and Options PROGRAM GROUPS 8 24 1 This page is only available in configuration level Options Page Parameter Name Parameter Description Default Program Type To select the type of programmer Time to Target Time to Target Ramp Rate Num of PSPs Number of profile setpoints used Profile Lock To allow a program to be created but allows no Unlocked Unlocked changes in operation levels Profile Locked Fully Locked A description of each of these parameters is given in the earlier sections of this chapter Part No HA026933 Issue7 0 Nov 12 99 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 8 24 2 PROGRAM GROUPS Wiring Page Table Number These parameters allow you to configure the internal soft wiring PROGRAM GROUPS 8 24 2 connections for the Program Groups Wiring Page This page is only available in configuration level Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default Pr
380. ns available in the calibration state This is to allow for the installation set up to be completed while the system is active without always giving access from level 3 See section 28 4 4 3 K Factor Probe constant entered by the user Auto 0 3 or L3 Units are 1 cm 0 001 to 99 999 K Factor val The actual value for K Factor being used L3 xxx by the system Temperature coefficient for deriving linear Auto 2 0 or 2 0 C L3 temperature compensation 0 1 to 100 0 Temp Coef The actual value being used by the L3 controller KKK Use Table Select to use the TCF table for deriving temperature compensation The table will only be available if a TCF calibration has been done otherwise this parameter is NOT shown Temp Coef 348 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook Table This list allows you to set up the parameters for boiler BOILER TDS Number control eu US 4 3 Name Confirm This parameter is used when the settings of Change K Factor and Temp Coef are changed and conflict with the TDScal It is only available if there is a need to confirm a change is used to indicate the problem and guide the user through the possible options Override TDScal cancel change etc See section 28 4 4 2 TDScal Status of TDS calibration Overridden is Default Status used to override previous calibration due Valid to manual settings Overridden See section 28 4 4 2 Calibra
381. nt electrical value of the input Input range units as configured Module 3A Val The current value in engineering units or 1 4 or 6A Module 3A 1 4 or6A can be user defined text CJC Temp emperature read at the rear terminals C hermocouple inputs only SBrk Trip Imp Current sensor break value See section 22 3 3 Read as a of the SBrk Impedance configured Channel Name Cal State Allows input to be calibrated See Chapter 27 Not shown for Pyrometer or mA inputs Rear Term Temp Allows a user measured offset to be entered for Auto to 50 00 C CJC calibration Ch Type thermocouple only R O Conf Conf Conf Conf Conf Conf See To Scale R O R O R O R O R O User defined name for the channel Select from Default Conf User Text Page Section 7 2 6 Text This module has a single input Its parameters are displayed under channel A Note1 Input Linearisation J Type K Type L Type R Type B Type N Type T Type S Type Platinel Il C Type PT 100 Linear Square Root Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 PT 25 5 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 293 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 23 3 11 Dual PV Input The dual PV input module accepts two inputs one from a high level source channel A and one from a low level source channel C The two inputs are not isolated from each other and have an update rate of 5Hz One application for the module is for a zirconia probe input The modul
382. nt loop summary a message below the banner is periodically flashed with the loop being tuned A second message flashes the state of tuning from the text above Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 171 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 12 4 MANUAL TUNING If for any reason automatic tuning gives unsatisfactory results you can tune the controller manually There are a number of standard methods for manual tuning The one described here is the Ziegler Nichols method With the process at its normal running conditions Set the Integral Time and the Derivative Time to OFF Set High Cutback and Low Cutback to Auto Ignore the fact that the PV may not settle precisely at the setpoint a S If the PV is stable reduce the proportional band so that the PV just starts to oscillate If PV is already oscillating increase the proportional band until it just stops oscillating Allow enough time between each adjustment for the loop to stabilise Make a note of the proportional band value B and the period of oscillation T 5 Setthe proportional band integral time and derivative time parameter values according to the calculations given in the table below Type of control Proportional band P Integral time I Derivative time D Proportional only 2xB OFF OFF Table 12 2 Tuning Values Note The parameters listed in the above table will be found under the heading Loop Setup This heading is also described in the following
383. o 3 ons Override SON SP Loop 3 Single relay or triac Other Digits AT Aux PV Loop 1 _HX Heat _PID PID control A2_ Aux PV Loop 2 LOX Cool _ONF On Off control A3 Aux PV Loop 3 Dual relay or triac SPI PID OnOff control E Ratio lead PV Loop 1 JHC PID Heat amp Cool VP1 VP w o feedback L2 Ratio lead PV Loop 2 VH VP Heat _VP2 VP with feedback LS Ratio lead PV Loop 3 _AA FSH amp FSH _VP3 Dual VP no feedback Input range _AB FSH amp FSL _VP4 Dual VP with feedback Select third digit from table 1 BAG DH amp DL _AD FSH amp DH _AE FSL amp DL 4 6 PV Inputs Table 1 AF FSH amp FSL None A 4 20mA linear AG FSH amp DB J Thermocouple Y 0 20mA linear AH FSL amp DB Thermocouple V 0 10Vdc linear AJ DB amp DB T Thermocouple Ww 0 5Vdc linear HHX Heat O P Ips 1 amp 2 L Thermocouple G 1 5Vdc linear CCX Cool O P Ips 1 amp 2 Thermocouple P12 Prog events 1 amp 2 R Thermocouple P34 Prog events 3 amp 4 S Thermocouple Precision PV input P56 Prog events 5 amp 6 B Thermocouple ZPV PV input Module P78 Prog events 7 amp 8 P Thermocouple _PA Aux PV Input Triple logic output C Thermocouple ARE Ratio lead input HX Ch1 Heat RTD PT100 Potentiometer input CX Ch1 Cool 4 20mA linear SVE VP Heat Feedback Te Ch1 Heat Ch2 Cool 0 20mA linear RS Remote SP HHX Heat O P Ips 1 amp 2 0 10Vdc linear Analogue Input HHH Heat O P Ips 1 2 amp 3 X J K T is N R S B P C p A Y V Ww G C Q D E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 29 3 0
384. o 8 to select In this view the Switch Type is configured as Manual Reset The alternative choice is Auto Reset 5 Press C to show the parameter list The switch enumeration is chosen 6 Press again to select the from User Text as 01 Open required parameter The Switch State toggles between User Text 01 and the next User Text 02 7 Press lor Y to change the parameter value In this example User Text 02 is configured as closed so that the switch toggles between Open and Closed 230 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 16 6 CUSTOM ENUMERATIONS Custom Enumerations allow a user to enumerate parameter values with their own text Parameters which support custom enumerations are e Program User Values see section 8 7 e Digital Pattern Generator Inputs see section 16 1 e Analogue Switches see section 16 2 e User Switches see section 16 5 e Digital Programmer Select parameter see section 9 2 e Digital lO Status parameters Enumeration see sections 22 5 1 22 6 1 23 3 2 23 3 3 and 23 3 4 e Logic Operator Output Value parameters see section 19 2 1 16 6 1 To Configure Custom Enumerations This consists of two operations 1 Define areas of text in the INSTRUMENT User Text page which are to be used for custom enumerations as follows In INSTRUMENT Set User Text Enabled User Text page Set Text Number from 1 to 50 to repre
385. o 999 9 30 l Derivative Time Set 1 seconds or minutes Cutback Low 1 1 rir aio f ia Cutback Low Set 1 Auto to Cutback High 1 Cutback High Set 1 display range Manual Reset 1 Manual Reset Set 1 only appliesto Off 100 0 to 100 0 Note 1 a PD controller r Cool Gain 1 Relative cool gain set 1 0 1 to 10 Only present if ch 1 and ch 2 are configured in the same loop An Value 1 OP Hi Limit 1 OP Lo Limit 1 The above ten parameters are repeated for sets 2 to 6 if the number of PID sets has been configured to 2 to 6 respectively r Analogue value set 1 Output high limit 1 I Output low limit 1 Note 1 Autodroop Compensation is used when the integral term is set to Off Under these conditions the controller will reach a steady state but is likely to control with an error When Autodroop Compensation Manual the Manual Reset parameter can be adjusted to compensate The effect is to add or subtract a small amount of power manually into the load or actuator When Autodroop Compensation Calc a value is calculated for the Manual Reset which automatically sets the power level Note that this is a snapshot taken at a particular control point If the SP is changed however the Manual Reset will re calculate Autodroop Compensation may be used in systems which have a very long time of response where it may not be possible to set a long enoug
386. o parameters are the same as FS Hi parameters if FS Lo Alarm Enabled Inhibit Src Alarm inhibit source Modbus Address Cm Inhibit Alarm inhibit value No No L3 Yes 10 7 4 ALARMS An Input Page Parameters The parameters for the Analogue Input Alarms are identical to the PV Input Alarms 10 7 5 ALARMS Module 1 3 4 5 amp 6 Page Parameters The parameters for the Module Alarms are identical to the PV Input Alarms Module alarm pages only appear if suitable modules are fitted 130 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 10 7 6 ALARMS User 1 to 8 Page Parameters Table Number These parameters set up user defined alarms ALARMS 10 7 6 User 1 to User 8 Type Alarm Type Off As order Conf Full Scale Low code Full Scale High Deviation Band Deviation High Deviation Low Rate of Change User 1 Ack Group alarm acknowledge for user No No L1 alarm 1 Acknowledge Name User defined alarm name Default Text or User defined Default Conf Use A or 7 to choose from the Text 01 to 50 Text User Text messages set up in section 7 2 6 Message User defined message Default Text or User defined Default Conf Use A or 7 to choose from the Text 01 to 50 Text User Text messages set up in section 7 2 6 Latching Indicates if the alarm has been None R O at L3 configured as latching Auto Manual Event Blocking Indicates if the alarm has been R O at L3 configured as blocking Y L
387. ock Diagrams tnter rete jette tn reto ta nitate fake botes Pepe asa 11 10 6 EOOP SETUP Wiring page for Cascade LOB ettet esee tree qe ener qe n es deg 11 10 7 Cascade Parameters sss 11 10 8 Cascade Wiring Example 11 11 RAMO CONTRO P 2 097 n 11 11 1 OVERVIEW SE 11 11 2 Basic Ratio Control 11 11 3 Controller Configured For Ratio 11 11 4 Ratio Parameters wees 11 11 5 Ratio Wiring Example 11 12 OVERIDE CONTROL 11 12 1 Overview sees 11 122 Simple OvelTide 4 oet e teme EC e rH PR eth Pere er er ie Y DE HD E Eee deer termes 11 12 3 SensorBr alk AGO e cette tn de CR e TEN UNTER LEEREN UR A EEEE TENSA EEEN 11 12 4 Sensor Break Type Output 0 11 12 5 Sensor Break Type Hold 1 42 57 LIssueswWithiSensorBEeak oie cceysnenscetanelcciiie eise te ists MSAN D LL LT M2 upDownscale ceu oM M MU MR MM 11 342 8 Upscale ette 11 12 9 Controller Configured For Override cmd oboe pne ab in ab ed rtm eb a 11 12 10 Override Parameters ced ase agio dee e WO EAR e T RR UH oT e ete EF LEX EAD ER HR A PUER 11 12 11 OverrideWirlng Exarmrple i serere gp ER e Rn een ir ele rn ct i Pe e ERE tique pre eta e been 11 13 LOOP2 SEMU Piolanti iia m a 11 14 LOOPS SET UB siehe eee bad on ode A a A een ad oe aed ag ANDETE RSET SENSE 167 12 CHAPTER 12 TUNING cecenii ia E e eet o ete 168 A nl ERONNEET E E E TT CHE arde 12 2 AUTOMATIC TUNING S ss m 12 2 1 Oneshot
388. of a power fail delayed start retains its value prior to the power fail but the request to run is cancelled A running program may be interrogated and changes made to segments in the same way as a synchronous programmer The programmer mimic can also be displayed in the same way as a synchronous programmer Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 113 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 8 31 1 Asynchronous Programmer Status Bar The programmer status bar is shown in the top right hand corner of the loop overview displays as selected by the LOOP button They are shown as PSP1 PSP2 PSP3 qj The view shown here is applicable when Groups are used The number of displayed status symbols depends on the number of programmer blocks used but the order of display is always left to right with no gaps When Groups are not used the program status is associated with the individual loop pages Symbols Used m fe npe The current status is shown in inverse e g PSP is in Hold These symbols are also used on other views for example the Run Group Status pop up shown in the previous section 114 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 9 CHAPTER9 DIGITAL PROGRAMMER 9 1 WHAT IS THE DIGITAL PROGRAMMER The digital programmer provides a timed control of a single digital output It may be used during any segment of a Setpoint Programmer or it may be used independently of the Setpoint Prog
389. of an enrichment gas is supplied to the furnace The second output controls the level of dilution air 13 1 3 Sooting Alarm In addition to other alarms which may be detected by the controller see also Chapter 10 Alarm Configuration the 2704 can trigger an alarm when the atmospheric conditions are such that carbon will be deposited as soot on all surfaces inside the furnace 13 1 4 Automatic Probe Cleaning The 2704 has a probe clean and recovery strategy that can be programmed to occur between batches or manually requested A short blast of compressed air is used to remove any soot and other particles that may have accumulated on the probe Once the cleaning has been completed the time taken for the probe to recover is measured Ifthe recovery time is too long this indicates that the probe is ageing and replacement or refurbishment is due During the cleaning and recovery cycle the C reading is frozen thereby ensuring continuous furnace operation 13 1 5 Endothermic Gas Correction A gas analyser may be used to determine the CO concentration of the endothermic gas If a 4 20mA output is available from the analyser it can be fed into the 2704 to automatically adjust the calculated carbon reading Alternatively this value can be entered manually 180 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 13 1 6 Example of Carbon Potential Controller Connections Probe Clean Motorised Valve Demand
390. ogram Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 This Is The Display You Should See Menu Config STRUMENT P UP PROFILE SP1 PROFIL nent Edit PROFILE SP1 Program Edit Po SP1 P1 Confirm Edit Function Engineering Handbook Additional Notes In this case the program has been given a name by the user When the program is copied the display returns to None er Press or to confirm or cancel If no button is pressed for 10 seconds the display reverts to previous and the paste is cancelled 111 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 8 28 EXAMPLE TO INSERT A SEGMENT INTO A PROGRAM Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press to TS NT access the page header menu 2 Press l or B PROFILE SP1 to select Menu Config 3 Press to select sub headers R 4 Press lor Y to select PROFILE SP1 Segment Edit PROFIL P Edit 5 Press C to select parameters and press again to edit Program Number In this case the program has been given a name by the user 6 Press Aor Y lto select the program number to be edited A In this case segment 1 is inserted and the total segment count increases by one 7 Press or Y to scroll to Edit Function ator LY If no button is pressed for 10 5 iue pe lneert seconds the display reverts to g previous 9 Press to confirm or to cancel
391. old L1 Alterable in Hold L1 Not in Time To Target prog L1 R O shown if configured The above table is repeated for PSP2 parameters and PSP3 parameters Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 93 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 8 20 PROGRAMMER WIRING EXAMPLES 8 20 1 One Profile Three Loops This example explains how to configure a programmer to allow one profile to generate a setpoint for three control loops The 2704 program block can generate up to three profiled variables which can then be internally wired to any parameter source In most cases the PSPs are used to allow control loop setpoints to follow a pre determined ramp dwell sequence but they can also be used for example to retransmit a setpoint to a slave device In this example PSP1 is soft wired to the program setpoints of each control loop Also the PV of loop1 is wired to the PV1 source to provide holdback and the PSP1 reset source to provide servo start This configuration is supplied from the factory by defining the hardware code field in the 2704 order code for loops programs to be 321 or 351 Programmer PV1 Src PV2 Src PV3Src Run Src Hold Src Reset Src Run Hold Src Run Reset Src Control Loop 1 Prog Setpoint Control Loop 2 Prog Num Src Prog Setpoint Advance Seg Hbck1 Dis Src Hbck2 Dis Src Hbck3 Dis Src WaitA Src WaitB Src WaitC Src Prog Setpoint Control Loop 3 PSP1
392. omms activity in H module WO Note 1 Profibus replaces ElBisynch if this option has been ordered For Profibus instruments only Address Protocol and Rx Timeout parameters are displayed Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 257 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 20 2 1 1 Ethernet Parameters Table Number These parameters are displayed if Protocol Ethernet COMMS 20 2 1 1 H Module Page L3 DHCP enable See section 20 4 Fixed Dynamic See section 20 4 0 255 20 2 2 J Module Parameters Table Number This page allows you to configure Digital Communications fitted in COMMS 20 2 2 slot J J Module Page L3 Protocol Comms protocol Modbus El Bisynch Baud Rate Baud rate Modbus Bisynch 2400 4800 and 9600 Parity Parity None Modbus only Even Odd Address Controller address Bisynch 1 99 Modbus 1 254 Resolution Comms resolution Modbus only Integer Rx Timeout J Comms timeout value None to 1 00 00 Comms activity in J module 0 or1 zi E 258 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 20 3 DIGITAL COMMUNICATIONS DIAGNOSTICS Digital communications diagnostics is available under the Comms page menu Two parameters are displayed The H Rx and J Rx messages increments each time a valid message is received via the H Comms Module or J Comms module respectively The Timed Out messages indicate a comms time out They are displayed as follows Table Number This
393. onditions Allows a user defined name to be given to the program number Issue 7 0 Nov 12 PSP1 2 or 3 PROFILE Program Edit Access Level L1 Default PSP1 01to PSP20 20 PSP1 01 Or name from user ext None Copy Program Paste Program None Per Program Per Segment Off Fine Lo Fine Hi Fine Band Course Lo Only displayed if Per Program configured Course Hi Course Band L1 Only shown if HBk Type z Off Display Range Per Second Per Minute Per Hour rc Disabled Enabled r Cont cr User string Each character can be set in turn 7 107 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 8 25 6 PSP1 2 or 3 PROFILE Segment Parameters This page is similar to the PROGRAM EDIT Segment Page in the synchronous programmer Table Number These parameters allow you to set up each segment in the program PSP1 2 or 3 PROFILE 8 25 6 Segment Edit Program Selects the program number to be edited PSP1 01 to PSP1 20 PSP1 01 L1 Or name from user text Segment Number Selects the segment number to be edited 1 to 100 o n Edit Function Allows a segment to be inserted None None The example in section 8 28 describes how Insert Segment this feature is used Delete Segment L1 Segment Type Segment type Profile Profile L1 End Segment Go Back Profile a normal segment End Segment the last segment in the program press C to confirm Go Back repeat part o
394. onf Text Idle Conf Low O C High 22 ohm Confirm Go Abort Restore Factory Save to User Sensor break detection on the sensing wires is not available Disconnecting these wires may cause a step change in the read value depending on the length of the wires Ground or driver wire disconnection can be detected by the near zero conductance reading 304 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 23 4 2 Cable Offset Cable offset is used to compensate for cable conductance of the installation It is only important if the desired range of measurements extends to a conductance of less than five times the conductance of the cable For example a typical 60m of 4wire screened cable produces 170uS reading Therefore the compensation will only be required if the measured conductance is expected to fall below 1mS It is worth noting that the cable compensation is only effective for 2 electrode type probes 23 4 2 1 To Calibrate Cable Offset e Enter Configuration level and select the particular Module Slot where the TDS Module resides It is a single channel module so the slot number will be followed by letter A e Disconnect the wires from the probe at the probe end and short circuit A to B and C to D at that end x I1 mE H4 L1 m Lig B 2704 LI LI C Controller Probe L FI FI disconnected 4 4 D EO e E EE y aces TDS Module
395. ons EIA 485 2 wire Connections daisy PC chained to other Go HA instruments EM C HB Rx Tx Com GA He KD485 l EIA 232 to EIA 485 RxB z TxB lt HD Common wi RxA om X 2 wire converter X a HE A Figure 2 13 EIA 485 2 Wire Communications Connections 24 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook EIA485 4 wire or EIA422 Connections daisy chained to other instruments AAAAA HA c Lies CS HB A Rx Rx Tx Com HC B Rx KD485 Lie EIA232 to pik TxB 69 HD Common EIA422 EIA 485 RxB Com TxA L S 4 wire converter 69 HE A Tx ied CO HF B m9 Figure 2 14 RS485 4 Wire Communications Connections Profibus Connections daisy chained to other ES HA instruments IL HB Shield l A X HC vP 5v HD Rx Tx ve M HE Rx Tx ve Master HF Dig Ground HA Twisted pairs a HB Shield HC VP 5V o9 3900 69 HD Rx Tx ve 2200 HE Rx Tx ve eX Last controlle
396. ons Page section 11 1 1 In MODULE IO Module 1A Page section 23 3 1 In PROGRAM EDIT Wiring Page section 8 12 2 2704 Controller set Gauge Src 04948 Mod6A Val This connects the low vacuum gauge connected to module 3 input to low vacuum gauge source set Gauge Src 04468 Mod3A Val This connects the high vacuum gauge connected to module 6 input to high vacuum gauge source set Gauge Src 04628 Mod4A Val This connects the backing vacuum gauge connected to module 4 input to high vacuum gauge source set Channel Type On Off set Wire Src 06657 This configures Dig 101 as a digital output and connects it to setpoint 1 output set Channel Type On Off set Wire Src 06707 This configures the AA relay as an on off output and connects it to setpoint 6 output set Channel Type On Off set Wire Src 06773 This configures module 5 relay as an on off output and connects it to the pump off output set Prog Setpoint PSP1 set Wire Src 06773 Connects PSP1 to become the program setpoint for loop 1 set Channel Type Volts or mA set Wire Src 00013 L1 Ch1 OP This configures module 1 analogue output to volts or mA output and connects it to the Loop 1 PID output Set WaitA Src 06677 This connects Setpoint 3 output to the Wait A input of the programmer block Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller
397. option with the 2704 is the Binary Coded Decimal BCD function block This feature is normally used to select a program number by using panel mounted BCD decade switches A configuration example for this block is given in Section 14 7 2 14 6 1 Main Features Calculation of BCD Value The function calculates a BCD value dependant upon the state of the inputs Unconnected inputs are detected as off This value is available as a wireable parameter Calculation of Decimal Value The function calculates a decimal value dependant upon the state of the inputs Unconnected inputs are detected as off This value is available as a wireable parameter Digit 1 Output The function calculates the first decade BCD value dependant on the state of inputs 1 to 4 Unconnected inputs are detected as off This value is available as a wireable parameter Digit 2 Output The function calculates the second decade BCD value dependant on the state of inputs 5 to 8 Unconnected inputs are detected as off This value is available as a wireable parameter 210 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 14 6 2 BCD Parameters Table Number This page allows you to configure the BCD input values INPUT OPERS 14 6 2 BCD Input Page O O n BCD Value Reads the value in BCD of the switch as it appears on the digital inputs Decimal Value Reads the value in decimal of the 0 255 Switch as it appears on the dig
398. or greater and use the cascade trim block diagram shown in the previous sections Earlier versions used the block diagram shown below These later versions use additional trim limits and scaling to provide improved control in this mode and it may be advantageous to upgraded to Version 4 0 or greater Slave LSP Master WSP b In T LR AuxHR AuxLR EE HR LR AuxLR Master PV e FeedFwT SP Limit CSD FF PHi Master Scale to Slave PV units Value SR OP ae Y Slave SP yg inf AuxHR AuxLR100 D m x iy inf UE Dux ta SPLo Tamtint com Master EB Re scale to 100 Val in2 100 AuxHR AuxLR C i gt 4 lt Xx in2 Figure 9 2 Cascade Trim Mode Software Versions Earlier Than V4 0 9 4 1 Cascade Parameters prior to April 2001 Table Number These parameters allow you to autotune the loop LPx setup 9 4 1 Cascade Page Disable CSD Cascade disable status It is sometimes useful to disable cascade when starting a process This also returns the controller to dd loop control using the local CSD FF Value Cascade feedforward value i e The Range of signal being fed value being fed forward forward CSD FF Trim Lim Cascade feedforward trim limit i e Range of slave loop The amount the master output can be trimmed up and down The above three parameters only appear if FF Type None 118 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Ha
399. or timer 3 Timer 4 Page Parameters to set the time period and read elapsed time for timer 4 Clock Page To set time and day Alarm 1 Page Parameters to set a time and day alarm and read the alarm output condition for alarm 1 Alarm 2 Page Parameters to set a time and day alarm and read the alarm output condition for alarm 2 Totaliser1 Parameters to read the totalised value set and monitor an alarm on Page totalised value Totaliser2 Parameters to read the totalised value set and monitor an a Page totalised value Totaliser3 Parameters to read the totalised value set and monitor an a Page totalised value Totaliser4 Parameters to read the totalised value set and monitor an a Page totalised value Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 215 Engineering Handbook 15 2 TIMER TYPES 2704 Controller Each timer block can be configured to operate in four different modes These modes are explained below 15 2 1 On Pulse Timer Mode This timer is used to generate a fixed length pulse from an edge trigger e The output is set to On when the input changes from Off to On e The output remains On until the time has elapsed e Ifthe Trigger input parameter recurs while the Output is On the Elapsed Time will reset to zero and the Output will remain On e The triggered variable will follow the state of the output Figure 15 1 illustrates the behaviour of the timer under different input conditions 216 Input
400. orm Function code 3 Read Output Registers allows the binary contents of holding registers to be obtained from the addressed slave Function code 4 Read Input Registers obtains the contents from input registers of the addressed slave For the 2000 range of controllers either function code can be used For other slaves refer to the manufacturers documentation 270 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 MASTER COMMS Access Level Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook Table Number These parameters configure the characteristics of the slaves MASTER COMMS 21 7b Slave1 to 8 Page The modbus address of the slave 0 to 254 ERR Resolution To set resolution configured in the Full Full slave to Full or Integer Integer Timeout msecs Time to wait for a response from a slave 20 to 2000 100mS Retries Number of times to retry before the 1 to 100 1 status goes to Timed Out Status Offline and Online are user selectable Offline If the transaction is not completed in Online the time set by the Timeout parameter Timed Out in the specified number of Retries the message Timeout will be displayed Recovering The message Recovering appears fleetingly Block Write Set to the maximum block size Oto 100 supported by the slave For IEEE this must be set to gt 0 see also section 21 8 1 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 271 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 21 8 ADDITIONAL NOTES 21 8 1 IEEE in 2000 Ser
401. osen from user text Page Name Section 1 Name Section 2 Name Section 3 Name Bar graph parameters i I i i ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC ABC 13 XXXXX 14 XXXXX 15 XXXXX 17 XXXXX 18 XXXXX ABC Parameter name from user text or default 7 ABC 8 ABC ABc io ABc 1 ABC 12 aBc text truncated Scroll List FC Up to 10 parameters can be promoted to the scroll list Figure 17 4 Triple Loop User Page 2 17 2 5 Status Grid User Page Page name can be chosen from user text Page Name Scroll List Up to 10 parameters can be promoted to the scroll list Figure 17 5 Status Grid User Page 2704 Controller Section Names are chosen from user text The position of each parameter is fixed and dictated by its number indicated next to the parameter The position of each parameter is fixed and dictated by its number indicated next to the parameter The position of the parameters depends upon the number of configured parameters and the status indicators are resized as indicated below This allows the display of more characters in each status indicator Up to 12 may be configured in this page Name Name Name 1 2 3 Name Name Nmae 4 5 6 Figure 17 6 Status Indicators for 4 6 and 12 Parameters 236 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 17 2 6 Bar Graph Page name can be chosen from user text Page Name T
402. oted at 0 to 50 C unless otherwise stated 31 1 ALL ANALOGUE DUAL AND PV INPUTS Sample rate 9Hz 110msec Input filtering OFF to 999 9 seconds of filter time constant f t c Default setting is 0 4 seconds unless stated otherwise User calibration Both the user calibration and a transducer scaling can be applied Sensor break a c sensor break on each input i e fast responding and no dc errors with high impedance sources Thermocouple types Most linearisations including K J T R B S N L PII C D E with linearisation error lt 0 2 C General Resolution noise free is quoted as a typical figure with f t c set to the default value 0 4 second Resolution generally improves by a factor of two with every quadrupling of f t c Calibration is quoted as offset error percentage error of absolute reading at ambient temperature of 25 C Drift is quoted as extra offset and absolute reading errors per degree of ambient change from 25 C 31 2 PRECISION PV INPUT MODULE Allocation One standard and up to two additional PV input modules can be fitted in I O slots 3 and 6 Isolation Fully isolated from the rest of the instrument mV input Two ranges 40mV amp 80mV used for thermocouple linear mV source or 0 20mA with 2 490 Calibration 1 5yV 0 05 of reading Resolution 0 5uV for 40mV range amp 1pV for 80mV range Drift x 0 05uV 0 003 of absolute reading per C Input impedance gt 100MQ Leakage 1nA 0 2V in
403. ower output The control output is characterised to compensate for the non linear effect of the cooling medium oil water and blown air Typically used in extrusion processes When the programmer is running this parameter determines from which setpoint profile the loop obtains its setpoint If None is selected this parameter can be soft wired 5 Deriv Type Derivative on PV Derivative on Error 6 FF Type defines that derivative action responds to changes to PV only defines that derivative action responds to changes to differences between SP and PV Feedforward control is used typically to overcome time delays or to compensate for the effect of external influences such as control signals from other loops in the process This is added directly to the output of the PID algorithm before output limiting and dual output conversions are performed Trim Limit applied to the PID calculated output is possible when Feedforward is enabled 136 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 7 Force Manual Mode Force Manual Mode allows you to select how the loop behaves on auto manual transfer Off Transfer between auto manual auto takes place bumplessly Track Transfer from auto to manual the output reverts to the previous manual value Transfer from manual to auto takes place bumplessly Step Transfer from auto to manual the output goes to a pre set value This value is set by the parameter Forced OP
404. possible to use module PL with Pt100 in order to obtain 0 5mK input resolution but then the maximum measurable temperature would be reduced to less than 50 C Table Number This page allows you to set the parameters for 4 Wire PT100 or PT25 MODULE IO Module 3 23 3 12 Modules or A Page These module can only be fitted in slots 3 or 6 Parameter Name Parameter Description Default Ident Module identification 4W PT100 or R O AW PT25 Resolution Display resolution XXXXX to XX XXX Conf X XXXX or SCI SBrk Impedance Sensor break enable Off Off Conf See section 22 3 3 a c type i e no errors Low High SBrk fallback Sensor break fallback Off Off Conf Down scale Up Scale Filter Time Input filter time Off to 0 00 01 4 0 10 00 0 6 Electrical Val The current electrical value of the input Input Reading R O L3 units in Ohms Module 3A or 6 The current value in engineering units R O Module 3 6 A can be user defined text Offset To apply a simple offset over the whole Display range L3 input range Module Status Module status OK or R O See Appendix D message SBrk Trip Imp Sensor break R O of the threshold impedance that sets SB Channel Name User defined name for the channel Select Default Conf from User Text Page Section 7 2 6 Text This module has a single input Its parameters are displayed under channel A Note1 Input Linearisation J Type K Type L Type R Type B Type N Type T Type S Type Platin
405. pter 13 1 ZIRCONIA Options Page Zirc SAlm Sooting Alarm PROBE 11068 Humid RH Humid DwP DI8 Val DI E1 Val 376 Relative Humidity Status of digital input 8 Status of IO expander inputs 11105 11106 11313 Chapter 13 4 HUMIDITY Options Page Chapter 22 STANDARD IO Diagnostic Page Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Parameter Description 1Alm OP 2Alm O 3Alm OP 4Alm OP 5Alm OP x IP1 x IP2 x IP3 x IP4 x IP5 x IP6 x IP7 x IP8 x IP9 OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE OE O Ex L1Alm1 OP Loop alarm 1 outpu u t IO expander input 1 IO expander input 2 IO expander input 3 IO expander input 6 IO expander input 7 IO expander input 8 IO expander input 5 IO expander input 10 32 2 PARAMETER UNITS PSP Units are None C F K V mV A mA Refer To Section Chapter 10 ALARMS LP1 Page LP1 Page LP2 Page LP2 Page LP3 Page LP3 Page User 1 Page User 2 Page User 3 Page User 4 Page User 5 Page User 6 Page User 7 Page User 8 Page Summary Page Engineering Handbook Modbus Address 11592 PH mmHg psi bar mbar RH mmWG inWG inWW Ohms PSIG 02 PPM CO2 CP sec OC F K rel Custom 1 Custom 2 Custom 3 Custom 4 Custom 5 Custom 6 sec min hrs 32 3 MODULE STATUS MESSAGES OK Initialising Ch A SBreak Ch C SBreak Ch A Out Range Ch C Out Range Ch A IP Sat
406. put 1 4V to 2V used for zirconia Calibration 0 5mV 0 05 of reading Resolution 60V Drift 0 05mV 0 003 of reading per C Input impedance gt 100MQ Leakage lt 1nA 0 10V input 3V to 10V used for voltage input Calibration 0 5mV 0 196 of reading Resolution 180yV Drift x 0 1mV 0 01 of reading per C Input impedance 0 66MO Pt100 input 0 to 400ohms 200 C to 850 C 3 matched wires up to 22Q in each lead without errors Calibration 0 1 C 0 04 of reading in C Resolution 0 02 C Drift lt 0 006 C 0 002 of absolute reading in C per C Bulb current 0 2mA Thermocouple Internal compensation CJC rejection ratio gt 40 1 typical CJ Temperature calibration error at 25 C lt 0 5 C 0 C 45 C and 50 C external compensation available Zirconia probes Most probes supported Continuous monitoring of probe impedance 100Q to 100KQ Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 365 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 31 3 DUAL PROBE INPUT MODULE General The same specification as for the Precision PV Input module applies with the exception of the following Module offers two sensor transmitter inputs which share the same negative input terminal One low level mV 0 20mA thermocouple Pt100 and one high level 0 2Vdc 0 10Vdc can be connected Isolation The two inputs are isolated from the rest of the instrument but not from each other Sample rate 4 5Hz 220msec of each input In
407. put filtering Default setting is 0 8 seconds 31 4 ANALOGUE INPUT No of inputs One fixed Not isolated Can be used with either floating or ground referenced transducers of low impedance see Isolation Input range 10V to 10V linear or 0 20 mA with burden resistor of 1000 Calibration 1 5mV 0 196 of reading Resolution 0 9mV Drift lt 0 1mV 0 006 of reading per C Input Impedance 0 46MQ floating input 0 23MQ ground referenced input Isolation Not isolated from standard digital I O Differential type input with common mode range of 42Vdc the average voltage of the two inputs with respect to Screen or Common terminals should be within 42Vdc CMRR 110dB at 50 60Hz 80dB at DC Functions Process variable remote setpoint power limit feedforward etc 31 5 ANALOGUE INPUT MODULE Allocation Up to 4 analogue input modules can be fitted in I O slots 1 3 4 amp 6 Isolation Fully isolated from the rest of the instrument mV input 100mV range used for thermocouple linear mV source or 0 20mA with 2 49 external burden resistor Calibration 10uV 0 2 of reading Resolution 6uV Drift lt 0 2uV 0 004 of reading per C Input impedance gt 10MQ Leakage lt 10nA 0 2Vdc input 0 2V to 2 0V range used for zirconia Calibration 2mV 0 2 of reading Resolution 30V Drift lt 0 1mV 0 004 of reading per C Input impedance gt 10MQ Leakage lt 20nA 0 10Vdc inpu
408. put relay 1 is Off to 9999 9 L3 configured as on off It sets the difference between relay on and relay off Ch1 Min Pulse Output minimum on time on off L3 control The above three parameters are repeated for channel 2 Deadband Deadband between ch1 and ch2 Off to 100 0 L3 On Off control Only applies if both ch1 and ch2 only are configured Target OP Target output power 100 to 100 wWihn n Rem Lo OP Lim Remote low power limit 100 to 100 j L3 Rem Hi OP Lim Remote high power limit 100 to 100 feedforward Yes mae Tampa SSCS Ena Aux OP Trk Auxiliary Output track enable Ee l Yes Aux OP Track Auxiliary Track input Display range r r r r r r 148 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 11 7 MOTORISED VALVE CONTROL The 2704 controller can be used for motorised valve control as an alternative to the standard PID control algorithm This algorithm is designed specifically for positioning motorised valves It operates in boundless or bounded mode as configured by the Control Type parameter in section 11 1 1 Boundless VP control does not require a position feedback potentiometer for control purposes Bounded VP control requires a feedback potentiometer as part of the control algorithm Note however that a potentiometer may be used with boundless mode but it is used solely for indication of the valve position and is not used as part of the control algorithm The cont
409. put when compared to a known input source Transducer scaling is often performed as a routine operation on a machine to take out system errors In the case of a load cell for example it may be necessary to zero the scale when a load is removed Transducer scaling can be applied to any input or derived input i e the PV Input Analogue Input or Modules 1 3 4 5 or 6 In practice however it is unlikely that transducer scaling would be required on every input and so the 2704 controller includes three transducer calibration function blocks These can be wired in configuration level to any three of the above inputs Four types of calibration are explained in this chapter 1 Shunt Calibration 2 Load Cell Calibration 3 Comparison Calibration 4 Auto tare 24 2 SHUNT CALIBRATION Shunt calibration is so called since it refers to switching a calibration resistor across one arm of the four wire measurement bridge in a strain gauge transducer It also requires the use of a Transducer Power Supply The strain gauge transducer is calibrated as follows 1 Remove any load from the transducer to establish a zero reference 2 Enter Scale Low and Scale High values which are normally set at 0 and 80 of the span of the transducer 3 Start the procedure using the low point calibration parameter Start Pnt1 Cal or a digital input wired to this parameter The controller will automatically perform the following sequence 1
410. r 6 Access Levels If modules have been added removed or changed it is recommended that this is recorded on the instrument code label I O Module Typical usage H W Code Connections and examples of use Note The order code and terminal number is pre fixed by the module number Module 1 is connected to terminals 1A 1B 1C 1D module 3 to 3A 3B 3C 3D etc Relay 2 pin and Dual Relay max 264Vac 2A min 12V 100mA Change Over Relay max 264Vac 2A min 12V 10mA Isolated Single Logic Output 18Vdc at 24mA max Triple Logic Output 18Vdc at 8mA max per channel Heating cooling alarm program event valve raise valve lower Heating cooling alarm program event valve raise valve lower Heating Cooling Program events Heating cooling program events R2 and RR R4 L TP Part No HA026933 Issue7 0 Nov 12 Contactor Relay Panel lamp etc Voltage Contactor Relay Panel lamp etc supply First relay A ay AU B C 4 D Second relay relay only dua Contactor Relay Panel lamp etc C9 Voltage E supply G SSR or thyristor unit d Output A tf Common
411. r only requires 3909 erminating resistors C9 HF Dig Ground Figure 2 15 Profibus Wiring Connections Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 25 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 2 6 2 DeviceNets Wiring This section covers the DeviceNet digital communications option To configure DeviceNet communications refer to the DeviceNet Handbook Part No HA027506 2 6 2 1 DeviceNet Terminal Functions Terminal CAN Color Description Reference Label Chip HA V DeviceNet network power positive terminal Connect the red wire of the DeviceNet cable here If the DeviceNet network does not supply the power connect to the positive terminal of an external 11 25 Vdc power supply HB CAN_H White DeviceNet CAN_H data bus terminal Connect the white wire of the DeviceNet cable here HC SHIELD None Shield Drain wire connection Connect the DeviceNet cable shield here To prevent ground loops the DeviceNet network should be grounded in only one location HD CAN_L Blue DeviceNet CAN_L data bus terminal Connect the blue wire of the DeviceNet cable here HE V Black DeviceNet network power negative terminal Connect the black wire of the DeviceNet cable here If the DeviceNet network does not supply the power connect to the negative terminal of an external 11 25 Vdc power supply Power taps are recommended to connect the DC power supply to the DeviceNet trunk line Power taps include A Schottky Diode to conn
412. r the appropriate module up to a typical measuring temperature of 800 C will permit the cable resistance limit to increase to 600 and 189 per cable respectively Resistance of any connecting wire within specified limit does not contribute to reading errors 27 5 6 4 Detaching RTD Sensor With Instrument Powered ON All inputs available in the instrument are primarily designed to remain wired to their appropriate input sensors while the instrument is powered on However disconnecting and re connecting any input with the instrument on is possible but a temporary reduction in reading accuracy should be expected The error magnitude and its recovery time to within specified limits are input type specific and depend on the length of time the input was disconnected as well as the way in which is was disconnected or re connected The 4 wire RTD input will stabilise recover to the specified limits within 5 minutes of re connecting the input provided that e The terminal A which sources the sense current is disconnected first and re connected last i e B C and D are connected to the RTD sensor before connecting A terminal e The B C and D inputs are not disconnected for more than two hours e No static discharge between B C and D terminals has just occurred i e static precautions should be observed e No external source of more than 200mV was applied between the above three terminals Otherwise recovery may take up to a few hours 27 6 TO
413. ram will be held until the process catches up When a profile is placed into holdback the other profiles are normally not held They continue and rendezvous at the end of the segment Each segment may consist of up to three profiles Two levels of holdback value course and fine may be applied for each profile of each segment in the PROGRAM EDIT Program page Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 79 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 8 7 PROGRAM USER VALUES Program User Values provide multiplexor facilities for the user Each user value provides storage for a number of event values currently 127 Each user value will normally be soft wired see Chapter 5 to call up another feature The following example shows how the programmer user values may be used to call up different sets of pre configured digital output values for different segments in a programmer This would make use of the Pattern Generator described in Chapter 16 and assumes that a user value has been wired to a Pattern Generator Program Segment 1 Program Segment 2 Program Segment 3 Program Segment x User Value 1 User Value 1 User Value 1 User Value 1 Value 1 Value 6 Value 11 Value 15 Pattern Generator Pattern Generator Pattern Generator output Pattern Generator output output 1 output 6 11 15 In each segment a different pattern of digital outputs is set up from the single value set in the User Value for each segment 8 7 1 Program User Value Enumerations Each p
414. rammer A sequence of eight Off and On times may be set for the output and up to four Digital Programs can be set Figure 9 1 shows an example of a timed digital output program On 1 On2 On3 On4 On8 Off1 Off2 Off 3 Off 8 On Off Step Time On 1 1 00 00 0 Off 1 0 30 00 0 On 2 0 05 00 0 Off 2 0 30 00 0 On 3 1 00 00 0 Off 3 0 25 00 0 On 4 0 10 00 0 Off 4 0 00 00 0 On5 0 00 00 0 Off 5 0 00 00 0 On 6 0 00 00 0 Off 7 0 00 00 0 On8 1 10 00 0 Off 8 0 40 00 0 Time Figure 9 1 An Example of a Programmed Digital Output Description On starting the sequence the output will be ON for 1 hour The output switches OFF for 30 minutes The output switches ON for 5 minutes The output switches OFF for 30 minutes The output switches ON for 1 hour The output switches OFF for 25 minutes The output switches ON for 10 minutes The step is omitted for any time set to zero The output switches ON for 1 hour 10 minutes The output switches OFF for 40 minutes and is then reset to the start of the sequence The sequence may be run by 1 Setting the Prog Status parameter to Run 2 Wiring the Run Hold Src to a A digital input controlled an external source such as a push button b A programmer User Value Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 115 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 9 2 TO EDIT THE DIGITAL PROGRAMMER Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display pre
415. rature sensor shield retener treten tint trier ree thee 364 Installation requirements for EMC tege eger i ener Pete ep e te E ERE Ee etin 364 PRO URI OP WIS X 365 APPENDIX C TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION scsssssssssssscssssessssssssscsscssscssssssssessseseees 365 all analogue dualand pvilnpUtss ai ade aes doe tan tht eee eite i te tara tees atte eene id 365 Precision PV input Module esee ede dee endo odiodod od deo eitis nd 365 dual probe input module oer cian stains E ONEEN NEE NENEVE URBAN VENEEN ERYE Reges 366 AMalOGUe IM pUtsectae vias m 366 analogue INPUT TMOG US teat atvecd remped pRHORIEID ERREUR E 366 Standardidigital Ves cae a ees ss Gee Gs es ca a va oa aba a re rats ese OS ese Ne RM RD 367 Digitalinp timodules m ocsse ssa chess teses dest enebeees enesdvehesasevesdoetevescoysdesseves dvsndves quee quete tele libe 367 Digital outputimodules E eerie ombre terrere 367 Analogue output Modules ssc ca ie teat te i ies cote UB OTHER ERI 367 Transiter P Dj sicuro ta Patani ne E VU OE EU ote Rote sheet Ure hort n p o ge dup os do anny avast een 367 Transducer PSUs 4 er re ere nase cep Pe De Dent ee pe atin he Re e ERRAT Ro ERE EE ER P Ro RR a 367 Dual DC Outputs PUPPI M S 368 high resolution DC Otput i coeno PePUPREERPEROO OUT ERROR 368 Fotentiometer InpUt gea egi qq adn Hr p PER tt lr te edt re 368 FDS module 8 83 81 B EHE REFER ERR E P HEU OE repr
416. rc Rt Lim Src Rt Lim Hld Src Prog SP Src PID Set Src RemSchedIP Power FF Src Track Enab S Track Src Ext FBack Src Prop Band S Integral Src Derivative Src Aux Prop Sr Aux Integral Aux Derivati 138 These parameters allow you to soft wire between function blocks Parameter Description Process variable source Target OP power source OP rate limit enable source OP rate limit source Freeze control flag source Integral hold flag source Auto manual select source Pot position source Remote feedforward source Remote high power limit source Remote low power limit src Remote setpoint enable source Remote setpoint source Internal setpoint select src Setpoint 1 source Setpoint 2 source SP rate limit disable src SP rate limit src SP rate limit hold source LP1 PSP wire source PID Set Source Remote scheduling input source Power feedforward source OP track enable source Track output source External feedback source Proportional band source Integral term source Derivative term source Auxiliary loop proportional band source Auxiliary loop integral term source Auxiliary loop derivative term source LP1 SETUP Wiring Page n Modbus add Modbus add Modbus add Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 11 3 SETPOINT DEFINITION The controller setpoint is the Working Setpoint which may be sourced from a number of alternatives This is the value ultima
417. re not used user defined text Cal state Allows the module to be Idle p Conf R O L3 R O L3 calibrated Cal Low Confirm Go Now Trim O P Accept Cal High Restore Factory Save Cal Trim Output calibration trim Conf Only appears when Cal State Now Trim O P 298 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 23 3 15 High Resolution Retransmission Output This module order code HR can be fitted in slots 1 4 and 5 with a maximum of three in any single controller It contains two output channels The first channel provides a high resolution 15 bit 4 20mA or 0 10Vdc retransmission signal The second provides 24Vdc 20 to 30Vdc transmitter supply The module provides full 240Vac isolation This unit has been designed for use as a conditioning circuit for complex passive sensors transducers such as may be found in a carbon potential control system The high resolution is achieved in feedback mode using a PID control loop The retransmission variable provides the setpoint for the PID loop The output from the module provides the PV input to the loop which corrects for any variations in the output signal Retransmission Variable 1 peu A wy e tt 4 ti Txdcr 0 100 HiRes Output un Scaling 4 20mA bd a block i 2L vi M ise PID Loop Panel Burden resistor SP ground 2 490 to 10000 0 196 Precision PV Input mA PV p 0 100
418. reak Value ou eects FIXED RELAY OUTPUT s TO SCALE THE FIXED RELAY OUTPUT ree rhe eren nr ier a ideae 278 THE FIXED RELAY OUTPUT PARAMETERS iter P eee sesta kae N ee dL eve EESE eene Ente 280 Standard IO AA Relay Parameters STANDARD IO DIG I OPARAMETERS ss Standard Digital 1O Parareters ot ir eter te d e XR RR T EE AEE EEEE EE TEETE EEE STANDARD IO DIAGNOSTIC PARAMETERS esee ener enne nne nnenr enne erret 283 Standard IO Diagnostic Parameters Table sse tenete 283 CHAPTER 23 MODULE IO cirean einen eene eene een see coueentecobertiedeeteetesedertdeseseretesesee 284 WHATISIM ODULE IO tas 2 det t ice en t RO RR ESRB ORI 284 MODUBEJADEN TIEICATIGO NS 2 1 37 2 th cche eget egets tente certet eret rr eIE Ferne ee Re POI coat RAAE eee pde 285 Iderits Page iusiduteagedus MODULE IO PARAMETERS Hs DG Control and DC Retransmissioti eere tee te rea tee eter der EG ee pe 286 Relay OUtp t docere bene ote ex aee e D RODEO ND ION D IR cgay esas sve UA ERR I BE EG CR EES 287 Triac OUtp Ut te eto etel ie RS Triple Logic Output and Single Isolated Logic Output Triple Logic and Triple Contact Input ee eg Transmitter Power Supply ierit iter ibi er mer ie bi ebrei recta d ER eb evens sesssadibiebassatbeneed 290 Transducer Power Supply ceret ete PH REI ER PEREAT ERE FEIER REIS ETVME LI EI Ke LL Ier tere let 290 Potentiometer Input 291 PV Inp t cite 291 DC Inpu
419. red SBrk Trip Imp parameter in for HZ Volts input type using Standard PV Input PV Input Module and Dual PV Input module Please note that the relationship is not linear particularly above 30 of the parameter value on High setting Also that the SBrk reading has a large manufacturing spread and is not factory calibrated It is recommended therefore that the SBrk Trip Imp is calibrated against a known resistor in the range 50 to 100kQ SBrk Trip Imp parameter value for SBrk Impedance High A i Td i Ha Spread E 10096 L 2 2 2 2 2 2224L22 e 222 SBrk Trip Imp 9 High setti parameter value for SENE SESS SBrk Impedance l Low Le l A 96 mmm we 4 Ue etea ere i Mee 100 dd Zu Note Onlythis l region is linear 50 l l am 100KQ 500KQ Sensor Probe Impedance in Q Figure 23 13 Relationship between sensor impedance and measured impedance 314 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 23 6 3 1 Implementation This example assumes the Zirconia inputs is connected to the Dual PV Input module Mod 3 Analogue Operator 2 acts as a scalar to convert 96 to a calibrated value of impedance User Value 1 is used as a convenient way to calibrate the sensor break value against a known resistor Since the signal can be noisey Analogue Operator 1 acts as a simple filter Input 1
420. risation curve 6 Press or Y to choose the Ensure that Rear Term Temp is linearisation curve for the thermocouple set to Auto If not it will be in use Aen necessary to accurately measure the temperature at the rear terminals and set this value accordingly 7 Press until the parameter Cal State is displayed Cal State Idle A v C JC 3sec A 2 8 Press or to choose CJC Cal State CJC y Press to Go Then Accept and Save to User as described in Section 27 3 1 steps 10 and 14 27 3 3 Voltage Calibration The procedure is identical to mV calibration with the exception that the low calibration point is OV and the high point is 8V Note The voltage input terminals are VH and V as detailed in the User Guide 27 3 4 High Z Voltage Calibration The procedure is identical to mV calibration with the exception that the low calibration point is OV and the high point is 1V Note The voltage input terminals are VH and V as detailed in the User Guide Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 333 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 27 3 5 3 Wire RTD Calibration The two points at which RTD is calibrated are 150 000 and 400 000 Before starting RTD calibration e A decade box with total resistance lower than 1K must be connected in place of RTD as indicated on the connection diagram before the instrument is powered up If at any instant the instrument was powered up without this connection then
421. rm or uum 23 59 59 222 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 15 6 TOTALISERS There are four totaliser function blocks which are used to measure the total quantity of a measurement integrated over time A totaliser can by soft wiring be connected to any measured value The outputs from the totaliser are its integrated value and an alarm state The user may set a setpoint which causes the alarm to activate once the integration exceeds the setpoint The totaliser has the following attributes 1 Run Hold Reset In Run the totaliser will integrate its input and continuously test against an alarm setpoint In Hold the totaliser will stop integrating its input but will continue to test for alarm conditions In Reset the totaliser will be zeroed and alarms will be reset 2 Alarm Setpoint If the setpoint is a positive number the alarm will activate when the total is greater than the setpoint If the setpoint is a negative number the alarm will activate when the total is lower more negative than the setpoint If the totaliser alarm setpoint is set to 0 0 the alarm will be off It will not detect values above or below The alarm output is a single state output It may be cleared by resetting the totaliser or by changing the alarm setpoint 3 The total is limited to a maximum of 99999 and a minimum of 9999 15 6 1 Totaliser Parameters Table Number This page allows you to set up Totaliser P
422. rmally open so that the potential on the top two lines is 5V high with respect to the bottom two lines This high signal is seen by all inputs connected to the network and is interpreted as Bottom Blowdown enable Closing any switch causes the top two lines to be shorted to the bottom two lines resulting in a low signal interpreted as Busy Bottm Blowdown disable This is only the case if three conditions are met 1 The wires form an unbroken link chain 2 The controller signaling Busy is fully connected to the network 3 The controllers receiving Busy are also connected to the network Providing that the network is complete any controller can short the network and verify that it has done so via its own input Network checking is carried out at the start of each blowdown sequence in this way to ensure that the controller is correctly connected to the network If the controller detects an error with the network an alarm will be activated and the network state shown 356 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 28 5 3 Blowdown Sequence When the blowdown time is reached the following sequence takes place Bldown State will change from BB Wait to Check Network for only a few seconds At this point the controller switches the network between high and low states This is to determine if any other controller is blowing down at the same time a Assuming no other controller
423. rogram user value may be allocated a name chosen from the User Text library see section 0 This means that a name can be allocated to Value 1 to Value x in the above table and can be used to describe the functions carried out in each segment For example if User Value 1 is called Carburise the Pattern Generator will set the digital pattern required for carburising and this message can be made to appear in the PATTERN GEN Dig Group x page during that segment Section 16 6 shows an example which shows how to apply an Enumeration to a Programmer User Value 8 8 EXTERNAL PROGRAM INPUTS Digital inputs may have been configured to allow the program to be operated by external sources Run Allows the program to be run from a pushbutton or other event Hold Allows the program to be held from a switch or other event Reset Allows the program to be reset from a pushbutton or other event Run Hold Allows the program to be run or held from a single external source Run Reset Allows the program to be run or reset from a single external source Advance Segment Selects the next segment from an external source Advance Program Selects the next program from an external source When this event occurs the controller display will change to programmer view Subsequent changes of this source will cause the program number to increment Holdback disabled Disables holdback from an external source 8 9 PROFILE LOCK Profile Lock is a configuration parame
424. rol is performed by delivering a raise pulse a lower pulse or no pulse at all in response to the control demand signal via raise and lower relay or triac outputs 11 7 1 Motor Parameters Table Number This list allows you to set up the motor interface parameters for a valve LP1 SETUP 11 7 1 positioning output Motor Page This page only appears if a motor valve positioning output is configured See Section 11 1 1 Control Type 3 Travel Time This parameter is set to match the 0 00 00 1 0 01 00 0 L time taken for the motor to travel from fully closed to fully open Inertia This parameter is set to match the Off to 0 00 00 1 0 00 20 0 L3 inertia if any of the motor 3 Backlash This parameter compensates for Off to 0 00 00 1 0 00 20 0 any backlash which may exist in the linkages Min Pulse Time Sets the minimum on time of the Auto to 0 00 00 1 Auto L3 signal which drives the motor 0 00 00 2 VP Pot Lo Lim Adjusts the valve position low limit 0 to 100 0 L3 in bounded mode set by the potentiometer VP Pot Hi Lim Adjusts the valve position high limit 0 to 100 100 in bounded mode set by the potentiometer VP SBrk OP Sets the action of the valve in VP Pos Lo to boundless mode VP Pos Hi Only appears in boundless mode i e Control Type VP Ch1 Only VP SBrk Action Sets the action of the valve if the Rest potentiometer becomes Up disconnected in bounded mode D own Indicates the position of the valve
425. roller 3 1 2 Status Messages Messages appear on the display to show the current status of the controller Table 3 1 below describes these messages LP1 LP2 LP3 Indicates which loop is being viewed LP7 LP2 LP3 may be user defined names All user defined names are shown in ta ics throughout this manual P01 to 50 Indicates which program is in use and its current status P01 to P50 can be followed by a user defined name AUT The selected loop is in automatic closed loop control MAN The selected loop is in manual open loop control SP1 SP2 Indicates where the SP is derived i e Setpoint 1 Setpoint 2 Programmer Remote PO1 to POSO REM CSD Indicates that the loop is in cascade O Indicates that the loop is in override VR RAT Indicates that the loop is in ratio Ratio must be enabled from the parameter list at the bottom of the display E Indicates a program is activated Indicates a program is held at its current levels E Indicates a program is in reset condition i e not running When an alarm occurs an alarm symbol flashes in the header banner When the alarm is acknowledged but is still active the symbol will be permanently lit When the alarm is acknowledged but is no longer active the symbol will disappear See Chapter 10 Alarm Operation for further details UNITS The process units are displayed in the right hand side of the banner This symbol will flash in the right hand side of the banner in place
426. rollers will in general provide stable straight line control but with an offset corresponding to the point at which the output power equals the heat loss from the system 11 4 2 Integral Term The integral term removes steady state control offset by ramping the output up or down in proportion to the amplitude and duration of the error signal The ramp rate reset rate is the integral time constant and must be longer than the time constant of the process to avoid oscillations 11 4 3 Derivative Term The derivative term is proportional to the rate of change of the temperature or process value It is used to prevent overshoot and undershoot of the setpoint by introducing an anticipatory action The derivative term has another beneficial effect If the process value falls rapidly due for example an oven door being opened during operation and a wide proportional band is set the response of a PI controller can be quite slow The derivative term modifies the proportional band according to this rate of change having the effect of narrowing the proportional band Derivative action therefore improves the recovery time of a process automatically when the process value changes rapidly Derivative can be calculated on change of PV or change of Error For applications such as furnace control it is common practice to select Derivative on PV to prevent thermal shock caused by a sudden change of output following a change in setpoint 11 4 4 High and Low
427. ror message displays a message showing the state of the controller The error messages are shown in Note 1 The diagnostic parameters are listed below 26 1 1 Diagnostics Parameters Table Number This page allows you to inspect diagnostic information DIAGNOSTICS 26 1 1 Parameter Name Parameter Description Default Error Count Number of errors recorded Read only Error 1 Error 2 Error 3 Error 4 di ors Historical errors where 1 is the most recent Ho Error 6 Error 7 Error 8 Read only 7 CPU Free A measure of the loading on the CPU Yes ae T Con Task Ticks UI Task 1 Ticks A measure of the activity of the algorithm Read only UI Task 2 Ticks TE HEN a Clear Err Log Error log reset Power FF Power feedback Read on Measures the supply voltage to the controller Power Failures A count of the number of power failures 328 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Note 1 Possible error messages OK Bad Ident Bad Fact Cal Module Changed DFC1 Error DFC2 Error DFC3 Error Module N A CBC Comms Error Cal Store Error CBC Cal Error Bad PV Input Bad Mod3 Input Bad Mod4 Input Bad Mod Input Bad An Input Bad NVOL Check Bad X Board Bad Res Ident Bad SPI SemRel Bad CW EETrans Bad Prog Data Bad Prog Csum SegPool Over Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 Engineering Handbook SPI Locked SPI Queue Full HighP Lockout Pro Mem Full Invalid Seg Program Full Invalid Pro
428. rotocol EI Bisynch Modbus Profibus Devicenet pO po fea ROM Size ROM Size eg 512K Word RAM Size RAM Size eg 128K Bytes NVOL Size Non Volatile memory size eg 128K Bytes 60 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 7 2 3 INSTRUMENT Units Page Engineering Handbook INSTRUMENT Table Number These parameters allow you to configure instrument units 7 2 3 Units Page Temp Units Temperature Units None Conf oC oF oK Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default Access Level Press C to select Custom Units 2 An index of customised 7 2 4 INSTRUMENT Display Page Table Number These parameters allow you to configure the 7 244 display Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Press C to select INSTRUMENT Display Page Default Access Level 01 Usr01 to 100 Usr100 Startup Text 1 Text which may be used to override the default message Startup Text 2 Up to 100 text strings are available Home Page Defines which page is displayed in the lower readout after initialisation2 Home Timeout To set a timeout for the display to return to the Home page All Loops Name All loops summary page name Disable Keys Yes will disable all front panel buttons when in operation levels Function Key 1 Function key 1 is Auto Manual Auto Manual or disabled Disabled Function Key 2 Function key 2 is Loop View Loop Select key or disabled Disabled Run Hold Disabled 01 Usr01 to 100 Usr100 Non
429. rs For example Loops can be given names which are more meaningful to the user such as Zone 1 Level Controller etc To use a customised name go to the relevant page such as LPx SETUP Display page or MODULE IO Module x page Examples are given at the end of this chapter To enter User Text Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From the INSTRUMENT page Views are typical and may vary 0EM Lo depending upon options in any particular controller header press to display the L list of sub headers 2 Press or Y to select User Text 3 Press C to show sub headers BIENES ee If Disabled no further parameters are available 4 Press C to edit User Text 5 Press or Y to Enabled INSTRUMENT User Text SET e 6 Press to select Text Number Up to 100 Text Numbers are available 7 Press gr to choose the text number to be configured 8 Press Le to select Text Usrx is the default text which is replaced by the text of your a Y choice 9 Press or to set the first Up to 16 characters are under scored character of the available user text 10 Repeat 8 and 9 above to set every character in the required text 64 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 7 2 7 INSTRUMENT Summary Page These parameters allow you to configure a page consisting of a list of up to 10 parameters which
430. rt No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Do This A 5 Press to choose Cal Low 6 Press to choose Go 7 Press Lo to scroll to Cal Trim 8 Press 4 or Y to achieve the required output value read by the multimeter 1 00 Vdc or 2 00mA 9 Press and hold while pressing twice to return to Cal State 10 Press A to choose Accept 11 Press A to choose Cal High This Is The Display You Should See Now Calibrate at 10 Output 3 Sec Cal State Cal Low y Cal State Confirm 3 Sec Cal State Go S Cal State Now Trim O P Cal Trim 3 Sec A Cal State Go b Cal State Now Trim O P Cal State Idle Calibrate at 90 Output 3 Sec Cal State Cal High y Cal State Confirm 12 Repeat steps 6 to 10 to calibrate at 90 output 9 00Vdc or 18mA 3 Sec Cal State Accept ie Engineering Handbook Additional Notes 3 seconds after selecting Cal Low the confirm message will appear The other choice is Abort The adjustment is between 9999 and 9999 These numbers do not have units and are used for indication only You can also scroll forward using the button only This however means that you will need to scroll through all parameters in the list 3 seconds later the calibration is accepted At this point the calibration values are used by the controller They will however be lost when the power to the controller
431. rt No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 353 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller NOTES State will change to Confirm once the user has entered the data representing the manually acquired TDS Value in the correct units with options for Accept and Reject as long as the calibration was successful If the calibration was unsuccessful then the state will change to Failed with an option to reject The data entry parameter will only be available while the state machine is in these states This path is only taken if neither K Factor or Temp Coef are set to AUTO at least one of them needs to be set to AUTO to allow the calibration to function Once accept has been selected then the relevant parameter is set to AUTO by the software Once stop is selected the calibration state machine will change to Passed with options to accept or cancel as long as all is well If the TCF Cal has failed then it will change to a state indicating the error and giving an option only to Cancel If any of the Cancel selections are made then the calibration sequence is aborted and the status returned to Idle For these reasons the Calibration parameter is bi directional can be set by the user or by the software 28 4 4 6 Function Block Status Enumerations The following table describes each of the status enumerations i is we ot cali Invalid O P FALSE KASNE EN EE EE E S
432. rt of enumerated text Range of enumerations is defined by Low Lim and High Lim f Low lim 0 and High Lim 3 range 4 f Low lim 1 and High Lim 3 range 3 he starting point is unaffected 232 Set Switch Enum User Text 15 Start User Text 01 Rough Valve Open User Text 02 Rough Valve Closed User Text 03 Diff Pump Run User Text 04 Diff Valve open User Text 05 Chamber Temp User Text 06 Start Program User Text 07 Start User Text 08 Pre Heat User Text 09 Stabilise User Text 10 Heat Ramp User Text 11 Annealing User Text 12 Cool Ramp User Text 13 Complete User Text 14 Furnace 1 Part No HA026933 or Y button is pressed the Switch State will Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 16 6 1 3 Enumerated User Value Example This example enumerates User Value 1 with 1 decimal point resolution In USER VALUES User Val 1 page Set Resolution XXXX X section 16 3 Set Low Limit 0 0 for example Set High Limit 1 0 for example Set User Val Enum User Text 7 for example The User 1 Value will now switch between User Text 01 Rough Valve Open the next 10 user text values ie Start to User Text 02 Rough Valve Closed Complete corresponding to each 0 1 User Text 03 Diff Pump Run change in the User Value 1 User Text
433. s number is displayed as Pattern and may be given a name using the User Text feature described in section 7 2 6 This is known as a User Enumeration An example of an application for the Pattern Generator would be to allow fixed output patterns to be applied in different segments of a program This may be useful where the same pattern is repeated in different segments or in other programs It is achieved by soft wiring see Chapter 5 to the Pattern Src as shown in the example below The pattern generator consists of 16 patterns displayed as Pattern 0 to Pattern 15 Each pattern consists of up to 16 digital outputs and any two patterns displayed as Dig Group 1 and Dig Group 2 can be active at any one time Select Group using the parameter Pattern 0 Pattern or from a wireable source ENNEN Output Group dite Secale tt o ti ore cn 16 m EENE N E Pattern 16 Figure 16 1 Digital Pattern Generator 16 1 1 Example Programmer Event Outputs In this example Program User Values are used to select the output pattern The outputs of the pattern generator are wired to relay outputs of an IO Expander see also Chapter 25 When Program User Value 1 0 then the digital values of pattern 0 will be active When Program User Value 1 1 the digital values of pattern 1 will be active and so on The patterns can also be enumerated so that each can be assigned a name
434. s or to select MODULE IO Press to display the list of sub headers Press or Y to select Module 1A Press C to display the parameter list Press A or Y to scroll to Wire Src This Is The Display You Should See Select the wire source Menu Config PATTERN GEN Menu Config ADT LF1 SETUP TUF Copy the wire source Address 00013 Copied Value 0 0 Copied Select the wire destination Menu Config MALOGUE OFE PE MOARD I0 OOULE I0 DIRGH ANDARD I0 MODULE 10 MODULE IO Module 1H ENE 2704 Controller Additional Notes This selects the parameter to be wired from This display confirms that the parameter with Modbus address 00013 ie CH1 OP has been copied This display appears for as long as the A M button is depressed This is the parameter to be wired to Part No HA026933 Issue7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Do This Select button i i to paste the copied parameter ie 00013 to the Wire Src of Module 1A This button becomes a paste button in configuration mode This Is The Display You Should See Paste the wire HODULE IO Module 1A SBY Engineering Handbook Additional Notes The Loop Select button becomes a paste button in this mode Press L to confirm Press nj to cancel as instructed i As in the previous example the modbus address can be entered at stage 13 above
435. s used to control which Analogue Input is switched to the output of the up to Analogue Operator If the output from the logic operator is true input 1 is switched through to the Select Logic 32 output If false input 2 is switched through to the output See example below Logic This connection is made by input 1 selecting Select Logic 1 p AND g g Logic An input 2 input 1 Logic Op 1 An input 2 The output is An Select input 1 when logic Logic 1 input and logic input 2 are true An Op 1 248 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 18 2 TO CONFIGURE ANALOGUE OPERATORS Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press las many times as necessary to access 0 the page header menu usi VALU ERS 2 Press or Y to select ANALOGUE OPERS 3 Press to show Sub headers Us YALU 4 Press or Y to select An 1 BIC ERS A to 32 5 Press C to show the parameter ANALOGUE OPERS An i SETS The first parameter is list d Operation The choices are 6 Press or Y to scroll to the Off Add Subtract Multiply Divide Absolute Difference Select Max Select Min Hot e i Swap Sample Hold Square 7 Press to edit the parameter Root Log Ln Exp 10x Select Logic 1 to Select Logic 32 required parameter iesalution 8 Press 4 lor v value or state to change the
436. sducer and transmitter characteristics Default Passcode 3 View It is possible also to read the configuration of the controller at any level but the configuration Configuration cannot be changed Passcode 2704 Configuration Configuration of the controller allows you to set up the fundamental characteristics of the controller so that it can be made to match the requirements of the process Default Passcode 4 1 1 1 The Structure Of This Manual This chapter provides a general overview of the controller Chapter 2 describes installation and wiring Chapter 3 describes general operation in Operator levels Remaining chapters are associated with configuring the controller to specific applications and provide parameter tables with explanations of their meanings These chapters follow the order in which the features appear in the controller and the navigation diagram in section 3 3 12 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 1 2 WHAT IS 2704 The 2704 is a modular fully configurable high accuracy high stability temperature and process controller which is available in a ALL LOOPS single dual or three loop format 01 Final Bake It is supplied in accordance with an ordering code which can be found printed on a label on the side of the instrument case A description of the order code is given in Appendix A of this guide and should be checked with that shown on the label A 120 x 16
437. sent the beginning of the text area section 7 2 6 Configure the Text for the required message using the A or Y buttons to change the text and the button to move to the next character The full procedure for this is described in section 7 2 6 User Text 01 Rough Valve Open User Text 02 Rough Valve Closed User Text 03 Diff Pump Run UserText04 Diff Valve open This table shows an example of a text area User Text 05 Chamber Temp User Text 06 Start Program User Text 07 Start User Text 08 Pre Heat User Text09 Stabilise User Text 10 Heat Ramp User Text 11 Annealing User Text 12 Cool Ramp User Text 13 Complete 2 Set up a pointer which defines the start point from which the text is to be selected and the range of the user text as follows a Choose the parameter to be enumerated for example Pattern Enum in the PATTERN GEN Dig Group 1 page b Define the range of the user text c Choose the start point from which the user text is to be taken Using the table below this user Text 08 Pre Heat ser Text 01 Rough Valve Open ser Text02 Rough Valve Closed ser Text 03 Diff Pump Run ser Text 04 Diff Valve open ser Text 05 Chamber Temp ser Text O06 Start Program ser Text07 Start ser Text08 Pre Heat ser Text09 Stabilise serText 10 Heat Ramp serText 11 Annealing ser Text 12 Cool Ramp ser Te
438. sire nennen io uies senses sensn 316 IO EXPANDER d 326 pi ch erry e T 328 GALIBRATION 5 ceci ete eene eec eto eee Lesen eet ete cuetccucactesetscusscensceseseteccites 330 1e B deo quio 343 ORDER CODE cp EE 360 SAFETY AND EMC INFORMATIONN eere rennen eene nennen nennen ntn stnae 362 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION eeeeeeee eene eene tnn nen nente tnn sensns tnn stnsns 365 PARAMETER UNITS AND ADDRESSES csccssscsssssscssscsecsesesescseeeeeeees 374 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 CN29089 1 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller Contents 1 CHAPTER 1 INTRODUGTION 2 72 22 0t ce Ert eerte rt etit ertet 12 1 1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL inn nite eee tee oce ee eecciai ca 12 ob he Structure Or This Mahal ces soiree et HE emm EE 12 1 2 WHAT IS 2704 3 ree Atri tene trend tee eiieeise hee npe tere eH c Ee ee need 13 2 CHAPTER 2 INSTAELAT IQ NY 706 eine onere te eterne Re ence e ete K ee eene nC y eben ape uino s eren open eae nene sinon 14 2 1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION iue enero terrre REPERTUS 14 VN MEE Jo ifeleMo E ER 14 2 1 2 Outline dimensions Model 2704 esent etti senei to tihi tb deo tale IR ied eos o iiss ek ee eee habe esses neina 14 211735 Mounting the Controle race icccsces E 15 2 1 4 Unplugging and Plugging inthe Controller rettet ec cepe
439. sor break fallback Off Conf Down scale Up Scale CJC Type CJC type Internal Internal Conf Only shown if Channel Type 0 C thermocouple 45 C 50 C None Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 291 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller Table Number This page allows you to set the parameters for a PV Input module MODULE IO Module 3 or 23 3 9 This module can only be fitted in slots 3 or 6 6 A Page The following four parameters are only shown for Channel Type mV Volts mA and HZVolts Emissivity Emissivity Off to1 00 Ch Type pyrometer only Electrical Val The current electrical value of the input Input range units Module 3A or 6A The current value in engineering units Module 3 6 A can be user defined text CJC Temp Temperature read at the rear terminals o C Ch Type 7 thermocouple only Offset To apply a simple offset over the whole Display range input range Module Status Module status OK or message R O See Appendix D3 SBrk Trip Imp Sensor break value See section 23 6 3 R O Read as a of the SBrk Impedance configured Channel Name User defined name for the channel Default Conf Select from User Text Page Section Text 5 2 6 Cal State Calibration state See Chapter 27 Conf Not shown for Pyrometer or mA inputs Rear Term Temp Allows a user measured offset to be Auto to 50 00 C entered for CJC calibration Ch Type thermocouple only This module has a single input Its parameters are displayed under cha
440. ss Jor Y Press Press Overview fete Header sese Header m Press or vj to select 2 to select sibi rura to Tm ind Figure 21 5 Summary of Basic Navigation Examples are shown in the following two sections Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 267 Engineering Handbook 21 5 TO CONFIGURE PARAMETERS Set controller access level to Config as described in Chapter 6 2704 Controller The parameters required to configure a transaction between a local parameter in the master and a parameter in the slave are shown in section 21 7 To configure these parameters Do This From any display press C as many times as necessary to access the page header menu Press l or Y to scroll to MASTER COMMS 7 Press C to display master comms sub headings 8 Press A or Y to scroll around the list and choose Parameters 9 Press to select the parameters in this list 10 Press again to edit the required parameter in this case Param Index 11 Press or Y to index the parameter 1 to 100 12 Now press to select the Parameter in the master 13 Press Al or Y tosetthe Modbus address of the parameter 14 Now press to select the address of the slave in which to send or receive the parameter 15 Press or Y to change the value 16 Now press to select Slave Parameter address 17 Press 4 or Y to change the value 18 Now press LO to select Scaling for
441. ss 1 to access the page header menu 2 Press 4 lor Y to select DIGITAL PROG 3 Press Lo to show sub headers 4 Press lor Y to select Edit Program 5 Press C to show the list of parameters Up to four programs can be chosen 6 Press again to select Prog Select 7 Press A Jor Y to change the program number if required o ene eee 8 Press Lo to select On 1 Re DIGITAL FROG Edt Proare To enter a large time period press r jt and together This will underline Alor Y the mins and hours sections 9 Press to increase or decrease the on time for the first output in the sequence independently each time the J button is pressed The hours mins can then be raised or A or LY 10 Repeat for the eight On and Off periods which make up the sequence lowered using The full list of parameters is shown in the following table Y Table Number These parameters edit the digital programmer DIGITAL PROG 9 2 1 Edit Program Page Prog Enum User string for first custom Not enumerated Not L3 enumeration Usr01 to Usr 50 enumerated 9 2 1 Digital Program Edit Page On 1 On period 1 0 00 00 0 0 00 00 0 Off 1 Off period 1 to 0 00 00 0 99 59 59 9 If this setting is exceeded ae HHHH is displayed To reduce the value Press and hold button On and Off periods are repeated up to period 8 116 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering
442. sures that the master loop will not go into integral saturation whilst the slave setpoint is being limited Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 177 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 12 6 2 1 Tuning the Loop Details of configuration Master LP1 loop range 0 100 Slave loop LP1A range 0 200 Cascade mode Trim SPFF Setpoint feedforward CSDTrim lo 50 slave SP trim lo limit CSDTrim hi 50 slave SP trim hi limit Step 1 Tune slave Disable cascade and tune the slave at a setpoint that you expect the slave to be operating at In this case it is done at 70 After tune is complete you must allow the slave to settle at its setpoint with no oscillations This is very important Step 2 Tune Master The master OP is normalised to the slave range So in this configuration if the master OP is 0 the slave SP is also 0 Ifthe master OP is 50 the SP is 100 and if the OP is 100 the setpoint is 200 You need to inspect the value of the slave proportional band calculated by the slave autotune In this case it was 36 eng units To tune the master loop the autotune limits need to be set so that the slave SP is allowed to alter by half its proportional band In this case 18 units To achieve this Tune OP low is set to 9 and Tune OP high to 9 With a master SP of 70 this allows the slave to go to a high value of 88 and a low value of 52 Please note during autotune the 9 is applied in addition to the Slave PV not the
443. t i293 4 WIre RTD Inp t iie ente emot eet ap eae e o pi eet 296 Dual DC Output ternis we 297 Dual DC Output Module IO Parameters Ju High Resolution Retransmission Output 2299 High Resolution Output Module Parameters ssssssssssssessseeeenetee tenente tnter entente 303 TDS input fsre i em E 304 TDS Input Module Parameters 304 Cable Offset diete i MODULE SCALING ec eec eat e RR studia cdd The RV nip ute i teta ied a e debe ea e e n Nee te d e e ave To Scale The PV Input Output modules To Scale A Control Output RetransmlissionO ut DUE c5 e cave tues e PIE OR RITIRO TORTE RO RUPER OR E DARE ONE IEEE To Scale the Potentiometer inpUt 12 anre mr tei rre b Vere e IEEE cl rario fena ia MODULE IO WIRING EXAMPLES esee To Configure Module 1 Channel A to Run a Program E To Operate Relay Troma Digital Input ce eite be pape eb E e i Ee e P ie noeh Zirconia Probe Impedance Measurement iiit eh bate ler A E PRAETERIRE TH CER Aalst PE VEO de Bo n Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 24 24 1 24 2 24 2 1 24 3 24 3 1 24 4 24 4 1 24 5 24 5 1 24 6 24 6 1 24 6 2 25 25 1 25 2 25 2 1 26 26 1 26 1 1 27 27 1 27 2 27 3 27 3 1 27 3 2 27 3 3 27 3 4 27 3 5 27 4 27 5 27 5 1 27 5 2 27 5 3 27 5 4 27 5 5 27 5 6 27 6 28 28 1 28 2 28 3 28 3 1 28 3 2 28 3
444. t Alarm ON Hysteresis Process Variable Alarm Setpoint T Time 10 2 5 Deviation Band A deviation band alarm monitors the process variable and the working setpoint and continuously compares the difference against the alarm setpoint If the difference is either negative by greater than the alarm setpoint or positive by greater than the alarm setpoint the alarm state will be active PV Working Setpoint gt Part No HA026933 x Process Variable Time gt Issue 7 0 Nov 12 121 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 10 2 6 Rate Of Change Alarm Negative Direction The Process Value falls faster than the alarm setting PV Alarm On d 7 Alarm Off P cd Actual rate of change x units per Negative Rate of Change set to x units per min min ud Hysteresis Ta E Time 10 2 7 Rate Of Change Alarm Positive Direction The Process Value rises faster than the alarm setting Alarm On T PV H i Alarm Off T Hysteresis Actual rate of change gt x gt fF eS units per min S Er Positive Rate of Change set to x units per min Time gt Notes 1 Separate alarms are required for positive and negative rates of change 2 Analarm is indicated during the period that the actual rate of change is greater than the set rate of change 3 There may be a small delay before the instrument displays an alarm
445. t 3V to 10 0V range used for voltage input Calibration 2mV 0 296 of reading Resolution 200V Drift lt 0 1mV 0 02 of reading per C Input impedance 69KO Pt100 input 0 to 400ohms 200 C to 850 C 3 matched wires up to 22Q in each lead without errors Calibration 0 4 C 0 15 of reading in C Resolution 0 08 C Drift lt 0 015 C 0 005 of reading in C per C Bulb current 0 3mA Thermocouple Internal compensation CJC rejection ratio gt 25 1 typical CJ Temperature calibration error at 25 C lt 2 C 0 C 45 C and 50 C external compensation available 366 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 31 6 STANDARD DIGITAL I O Allocation 1 digital input standard and 7 I O which can be configured as inputs or outputs plus 1 not isolated changeover relay Digital inputs Voltage level input active 2Vdc inactive 4Vdc Contact closure input active lt 100ohms inactive gt 28kohms Digital outputs Open collector 24Vdc at 40mA drive capability requires external supply Changeover relay Contact rating 2A at 264Vac resistive Functions Refer to Chapter 22 Operations 1 000 000 operations with addition of external snubber 31 7 DIGITAL INPUT MODULES Module type Triple contact input Triple logic input isolated as a group Allocation Can be fitted into slots 1 3 4 5 or 6 Contact closure Active 1000ohms inactive 28kohms Logic inputs Current sinking active
446. t User Value Yes Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 83 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 8 12 PROGRAMMER WIRING 8 12 1 Programmer Function Block The programmer function block shown in Figure 8 7 shows an example of soft wiring to other functions The connections can be made using the copy and paste method described in Section 5 1 2 with the exception of the Prg DO1 to Prg DO16 event outputs These can be found by searching through the list of parameters or by entering the Modbus address directly The Modbus addresses for these parameters are 05869 to 05883 inclusive The parameters which can be wired are listed in Figure 8 7 These parameters can be wired to any other parameter by Modbus address or using the shorter list of parameter names Appendix D CA PV1 Src 00001 L1 PV ERN Programmer Loop 1 PV1 Src Sp Src Program Control Loop L1 PV PV2 Src PV3Src Run Src Hold Src Reset Src Run Hold Src Run Reset Src CtRun Src Prog Num Src Digital Output Advance Seg mmm Hbck1 Dis Src Hbck2 Dis Src Hbck3 Dis Src WaitA Src WaitB Src WaitC Src PSP1 Reset Src PSP2 Reset Src PSP3 Reset Src Digital Input 1 DiglO1Val Figure 8 7 Programmer Function Block and Wiring Example 84 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 8 12 2 PROGRAM EDIT Wiring Page Table Number These parameters allow you to soft
447. t be used since the magnetic coupling is contained within the RJ45 connector It consists of an RJ45 connector socket and a termination assembly which must be connected to terminals HA to HF Use standard CAT5 cable to connect to the Ethernet 10BaseT switch or hub Use cross over cable only if connecting one to one with a PC acting as network master View of cable which may also be ordered separately as Part No SUB27 EA Cable connected to a Activity and terminals HA to HF power on LED i indicators B Figure 2 17 Ethernet Connections 28 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 2 6 4 I O Modules The 2704 controller contains five positions in which 4 terminal I O modules can be fitted These positions are marked Module 1 Module 3 Module 4 Module 5 Module 6 in Figure 2 4 Module 2 is reserved for the Memory Module which can only be fitted in this position To find out which modules are fitted check the ordering code which is found on a label on the side of the instrument Any module listed in this section can be fitted in any position except the PV input limited to positions 3 and 6 only and the Analogue Input module cannot be fitted in slot 5 Care should be taken therefore to ensure that modules are fitted as expected from the order code The instrument can be interrogated in View Config level to locate the positions in which the modules are fitted See Chapte
448. t wired to the program setpoints of loop 1 and loop 2 respectively Also the PV of loop1 is wired to the PV1 source to provide holdback and the PSP1 reset source to provide servo start The latter is repeated for Loop 2 This configuration is supplied from the factory by defining the hardware code field in the 2704 order code for loops programs to be 222 or 252 Programmer PV1 Src Control Loop PV2 Src PV3Src Run Src Hold Src Reset Src Run Hold Src Run Reset Src Prog Setpoint Control Loop Prog Num Src Prog Setpoint Advance Seg Hbck1 Dis Src Hbck2 Dis Src Hbck3 Dis Src WaitA Src WaitB Src WaitC Src PSP1 Reset Src gt PSP2 Reset Src PSP3 Reset Src Figure 8 9 Example Programmer Wiring Two Profiles Two Loops 8 20 2 1 Implementation 1 In INSTRUMENT Options Page set Num of Loops 2 set Programmer Enabled 2 In PROGRAM EDIT Options Page set Num of PSPs 2 Note other parameters such as number of digital event outputs SP range and power failure recovery are also set in this page 3 In PROGRAM EDIT Wiring Page Set PV1 Src 00001 L1 PV This connection is required so that the programmer can use Loop 1 PV to calculate holdback for PSP1 4 In PROGRAM EDIT Wiring Page Set PV2 Src 01025 L2 PV This connection is required so that the programmer can use Loop 2 PV to calculate holdback for PSP2 5 In PROGRAM EDIT Wiring Page Set PSP1 Reset Src 00001
449. t2 Src 05450 DIO2 Va Set Input3 Src 05498 DIO3 Va Set Input4 Src 05546 DIO4 Va Set Input5 Src 05594 DIO5 Va Set Input Src 05642 DIO6 Va Set Input7 Src 05690 DIO7 Va Set Input8 Src 11313 DIO8 Va Set Prog Num Src 10450 This connects the output of the BCD block to the program number Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 14 7 3 Holdback Duration Timer This procedure describes how to configure a 2704 controller using the Monitor Block to accumulate the total time that a program has been in holdback within a segment A holdback timer can be used to inform the user his application is taking longer to heat up than normal possibly indicating a problem with the heat source or unusually high losses Monitor Block Input Src Reset Src Alarm Output Figure 14 7 Monitor Function Block The Monitor Block functions are as follows 1 Logs the maximum and minimum excursions of its input value These values are reset when a the controller power is cycled b the block is reset 2 Counts the time above a threshold 3 Provides a time alarm This example assumes that the controller has already been set up as a single loop programmer and that program digital output 1 is used to enable the timer during certain segments This isused to reset the monitor at the end of the segment The maximum expected holdback time is set to 30 minutes When this time is exceeded the AA relay
450. tal IO is provided by plug in IO modules which can be fitted in any of five slots see also Introduction Chapter 1 The type and position of any modules fitted in the controller is shown in the order code printed on the label on the side of the controller This can be checked against the order code in Appendix A The module part number is printed on the side of the plastic case of the module Modules are available as single channel two channel or three channel IO as listed below E SU Order Code Idents Displayed As Number of Channels Module Part No Change over relay Form C Relay AH025408U002 2 pin relay Form A Relay AH025245U002 Dual relay Dual Relay AH025246U002 m G lee i p mmm Dual triac Dual Triac AH025409U002 a r ome LI CHNNNNNNLANN LT NN o o O 7 NN pa aa aes contact input Tri Contact IP 3 AH025861U002 2 Transmitter PSU 5VdcTransducer power Transducer PSU supply 10VdcTransducer power Transducer PSU supply Potentiometer input Potentiometer input Pothput Pothput Analogue input module 2604 2704 dc Input AH025863U002 AH026306U002 AH026306U002 AH025864U002 3 a rs DC Input LE AH025686U004 Sin Logic OP H025735U002 Dual DC Out AH027249U002 HR DC Out E qt AH027249U003 TDS Input TDS Input 1 f H0277200002 4 wire Pt100 Input 4Wire PT100 ts AHO28494U002 4 wire Pt25 Input 4Wire PT25 1 AH0284940003 The TDS Input Module is desig
451. ted to the Modules precision PV input of one I O module connections C amp D with the Volt Source connected to the second module terminals A amp D A Zirconia B Volt source Figure 2 19 Wiring Connections for Zirconia Probe 34 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 2 7 1 Zirconia Probe Screening 2 7 1 4 Zirconia Carbon Probe Construction Outer Electrode Screen Ceramic Insulator Hot End 3 3 mrs i i paca nut p Zirc mV Thermocouple Zirconia Sensor Outer metallic shell of the probe Figure 2 20 Zirconia probe construction 2 7 1 2 Screening connections when two modules are used The zirconia sensor wires should be screened and connected to the outer shell of the probe if it is situated in an area of high interference Screen Outer Electrode Inner Electrode Screened Cable Figure 2 21 Screening connections two module configuration 2 7 1 3 Screening connections when a dual input module is used Both the thermocouple and the zirconia sensor wires must be screened and connected to the outer shell of the probe if it is situated in an area of high interference Note the reverse connection of the zirconia sensor Screen Out
452. ted to the first 20 program numbers default PSP1 Temperature names PSP1 01 to 20 J L PSP2 to the next 20 default names PSP2 01 to 20 PSP2 Pressure PSP2 to the last 20 default names PSP3 01 to 20 PSP3 Humidity This is applicable over digital communications or when wiring the parameters Each program can be run held or reset individually or together as a group Run Run Program Hold Groups Reset Example Run Group 2 This might consist of a Temperature Profile and a Humidity profile Up to 20 profiles can be stored in each PSP ZU adl Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 97 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 8 23 EXAMPLE TO CONFIGURE AN ASYNCHRONOUS PROGRAMMER If the instrument has been supplied as a programmer it will only be necessary to complete this step if the programmer feature has subsequently been disabled or it is required to change from a synchronous to asynchronous programmer Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes INSTRUMENT 1 From any display press 1 to access the page header menu 2 Press or x to select INSTRUMENT Ct 3 Press to display sub headers INSTRUMENT mm 4 Press or to select Options if necessary 5 Press to display parameters INSTRUMENT Options xSEY Num of Lo 3 6 Press Y to scroll to Programmer 7 Press to edit Programmer 8 Press 4 or Y to Enabled In an Asynchronous programmer
453. tely used to control the process variable in a loop LSP derives from a parameter called the local setpoint which is the value which the operator can alter This local SP may be derived from one of two setpoints Setpoint 1 or Setpoint 2 Either of these setpoints may be selected by a parameter in the controller or soft wired to a digital input In remote mode the working setpoint is modified by the Remote SP Local Trim when Enable Rem SP is set to Yes When Remote Track LP7 SETUP Options Page is set to Track the transition to the Active Local SP SP1 or SP2 takes place bumplessly and the Active Local SP tracks the value of the Remote SP In a controller programmer the Working SP is derived from the output of the programmer function block In this case the setpoint varies in accordance with fixed rates of change stored within a program 11 3 1 Setpoint Function Block Programmer SP PSP High Lim Enable Rem SP PSP1 Prog PSP2 gt Range Max PSP3 Local PSP Low Lim e pl e Loca gt SP2 High Limit a v ne Target SP Range Min SP2 SP2 Low Limit s SP2 Enab SP1 High Limit SP1 Enab SP1 SP1 Low Limit Trim High Local SP 1 RemoteTrim Trim Low 9 Remote SP Remote only es e Sai Y gt o Remote Type 4 Remote Local Local Trim Trim Range Max Other inputs Target
454. ter found in the PROGRAM EDIT Options Page which allows programs to be created but which prevents them from being changed in operation levels If more than one program was created prior to Profile Lock being selected then the user can select these programs using Program Number but cannot create any more The options are Fully Locked No parameter or the profile can be changed in operation levels Profile Locked The profile of the program is locked but changes can be made to certain parameters such as Target setpoints rates dwells or segment duration 80 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 8 10 EXAMPLE TO CONFIGURE A SYNCHRONOUS PROGRAMMER If the instrument has been supplied as a programmer it will only be necessary to complete this step if the programmer feature has subsequently been disabled or it is required to change from a synchronous to asynchronous programmer Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press to access the page header menu Nenu Config 2 Pres or to select INSTRUMENT 3 Press to display sub headers 4 Press or Y lto select Options if necessary C 5 Press to display parameters INSTRUMENT Options SEY 6 Press Y lto scroll to Programmer 7 Press to edit Programmer 8 Pres or lto Enabled It is then necessary to confirm this change since an
455. terminals of the last controller in the chain 2000 series 2000 series 2000 series 2000 series controller controller controller controller Up to 32 instruments Figure 21 3 Example Wiring RS485 2 wire for 2000 Series Instruments EIA232 2000 series controller Screen grounded at one point Figure 21 4 Example Wiring RS232 for 2000 Series Instruments 266 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 21 3 CROSS BOARD VERSION Engineering Handbook If master communications is fitted as an upgrade check also the cross board version before configuring master comms This parameter can be found in configuration level in INSTRUMENT Info Page CBC Version and must be greater than 4 7 displayed as 47 To configure the controller for master communications it will be necessary to navigate to configuration access level see Engineering Handbook A summary of navigation 21 4 BASIC NAVIGATION Parameters are organised into pages Each page is given a name or header which describes a particular subject in this case MASTER COMMS The MASTER COMMS page is divided into sub headings for example Parameters Slave 1 etc Parameters for the chosen subject are found in these pages To change the value of alterable parameters is shown below press J to access the page press A or Y to select the header press to access press or Y Y to select the header press again pre
456. ters allow you to configure Program Type and Options PROGRAM EDIT 8 11 1 Press C to select each parameter Options Page This table is only available in Configuration Level Prog Usr Val1 Allows programmer User Value 1 to be No enabled Yes UVal1 Low Lim User value 1 low limit 0 to 127 Limited by Uval1 Hi Only shown if Prog Usr Lim Val Yes UVal1Hi Lim User value 1 high limit 0 to 127 1 Usr Val1 Name Name from user text for programmer 01 Usr1 to 100 Usr100 Default Text user value 1 1 Usr Val1 Enum First user string from for programmer 01 Usr1 to 100 Usr100 Default Text user value 1 custom enumeration Prog Usr Val2 Allows programmer User Value 2 to be No No enabled Yes 82 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook Table Number These parameters allow you to configure Program Type and Options PROGRAM EDIT 8 11 1 Press C to select each parameter Options Page This table is only available in Configuration Level UVal2 Low Lim User value 2 low limit 0 to 127 Limited by Uval2 Hi Only shown if Prog Usr Lim Val Yes UVal2Hi Lim User value 2 high limit 0 to 127 Usr Val2 Name Name from user text for programmer 01 Usr1 to 100 Usr100 Default Text user value 2 Usr Val2 Enum First user string from for programmer 01 Usr1 to 100 Usr100 Default Text user value 2 custom enumeration Wait Events Activates the Wait events option No Yes Yes Recovery Type Defines the power recovery
457. that is Low Calibration at 0Q which effectively is the mV offset calibration for the input and High Calibration at 2000 for PT100 Module or 500 for PT25 Module Low and High calibration should be carried out consecutively using the resistance reference connections shown in the diagrams below 27 5 6 1 Calibration Procedure 1 Connecta reference source as shown below and allow the instrument to warm up for at least 30 minutes Note this connection retains the test bulb current and yet ensures that no voltage is developed across the measured resistance Do not attempt to calibrate this point by just short circuiting the 4 wire resistance 4 wire LLL Resistance Reference G9 2000 or 500 LCY 3A or 6A 69 3B or 6B 2704 CA 3C orec amp 3D or 6D Controller Figure 27 7 Low Point Calibration Connections Do This 2 Inthe relevant MODULE IO page 3 or 6 press LO l until the parameter Cal State is displayed 3 Press 4 or Y to select Cal Low 4 Press or Y to select Go 5 Press to Accept 340 This Is The Display You Should See Cal State Idle Cal State Confirm Cal State Go M Sec Cal State Passed 3 Sec Cal State Accept b Cal State Idle Additional Notes Confirm will automatically Cal State Cal Low 3 Sec appear The controller will automatically calibrate and th
458. the specified target When creating programs the target is inherited from the previous segment The setpoint steps instantaneously from its current value to a new value at the beginning of a segment Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 75 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 8 4 2 Go Back To Segment Go Back allows segments in a program to be repeated by a set number of times It is the equivalent of inserting sub programs on some controllers Figure 8 3 shows an example of a program which is required to repeat the same section a number of times and then continue the program A Go Back To segment is used to save the total number of segments required in a program and to simplify setting up When planning a program it is advisable to ensure that the end and start setpoints of the program are the same otherwise it will step to the different levels A Go Back To segment is defined when editing a program see section 8 15 1 This section is repeated n times Segment is defined as a Go Backsegment X At this point Go Back To segment 3 Segment 1 Segment 2 l Segments 3 to 6 Segment 7 Figure 8 3 An Example of a Program with Repeating Section Note 1 If a second or more Go Back segments are created they cannot return to a segment before the previous Go Back segment as shown below Not allowable 1 2 Go Back 3 4 5 Go Back Segments Figure 8 4 Permitted Go Back Segments 8 4 3 End Segment
459. the Calibration Chapter 27 Part No HA026933 Issue7 0 Nov 12 359 Engineering Handbook 29 29 1 APPENDIX A ORDER CODE HARDWARE CODE 2704 Controller The 2704 has a modular hardware construction which accepts up to six plug in modules and two digital communications modules Eight digital IO and a relay form part of the fixed hardware build 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 1 Controller Type 5 9 O Slots 13 45 6 l Memory Module 16 Toolkit Blocks 2704 Standard None Fitted ot Fitted XX Standard 2704 Profibus Change Over Relay itted U1 16 An amp 16 Dig 2 Pin Relay U2 24 An amp 32 Dig Dual Relay Comms H Supply Voltage Triac one Fitted 17 Tech Support 100 240Vac Dual Triac 232 Modbus TS1 1 Hour default 20 29Vac dc DC Control 2 wire EIA 485 TSO None 3 Loops Programs First Digit hee One Loop DN Two Loop op e Three Loop Second Digit XX No Programs 222 20 Programs DIS 50 Programs A Async Programs Third Digit XX No Programs TUE 1 Profile 1 DC Retransmission PV Input slots 3 amp 6 Triple Logic Input Triple Contact Input Triple Logic Output 24Vdc Transmitter PSU Potentiometer Input 5Vdc transducer PSU 10Vdc transducer PSU Analogue input not in slot 5 Dual DC porbe input slots 3 amp 6 Isolated single logic OP 4 wire EIA 485 232 Bisynch 2 Wire 485 Bisync 4 Wire 485 Bisync Prof
460. the Dual Loop Page view The number of the custom parameter should correspond to the position shown in the User Page views e g 1 to 12 The parameter can be chosen by its Modbus address or by selecting the parameter by its name from the list of commonly used parameters given in Appendix D The custom text for 01 as defined in section 7 2 6 is Heat The number of characters which will be displayed on the user page will be truncated The following two parameters set the range of the graph These are set using the same procedure as above Up to ten parameters can be promoted to the bottom section of the user page These parameters can be scrolled and adjusted in the User Page view The remaining parameters in the User Page configuration list set up these parameters 22 Press j to select Promote Param 23 Press Al or Y to choose required the parameter number USER PAGES User Page 1 5BY l Up to ten parameters may be promoted The order in which they appear in the User Page is determined by the order in which they are selected here The remaining parameters are selected and chosen in exactly the same way as those already described The display above shows e The first parameter 1 in the user page list is Programmer Event Output DO1 e The name of this parameter is chosen from User Text 03 which has been given the name Open Vent e The access level of this parameter is read only
461. the controller will increase the output power in order to prevent undershoot on cool down Low cutback The number of display units below setpoint at which the controller will cutback the output power in order to prevent overshoot on heat up Cool gain Only present if cooling has been configured and a module is fitted Sets the cooling proportional band which equals the proportional band value divided by the cool gain value Table 12 1 Tuning Parameters 12 2 AUTOMATIC TUNING The 2704 controller uses a one shot tuner which automatically sets up the initial values of the three term parameters 12 2 1 One shot Tuning The one shot tuner works by switching the output on and off to induce an oscillation in the measured value From the amplitude and period of the oscillation it calculates the tuning parameter values If the process cannot tolerate full heating or cooling being applied during tuning then the levels can be restricted by setting the autotune high power limit Tune OH and autotune low power limit Tune OL in the AUTOTUNE parameters page section 12 3 2 These limits are only applied during the autotune process However the measured value must oscillate to some degree for the tuner to be able to calculate values Under normal control the output power limits may be set by OP Low Limit and OP High Limit found in LPx SETUP Output lists If these limits are set to a lower value than the autotune limi
462. the event to become true This table is also available in Level 3 but can be promoted to Level 1 see section 7 2 5 See section 10 6 These are the same as loop 1 These are the same as loop 1 High and Low Alarms are available for the fixed PV Input High and Low Alarms are available for the fixed Analogue Input Alarms for These pages are configured As in section 10 6 High and Low Alarms are available each module These are alarms which are user defined Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 127 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 10 7 1 ALARMS Summary Page Table Number These parameters indicate alarm status ALARMS 10 7 1 Alarm parameters in this table only appear if the function is enabled Summary Page The last three parameters always appear Parameter Name Parameter Description Default Access Level LP1 Ac Loop 1 alarm 1 acknowledge LP1 Ac Loop 1 alarm 2 acknowledge LP2Ac Loop 2 alarm 1 acknowledge LP2Ac Loop 2 alarm 2 acknowledge BD LP3 Ac Loop 3 alarm 1 acknowledge LP3 Ac Loop 3 alarm 2 acknowledge PV Alm AckH PV Input high alarm acknowledge PV Alm AckL PV Input low alarm acknowledge Eo An Alm AckH Analogue Input high alarm acknowledge EL r r r r r An Alm AckL Analogue Input low alarm acknowledge Module 1A 1 AckH Module 1 high alarm acknowledge Module 1A1 AckL Module 1 low alarm acknowledge EN The above two alarms are repeated for Module 3 4 5 and 6 if th
463. times as necessary to This parameter can be configured scroll to Start Pnt1 Cal to be activated from a digital input and wired for example to an external switch 2 Press or to On An example of this wiring is given atthe end of this chapter 3 Press las many times as necessary to The confirm message does not scroll to Adjust Value m appear unless Adjust Value is changed f the displayed value is acceptable change it momentarily hen back to the value to step to he next stage 4 Press A or Y to enter the value indicated on the reference instrument On confirm the current input value is stored as Input Low and 5 Press lto confirm or to cancel as he value entered by the user is instructed stored in the Scale Low parameter Allow the Process to settle at the high calibration point pe GER IEEE ESENT This parameter can be initiated from a digital input and wired for example to an external switch 6 Press lto Start Pnt2 Cal 7 Press lor Y to Om An example of this wiring is given at the end of this chapter e The confirm message does not appear unless Adjust Value is changed 8 Press as many times as necessary to EAF scroll to Adjust Value If the displayed value is acceptable change it momentarily then back to the value to step to the next stage 9 Press 4 lor Y l to enter the value indicated on the reference instrument
464. tion 11 10 6 set PV Src 05108 PVIn Val Appendix D This connects the PV input to the master PV of the cascade loop 3 In LP1 SETUP Wiring Page section 11 10 6 set Aux PV Src 04468 Mod3A Val Appendix D This connects the PV input from Module 3 to the slave PV of the cascade loop 4 In MODULE IO Module 1 A Page section set Wire Src 00013 L1 Ch1 OP 29e Appendix D This connects channel 1 heat control to the DC output module See Appendix D for list of Modbus addresses See Copy and Paste description in Chapter 5 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 157 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 11 11 RATIO CONTROL 11 11 1 Overview Ratio Control is a technique used to control a process variable at a setpoint which is calculated as a proportion of a second lead input The ratio setpoint determines the proportion of the lead value that is to be used as the actual control setpoint The ratio setpoint can be applied as either a multiplier or as a divisor to the second input A typical application is in gas fired furnaces where in order to achieve efficient combustion the gas and air flow supplied to the burners needs to be maintained at a constant ratio 11 11 2 Basic Ratio Control The 2704 contains a ratio control function block which can be used in any control loop Figure 11 12 shows a block diagram of a simple ratio controller The lead PV is multiplied or divided by the ratio setpoint to ca
465. tion Calibration state machine controls See section 28 4 4 4 for more details and to enable probe calibration Probe Cal Periodic calibration following titration See Off section28 4 4 4 for further information and On how to enable this parameter Params Disabled TCF Cal Establishing a set of Temperature Correction Factors every 10 C for a particular water type See section 28 4 4 4 for further information Cal Data Titration result entry point under calibration Entry conditions The data is assumed to be in the same units as the function block Units setting Only available when the Calibration parameter is in one of the Enter Data states Apparent K Current probe factor derived from the Probe Cal TDS Cal and current readings This is used internally within the function block as a substitute for K Factor and is outputted for diagnostic purposes ax aximum limit for apparent probe factor If Apparent K his is breached then the function block will set Clean Probe Rq to Yes Probe Clean Flag indicating that Apparent K has Yes Apparent K gt Max Rq exceeded the Max Apparent K parameter Apparent K No if not RPercent Parameter that models non linear 0 0 to 100 0 cm behaviour of probes and requiring two different titration values to determine it It represents the anticipated percentage contribution split between probe surface contamination errors and probe scaling errors at Pro
466. tion blocks Timers Totalisers Real time clock Pattern generators 32 digital operations 32 patch wiring operators 32 analogue calculations 3 multiple operators 4 On Pulse Off delay one shot and min On 4 trigger level amp reset input Day of week and time 16x16 2 off 31 23 GENERAL SPECIFICATION Display range Supply Operating ambient Storage temp Panel sealing Dimensions EMC standards Safety standards Atmospheres Inrush Current 370 5 digits including up to 3 decimal places 85 264Vac 20Watts max 0 50 C and 5 to 95 RH non condensing 10 to 70 C IP65 Nema 4X 96H x 96W x 150D mm EN61326 electrical equipment for measurement control and laboratory use EMS requirements suitable for commercial and light industrial as well as heavy industrial environments With Ethernet module fitted product is suitable for heavy industrial environments only class A emissions Meets EN61010 installation category Il pollution degree 2 Not suitable for use above 2000m or in explosive or corrosive atmospheres High Voltage controller 30A duration 100s Low Voltage controller 15A duration 100ys Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 31 24 GRAPHICAL REPRESENTATION OF ERRORS This section shows graphically the effects of adding all contributions of different errors for each input type and range The errors are a combination of Calibration accuracy Drift with amb
467. to 100 User T Text Promote Acc Access level of the promoted Lev 1 Read Only Conf parameter Lev 1 Alterable Lev 2 Read Only Lev 2 Alterable Promote Value Promoted parameter value Only appears if a parameter is promoted 244 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 17 5 5 Bar Graph Table Number This page allows you to configure a bar graph user page USER PAGES 17 5 5 User Page 1 to 8 Level Page Location Defines where the page is None Conf located Main Page Loop Summary Page Style Defines the style of the page Parameter List Conf Single Loop Dual loop Triple Loop 1 Triple Loop 2 Status Grid Bar Graph Blank Page Auto Man Key Auto manual button is associated None None Conf with this user page LP1 LP2 LP3 Graph Style Grows from bottom up Absolute Conf Grows from centre Error Page Name Defines the name which appears Default Text Default Conf in the header at the top of the 01 to 100 User Text Text page Custom Name Parameter name from user text Default Text Default Conf 01 to 100 User Text Text enone Gaphlowpant swsemms O o Promo Param Promoe paame iam M e Promote Add Modbus Address Promote Name Promote parameter name from Default Text Default Conf user text 01 to 100 User Text Text Promote Acc Access level of the promoted Lev 1 Read Only Conf parameter Lev 1 Alterable Lev 2 Read Only Lev 2 Alterable Promote Value Promoted par
468. to remove the steady state error 12 4 3 Valve Position Control See section 11 7 Control of Valve Positioning Motors for an explanation of the additional parameters required for motorised valves and how to set the values of these parameters Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 173 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 12 5 TUNING WHEN GAIN SCHEDULING IS USED Gain scheduling is described in section 11 5 It is the automatic transfer of control between one set of control values and another set in non linear control systems Up to six sets can be configured and each set is configured to operate over a selected input range where the control operates over a reduced and approximately linear range SP A 4 5 Boundary SpA basse See eae 3 4 Boundary SP3 tee see 2 3 Boundary SP2 4j 1 2 Boundary SP1 4 Controlled A 4 4 Variable PID PID PID PID Set1 Set2 Set 3 Set 4 Figure 12 1 Gain Scheduling 12 5 1 Tuning Procedure In normal operating mode Schedule type will be set to PV SP OP Error Rem Sched IP or Soft Wired as dictated by the requirements of the process 1 Selectthe number of PID sets required from 1 to 6 Set the Boundaries over which each PID set is required to operate Go to Configuration level if not already selected Set Schedule Type LPx SETUP PID page Set Go to Level 3 Select Active PID Set PID Set 1 Set the Setpoint to control at a point approximate
469. tons T r 5 e WwW l4 Auto Manual When pressed this toggles between automatic and manual mode button e f the controller is in automatic mode AUT is displayed e Ifthe controller is in manual mode MAN is displayed Each press selects each loop in turn or between each loop and the trend chart if each of Loop select P the above options are configured plus a summary of all loops button The loop name is shown n the banner at the top of the display Programmer Press once to display a pop up window button Program Statkus This button operates the programmer on all loops The pop up window will remain for approximately 6 seconds and during this period See also Chapter 8 Press PROG again to RUN a program Programmer Operation am PROG again to HOLD a program PROG again to toggle between RUN amp HOLD PROG and hold for two seconds to reset El Press to select the Page Header Menu Scroll button Press to select a new parameter from the page heading If held down it will continuously scroll through the parameters Press to decrease an analogue value or to change the state of a digital value Up button Press to increase an analogue value or to change the state of a digital value Note The AUTO LOOP or PROG may have been disabled in configuration level Figure 3 2 Operator Buttons Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 37 Engineering Handbook 2704 Cont
470. tputs to the vacuum system but used in conjunction with the existing PID loops provides the ability to control the temperature within the chamber or furnace It provides the following features Vacuum probe switchover High vacuum gauge power up when required vacuum level is achieved Backing chamber pressure measurement and setpoint output Gauge status inputs Leak detection Roughing pump timeout mio gr poo UN E Gauge calibration 13 8 1 Setpoints Six setpoint outputs are provided These can be used to turn on and off vacuum gauges or other external devices or to set up internal conditions such as temperature program wait signals Each setpoint may be configured with an on and off value The two values are used to provide switching hysteresis on the setpoint output For example 1 If On SP lt Off SP 2 If On SP gt Off SP Output True if Input On SP Output True if Input gt On SP Output False if Input gt Off SP Output False if Input Off SP Figure 13 8 shows the first case The On SP is a lower vacuum than the Off SP or in other words the SP is On when the vacuum is larger than the On SP Vacuum values are given for reference purposes only Probe Off SP e g 1x10 Vacuum Probe On SP e a 1x10 increasing SP On SP Off Figure 13 8 Setpoint Output Status when On SP Off SP Each setpoint is also provided with a user text string This is displayed in the vacuum setpoint message box
471. trical Low setting 12 Press lto select Eng Value Lo 13 Press Jor Y to adjust the value TRRDHRE TO RH Aes et up this value so that the 14 Press C to select Eng Value Hi SERRE setup i relay switches fully on corresponding to the Electrical 15 Press or Y to adjust the value High setting The following table gives the full list of parameters available under this list header U Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 279 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 22 THE FIXED RELAY OUTPUT PARAMETERS These parameters configure the fixed relay output connected to terminals AA AB and AC This relay may be used as an alarm time proportioning or On Off control output 22 5 4 Standard IO AA Relay Parameters Table Number This page allows you to configure the Fixed Relay Parameters STANDARD IO AA Relay 22 5 1 Function of the relay On Off As order code Conf Time Proportion Valve Lower Valve Raise Relay energised Normal Conf Relay de energised Inverted The following five parameters only appear if Channel Type Time Proportion Minimum relay on or off Auto 0 05s time or 0 1 to 999 9 Electrical low input level Input range Low display reading Display Eng Value Hi High display reading range AA RelayValue Status of the relay output 100 to 100 editable if not AA Relay can be See note 1 ve values not used wired user text Electrical Val The current analogue value of th
472. trolling loop then the output will hold at its current value and override action is suspended If itis the loop not currently in control then the controlling loop will continue controlling 11 12 6 Issues with Sensor Break A PV or Analogue Input can be set up to have a sensor break fall back vale InpClp of Up Scale 2 or Down Scale 1 On 2000 series controllers the break impedance is measured with an AC signal For the short period until the break condition is detected the value of the input can drift This can produce an undesirable effect with override control if the drifting signal causes the override to switch loops To ensure that any initial drift is in the correct direction it may be necessary to fit a resistor to the sensor input terminals The terminals used will be dependent on whether the signal is required to go downscale or upscale as follows 11 12 7 Downscale Fitting a resistor across the sense terminals V and V will cause the temperature reading to collapse towards ambient when the sensor is broken A value between 100K and 10M can be used with little effect to the normally displayed value CO ve B 11 12 8 Upscale Fitting a resistor across the sense terminals VI and V will cause the temperature reading to rise when the sensor is broken Due to the sensor wire resistance being as much as 22R the temperature reading will be sensitive to the value of R A value of 10M will add 5 5uV
473. ts then the autotune high and low power limits will be clipped to the output limits as soon as autotune is run A One shot Tune can be performed at any time but normally it is performed only once during the initial commissioning of the process However if the process under control subsequently becomes unstable because its characteristics have changed you can re tune again for the new conditions It is best to start tuning with the process at ambient conditions and with the SP close to the normal operating level This allows the tuner to calculate more accurately the low cutback and high cutback values which restrict the amount of overshoot or undershoot 168 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 12 3 TO AUTOTUNE CONTOL LOOP LP7 Engineering Handbook In most cases it will only be necessary to carry out the Autotune procedure when commissioning your controller 6 Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes Set the setpoint to the value at which you will normally operate the process From any display press Cas many times as necessary to access the page header menu Press or Y lto select AUTOTUNE Press to display sub headers and again to select Tune OL Press 4 or Y to setthe minimum power limit during uning Repeat for Tune OH c Press to select Autotune Loop Press or to choose the oop to tune Meru Level 3 0 0 oo LF1
474. tune is active e The instrument keys must be enabled Keys can be disabled by a logic input turned off in configuration level or via digital communications A logic input can be configured to disable front panel keys this will not remove remote control of the user interface via digital communications The Navigation Diagram which follows shows all pages which are available at Config level Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 45 Engineering Handbook 3 8 NAVIGATION DIAGRAM gt vi EREEEEN Y lo Y 2704 Controller gt Y gt OEM SECURITY SUMMARY gt v gt AY She Parameters for Customised OEM SECURITY summary Select Pe i See Chapter 7 Ly OEM SECURITY SUMMARY Page only appears if only appears if ordered configured See Standby section 7 2 7 Parameters for Access Levels See Chapter 6 aca Parameters for Instrument See Chapter 7 7 Y gt PROGRAM RUN gt Y gt PROGRAMEDIT gt gt gt PROGRAM GROUPS gt Y gt DIGITALPROG gt Y gt Kea Select Select Select PTS xus eng Dana e see PSP1 4 A A using PSP2 or or or Dig Prog 3 A PSP3 7 v v Dig Prog 4 T v e c Y Parameters for c Parameters for Parameters for Program Y Program Run Program Edit Groups P ET
475. ture is used Paste Program L1 Hbk Mode Holdback mode None no holdback None Per prog applied over the whole program Per Program Per seg active in every segment Per Segment 86 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook Table Number These parameters affect the overall program 8 14 1 PROGRAM EDIT Program Page PSP1 FineHbk Fine holdback value for PSP7 Display Range PSP1 CourseHbk Course holdback value for PSP7 Display Range The above three parameters are repeated for PSP2 and for PSP3 if these are configured Hot Start PSP Allows hot start to be applied to each PSP See also section 8 2 5 Rate Units Rate units for a Ramp Rate Programmer Per Second Per Minute PSP1 HBk Type Holdback type for PSP7 per program Off Off These are deviations between SP and PV Fine Lo Fine and course holdback allows two levels Fine Hi of holdback to be applied to different Fine Band segments see section 8 14 2 Gourseilo Course Hi Course Band p 4 L1 Only displayed if Per Program configured L1 Only shown if HBk Type z Off L1 Only displayed if the programmer is Ramp Rate Program Cycles The number of times a program repeats Cont to 999 End Action Defines the action in the end segment Dwell the program will dwell indefinitely at the conditions set in the end segment Reset the program will reset to the start conditions Program Name Allows a user defined name to be giv
476. uced below for convenience 24V Supply acor dc dc polarity Digital Dus igital Inputs not important 211530 pemg 30 10 1to10 Comms Screen 10 IO Expander Board Transmitter PSU Out A B HB 3 2 eA C o c o A A 2 B c o c j A B Q A o C B i e B Digital Inputs Outputs A E Digital Outputs 2 11 to 20 21 to 30 c 9 Inputs 31to40 A 1to10 o C o A 7 12 o C j c o A 8 A o C C eol 9 ol Q c 9 c Q 10 9 AJO o c c Q Figure 2 10 IO Expander Connections 22 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller 2 5 6 Digital I O Eight digital I O connections are provided as standard They can be individually configured as 1 Inputs Run Hold Reset Auto Manual etc logic or contact closure 2 Outputs Configurable as Control outputs Programmer Events Alarms etc Digital IO is not isolated from instrument ground Engineering Handbook Digital Inputs Logic Inputs or Contact Closure in any combination Common Logic Common inputs S D8 GA H This terminal can be used for Digital Input only not DO Contact Notes closure Logic inputs can accept drive signals from inputs a voltage source where lt 2V Active 1 Limit 1V gt 4V Inactive 0 Limit 35V This action is reversed if the input has been configured as Inverted Digital Outputs Relay Thyristor
477. um control An example wiring diagram for vacuum control Viewing and adjusting the parameters for a vacuum controller oO oO Oo 0o 000000 o0 o An example of soft wiring for vacuum control Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 179 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 13 1 ZIRCONIA CARBON POTENTIAL CONTROL A dual loop 2704 controller is required to control temperature of the process on one loop and carbon potential on the other The controller is often a programmer which generates temperature and carbon potential profiles synchronised to a common timebase In this section it is assumed that a programmer is used 13 1 1 Temperature Control The sensor input of the temperature loop may come from the zirconia probe but it is common for a separate thermocouple to be used The controller provides a heating output which may be connected to gas burners or thyristors to control electrical heating elements In some applications a cooling output may also be connected to a circulation fan or exhaust damper 13 1 2 Carbon Potential Control The zirconia probe generates a millivolt signal based on the ratio of oxygen concentrations on the reference side of the probe outside the furnace to the amount of oxygen in the furnace The controller uses the temperature and carbon potential signals to calculate the actual percentage of carbon in the furnace This second loop generally has two outputs One output is connected to a valve which controls the amount
478. user may select and modify programs in the selected group when the program is in Hold or Reset mode in the same way as a synchronous programmer Changes made to programs other than Group 0 are permanent A delayed start parameter is available Changes made to Program Group 0 will be overwritten by stored program combinations for other groups when one of these is selected The Run Hold button acts as a global Program Group control i e all programs in the program group are put into the requested state Individual status parameters are available for each program in the group There is a Group Status parameter to control the state of the active run group Three programmer blocks are utilised to service each Program Group Programs not running as part of an active group may be run under independent control provided the programmer block is not already in use by the active Program Group 96 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 8 22 PROGRAM GROUPS Up to three PSPs can be programmed into a single Program Group Example 1 Run Group 1 You may wish to run a Temperature program a Pressure program and a Humidity program in a particular application These are shown below as PSP1 PSP2 and PSP3 respectively Each PSP program can store up to 20 profiles and each includes 16 event outputs Any combination of these can be placed into a program group Up to 20 program groups can be defined PSP1 is alloca
479. using Mor LY eS A back and forward scroll is available by holding down and pressing A or Y respectively Further parameters may be accessed and adjusted in the same way These are listed together with an explanation of their function in the following table Table Number These parameters allow you to set up each segment in the program PROGRAM EDIT 8 15 1 Segment Parameter Name Parameter Description Default L1 Program Number Selects the program number to be 1 to 20 edited or 60 8 15 1 PROGRAM EDIT Segment Parameters Segment Number Selects the segment number to be 1 to 100 edited Edit Function Allows a segment to be inserted None The example in section 8 28 describes nsert Segment how this feature is used Delete Segment Segment Type Segment type Profile Profile L1 End Segment Go Back Profile a normal segment End Segment the last segment in the program press C to confirm Go Back repeat part of program Not shown for segment 1 88 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Table Number 8 15 1 These parameters allow you to set up each segment in the program Engineering Handbook PROGRAM EDIT Segment PSP1 Type Profile setpoint 1 type Only shown if Program Type Ramp Rate and program not in End PSP1 Target Profile setpoint 1 target value SP1 lo limit to SP1 hi limit PSP1 Dwell Tm ile setpoint 1 dwell time Only shown if Program Type Ramp Rate CMM Type Dwel
480. ut alarms depending upon the function of the module fitted These alarms are associated with modules 1 3 4 5 amp 6 since module 2 is reserved for future use User Alarms Eight undedicated alarms which can be wired to any variable 10 5 HOW ALARMS ARE INDICATED Alarms are indicated when the controller is in normal operating level When an alarm occurs a message will appear on the display which will indicate the source and the type of alarm The format of this alarm message is A alternates for an gt Q LP7 Alarm source unacknowledged alarm Alarm message Full Scale Low Press C to Ack Instruction For an un latched alarm this message disappears when the alarm condition is no longer present When the alarm has been acknowledged the message shown in the banner of the pop up window above will now be shown in the Loop Display page The amp symbol will be shown steady in the top banner of any page if any alarm is still present If a relay has been connected to the output of the alarm it will operate to allow an external beacon or audible device to be activated In general the relay will be de activated when the alarm is acknowledged subject to the latching configuration 10 5 1 Alarm Delay Time A delay time can be set for each alarm between the occurrence of the alarm and the indication of the alarm in the controller This is useful to prevent spurious alarms from being indicated in some noisy or rapidly changi
481. utomatic Probe Cleaning meme a CHRE EUER RRDORC NOI OP EET RO RERO ER II ONE Se eden 180 13 1 5 Endothenmie Gas Co rreCtio el eoe ter OR RR ODER tU Er Et IURE EU 180 13 1 6 Example of Carbon Potential Controller Connections sse terere teet treten 181 13 2 TO VIEW AND ADJUST ZIRCONIA PARAMETERS 182 13 2 1 Zirconia Parameters nde c e eed PRSE TER RD TIO DEPT TUER EIER OUS 182 13 2 2 Witing Pages sistit entia do eate bt pne pne etn utat e P redd ER YO IUOS 184 13 3 ZIRCONIA WIRING EXAMPLE 184 13 3 1 The Zirconia F nction Block 5oe eite i Eie e i d ORE RE E ER C EE REESE HER EP EE cr 184 13 3 2 Configuration of a Carbon Potential Control Loop sse tette tette nter nter tenentes 185 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 5 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 14 15 13 3 3 13 4 13 4 1 13 4 2 13 4 3 13 4 4 13 5 13 5 1 13 5 2 13 6 13 6 1 13 6 2 13 7 13 7 1 13 8 13 8 1 13 8 2 13 8 3 13 8 4 13 8 5 13 8 6 13 8 7 13 9 13 10 13 11 11 4 12 12 1 122 s s cac 9 00 G9 CO O CO QU WO 0 CO CO CO 0 02 Ga CO d t EY E E EY E N E 14 1 14 2 14 2 1 14 3 14 3 1 14 4 14 4 1 14 5 14 5 1 14 6 14 6 1 14 6 2 14 7 14 7 2 14 7 3 15 1 15 2 15 2 1 15 2 2 15 2 3 15 2 4 15 3 1 15 4 15 4 1 15 5 1 Probe Impedarnce 1 PRENNE ERE TED RENTRER ER EE E edo i evi 186 HUMIDETGGONTIRO s 6 ttti tret reete t eon tired 187 leu
482. utput Lo eg 0 C Input Lo nput2 to 15 gt Input Hi eg 0 C eg 1000 C Figure 14 2 Compensation for Sensor Discontinuities The calibration of the sensor uses the same procedure as described above Adjust the output displayed value against the corresponding input value to compensate for any errors in the standard linearisation of the sensor Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 207 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 14 3 TO VIEW AND ADJUST INPUT OPERATOR PARAMETERS Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press D jas This page is only available if Input Opers is Enabled in the many times as necessary to access INSTRUMENT Options ptions page the page header menu 2 2 Press 4 lor Y to select INPUT OPERS Cust Lin 1 Custom 3 Press eJ to show Sub headers Cust Lin 2 linearisation Cust Lin3 of inputs 1 2 and 3 Switch 1 T C to pyrometer switch over Monitor 1 Logs max min and time above A 7 threshold 4 Press or to scroll to the required sub header BCD Input For use with external BCD switch 5 Press to select the parameter list for the required sub header The full list of parameters available under these list headers is shown in the following tables 14 3 1 Input Operator Custom Linearisation Parameters U Table Number 14 3 1 This page allows you to set up a customised linearisation curve INPUT OPERS Cust Lin 7 Parameter Name
483. value of about 2500PPM When the TDS is high the controller opens a valve to bleed water from the boiler with the effect of reducing the water level The level controller compensates for this by introducing water with a low TDS value thus reducing the overall TDS Water treatment and high temperatures cause some of the contaminates to precipitate To remove sludge and precipitated solids that accumulate at the bottom of a boiler an intermittent blowdown method called Bottom Blowdown is used This is performed periodically by opening a large valve at the bottom of the boiler for a short period of time Steam Feedwater TDS Probe Continuous Blowdown Bottom Blowdown Figure 28 1 2704 Control of TDS and Precipitated Solids in a Boiler 28 2 WHAT IS TDS TDS Total Dissolved Solids is the measurement of the amount of solids dissolved in water The measurement is often expressed in PPM parts per million This PPM value directly indicates the mass of dissolved solid molecules in the fluid as a proportion of the total mass of the solution i e 200PPM indicates that for every million grams of the solution there are 200g that are not water The most reliable way of measuring TDS is to evaporate water from a unit volume of a solution and to weigh the solid residue commonly referred as TDR total dry residue Fortunately the solids dissolved in naturally occurring water are of the type which cause water ionisation and hence have a dire
484. ve Repeat the above steps for up to 10 parameters which are to be promoted to the Summary page 66 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook 7 2 7 1 Summary Page Example This is an example of a Summary Page showing five parameters produced by the above procedure Page Name chosen from User Text Name of parameter chosen from User Text These four parameter names use the default text 7 2 8 INSTRUMENT Standby Page The standby state of the controller occurs when it is in configuration mode or during the first few seconds after switch on see also Section 3 1 2 The INSTRUMENT Standby Page allows you to wire to a parameter such as a digital input which when true will switch the controller to Standby Mode 7 2 8 1 Example To wire Standby to Fixed Digital Input 1 Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From the INSTRUMENT page Views are typical and may vary header press C to display the list of sub headers depending upon options in any particular controller v 2 Press or to select Standby If On is selected the controller will C 3 Press C to show the list of be switched to Standby Mode parameters when the event DIO1 becomes true 4 Press C to select Standby If Off is selected the event is ignored 5 Press or Y to On 6 Press C to select Standby Src The Modbus Address of Fixed i Digital Input number 01 is
485. vice for the instrument 30 4 7 Earth leakage current Due to RFI Filtering there is an earth leakage current of less than 0 5mA This may affect the design of an installation of multiple controllers protected by Residual Current Device RCD or Ground Fault Detector GFD type circuit breakers 30 4 8 Overcurrent protection To protect the internal PCB tracking within the controller against excess currents the AC power supply to the controller and power outputs must be wired through the fuse or circuit breaker specified in the technical specification 30 4 9 Voltage rating The maximum continuous voltage applied between any ofthe following terminals must not exceed 264Vac e line or neutral to any other connection e relay ortriac output to logic dc or sensor connections e any connection to ground The controller should not be wired to a three phase supply with an unearthed star connection Under fault conditions such a supply could rise above 264Vac with respect to ground and the product would not be safe Voltage transients across the power supply connections and between the power supply and ground must not exceed 2 5kV Where occasional voltage transients over 2 5kV are expected or measured the power installation to both the instrument supply and load circuits should include a transient limiting device These units will typically include gas discharge tubes and metal oxide varistors that limit and control voltage transients on t
486. witches Enabled led An Logic Opers To enable or disable the Analogue Chapter 19 and 18 Disab and Logic Operators Also includes Enabled Multiple Operators and Patch Wiring from software versions 6 Txder Scaling To enable or disable transducer Chapter 24 Disabled scaling Enabled IO Expander To enable or disable the IO Expander Chapter 25 Disabled Enabled Master Comms To enable master comms Chapter 21 Disabled Enabled Boiler To enable boiler control option Chapter 28 Disabled Enabled User Mbus Map To enable user modbus map Disabled Enabled Clear Memory Clear non vol memory areas No No Programs User Text Promote Params Promote Pages All Memory Load Sim To enable or disable a control loop Technical Note Ref Disabled simulation for test demonstration TIN123 Enabled Can only be activated if ordered see Ordering Code Appendix A Note 1 Areas of memory which can be independently cleared are Programs User Text Promoted Parameters Promote Pages All Memory 7 2 2 INSTRUMENT Info Page Table Number These parameters are read only and available in Level 3 They INSTRUMENT 722 give information about the controller Info Page Parameter Name Parameter Description Value Default Press C to select CBC Version Software version number of the cross e g 40 board Feature Code 2 chargeable features IEEE Inst 2nd Lang Instrument language for user interface fs gt ES Alt Protocol Alternative comms p
487. wn 1 L3 Inst Number BB1 Time BB2 Day BB2 Time BB3 Day BB3 Time BB Duration Cool Duration Suspend Sr Suspend Netwrk Src Network Level Valve Switches VSwitch Src VSwitch State VSwitch Status Netwrk Inhibit Blowdown O P BB State 358 Instrument identification number Used to generate an instrument ID specific delay timer to ensure that if two blowdown times are set the same then the two controllers will not initiate blowdown at the same time 8 has the highest priority Day selected for Bottom Blowdown 1 Never Never L3 Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Sunday Mon Fri Mon Sat Sat Sun Every Day To set a cool down period to ensure that another 0 01 00 to 3 00 00 controller does not blow down until the first has cooled Source wire for the suspend input If the value Modbus address returned by this wire is Yes then the blowdown is suspended Suspend blowdown If this parameter is not wired the user can set this manually If the Suspend Src is used the wire will override this parameter Source wire for the digital input that represents Modbus address the state of the network Indicates the state of the network High w To select the valve switch option if the bottom No blowdown valve has a limit switch fitted Yes If Yes the next 3 parameters are made available Source wire for the valve switch limit input Modbus address Shows if the switch is open or close
488. x or 32770 See also section 21 8 1 The choices are shown in the Master Comms Parameter Table section 21 7 Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 2704 Controller Engineering Handbook To Configure Parameters Continued Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes ce Param Index This sets the function to be read or 20 Now press to select Parameter write See section 21 7 for full list Function Slave Address of choices Slave Param 21 Press Alor Y to change the peeling Function value Repeat Rate 0 00 00 0 oe Param Index This sets the time between 22 Now press to select Repeat Parameter transmissions Rate Slave Address 0 continuous Slave Param 23 Press or Y to change the Scaling value Function Repeat Rate 21 6 TO CONFIGURE SLAVES The controller must be in config mode The parameters required to configure the characteristics of the slaves are shown in section 21 7 To configure the slave parameters Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From the sub headers menu press USER SWITCHES A Y USER PAGES Up to eight sixteen from software or to select the required version 6 onwards slaves can be COMMS Parameters fi d MASTER COMM eonmgares STANDARD IO Slave 2 MODULEIO Slave 3 DIAGNOSTICS Slave 4 Slave 5 slave 2 Press C to select the The flashing underline indicates parameters in this list Address 1 the value can be changed
489. xt 13 Complete serText 14 Furnace 1 Start pointer 08 6 000000 NONDNL The Pattern name will be selected between User Text 08 start pointer and User Text 12 Pattern High Limit Pattern high limit defines the number of enumerations Clic Ee Cre Cl Cre Ere ere ere A Pattern high limit of 4 0 to 4 i e 5 enumerations The following examples show how to apply this to different types of parameter Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 231 Engineering Handbook 16 6 1 1 User Switch Example This is an example of a parameter which has just two states USER SHITCHES Switch 1 xSEYx Pe 2704 Controller shows two states Start and Stop User Text 10 Heat Ramp User Text 11 Annealing User Text 12 Cool Ramp Start pointer 15 User Text 13 Complete User Text 14 Furnace 1 User Text 15 Start aa The enumeration User Text 16 Stop The procedure for configuring the above example is as follows First set up the required user text as described in the previous section Then In USER SWITCHES Switch 1 page Set Switch Type Auto or Manual Reset section 16 5 Each time the toggle between Start or Stop 16 6 1 2 Programmer User Values Example This example shows the configuration for Programmer User Value 1 PROGRAM EDIT Options Usr Val1 Enum 03 Diff Pump Run Pointer defines sta
490. y enhanced common mode rejection i e operation within the spec this voltage should be limited to 40Vdc Floating transducers will automatically be biased to 2 5V with respect to instrument ground upon connection Note All the other I Os are fully isolated from the instrument ground and each other Analogue Input 4 3 C Digital Input Control 220KQ Voltage I Digital IO 220KQ Common _G Lo Voltage N T 2 5V Instrument Ground Screen E L e Com 100R Fuse 2MQ Bleed Resistor Resistor Dee N L Figure 30 1 Analogue Input and Fixed Digital I O Equivalent Circuit 30 4 5 Wiring It is important to connect the controller in accordance with the wiring data given in this handbook Take particular care not to connect AC supplies to the low voltage sensor input or other low level inputs and outputs Only use copper conductors for connections except thermocouple inputs and ensure that the wiring of installations comply with all local wiring regulations For example in the in the UK use the latest version of the IEE wiring regulations BS7671 In the USA use NEC Class 1 wiring methods Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 363 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 30 4 6 Power Isolation The installation must include a power isolating switch or circuit breaker This device should be in close proximity to the controller within easy reach of the operator and marked as the disconnecting de
491. y programs already entered will be lost Press c Cr 9 Press to edit Prog Mode 10 Press or Y to Synchronous to confirm or to cancel as instructed in the pop up box Part No HA026933 Issue 7 0 Nov 12 81 Engineering Handbook 2704 Controller 8 11 EXAMPLE TO CONFIGURE SYNCHRONOUS PROGRAMMER TYPE The programmer is supplied as a Time to Target programmer This section describes how to configure a Ramp Rate type Do This This Is The Display You Should See Additional Notes 1 From any display press to access the page header menu RUM ROGRAN EDIT i 2 Press or lto select PROGRAM EDIT G 3 Press to display sub headers 4 Press or Y to select Options if necessary If programs have already been PROGRAM EDIT Options sSYE set up using the previous Program Type all segment data will be deleted and will need to be re entered in Operation level 5 Press C to display parameters 6 Press again to select Program Type The Program Type requires a few seconds to re configure during which time INITIALISING is displayed 7 Press or Rate LY to select Ramp The Program Type is then confirmed 8 Confirm or reject as instructed If no button is pressed for 10 seconds the display reverts to the previous view The following table lists further parameters in this page U 8 11 1 PROGRAM EDIT Options Page Table Number These parame

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

東芝非常用照明器具 東芝階段通路誘導灯 (併用形) 取扱説明書 建築  folleto notice du produit Packungsbeilage Package Insert  FX COMMUNICATION (RS-232C, RS-485, RS  Solución de problemas  Bedienungsanleitung  Please: Call us if you have difficulty before you  Prospect    Huawei XH621 V2  平成20年度 待機時消費電力調査報告書 - 資源エネルギー庁  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file